arated 


art 


sag aietetolesaheas-telei igtealate soapy 
Sin Shae ee eee 
Beatie een ee 


ee. ae 


ot aa digs 10f 
AA bales he 
VIAT to WY 


Pu eee eae 


<4 


_. Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2022 with funding from 
Duke University Libraries 


https://archive.org/details/beloved01mccl 


“* The beloved.’’ 


tia OV EL.” 


An Iowa Boy In the Jungles of Africa.. 


CHARLES WARNER McCLEARY, 


His Life, Letters and Work. 


LOVING TRIBUTES BY 


DR. A. W. HALSEY, New York, 
DR. ORVILLE REED, New Jersey, 
REV. MELVIN FRASER, West Africa... 


EDITED BY 


John Frederick Hinkhouse, M. A., D. D... 


Of Parsons College, Former Moderator of Synod of Iowa, 
Author of Presbyterian Iowa. 


PUBLISHED BY FRIENDS. 
FAIRFIELD, IOWA. 
Isog. 


EDITOR’S NOTE. 


“Of the making of many books there is no end.” The 
‘only apology that we offer for the issuing of this book is the 
merit of its subject matter. The world has seen too few 
heroes of the type of Charles Warner McCleary. When one 
does appear on the scene of action, it is well to call the 
attention of the world to what he was and did. The world 
will be made better by knowing him, This book will show 
the heart of this man of God ina very realistic way. Its 
contents is largely the words of McCleary himself, written 
with little or no thought that they would ever appear in 
printed form. Mostly it is letters written to the Godly 
Father and Saintly Mother in the modest home in the little 
‘village of Crawfordsville, Iowa. Nothing could be more 
‘charmingly written. He who begins to read and does not 
finish must be a dullard indeed. He who reads and does 
not find himself humbled before the humility and consecra- 
tion and zeal of this servant of God must certainly be exalt- 
ed in his own mind, 


J. Bee 
Parsons College, Fairfield, Iowa, March, 1909. 


“THE BELOVED.” 


Rev. A. W. Halsey, D. D. 


The African drum is a unique feature of African life. Every 
town and every village in West Africa, that it was my privilege to visit, 
had a drum. The “War Drum” or “Call Drum” as it is called, is a 
very rude instrument made of a block of wood hollowed out, with two 
short slits cut in the top. It varies in length from one to three feet 
or more. The wood is often red and has a clear sound when struck 
by the two wooden sticks. Only a log of wood hollowed inside with 
two openings at the top and closed at the ends, yet with it the African 
can talk to his friends many miles away, as easily as we can send 
news by telegraph. The drum calls people to war, to church, to 
feasts; it announces a wedding, it tells of a death. 

Not the least remarkable feature of the drum is the drum-name 
given to each man. This name often embodies the most prominent 
characteristic of the individual. No one thing in Africa produced 
a2 more profound impression on me than the psychological accuracy 
with which the Africans had given drum-names to missionaries. The 
drum-name of the late Charles W. McCleary, the one by which he was 
known from Batanga to Elat, was “The Beloved.” When this saintly 
man, whose untiring labors had touched all the missions in the 
Kamerun District of the West Africa Mission of the Presbyterian 
Church, died at Elat, the news was conveyed to the coast, 120 miles 
distant, through the medium of the drum. From viliage to village 
and town to town the mournful news was drummed, “The Beloved is 
flead.” No greater testimony to the value and efficiency and fruit- 
fulness of the labors of this servant of God could be given than this 
simple fact, conveyed by drum beats to hundreds of loving and devoted 
friends, that the one whom they loved had gone “to be forever with 
the Lord.” 

The African has limited opportunities for education; he is far 
behind his white brother in all that makes for civilization, but he is 
very quick to discern the finer traits of character, and it was no hap- 
hazard guess but a true analysis of character which induced him to 
give to Charles McCleary the drum-name of “The Beloved.’ Mission- 
ary and native Christian and adherent alike all spoke of him as one 
who in his life closely resembled “The disciple whom Jesus loved.” 

Could any servant of Christ desire higher praise? 


THE MISSIONARY ON THE FIELD. ~ 


Rey. Melvin Fraser. 


The writer means simply to tell some things which he knew of 
this missionary of the cross by daily association with him as yoke- 
fellow in the lights and shades of missionary experience, during his 
entire stay of six years on the field. 

In Mr. McCleary the man was behind the missionary and the mis- 
sionary was the easy expression of the noble manhood. He came to 
the field in the Fall of 1895, equipped by acquirement and heritage, 
and evidently authorized by divine selection as well as human ap- 
pointment, for the great work which was to unfold before him. Mis- 
sionary experts, who know the stuff soldiers of the cross are made 
of, made no mistake when they wrote out to the field in advance, say- 
ing that Rev. Charles W. McCleary, of Crawfordsville, Iowa, lately 
graduated from Princeton Seminary and an alumnus of Parsons Col- 
lege, would sail in the Fall. When with others he landed from the 
steamer at Batanga, we looked upon a determined and modest man of 
medium size, physically strong, intellectually keen, spiritually fervent, 
eminently practical. His abiding worth was about to be demonstrated. 

At the annual meeting held soon after his arrival, the Mission 
was looking for another unmarried man to help open up a new 
station farther interior-ward, and seasoned missionaries seemed at 
once to be thinking alike of his adaptation to pioneer work and con- 
ditions and were ready to assign him to the hinterland—to be one of 
three men who should inaugurate the station which was to become 
known as Elat. When asked if he was tough enough for the roughing 
of the pioneer enterprise, he smiled and said, “Try me.” He went 
directly to help start Elat, upon which the impress of his personality 
abides, and with the founding and fortunes of which his name must 
ever be associated. 

Youthful as he always was, the missionary historian will always 
write him as an early father of the Kamerun Interior work—to all of 
which he literally gave his life . Time rolled on, mountains of dif- 
ficulties and possibilities rolled up, but the man who had come to the 
kingdom for such a time as this was in the midst. He soon became 
known as a good soldier of Jesus Christ, able and willing to “fight 
the Lord’s battles,” as he used to say in his humble, earnest prayers as 
three men knelt together each evening to ask God for help in the 
midst of a crooked and perverse generation. 

If it be asked, What were the personal characteristics or qual- 


“THE BELOVED.” 5 


ities which made him the missionary that he was, answers rush 
to the pen and yet will fail to express all when committed to paper. 
One knowing his personal habits and tastes, and looking for a secret 
of his power, would be impressed that he lived in close fellowship 
with his Lord and Saviour. His steadfast habit was to be out of bed 
at break of day, be seated quietly in his room while there was no 
stir or noise but the singing of many birds. There in the secret place 
he pored over his well worn Bible, and held communion with Him 
who heareth in secret. There he gathered strength for the day, food 
for the soul, and came out to our frugal breakfast with shining in 
his countenance. Dealing with present facts, he yet lived. with the 
unseen and the eternal, and in the thick of the battle, where he liked 
to be, he fought the good fight with the cross beween him and the 
world. Mr. McCleary walked with God and God blessed him with His 
best blessings, to do and endure. 


He was very human, too, and loved the natives—had nothing too 
good for them—and they loved and trusted him, old men and women 
looking up to him as to a father and the boys gathering around him 
as children to an elder brother. In the blessing before meals he 
would sometimes ask that we might “show forth Thy love.” To him, 
love was the fulfilling of the law. To a fellow missionary whom 
he heard speaking harshly once he said, “Let the law of love be in 
your lips.” So he was gentle with the erring, and had great compas- 
sion upon the multitude in the midst of which he lived. He knew how 
and when to administer a sharp rebuke, and was as firm as Gibraltar, 
but back of the native depravity and dirt, he saw as did our Master, 
the image—marred image—of our common Maker, and he had a way 
of dealing with the natives after the manner of Him who loved us 
and gave Himself for us. By temperament and grace there was in 
him that indefinable and irresistible something which we call person- 
al magnetism which disarmed suspicion and prejudice, drew friends 
and held them as with hooks of steel. To the natives, who had great 
difficulty in pronouncing his name, his life was an open book, and they 
loved him because he first loved them. 

He had a rare combination of that initiative and tact with which 
things are brought to pass. The battle was never won, so long as 
there was something else to be done, and in dealing with men and mat- 
ters he read human nature as a book, and forged ahead, so far as possi- 
ble avoiding friction and according to the “eternal fitness of things.’ 
‘This tactful aggressiveness led him forth to conquer new worlds and to 
wait where conditions were stubborn and the wheels necessarily slow- 
moving. Thus by push and patience he was the master of situations, 
quickly adjusted to and fitted to deal with pioneer conditions and with 
people who move slowly, but need to be moved. 

In the daily rounds of toil and trial, he was always full of good 


6 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


cheer, to which the natives are very susceptible, and which smoothed 
out many ugly wrinkles from troubled hearts. The contagion of his: 
optimism and humor was an every day blessing to those associated 
with him, and was a distinct element of power in a country and en- 
vironment of depressing influences. Mr. McCleary was cheerfully in 
dead earnest. 

Of refined instincts and unselfish soul, he was ever thoughtful of 
others, considerate of their interests and wishes, and exceedingly 
slow to speak evil of another; was chary, too, of praise, but deeply 
appreciative of any real merit or latent possibility for good. He car- 
ried an atmosphere of delightful altruism and winsome self abne- 
gation. Modest and cautious he gained ground by inches—then held 
it. As a new missionary, he was on the inquiring side as to methods 
of work and principles of procedure. He wanted to get the benefits 
of the experience and counsel of older missionaries, for sure footing. 
Thus he built carefully from the bottom, and by a normal growth 
took his place among the strong, with long vision and firm grip. In 
after years he was a good leader because at first he was a good learner. 
His altruistic self abnegation went before him and made him great. 
Something is expected of a man thus in love with God and men, pos- 
sessed of initiative and tact, enriched by the cheer of a good con- 
science and eager to spend and be spent for the other man. 


As to the work which Mr. McCleary did in Africa: His time on 
the field was but six brief years, closing with less than four months, in 
wedded life, after his first furlough. But usefulness is not measured 
by years alone. “That life is long that answers life’s great end.” The 
writer heard him say, “I would rather live one year in Africa than ten 
at home.” Such was his estimate of the premium on the service to 
which he had come, thinking of the comparative numbers to be reach- 
ed and the scarcity of workers. From first to last he did not fail to re- 
deem the time. 

There are outstanding points in which his service in Africa was 
and is conspicuous. As already intimated, he helped plant Hlat sta- 
tion. He who has part in founding a station in the midst of a numerous 
pagan people puts himself into a unique and enduring monument. The 
old soldiers are not forgotten, for to their courage and endurance future 
generations owe blessings. This man of early days planted trees and 
built houses, grubbed stumps and rolled rocks, blazed paths through 
the jungle under a blazing sun, and brought order out of chaos, helped 
to reduce a pagan dialect to writing and to produce in it a literature, 
to clear away the rubbish of an abject heathenism and to teach the 
people the alphabet of civilization. He magnified the importance of 
these details as one acting for eternity, laid deep and well the founda- 
tions upon which an holy temple of human character was to be reared 
and to reach into the heavens. Down in the foundations of Elat, visible 


“THE BELOVED.” 3 


and invisible, are the soul, body and spirit of this pioneering servant 
of God. Like him of the “voice in the wilderness,” he came to prepare 
the way, to pull down mountains and fill up valleys. And he was 
at it with spade and pick. 

He preached the Gospel with persuasion and power. He had the 
art of making the eternal verities simple and real. He did not omit 
to enforce the law that came by Moses, where the people needed the 
bolts of Sinai to arouse them to a sense of their sin, but he seemed 
most at home in telling of the grace and truth which came by Jesus 
Christ. The skillfully woven cord of broadside warnings and tender 
appeals stirred deeply and drew mightily. There was, too, a charm 
of manner and winsome form of presentation to which hearts cold 
and hard as stone could not remain indifferent; now and then a 
spontaneous flash of humor, at which the hearers would laugh. Then 
was his time to drive his truth or drop his seed into prepared soil. 
Another element which gave his preaching power was the knowledge 
on the part of the people, of the man behind the preacher. His correct 
walk and personal friendship with the people six days in the week 
commanded their attention to his message on the seventh day. Their 
believing in him and liking him, as all the people did, made them be- 
lieve in and welcome his message. The good man, the winsome man- 
ner, the Christ-filled message—all baptised of the Holy Spirit, made 
him the persuasive preacher, and the common people heard him gladly. 


He helped translate the four Gospels and the Acts of the Apostles: 
To this tedious task he brought a keen mind and a spiritual discern- 
ment and a knowledge of the vernacular which were invaluable to the 
undertaking. And to this day there are many forms of expression and 
shades of thought and a certain symmetry of product due in no small 
measure to the translating skill, the exegetic bias and the linguistic 
knowledge of this careful student. And these forms and shades and 
this symmetry are shaping the thought and making the character of 
multitudes of natives who read and hear the Word. In the Bulu hymn 
book are about a dozen hymns which Mr. McCleary translated, most of 
which are among the best in thought and in the difficult fitting of 
words to music, and have already put on immortality. To hear @ 
thousand voices in church singing, “Glorious Things of Thee Are Spok- 
en,” “Come to the Saviour, Make No Delay,” “By Cool Siloam’s Shady 
Rill,’ or “Blessed Jesus, Keep Me White,” calls up the departed, and 
suggests a debt of gratitude to him who put such hymns into form for 
use. 

He was a large factor in the life of the people. He knew what 
Was going on in general and was a ubiquitous check to evil doers. He 
was a natural detective and delighted in finding and following a clue 
to mischief. Wrong doers often learned with dismay that they had been 
taken in their craftiness, and failed to cover their tracks, from this: 


3 CHARLES W. MCCLEARY. 


quiet, effective pursuer. But in season and out, not less instant was he 
to enlighten and plead with the transgressor than ito pursue him. He 
-carried the natives upon his heart. His relation to them was not un- 
like that of Moses to Israel, where he prayed God for their deliverance 
and pardon, and rebuked and pleaded with them to repent and return. 
He went about doing good, carrying a “light to their path and a lamp 
to their feet.” In 1898 when the German Government was making a 
punitive expedition against the Bulu for their persistent lawlessness, 
a certain “big chief” was summoned by the Commander-in-Chief of 
the invading army to appear within a certain time. Time passed until 
the eleventh hour, and still this great head-man had not come. The 
opinion was that he would not come, not because he was not in the 
habit of being ordered about, but because he feared. Mr. McCleary 
knowing that in those days of martial law and summary executions, 
this man would probably be stood up by a stump and shot if he failed 
to report within the specified time, first went to the Commander and ob- 
tained a promise that the summoned man would not be killed if he 
appeared within time, then walked hurriedly five miles to his vil- 
lage and told the man of the officer’s pledge, and that he had better 
make haste to come. He greatly feared and hesitated, for he was not 
accustomed to thinking that a man would keep a promise in such cir- 
cumstances, but being assured that the white man would keep his word, 
but would send soldiers to bring him to very probable death if he did 
not come, he yielded to the entreaty and returned with Mr. McCleary, 
-and at this writing, ten years later, he still lives and doubtless owes 
his life to that kindly intervention at a critical moment by the solicitous 
missionary. In this missionary watchman the people knew that they 
had a friend, and in their perplexities and goings astray found in him 
a wise counsellor and a faithful helper. 

Much more might be said in which it would further appear that 
Mr. McCleary was an all ’round man for the vicissitudes of missionary 
life. His work was manifold, in which we see the preacher, teacher, 
watchman upon Zion’s wall, peace-maker, carpenter as the Man of 
Nazareth, explorer, translator, evangelist, in all of which capacities he 
laid his goodly gifts upon the altar for service and sacrifice. 


Not only so. He died for the people, as he had lived for them. 
After preaching one Sabbath morning in June he went to his room and 
came not out again until his spirit took its flight the twentieth of that 
month. When he knew that the time remaining would be short, he 
called for some of the church members, who came to his bed side. He 
gave them a message of cheer and a parting exhortation to hold fast 
the profession of their faith. At length he longed for release from 
pain, and added, “I cannot stand it any longer,” ‘““Dear Jesus, come and 
take me.” He took this place among the martyrs, a martyr not to vio- 
lence of mob, but to encroaching disease, induced in the days of 


“THE BELOVED.” 9 


pioneer living, and aggravated by an unfriendly climate and an extend- 
ed term of service—a pregressive martyrdom for the cause which was 
dearer than life to him. 

His taking away made a deep impression upon a large community 
of natives, and the little mound of earth at Elat under which he 
sleeps is vocal to a daily procession of passersby who knew him, and 
associate him with deeds of love and words of eternal life. He is 
lovingly remembered by fellow missionaries and natives alike. 
He was a “beloved disciple” among us, his name is written high on 
the scroll, for he toiled and triumphed in the service and in the spirit 
of Him who “came not to be ministered unto, but to minister and to 
give His life as a ransom for many.” 

When he realized that his place was soon to be vacant, among 
his last words he left a message to be carried to the homeland, that 
there should be sent “fifty more men to Africa.” More of such mis- 
sionaries as he was are still needed, and this little sketch fails in so 
far as it does not help to make more characters like his, and to answer 
his dying prayer for Africa. 


EXTRACTS FROM MEMORIAL SERMON. 
Rev. Orville Reed, Ph. D. 


2 Timothy, 1: 12, (last part). “For I know whom I have believed 
(trusted) and am persuaded that he is able to keep that which I have 
committed unto him against that day.” 


These are among the last words of our foreign missionary, as, 
far away in the darkenss of Africa, he was entering and passing 
through the “Valley’ and up into the eternal Sunshine of the Holy 
City above. He certainly knew Him whom he trusted! And he trusted 
that Master with all that he had—life, strength, love; absolute dedica- 
tion and pure devotion; all was unreservedly his Lord’s, whenever and 
wherever that Lord should call! He spent six years of the most trying 
and intense service in the Dark Continent, as the Foreign Missionary 

of this Church, and then came the call to the sinless, unhindered and 
glorious service on High. 

During this week I have been reading over all of his letters to 
us as a Church, from that first glad note written at Princeton Semin- 
ary, thanking us so heartily for sending him to Africa, down to the 
last words, written a month before he died. All are full of his work, 
of grateful appreciation, (with here and there a gleam of his wonted 
humor) and with the same hopeful, trustful spirit as of old, although 
the burdens were heavy and the mortal frame was beginning to totter 


10 CHARLES W. McCLEARY,. 


to its fall. By these vivid word pictures, which he sent to us so faith- 
fully, I have been carried away in imagination to Africa; up through 
the jungle to that interior station, and have been living at Elat, on the 
beautiful African hill among the villages of Bulu-land. And I have 
been impressed more deeply than ever before, with this fact: Our 
missionary lived a most intense life, a life that must burn out the vital 
powers quickly. We think of our friends over in Africa as living more 
slowly and moderately than we here in America. But the record of 
Mr. McCleary’s life shows unmistakably that the pressure was intense; 
the days were long and filled with unceasing care and toil; every bit 
of strength was used up to the limit, and sometimes beyond the 
limit, of reasonable safety. 

And now that the work here below is finished and the life gone 
on before us for a little while, until we, too, “enter in through the gates,” 
we wish to think upon it all ;to get new inspiration from his character; 
and to consider anew God’s call to us as it sounds forth from the inter- 
jor of that darkened and sin cursed land. 

Thirty-six years ago our missionary was born in the little town 
of Crawfordsville, Iowa. He was a farmer’s boy, helping on the farm 
and going to the country school. The simple and healthful life of the 
farm did much to fit him for his missionary work. The all round de- 
velopment of country life prepared him for the varied calls that are 
made upon those who undertake pioneer missionary service in Africa. 
To cook a meal, to build a house, to cultivate a garden, to handle a 
rifle, for all of these and more, he was most practically equipped by 
the farm life of his boyhood days. And his life in the interior of 
Africa called out all the practical gifts and resources of this early 
training. 7 

He was the youngest of four sons, the others are all living. His 
father writes: “He was always a very obedient child, loving and 
kind, especially to his parents; always ready to help his mother, and 
he took delight in doing deeds of kindness whenever he could, and he 
could always see something to do when others could not. He was 
never idle, and very persevering; what he undertook he generally 
carried through, but always had respect for the feelings of others. 
He was of Presbyterian stock, for several generations, at least.” 


After leaving the country school he entered. the Academy at 
Washington, Iowa, from which he graduated in 1890. He graduated 
from Parsons College, Fairfield, Iowa, in 1892, and entered Prince- 
ton Theological Seminary, from which he graduated in 1895. 

While at the Seminary he made his decision for Foreign Missions, 
and that decision is significant. Good old Dr. Paton was at Prince- 
ton, addressing the students. He made an appeal for volunteers. In 
that appeal he spoke of Dr. Good and his death in Africa. Mr. Mc- 
Cleary’s father writes: “It was such a wonderful appeal that Charles 


“THE BELOVED.” 11 


promised, there and then, that, with the help of the Lord, he would 
give his life for Foreign Mission work and go anywhere the Lord 
seemed to direct. I heard him speak of that appeal as the greatest 
talk on Foreign Missions the had ever heard, and I think that was his 
first decided idea of Foreign Mission work.” 


Trinity Church was looking for another representative to carry 
forward the work so recently laid down by Dr. Good. Mr. McCleary’s 
letter of application to the Board pleased.us. He was “ready to go 
anywhere.” We thought it had the true ring. Upon that letter we 
made our choice and wrote him accordingly. “I cannot tell you,” he 
writes, ‘with what great joy I read your letter yesterday afternoon. 
I had feared the way was barred for the present, but the Lord has 
opened it again.” (The Board felt that they could not commission any 
more men at that time for lack of funds). “I am very grateful, first 
to God, second to you and your Church. It is indeed a hard place 
you ask me to fill and I can never hope to fill it. I can only be a fol- 
lower of that great and good man, Dr. Good. I recognize the great 
honor you have conferred upon me in asking me to be your repre- 
sentative on the foreign field. I wish to thank you and ask you to 
thank your congregation for me for this offer of my support.” Thus 
is indicated his spirit and purpose at the outset—will go anywhere: 
esteems it an honor to be sent as follower of Dr. Good; humbly feels 
himself unworthy of such an honor; rejoices that he can go immediate- 
ly to the Dark Continent! 

There is no doubt that Dr. Good exerted a great influence upon 
Mr. McCleary; the latter asked for Dr. Good’s letters and read them 
with deepest interest; and in his own letters to us there is now and 
then a sentence which reveals the fact that Dr. Good’s life was ever 
before him, an inspiration and a guide. 

He began work immediately, preaching or talking Foreign Mis- 
sions every Sabbath after leaving the Seminary until he sailed for 
Africa. On November 12, 1895, some of us had the privilege of bid- 
ding him good-bye as he sailed, full of earnest expectation and hope, 
to take up his life work. His father writes: “He is the first Foreign 
Missionary that has left our Church and community, and all manifest 
great anxiety in his safety and future prosperity, and he goes with the 
prayers, not only of his personal friends, but of the whole community. 
May God also bless the people of the Montclair Church for their gen- 
erosity in providing means to send a missionary to Africa. May it 
bring a blessing upon the church and be the means of bringing many 
benighted souls into the Kingdom of our Lord Jesus Christ.” 

Our missionary’s first letter from Africa, December 10, 1895, be- 
gins: “Praise the Lord for His goodness to us! He has brought us 
safely on our way in perfect health and strength, and all our goods 
in good condition. We are once more in the hands of kind friends. 


12 ce; CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


It does not seem like Africa at all, so far. We have had many pleas- 
ant surprises in finding things better than we had anticipated.” It 
is characteristic of his spirit and temper of mind—ready to see the 
good side, looking for God’s hand in his life. 


* * * Ki Oe 


On December 14th he writes: “Yesterday, you will remember, was 
the anniversary of Dr. Good’s death. It so happened—not planned by 
man, but what a happy coincidence—that just one year, to 
a day, after his death, five new missionaries were assigned 
to their definite fields of labor in the same mission where 
he fell. . All are satisfied and happy. I go to the new 
field. It will take a great deal of strength, courage, and grace 
to go to this wild place, but not as much as it must have taken to ex- 
plore for our going. That was done by one we loved, and whose 
memory will always be dear to us. We should not falter nor shrink 
from following. Nothing as yet has been done except that the ground 
for the Mission premises is secured. We will have to clear the 
ground, cut and saw the lumber and build all necessary buildings. 
The dear Lord only knows what the result will be.” 

On December 31st, 1895, they left the coast, bade farewell to their 
kind friends and fellow travelers, and the three white men (Mr. Frazer, 
Mr. Kerr and Mr. McCleary), with their caravan of carriers, each 
bearing sixty pounds of goods upon his head, plunged into the bush 
and were lost to sight as they entered the darkness of the African 
forest and pushed on toward the interior. “There were towns nearly 
all the way and the people were hostile. The carriers would be robbed 
if the white man were not along. We cannot trust even the mail, with- 
out one of us, so we may get mail four or five times a year. It did 
not rain and the road was good as compared with what it usually is. 
Still we were in mud and water half way to the knee every day. 
Sometimes we would follow the bed cf a stream for 20 rods at a time. 
In the morning we always got wet to the thigh from the grass. We 
always stopped in a town at night and had a good fire to dry our 
clothes. All along, the people of the towns would come out in crowds 
and follow us like children after an “Uncle Tom’s Cabin” parade. It 
got very tiresome. They were even insulting at times.” 


* * % * * 


The missionary has reached his field of labor, Hlat. For six 
years, with intermissions here and there, he is to spend his life upon 
this hill, giving all that he has, and that life itself, to Christ, his 
Lord, through these benighted Bulu lives. 

From tke poor, simple African hut as a beginning and a base of 
operations, the missionaries steadily change conditions, bringing 
in by arduous labor, some of the appearance and necessities, and 


“THE BELOVED.” By ties 13 


comforts of civilization. The land is cleared; a larger house is built; 
and what the natives call the Sunday house, a rude shed open at one 
end, where services may be held. They must make their own saw pit, 
cut, saw and plane their lumber, and erect their buildings. 

They have their trials: four times during this year they are 
driven from their homes by the Driver Ants. “Three times they came 
at night and we had to flee, losing our rest. They come in such vast 
numbers that we can do nothing. They will not stop for fire or water. 
They fight unto death. But they cleared our house of roaches!” He 
is always looking for the blessing in the hardship. ‘We got tired 
of the thing and vowed revenge. It came, and oh, so sweet! We 
discovered their home and burned them out.” 

There were trials also with the natives. The selfish, grasping 
character of old Mvondo, the chief, showed itself. He cut the trees 
to change the boundary line of their premises, and encroach upon 
their territory. After selling them the property, he now purposes to 
steal it back! But the missionary is a match for him, and soon 
brings him to terms. He and his people are nothing more than big 
children who must be treated as such. 

And then, with the building and planting, our missionary must 
keep steadily before him the great object of his living here, viz.: to 
get the Word of Life to these darkened souls. He is at work every 
spare moment upon the language, and begins as fast as: he can com- 
mand it to use it to convey the stream of the Water of Life. 

After being in the interior four months, Mr. McCleary was called 
to go forth alone upon a dangerous journey. Hostile natives had at- 
tacked one of the missionaries while he was coming up from the coast 
with mail and supplies, and had stolen three loads and Dr. Good’s old 
Trifle. The rifle in the hands of the chief, was cocked at the head of 
the missionary. “It was decided,’ he writes, “that we must inform 
the officials of the government, and I was the one sent on that mission. 
I did not want to undertake such a trip, but it seemed best that I 
should and I was ready. I am here for service wherever the Lord 
may call.” And thus, the only white man, he starts off with his com- 
pany of native carriers, through country all unknown to him, trust- 
ing to native guides, making his way through the forest by compass. 
At last he reaches the first Ngumba town. 


* * * * * 


The thankful and the hopeful spirit were combined in rare degree 
in our misionary. And how necessary this was in a work such as 
his! In his “Personal Report” at the end of the second year, he says: 
“Before beginning to magnify what little I have done, I wish to tell a 
little of what God has done for me. Every day of the year He has 
revealed Himself to me in some new light. Some new manifestaition 


14 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


of His Divine Attributes has been given. He has given direct 
answers to prayers, and so established my faith more firmly. He 
has made me to feel the power of His Spirit working within me. He has 
made me feel more and more how He, and He alone, can satisfy, yea, 
more than satisfy every desire. He has wonderfully kept me from 
every fear and has been more to me than I asked. Many a victory 
He has given. Many a burden has He lifted. Few have been the 
sorrows, and many the joys. His love has been so great. Commun- 
ion with Him has been so sweet and refreshing. I cannot say enough 
in praise of Him, or use words strong enough to express my gratitude 
for His goodness.” 

Ten thousand miles away from home and friends; sometimes not 
hearing for a ‘hundred days from home; up in the interior of the Dark 
Continent, in the thick moral darkness of heathenism; living a rude 
life with improper food and with attacks of fever; seeing fellow 
missionaries dying or forced by severe illness to leave the already 
needy force; yet thus our missionary can thank God for untold 
mercies, and take courage to go forward. 

The work of a missionary in Africa is many sided. 


First—Land clearing, house building and manual training. 

Second—Language learning. e 

Third—School teaching. 

Fourth—Regular preaching. 

Fifth—Itinerating and pioneering into new and heretofore un- 
explored territory. 

Sixth—Translating of the Scriptures. 

Seventh—Medical work. 

Our missionary did all of this and did it thoroughly and well 
during those six precious years. In the work of itinerating, lhe took 
two long and most interesting journeys farther inland; one of twenty 
days among the Bulu, and one of thirteen days among other tribes to 
the south of Elat. 

* * * * * 


A scene in the forest is brought vividly before us. He writes: 
“We had evening prayers in Bulu. As we sat there in that great dark 
forest, with our flickering little candle, how small it seemed, and how 
immense the darkness! Those dim little rays did not penetrate very 
far. I could not help but compare the candle to myself; dim is my 
light and unavailing my efforts to lighten up the great mass of dark- 
ness around me. But praise God, it does not depend upon the size 
of my light. Wait till the morning and watch that darkness disappear 
as the sun mounts on high! So when the Son of Righteousness comes, 
all lights will be lost in the one Light, and all darkness will be dis- 
pelled. God help us to labor and to wait.” 

Among the most important of all missionary work is the trans- 


“THE BELOVED.” 15 


jation of the Scriptures. To this difficult undertaking Mr. McCleary 
was assigned by his fellow missionaries, as being especially adapted for 
it. Dr. Good had caught the language from the lips of the natives 
and reduced it to writing. He had also written a primer in Bulu, 
and had translated, roughly, the Gospels. This work Mr. McCleary 
continued, translating also the Acts in company with Mr. Fraser. 


* * * * * 


And now we must draw swiftly to a close this rapid survey of 
that intensely earnest, self-sacrificing service of six years. We see 
how varied it is, calling forth every latent power and resource. We 
see how limitless was the opportunity and consequently must feel 
something of the awful pressure put upon that tender, sensitive, lov- 
ing heart, as he looked out upon these thousands and hundreds of 
thousands crying out for the Gospel, and going down into the dark- 
ness before his eyes, because there is not strength nor time to reach 
them. 

When his five years are up he longs to return to America for need- 
ed rest and recuperation, but there is no one else to leave out in this 
lonely picket line and he cannot desert these dying souls. Fevers 
warn him that the African climate is gaining in power over him, but 
still he feels upon his soul “the power of the endless life’ and the 
dire need of perishing men. He sees fellow laborers who came out 
with him fall by the way and obliged to return to America. Still he 
keeps on, hoping and praying that his strength may hold out until re- 
inforcements arrive. 

And the work is growing. God’s Spirit is evidently moving upon 
the hearts of these Bulu people. Where, at first, a hundred attended 
the Sabbath service, now four and five hundred are present. And he 
cannot leave them uncared for. But at length the fever speaks in no 
uncertain tones, and the soldier on the firing line is forced to the 
rear. Scarcely able to travel to the coast, and at one time fearing 
that he might never reach it alive, he is at length put upon the home- 
ward bound steamer. 

Well we remember that thin, emaciated form, too weak to speak 
to us, when first he returned and stood in this pulpit. But the home- 
coming revived him; finding the woman he had loved all these years 
still true to him, gave new joy and life to his heart. And when, after 
a year of much labor and speaking here at home, he joyfully turned 
his footsteps once more toward Africa, with his bride, he had high 
hopes of future service, although we could not but feel apprehensive 
of what that dread climate might have in store for him. 

After a safe and fairly comfortable voyage they reach the coast. 
With the donkey, which our Bible School girls provided, Mrs. McCleary 
is carried quickly and comfortably into the interior. Their return to 


16 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


Elat is like a triumphal procession, the natives are so rejoiced to re- 
ceive him back again. But immediately that great burden of labor 
falls heavily upon his shoulders—too heavy to be borne. In a few 
hasty letters the story is told. And then the end came. 

We have all read Mrs. McCleary’s letter over and over again, and 
in imagination we have gathered in that little mission house around 
that struggling, yet triumphant form. The soldier has fought his 
fight, he has finished his course, he has kept the faith. And we know 
that he has received the crown of life. 

Humble of mind, gentle of spirit, with a keen sense of humor, 
utterly devoted to his Master, with an iron determination of will, yet 
with a rare sweetness of disposition, we shall not soon see his like 
again. A striking contrast to Dr. Good, yet he was wonderfully like 
him in many ways. 

Africa is costing us dear. Its price is great. Yet there is but one 
thing to do—go forward. The silent, lonely grave at Efulen, this new- 
made mound at Elat; they do but call us ever more pleadingly to carry 
the Bread of Life quickly to those perishing millions. 

Just before Mr. McCleary left us this last time, he said signifi- 
cantly, “You know how it is in building a large bridge. Many foun- 
dation stones must be buried down deep out of sight before the bridge 
can be erected. If God wants me to be one of the foundation stones 
buried in darkest Africa, I am content. I would be glad to go, even 
if I knew that I would not live six months, if, by my death, I might 
inspire others to carry on the work of opening up Africa for Christ.” 
“Those poor people are like a great flock of sheep, with wolves on 
every side. They are seeking rest and peace, but find none. They need 
shepherds to protect them from the wolves, to lead them into pleasant 
pastures and beside still waters where they can find rest and peace.” 

May that lonely grave ever speak to them hope that there are 
lives still in America ready to be laid down for their salvation. May 
it ever call us to prayer and sacrifice, and to a deeper devotion, as we 
see how little we have given when compared with what he gave. 


— W. McCLEARY IN PARSONS 
COLLEGE. 


Rev. H. W. Reherd, Waterloo, Iowa. 


I first knew Charles McCleary in the fall of 1890 when he entered: 
the Junior class of Parsons College, Fairfield,,lowa. He had made 
good preparation at the Academy at Washington, Iowa, and was able 
to complete the college classical course in two years, graduating~ 
with the splendid class of 1892. 


As a student McCleary made no claims to originality or great 
scholarship and yet, perhaps, no man of his class was more consci- 
entious in the preparation of his college work. It was his careful 
attention to the matter in hand, coupled with his inquiring disposition 
which made it possible for his fellow missionaries, after his death, to 
say that his ability to learn a new language directly from the natives 
and to converse with them. was remarkable. 

His simple early life gave him a splendid physique, which he pre-- 
served through all his student days. He had no sympathy with those 
extremes of fun which border on riotous conduct and chose always: 
the straight path of virtue and royal manhood. I never knew him to 
engage in any questionable action nor to indulge himself in any so 
called “bad habits.” He maintained a strong physique by living a 
clean, noble life, and of him it could be said that he never dissipated 
an hour in his life. Such strength of body was valuable capital dur- 
ing those long marches over hills and through the fever laden swamps 
of equatorial Africa. 

McCleary was a member of the Aldine Literary Society during~™ 
the entire period of his college course and the last year sang tenor 
in the society quartette. He took a definite interest in the religious 
life of the college and town as represnted by the Young Men’s Chris-- 
tian Association of the college and the Christian Endeavor Society 
of the Presbyterian Church. No one who knew him at all intimately~ 
could have questioned that his religious life was very definite and 
important to him. It held him true to what he considered best in- 
life. 

It is with great pleasure that I write these few words in mem- 
ory of him whom I knew as a true man in college, learned to love as a: 
close friend for a year in Princeton Seminary, admired as a volun-- 
teer willing to plunge into the forests of Africa, honored as a tried: 
soldier who returned to tell of his victories on the field, mourned as az 


18 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


dying hero who summoned his friends to send others to take his place 
—the place of a man whose grave in western Africa is a silent tes- 
timony to his devotion to the cause of a needy people. 


McCLEARY AS I KNEW HIM IN 
PRINCETON. 


Rev. Mott R. Sawyers, Davenport, Iowa. 


I knew McCleary well in Princeton. Very few fellows in the 
‘institution knew him better. I was not among his most intimate 
associates, we did not belong to the same club, nor room in the same 
‘dormitory, and our diversions outside of working hours took us in 
different directions—all this rendered the closest friendship difficult. 
But the fact that we were both from Parsons was a common bond that 
‘brought us frequently together. We exchanged items of news from 
“the Alma Mater, and held many an interesting conversation about 
the then past, present and future of Parsons people. 

As a scholar McCleary ranked well. He did not lead his class, 
but he was a long way from the foot. His proper ranking would 
probably be a little above the middle. He was not distinguished for 
scholarship but he was reliable. Indeed, reliability was his chief 
characteristic. You could always count on him to do fairly well. 
This steady performance gave him a better average than some who 
might alternate between spectacular recitations and spectacular fizzles. 
Taken all around McCleary was a scholar that any college might be 
satisfied to graduate, and you may be sure that the reputation of 
Parsons did not suffer on account of him. 

He stood well with the fellows, too. He was recognized as one who 
was alive without being frivolous, and he was universally respected 
on account of his character. You could count on McCleary. He was 
not demonstrative, but if he said he would do anything—he would. 
That was McCleary. 

I remember very well when we learned that he had decided to 
offer himself to the Board of Foreign Missions. I knew that he was 
considering the matter, but he said so little about it, that I was some- 
what surprised to ascertain that he had settled the matter so soon 
and so completely. But that was his way. He did not run around tell- 
ing people what he was thinking about, nor bewail in a boasting way 
the sacrifice he must make. He studied the matter candidly, came to 
the conclusion that he ought to go to the Foreign Field, and then 
quietly told his friends that he had decided to go. His decision was 
heroic and showed that he had plenty of what the boys called “nerve,” 


“THE BELOVED.” 19 


but it was not showy. He did not parade his future martyrdom, though 
he was undoubtedly ready for martyrdom. It was never like McCleary 
to seek the limelight and it was not until the class was ready for 
separation and the members were inquiring of each other’s future 
that more than a few knew that McCleary was to be a Foreign Mis- 
sionary. 

Some may have been surprised when he went to Africa, but I am 
Sure that none who knew him in Princeton were surprised to hear 
that he was willing to die rather than to give up his chosen work, 
for that was the spirit that animated him in all of his Christian 
activities. 


OFFERS HIMSELF AS A MISSIONARY. 


New York, January 30, 1895. 
Mr. Charles W. McCleary, 
Princeton, N. J. 

Dear Brother:—Your interesting letter of the 28th inst. making 
application to the Board of Foreign Missions for appointment as mis- 
sionary under their care, has been received and read with deep in- 
terest. Dr. Gillespie had spoken of his interview with you, and I was 
prepared to receive this communication from you. I now enclose to 
you the personal blank which you desire. You had better ask your 
Princeton Professors to write us in regard to your qualifications for 
the work. Later on we will send you a medical certificate. 

Yours cordially, 
BENJ. LABAREE, 
Rec. Sec. 


ACCEPTED BY THE BOARD. 


New York, March 5, 1895. 
Mr. C. W. McCleary, 
Princeton, N. J. 

My dear Mr. McCleary:—It gives me great pleasure to inform 
you that the Board at its meeting yesterday accepted your application 
for service in the foreign field, and appointed you as one of its mis- 
sionaries. Furthermore, acting as they understood in accordance 
with your wishes and Mr. Hickman’s, they assigned you to the Gaboon 
and Corisco Mission, in Africa. You doubtless have known of the 
correspondence between Dr. Gillespie and Mr. Hickman on this sub- 
ject, and probably will not be surprised at the action of the Board. 


20 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


You would neither of you have been assigned to the African fielé 
had it not been that you had signified your willingness to accept ser- 
vice in that very interesting but much afflicted Mission. I will not 
enlarge here upon the peculiar features of that work. Dr. Gillespie will 
write you much more fully than I can do, having had the administration 
of mission affairs in that field for a number of years. It was with a very 
hearty appreciation of the spirit of consecration manifested in your- 
self and Mr. Hickman that the Board passed the vote which it did. 
I cannot but believe, my dear Mr. McCleary, that God is calling you 
to a very high and holy service in this appointment, and that He has 
some eminent results to accomplish through your efforts. It has 
been very gratifying to me these days to talk with my son, Robert, 
now visiting at home, to learn how highly esteemed you have been 
by such judicious friends as Mr. Graham and others of your Seminary 
associates. I only trust that you will enter upon this work which 
leads you to face so many difficulties with a great faith in God, and 
with a sense of the high responsibility resting upon you as a mem- 
ber of the Christian Church to advance the kingdom of Christ in the 
Dark Continent. 
Yours very cordially, 
BENJ. LABAREH, 


SUCCESSOR OF DR. GOOD. 


New York, May 7, 1895. 
Mr. C. W. McCleary, 
Princeton, N. J. 

My Dear Mr. McCleary:—I have just received a letter from the 
Rev. Orville Reed of the “Trinity Presbyterian Church,” of Mont- 
clair, N. J., to the effect that that church has decided to support you in 
Africa as the successor of Dr. Good. 

During Dr. Good’s last furlough in the United States, the Trinity 
Church became deeply interested in him and his work, and assumed 
the entire responsibility for his salary, the amount being eight hun- 
dred dollars ($800.00) per annum. Since the death of that noble broth- 
er the Church has been anxious to secure a successor, so that their 
interest might be maintained in the same field. I have had several 
interviews with Mr. Reed on the subject, and, as intimated above, the 
Church has chosen you as its representative. This fact, of course, 
does not in the slightest degree change your relation to the Board. 
The Church will pay into our treasury the amount of your salary, 
which in turn will be paid to you by the Mission Treasurer as in all 
other cases. 

BENJ. LABAREB, 


“THE BELOVED.” 21 


Princeton, N. J., May 7, 1895. 
Rev. Orville Reed, Montclair, N. J. 

Dear Sir:—I cannot tell you with what great joy I read your letter 
yesterday afternoon. I had feared the way was barred for the pres- 
ent, but the Lord has opened it again. I am very grateful, first to Him 
and second to you and your church. It is indeed a hard place you 
ask me to fill, and I can never hope to fill it; I can only be a follower 
of that great and good man, Dr. Good. I am most certainly willing 
and glad to accept this kind offer. 

I recognize the great honor you have conferred upon me in asking 
me to be your representative on the Foreign field. I wish to thank you 
and ask you to thank your congregation for me, for this offer of my 
support. 

In regard to coming to see you, I hardly know what to say. I 
had made all arrangements to leave here this evening for the west. 
It will be impossible for me to come for Sunday. I will, however, 
come Wednesday night. But I have no address prepared. You know 
doubtless, how busy we have been for the last few weeks. We have not 
had time to think outside of our work here. We finish today. I will 
come up and we can get acquainted at least. 

I would like to have gone up to the Board room to meet you 
there, but cannot get through here in time. 


Crawfordsville, Iowa, June 20, 1895. 
Rey. Orville Reed, Montclair, N. J. 

My Dear Brother:—I feel very guilty for not letting you hear from 
me before this. I have been visiting most of the time since I visited 
you, and you know how hard it is to do anything while one is thus 
engaged. 

I have had a splendid time; found my friends all well, and have 
thoroughly enjoyed my rest so far. I have either preached or talked 
missions every Sabbath since leaving the Seminary. Have received 
much encouragement. I enjoy the work so much. I was examined and 
ordained on the 28th of May, at my own home. Will spend most of 
the summer talking on the subject that is so near our hearts. I often 
tell of the work of your church and hold it up as a model. I wish 
there were some way of letting more of our churches hear of your 
way of doing things. It would be so helpful and might do a great 
thing for missions. 

If you receive any new information regarding our field I would 
be glad to hear of it, that I might learn it also. Do you have any def- 
inite idea just when we will be expected to sail? 

Please give my best wishes to your family and all the dear people 
of your church. 


GETTING READY FOR AFRICA. 


New York, October 7, 1895.. 
My Dear Father and Mother: 

You will see from the heading of this letter where I am. I have 
had such a pleasant time on my trip east. Had a good time at Mc- 
Cormick; then at Berwyn with Hickman. Yesterday I was at Prince- 
ton and saw a host of old friends. This morning I came to New York. 
Have seen some of the Secretaries. Everything is all right. I may 
get most of my outfit here after all. I like the new building very 
much. It is a handsome one. We have a meeting here Thursday 
and Friday. We sail Saturday at 11 o’clock. There will be six of us, 
at least. I will go to Montclair tonight, but may come back tomorrow 
morning. I have to repack my books—hard job—must go at it. 


New York City, October 8, ’95. 
My Dear Parents: 

You ought to have seen me today. I make a great shopper—dish 
pans, brooms, stew pans and ladles, large spoons and small, scrub- 
bing brushes, dust pan, water bucket; a saw, file, hammer, screw 
driver, a Winchester rifle, a revolver, and other articles too numerous 
to mention. I am not half done yet. 


I will have a very short visit at Montclair, for which I am very 
sorry. Was out there last night and had a good time. ; 

I have a very fine place to stop; too fine forme. The waiter asked 
me this evening whether I would have claret or beer. I told him I 
would take cow milk. They had Philadelphia chicken, but it tasted as 
though it had been in the sauer kraut barrel. 

I bought a dollar’s worth of experience when I came to New 
York on Monday, but it will last me some time. Will not tell you 
what it was. I am tired tonight. I received your letter and the Im- 
print. Was glad to get both. Write often. 


New York, October 11, 1895. 
My Dear Parents: 

Your letter was received last night at Montclair. I have beer 
here all week but went out last night for the farewell meeting. We 
had a fine time. It was a combination of their anniversary and a fare- 
well. Came in this morning to pack up. Everything has to be packed 


“THE BELOVED.” 2 


by 3 P. M. today. I am nearly worn out by this new kind of work. 
Shopping is hard work for a man, but they say it is a woman’s delight. 

You just ought to see my things. But I have no time now to tell 
you of them. If I do not get sick I will write fully on the vessel. TF 
am well—only tired. All the missionaries who are going are here at 
the hotel, six from here and three more from Liverpool. It will take 
five weeks from Liverpool, instead of two, as I told you. 


Saturday morning.—We had a splendid meeting at 4 p. M. yester- 
day in the Mission house—a farewell meeting. And then last night we 
were all up to Dr. Gillespie’s home for a social time. I went to bed 
at 12 and got up at 6. It is now 6:38; four hours and I must be on 
board. 

I feel resigned perfectly. It is hard to leave you all and my dear- 
girl at Brighton but I know the Lord Jesus loves us and will protect 
us and I trust bring us all together again. 

I will try to write a card after I get on board the ship. There will 
be a great crowd at the wharf, for the City of Rome is one of the very 
largest steamers on the ocean. Her capacity is 8144 tons. 

May God bless you all and watch between us when we are ab- 
sent one from the other. Give my love to all the friends. Good bye 
dear parents and brothers and sisters. Let us be often on our Knees 
God is good. He will answer prayers. With a heart full of love to 
all, I bid farewell. Your prodigal boy, CHARLIE. 


SAILS FROM NEW YORK. 


S. S. City of Rome, October 19, 1895. 
My Dear Parents: 

One week ago just now we left the wharf at New York. It has 
been a very short week indeed. I have not been able to do anything. 
Could not even read my Bible. Can not think in a straight line. You 
have no idea what it is to be sea-sick. We have not had a smooth 
hour’s ride yet. The first Sabbath everybody was sick. I took nothing 
from Saturday evening till Sabbath evening and then a very little. 
Some of our party had nothing for two days, except a little tea. 
Somehow I did not get very sick at first, but it has stayed with 
me. It is very bad today but we have grown used to it a little, still 
we all feel miserable in one way. In another way we have enjoyed our 
trip. We have had no storm, only a high wind. We have had white- 
caps every day. But I must go out on deck or I will spoil this sheet. 

P. M. on upper deck.—There is still a high sea, but notwithstanding 
the roughness we rather enjoy the voyage. There are some excellent 
people on board, some Scotch, and lively, too. I will write all about the 


“24 CHARLES W. McCLEARY.. 


~vyoyage when we get on terra firma, and let you give it to the Imprint. 
I would like to ask you to send a copy of all the Imprints I write for 
to Miss Kirby. She received one some time ago, for which she was 
~very thankful. 

We have a very pleasant party, six for Africa and five for India. 
“Mrs. Ogden, Miss Engels, Mr. and Mrs. Johnson, Mr. Hickman and my-~ 
self. For India: Mr. Sieler, wife and three children. 


October 21, 1895, Glasgow. 

I was not able to finish my letter, but now we are very com- 
fortably fixed at a good hotel in Glasgow. Our ship came into Green- 
ock at 10 P. M., but did not land till this morning. After custom 
duties we took a queer sort of a train for Glasgow. We arrived here 
all safe and sound at 10 o’clock. We had a time claiming our baggage. 
“We had 23 boxes, 12 trunks and 13 packages. These were all tumbled 
-off with a thousand other boxes and bags and we were expected to 
‘point them out and claim them. They give no checks. It is a free 
for all hunt. We succeeded finally in locating them all. 


Glasgow, October 21, 1895. 
“My Dear Parents, Brothers and Sisters: 

This letter will tell you that I am safe on the other side of the 
great Atlantic. I wish I were with you that I might describe my very 
‘interesting voyage. Every day had some new thing of interest. We 
met several steamers, saw a shark, saw several porpoises. On 
Wednesday we had a funeral. It was very sad to see them drop the 
body down into the great ocean—down, down, a thousand feet per- 
haps. But after all, it is all the same. What matters it where our 
body lies, whether in Iowa, Africa or the deep blue ocean? Where 
can we go to get away from God’s presence?—no place. God is every- 
where. Why should we fear then to go anywhere, for there we will 
find Him. 

The first Sabbath we were too sick to have services, but last 
Sabbath we had services at 10 A. M. After that the day was a noisy 
one. At 11 o’clock the Irish coast appeared. From that on we had 
constant excitement. Everybody in good spririts, all on deck, all talk- 
ing and laughing. Then at 2:30 we landed about one-third of our pas- 
sengers at Londonderry in Ireland. Our ship then went on to Green- 
ock. We passed the custom house officers very easily. One of the 
stewards of the ship told one of the leading men that we were bound 
for Africa and he asked me, “Do you give me your word that you have 
no spirits or tobacco?” I said, “I do,” and he passed the whole party, 
‘with 23 boxes, 12 trunks and 13 smaller packages, without opening 


“THE BELOVED.” 25 


anything but our steamer trunks. He shook his head a little at 
some of my books, when I showed him the list, for some are English 
Teprints. But he said since we were going on through he would let 
them go. He had a perfect right to destroy all reprints. We tipped 
the steward in good shape, you may know. I hate this custom of 
“tips.” Everybody who looks at you expects something for it. 

This afternoon we took a short tour of the city. We saw the 
Glasgow Cathedral, one of the most interesting ones of all Europe. 
It is 700 years old. Then we went to the cemetery, which is the grand- 
est one I ever saw. From it we could see all over the city. There we 
saw a monument in memory of John Knox, the great Scotch Re- 
former. ,Then later we saw a monument in honor of Sir Walter 
Scott, the great Scotch author. 

We go to Liverpool tomorrow at 10. It is a six hour ride. We are 
all together yet. At Liverpool three others will join our party. We 
are having a real nice time together, very cogenial company. Mrs. Og- 
den is such a fine old lady. 


IN LIVERPOOL ENGLAND. 


Liverpool, Oct. 22, 1895. 
My Dear Parents: 

You will note our change of address. I will start a letter this 
evening and finish it later on. We five young people left Glasgow this 
Morning at 10 o’clock on the Midland railway. Mrs. Ogden went to 
Edinburgh for a day and will join us tomorrow. We had a delightful 
ride. More fun, better views, and altogether the most enjoyable trip 
if the kind I ever had. We arrived in Liverpool about 4:30. Mr. 
Alexander (an agent of our Board) met us, took care of our baggage, 
and brought us up to the Hotel Shaftesbury, where we will be located 
during our stay here. I do wish you all might have the ride we had. 
The scenery of the Alleghenny mountains will not compare with 
what we saw today. It was the most varied of any I ever saw. Of 
course, these old cities are quaint and odd to us. Then the fields are 
so queer to one raised on the prairie. The stone fence is seen every- 
where, and the fields are so small. They would not average over 5 
or 6 acres. Some possibly had 20, but most under 5. We saw some 
sheep cotes built of stone like the ones we read of in the Bible. 
We passed through Dumfries, near which John G. Paton was born 
Then on into England. We noticed one old ruin of a castle up on a 
high hill. It looked very much like the pictures we see. The coun- 
try is quite mountainous; nearly all the way we could see the snow- 
capped peaks. We came near the snow, too, in crossing. Below it was 
the green grass and away down in the valleys were the sheep and cows 


26 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


feeding just as in the month of June, although it was quite cool. They 
have a fine quality of sheep, cattle and horses here. But I have not 
yet seen a single hog. 

The trains run very fast between stations but are delayed a long 
while at stations. Part of the way our train made 70 miles an hour, 
they said. My, how they did shake us up! The cars are light and 
short and bounce around like the B. & N. W. cars do. 

My dear mother, I neglected to speak to you about receiving that 
present from home. Mr. Reed got it and brought it to the steamer, 
and handed it to me in my state room after I had gone aboard, and I 
did not open it till we had left the wharf. It was real nice of you to 
remember-me that way. It has cheered me all the journey through. 
I will keep some of my best pictures in that holder and have it ever 
near my study table, if I am fortunate enough to have one. 

Well, I have just completed a day’s shopping in a strange land. 
But it does not seem strange. The only thing that is different is the 
money and that is very confusing. The clerks are more obliging than 
in New York or Philadelphia. You know in the United States every- 
body is his own lord: not so here; there are classes, and one man 
domineers over another. We noticed it at the station. The train man 
objected to our taking two trunks apiece, one being the limit according 
to rule. But the agent of the ‘Anchor Line” who was looking after 
us, said in a lordly way, “But, I tell you, put them in.” The poor man 
jumped as though struck, put them in and never said a word. In the 
stores the clerks do not know who they are dealing with, and so are 
very obliging to everyone. Liverpool does not differ much from New 
York. The people look much the same. They dress just the same. 
The stores are much the same and so are the prices. The buildings 
are older and the streets are more crooked. It is very hard to find a 
place. We succeeded in getting most of our clothing today. I think 
I can finish in one day. We expect to go up to London for a day or 
two. There will be four to join our party here. Mrs. Ogden came 
today. So did Mrs. DeHeer and Mrs. Rheutlinger. The others will 
come. We sail Wednesday, the thirtieth of October, on the steamer, 
“Niger.” " 
October 25, 1895. 

The steamer for America sails tomorrow, so I will send this, and 
another just before sailing south on Wednesday next. They tell me 
mail goes from here to Africa once every four weeks. Think of that! 
But it comes this way more often, coming by France. I am through 
shopping. Have gotten along very well. Still have some outfit money 
left but may need it later on. There is one thing about shopping here 
in England that I like, i. e., kind attention. The clerks will do any- 
thing for you. Another thing is that everything is handy. 


“THE BELOVED.” : 27 


The Hoel Shaftesbury is an old fashioned one. We have fire- 
places and tallow candles. Our party now has a private room and in 
it there is electricity. There is but one electric railway in Liverpool. 
This is the first one we have seen in England. There were none in 
Glasgow. 

We will not get up to London as we had expected. We have been 
so busy buying that we have had no time to look at sights. Now we 
are through, and free till Wednesday. I received your last letter to 
New York yesterday. The tube-rose still had perfume in it. Thanks. 
Love to all. We are all well. 


Shaftesbury Hotel, Liverpool, October 29, 1895. 
My Dear Parents and All: 

This is my last night in a civilized country and my last letter for 
a time. We sail tomorrow at 10 o’clock on the steamer Niger. We 
expect to have a pleasant time. If the weather is good I will write and 
send mail back at every port possible. You may get it or not, I cannot 
say. On Saturday we five new missionaries had our photos taken. 
This evening I mailed three to you. One is for you, one for Myrtie, and 
one for Rey. Orville Reed. I send them to you because they will carry 
better all together. May I ask you to send the other two as above? 
Today all ten of us had our pictures taken, but I took only one of 
them and will not send to you. The weather here is very bad now, 
cold and damp, the worst I ever saw. It goes clear-through one. And 
this hotel is not a very good one for the prices. It is very expensive 
traveling over here. We do not go anywhere. Had expected to go to 
London, but the weather has been so miserable that we stayed home. 
On Sabbath day we heard two good sermons—Mr. Thomas in the morn- 
ing and McClaran Watson in the evening. In the evening the church 
Was crowded. It is the most aristocratic church in the city. He gave 
us a very fine sermon. But I would just as soon hear Dr. Purves of 
good old Princeton. 

I received your letter of October 18th, on the 28th. This is the 
last word I will have from you for four, and perhaps five, six or 
seven weeks. It will be a long time, but I am perfectly resigned. I 
don’t care for any little thing such as this now. I am prepared for 
whatever comes. I am very grateful for the prayers which are con- 
tinually being offered for me. It is strengthening for one to know that 
he is thus remembered. We can help one another very much in this 
way, I think. 

We are all through our worry now. All are waiting quietly for 
the time to come. One more night’s sleep and one more meal, and we 
are through with this country, and we will all be glad. Our whole 
party is tired of Liverpool and Shaftesbury Hotel. We have tallow 


28 aes CHARLES W. McCLEHARY. 


candles for light in our bed rooms, and grates which are no account 
whatever only for smoking.. But this is all thrown in. Another 
thing which is annoying is the abominable system of tipping. This, 
too, is thrown in. But we have a good deal of fun anyway, for we 
have a lively crowd. Mrs. DeHeer is a real jolly woman and we all 
enjoy her fun. 

They say that the Bay of Biscay is very rough at this time of the 
year, so we may have a sick week. When you get this we will be near 
the Canary Islands, perhaps past them. But you know we will be some- 
where on the ocean billows but just as safe as in Crawfordsville, Iowa. 
Don’t worry a bit about my safety. I hope to be home in three years, 
possibly not till four. The Lord only knows,. but He does know, and 
We can only wait and trust. 

Well, good bye dear ones. May the Lord watch between us while 
we are separated, and restore us again in peace and safety. 


OUTWARD BOUND FROM ENGLAND. 


S. S. Niger, near Maderia, Nov. 5, 1895. 
My Dear Parents: 

This is a lovely day. The sun is shining brightly and a mild breeze 
is blowing from the southwest. The “Niger” rolls quite a good deal 
and consequenty we all feel a little squeamish. But our journey has 
been a very prosperous one so far. When we left England it was 
rather cool and the mountains were covered with snow, but gradually 
the temperature has risen till now it is quite warm. Yesterday I left 
my overcoat off, and today put on my summer clothes. We will have 
no more cold winds now, for we are below the cold wave limit. To- 
morrow we will reach Maderia-and I will mail this letter and let it 
return by the next mail going north. 

I have not been able to read, write or do anything but sit around 
on deck and wish for land. We have a splendid ship and an agreeable 
crew. The officers are all pleasant and talkative, and we are now 
pretty well acquainted with everyone on board, i. e., the passengers 
and officers. There are nineteen passengers and forty-five in the 
crew; one dog, three cats, one billy goat, and about eight sheep, one 
pen of geese and one of ducks and chickens. Yesterday the billy goat 
got mad and made a charge on the first mate. He ran, but too slowly. 
Billy took him on the gable end of his official breeches and sent him 
rolling on the deck. 

We will have a concert tonight. I will sing “Thompson’s Mule,” 
if the vessel is not too shaky. This is all I can write now. I will have 
to write on the installment plan. We have to dress frequently on the 
same plan: put on one garment, then rest, and so on. 


“THH BELOVED.” 29 


5:30.—Th sun has just gone down and so has the wind. The sea 
is smooth and the vessel is making good way. This is the first good 
opportunity we have had for writing. I have nothing of interest, how- 
ever, to tell you. It is the same old story day after day. We will 
have wonderful appetites soon. It seems to me the stewards are 
busy all the time getting eatables and drinks. First, in the morning 
from 6:30 to 7, they serve coffee. Then at 8:30 we have breakfast; 
lunch at 1:00, and tea at 4, then dinner at 6:30 in the evening. In ad- 
dition to this, on the City of Rome, they had at 11 o’clock, beef tea, 
and again at 9:30 P. M., they had supper, making seven times for eat- 
ing. Here we have five. There is a great deal of drinking done by the 
other passengers; whiskey, wine, beer, ale, and so forth. So far I 
have had a good appetite but have not felt well between meals on ac- 
count of sea-sickness. I think that is over except in case of storm.\ 
One thing, which is very nice, but which I think really a detriment, 
is that the ladies have a goodly supply of candies along. Every day 
they bring out their sweets and tempt us with them. They are fine— 
both the ladies and the sweets. 

Wednesday morning, 7:30. The beautiful Island of Maderia is 
close by. I wish you could be where I am just now. There is no 
more rocking of the vessel and the morning is a perfect one. The 
island is so high that the clouds hide the top. The moon is just 
above it. The whole landscape is covered with houses, which to the 
naked eye look like stones, but through the glass look like nice 
houses. Well, I have another letter to write and breakfast to eat 
before landing, and I must close this note. 


A DAY IN MADERIA. 


November 7, 1895. 

At daybreak on November 6 the beautiful island of Maderia ap- 
peared on the horizon. It was indeed a welcome sight. For five days 
we had seen nothing but the big, blue ocean, and the sight of land on 
Wednesday morning cheered us all. The Niger cast anchor about 
8:30 in the morning, in the bay before Funchal. This was our break- 
fast hour, so we had to go in and take our meal, while without were 
“ many interesting scenes. But Captain Davis assured us that we would 
not sail before 10 P. M., so we had plenty of time and quietly obeyed the 
summons. After a hasty meal we all went up on deck. There were 
about a dozen small boats all around the ship. Some of them con- 
tained officials, others sailors, but most of them were rowed by native 
boys, half naked and each shouting as loud as possible to the passen- 
gers, “Dive, six-pence,” meaning that if we would throw a six-pence 
into the water, they would dive and get it. For a six-pence they 
would dive under the Niger, which would cause them to go down 
at least twenty feet under water. While watching these boys, we met 
with a glad surprise. A very pleasant looking Englishman came up 
and introduced himself as Rev. Smart, a missionary on Maderia. Of 
course we were glad to meet with a missionary, and still more glad 
when he told us that he would be at our service as a guide over the 
city of Funchal, where he was now located. He had two boats near, 
and calling to them, took us ashore. This way of landing was new to 
us. The tide was coming in and the waves quite high for small boats. 
Some of us landed safely but others did not fare so well. Just as the 
ladies were going to step out, a big wave went over their boat and 
part of them were drenched. No one was drowned, however, and we 
had a good laugh at the expense of the wet ones. After landing, Rey. 
Smart led us up one of the most beautiful streets I was ever in, on 
into the public gardens, across these to his own home, where we met 
his amiable wife, sister-in-law, and brother-in-law. They led us up 
to the third story where they had a beautiful parlor, opening on a 
large balcony, from which we had the most beautiful view I have 
ever had the privilege of seeing. Immediately below, across a narrow 
street, were the public gardens. These were beautiful beyond my pow- 
er of description. You know Maderia lies near the tropical zone and at 
this time of year things look as fresh as they do in June in our country. 
The roses were in bloom and other flowers and trees covered with 
bloom. We saw palms, figs, pomegranates, in fact nearly everything 


“THE BELOVED.” rout 


which grows in the tropics. Beyond the garden was the city. A 
queer looking one, too. The streets are very narrow and paved with 
little flat pebbles stuck on edge. The captain of the Niger called 
them ‘ladies’ hearts,’ so we had to tread on them. They make a 
beautiful street. In these streets we saw a crowd of dark people, not 
black, but brown. They are Portugese of long years ago, but some- 
what changed from the people of their ancestry now. For conveyances 
they use sleds, or rather boards, hauled by oxen. On these they pile 
everything, but what they carry, and drag them around in this quaint 
way. They have a very few horses, but use them only for riding, and 
that for visitors. They are all born beggars. Even little children not 
Jarge enough to talk, are taught to stick out their hands to Visitors. 
The buildings are of stone, with tile roofs, with scarcely any win- 
dows. They tell us that the farm houses have no windows at all. 
One door is the only opening. These buildings stretch away back 
from the bay, forming a half circle, the beach being the straight side. 


But the most beautiful part of the view was the background. The 
city is on a very steep hill, or rather on the foot of a mountain, the 
outskirts (out-bloomers) rising some 1800 feet above the sea. But 
beyond the city the mountain rises still higher, piercing even the 
clouds. Part of the time the tops were not visible. The highest point 
is about four thousand feet. From the balcony all the panorama 
appeared before us. The mountains were covered with verdure; here 
and there we could see a waterfall in the distance. Well up on the 
mountain side we could see a church steeple, and we expressed the 
desire that we might go up, and from there look back upon the city. 
Rey. Smart told us that building was a convent and to it there was a 
cog railway; the only railway on the island. At 11 o’clock we started 
up on this mountain climber. Up and up we went, through gardens of 
trees, and sweet scented flowers. On either side could be seen grape 
vines, figs, chestnuts, oranges, dates, bananas, cane, pumpkins and all 
the rest. Finally the engine stopped and we got out. Mr. Smart led us 
to a winding, shady lane past a clebrated fountain, then up a long flight 
of stone steps to the front of the convent. What a grand sight met 
our gaze! We were standing two thousand feet above the sea, looking 
down on the city and bay. There lay the Niger and several other 
Ships, among them a United States man-of-war, with the stars and 
stripes waving. The sea was as smooth as glass and stretched away 
as far as the eye could see, where the sky and sea came together. The 
sun was beaming down as on an Jowa June day. The air was balmy 
and fresh and loaded with the scent of flowers and fruits. We longed 
to linger, but time would not permit. The homeward-bound steam- 
er came in while we were going up and we had letters to mail, so 
we must either hasten or let our letters lie a whole week in that city. 
Part of our company returned by rail, but part by the toboggan slide, 


32 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


as we called it. They placed two of us in a wicker sleigh and a native 
took hold of the rope fastened on each side and ran behind as the 
guide. Away we went, over those “ladies’ hearts,’ down a narrow 
street. Part of the way it was very steep. The guide would then 
jump on and we sailed down over those stones like the wind. It was 
a delightful ride. Most of the way there was a sparkling stream of 
water rippling down the side of the street. Our fast descent caused 
a strong breeze, at least it seemed that way, and we were soon cool 
enough. In about ten minutes we were down at the bottom again, 
feeling somewhat shaken up, but still able to enjoy a walk in the 
gardens before the others put in an appearance. At 1:30 we all took 
lunch at Mr. Smart’s, after which we went out for a short time, re- 
turning at 4:00 for a season of prayer together before we separated. 
It was indeed refreshing to have that fellowship with Christian friends: 
in a strange land. It was a mutual help for us and them. After 
prayers tea was served, and then we returned to the steamer, getting 
back at 6:00 o’clock. We were tired in body but revived in spirit. 
It was a happy day for us, a Godsend to cheer us on our way. 

At 10:00 o’clock we were again at sea and as we left the port 
we lingered on the deck in silence, praying in spirit that the Lord 
would bless his faithful few in that worse than heathen city, for it 
is ruled by a few vile priests. 

It is a pity that such a beautiful spot of God’s earth is under the 
control of such people as it is. The Portuguese do not seem to care 
what becomes of it. 

This would be a delightful place to stay for a short winter vaca- 
tion, but to live here all the time, amidst the wickedness, would be 
hard. But for one day I do not see how one could spend the time 
more profitably than to take the little round we had on this, as a 
passenger remarked, the most beautiful spot on earth. It was to 
us like an oasis in the desert is to a weary traveler. We thoroughly 
enjoyed it. Long will we remember Maderia. Would that you alB 
might see it. 


November 11, 1895. 
My Dear Parents and All: 

We are now in the sunny south, just off the coast of the Great 
Sahara Desert. It is getting warm—yes, hot in the sun. Of course 
out on the sea where the cool breezes are blowing, and where we are 
protected from the sun by a double awning, we do not feel the heat 
so much yet. The weather is delightful and the sea is smooth. The 
constant rocking of the ship does not affect us any more and we are 
beginning to enjoy the voyage in good earnest. This morning we 
saw a whale off to our right—the first one I have seen, and I did not. 
see much of it. The Captain says they are thick farther down 


“THE BELOVED.” 3= 


the coast. Yesterday we saw some fiying fish and two or three schools: 
of porpoise (hog fish). Other than this we see nothing but the bound— 
less sea usually. But are now able to read and write and so can- 
pass the time very pleasantly. Yesterday we had services in the 
Morning. It was my turn to conduct them. I preached on the text: 
“OQ, taste and see that the Lord is good,” Ps. 34:8. There were not- 
many out but our own party, but we had a very nice service. Mr.. 
Jobnston preached last Sabbath. It will be Hickman’s turn next. 

I told you in my last letter about our pleasant day on Maderia.. 
Now I must tell you of 


A DAY ON TENERIFFE. 


Teneriffe is one of the largest of the Canary Islands. It contains: 
919 square miles; has a population of about 110,000. It is under- 
Spanish rule, but there are a great many Portuguese living there. 
When we went up on deck Friday morning, Nov. 8th, the island was. 
plainly in sight. For some three hours we Kept sailing around the: ~ 
northeastern part of it, till near ten o’clock we cast anchor in the- 
harbor before Santa Cruz. From the harbor we could get a good view 
of the city and surroundings. But some of us wanted a better and 
nearer view, SO aS soon as we could, five of our party tock a boat for- 
the shore. After wandering about the city awhile we decided to 
get a lunch and-go out to some shady nook in the mountains behind. 
the town and have a little picnic all to ourselves. We soon found. 
that this was easier planned than executed, for the mountain was: 
farther away than we thought and when we did get to it there was a. 
very limited supply of shade. About the only thing growing was the 
cactus. We did, however, find a weeping willow tree which afforded: 
a little protection from the scorching sun. Under its drooping boughs: 
we ate our lunch of buns and fruit. It was a grateful rest, for we were: 
tired and warm, and the sea breeze refreshe. us. After our lunch 
we started for the top of the mountain. The sun was very hot, but. 
we had our pith hats and white umbrellas, so were able to Keep 
the scorching rays off to some extent. We found very little else but- 
rocks, moss and cactus; but as these were all new to us in this con- 
nection, we rather enjoyed it. We Kept climbing on and on, up and up, 
over those barren crags, till we reached a point right above the city, 
where we could look down upon it and the harbor. As at Maderia 
we could see the “Niger” quietly achored in the bay below us. There: 
lay the city with its quaint old buildings and narrow streets. We 
were about 1,800 feet above it, so we could get a very good view. We: 
also had a good view of some of the farms. You would laugh to see 


34 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


‘them plowing and sowing in those little fields. Now you think I have 
“made a mistake in talking about sowing at this season of the year. 
Well, I have not, for they were actually sowing and planting their 
‘flelds. One thing that looked singular was the large patches of to- 
Mmatoes seen on the hillsides, just started, and that was the 8th of 
‘November. They will be ready for Christmas, perhaps. All their 
“fields are exceedingly small. They are built; not natural. The 
ground is so steep that it would be impossible to plow it at all if 
they did not first build it up in terraces. The mountain side looks 
-just like a huge flight of stairs. They use the large rocks and stones for 
the wall on the lower side of the patches, then they fill in behind this 
wall with the best soil they can find. Thus their farms are “built,” 
and they do get some very nice small gardens, as we call them. They 
“use no horses. The oxen do good service however. Their plows 
seem to be of wood. The soil is full of stones, and looks as if it were 
of no account, but they raise fair crops on it. They make a great deal 
von the fruit, being able to grow anything in that line. 

One thing we saw from our high perch was the amphitheatre 
where they hold their bull fights, just as they do in Spain. This we 
‘did not like to see, but like all the rest of the wickedness we saw, 
we could only pass it by with a prayer that somehow it would be 
-done away with. After we had taken a good look and had rested, we 
started down again, but by a new path. On the way we came to a 
pring where we quenched our thirst. Again we passed a small barn 
where they kept goats for milking, but we did not stop for a drink. 
“Tired and weary we reached the city again. After a few purchases we 
took a boat for the “Niger,” glad to get back to our home, but not 
-gorry we had gone, for at the ship there was a great uproar all day 
long. They took on 200 tons of coal, which of course made a dust, 
“so we were glad to be away and have a quiet day. At ten o’clock 
“that night we “heaved away” from Santa Cruz, not to stop till we 
reached Sierra Leone. We will get there some time Thursday, per- 
haps, when I will mail this letter. We are in good health and spirits. 
“The officers are becoming more and more obliging and sociable, which 
makes it very pleasant for us. I will send a twig from Teneriffe, also 
xa picture of a hotel. Good-bye, dear ones. 


FIRST SIGHT OF AFRICA. 


November 15, 1895, 3:30 p. m. 


My Dear Parents:—I am going to write to you about our stop at 
Sierra Leone while it is fresh in my mind. I was up with the sun 
this morning; this for two reasons perhaps. It was so warm I could 
not sleep well, and the captain told us last night that we would see 
land about daylight. The latter had more to do with it than the 
former, for I was very anxious to get a glimpse of Africa, my adopted 
country. And I was rewarded for getting up early. As soon as I came 
on deck, Africa rose up before me. We were nearing Freetown, the 
capital of Sierra Leone. This is a city on a river, near its mouth, with 
mountains on one side and a low marshy plain on the other. The 
mountains loomed up before us. They were beautiful, green and fresh 
as an Iowa June morning. A delightful breeze was blowing, bearing 
from the land the scent of fruits and flowers. It was refreshing. The 
tops of the mountains were covered with the clouds, but what we could 
see of them was fine. So different from Teneriffe, for they were cov- 
ered with trees and herbage of all kinds. None of the bare rocks ap- 
peared. The palms looked nice, especially. So tall and straight, and 
the tops, spreading as they do, look so inviting on a hot day. Well, 
from sunrise till 8 o’clock, we feasted on these scenes, rejoicing in 
the sight of land once more, and especially in this land, for it was 
Africa. 


At 8 a.m. the Niger cast anchor in the river before Freetown. 
Soon the health officer came out, and, when he found that there was 
no sickness, ordered the yellow flag down. Then we witnessed a new 
scene of @ different color. Load after load of the natives came to the 
side of the ship, yelling and jabbering in a somewhat revised dialect 
of the English language. We were able to understand hardly any- 
thing they said. They were a hard looking lot. Jet black, half clad, 
bare headed, large boned, big mouthed monsters of the dark land. I 
counted seventy-five of them. As soon as the mails were delivered 
they were allowed to come on board. At a given sign they all made a 
rush for the rope ladder that was thrown over the side for them. They 
can climb like monkeys. Up they came, laughing and shouting, glad 
to get on the ship. As the third officer said, about the only thing 
they had on was a broad smile. What they came for no one seems 
able to tell. Some say to steal, for they often miss things after 
leaving Sierra Leone. They run all over the vessel, peering into every 
nook and corner. They look up into your face and grin. 


36 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


Sierra Leone is one of the most unhealthy parts of the west and 
We were advised by the older missionaries not to go ashore, not being 
used to the climate. Some of them went, but we, the younger ones, 
remained on board and viewed the place from a distance. Our stay 
was not long but it was exciting at this port. Our crew, passenger and 
cargo lists were all increased. They added 16 to the crew, 51 to the 
passenger list, and took on 16 head of cattle. The cattle were put 
in the alley-way on the port side of the vessel. The passengers were 
all stowed on the lower deck. There they have to sleep, eat and live. 
You would laugh to see their dress. Some of them have decent suits, 
but most have only an attempt at decency. One fellow has a pair of 
green trousers cut in the latest style, i. e., bloomer fashion. Some 
have loose wrappers on only, others shirts, others only trousers. The 
color makes no difference, just so it is something flashy. The mate 
told of one fellow they took once who had a bright red shirt and in 
putting it on he put his feet through the arm-holes, then tied the 
lower part under his arms. So we are in the midst of high life. You 
ought to have seen them take the cattle on board. They brought them 
out in a small boat to the ship’s side, then put a rope around their 
horns and hauled them up by the derrick crane as they would a 
sack of potatoes. We left another of our passengers at this port. 
At one o’clock we “heaved away” again and were soon out of sight of 
land. 


Saturday Evening, Nov. 16, 1895. 


Tonight we are anchored at Monrovia, the capital of Liberia. We 
came in at five o’clock this evening and will not get away till morn- 
ing. Monrovia is a quiet little place situated on the slope of a small 
mountain by the sea-side. We can see a church steeple, and some 
of the houses look quite American. Only two boats came out. One 
an oficial, the other a native canoe. This is the first one I have 
seen. It is very long and narrow and they are able to propel it very 
fast with their queer little paddles. 


This evening some of the ladies gave us a stereopticon show. It 
Was quite good although the lenses were somewhat damaged in ship- 
ping. They gave some views of Africa, some of Switzerland, some 
of Norway, some of America, and at the close, the stars and stripes and 
the queen. We were about equally divided between England and 
U. S., and each tried to outdo the other in cheers for their native land. 
We sang “America” and they, “God Save the Queen.” An enjoyable 
evening was thus spent. 


Yesterday we started with the Gospel of Luke for a systematic 
study. We will first read it over hurriedly to get the history. Then 


“THH BELOVED.” 37 


we will take it up chapter by chapter and study it carefully. I think 
we can get a great deal out of it in this way, and I am sure we will 
all enjoy it. 


November 19, 1895. 


Dear Parents:—I have related our history up to Saturday even- 
ing, the 16th. Well, Sabbath morning was a busy one for the Niger. 
We have lain at anchor all night before Monrovia, and the Captain was 
in a hurry to get away. He was expecting quite a number of colored 
Men as passengers. They were slow about coming on, so he fired 
the cannon and blew the whistle at a furious rate, making the har- 
bor resound. After a time they did get them all on board, 125 of 
them. These were all stowed on the lower deck with the other 51 
from Sierra Leone. What a pile it makes! These are not as well 
dressed as the others. Some of them have scarcely a thing on. Most 
of them have fine forms and some are quite intelligent looking. 


Our services were postponed till 4:00 o’clock in the afternoon. 
Even then it was hard to get into the spirit of devotion, there was so 
much noise. In the evening we sang gospel songs till quite late. 


Yesterday was a fine day. Twice we stopped to see if there were 
any more boys for the Congo, but did not get any. The first was at 
Grand Sesters. Twenty-six canoes came off. The natives were the 
toughest of any we have seen yet. It is marvelous the way they 
handle those long canoes. We were soon away from here as there 
were no boys for us. We next stopped at Cape Palmas. Again a 
great crowd came out but there were none for us. So we were soon 
away from there, also. One thing of interest here was an old wreck 
‘we Saw on the beach. It has been there some twenty-five years. This 
is a dangerous place, there being so many rocks just hidden in the 
water. These colored fellows have a great time with “Billy.” They 
fairly tease the life out of him. They are a jolly lot. Yesterday I 
took my guitar and went down among them. They soon gathered 
around me and most of them listened attentively to the music which 
I tried to make. Some of them even tried to sing. I am going to 
try to win them in this way, then try to talk with them. 


I am beginning to flatter myself on my success with the type- 
writer. How do you like it? I know you can read my letter with a 
great deal more satisfaction. Please give my best wishes to all who 
inquire about me. Give them to the relations whether they inquire 
or not. 


We will get to Batanga about the last day of this month. 


38 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


S. S. Niger, near Kamerun. 
November 26, 1895. 
My Dear Parents and All: 

This morning is a delightful one. The air is cool and refreshing. 
The Kamerun mountains are near. They are beautiful, 13,000 feet 
high. Barly this morning we arrived at Victoria, at the foot of the 
mountains. We stayed only a few hours; took on one passenger—a 
missionary going away for his health. He is a German. 

The mountains are covered with trees of nearly all colors, some 
red, some green, some one, some another. The rocks near the water 
are covered with moss and vines. The verdure is just hanging over 
into the water. It looks so nice. 

We will get to Kamerun, a city twenty miles up the Kamerun 
river, this afternoon. This is our last port before we reach Batanga. 
We cannot tell just when we will get there. When we were at Fer- 
nando Po we were only eight hours from Batanga, but the way we 
go it takes nearly a week. We are all well and happy. Hope we will 
stay so. We are told there is no mail on this steamer for Batanga. 
If so we may not get mail for a month after we get there. But we can 
stand it. You will all write me, won’t you, often? It is so far away. 
I do not have any idea where we will be sent. Perhaps Hickman and 
I will be sent to different places after all. The Lord only knows. 
I am satisfied with whatever comes. Only let me be sent where I can 
do some good. I think I will thoroughly enjoy this work. 


LANDS AT BATANGA. 


Batanga, Kamerun, West Africa, Dec. 10, 1895. 
Rev. Orville Reed, Montclair, N. J. 

My Dear Mr. Reed:—Praise the Lord for His goodness unto us. 
He hath brought us safely on our way in perfect health, and all our 
goods in good condition. We are once more in the hands of kind 
friends. It does not seem like Africa at all so far. We have had many 
pleasant surprises in finding things better than we had anticipated, 
judging beforehand from the descriptions we had read and heard. 
Possibly those high hopes will vanish as we get farther along, but E 
believe you said you wanted me to write my first impressions. 

The whole voyage was a pleasant one. At Sierra Leone we had 
our first glimpse of Africa. We were thoroughly surprised. My idea 
was that all we would see would be a marshy tract of land covered 
with a dense growth of trees, vines, and bushes, with here and there 
a native hut or village, and a few trading posts along the coast. But 
the sight of the beautiful city of Freetown, the capital of Sierra Leone, 
situated as it is on the side of a mountain, and surrounded by palms, 


“THE BELOVED.” 39% 


and tropical trees neatly arranged and trimmed, with gardens of 
flowers and fruits, and winding shady paths, disabused this idea some-- 
what. And from that time on, my ideas of Africa have been growing 
better continually. Some of the scenes along the coast were sad ones, 
yet not as they had been pictured to me by missionaries, and espe- 
cially by the ship’s officers. But I have learned to take the stories of" 
sailors with a grain of salt. e 

We had a good introduction into African life at Monrovia. Here: 
the ship took on 125 boys as deck passengers for the plantations in. 
the south of Africa. They were very poorly clad and had no shelter but 
the blue sky. They ate, slept, lived out on the deck, through the day~ 
in the hot sun, at night in the damp sea air; no bed but the hard 
side of a board; no cover but some miserable rags which through 
the day they tied around their dusky bodies. More boys were taken on. 
at other places till they ‘had over 200. Some of them could understand. 
a little English, and so we were able to do a little missionary work: 
among them. They appreciated all we did. They were glad to have: 
us go down and talk and sing with them. We were surprised to find. 
that some of them could repeat the Lord’s Prayer and quote some 
Bible verses. 

Several especially pleasant days were spent on the latter part of* 
the trip. November 22nd I celebrated my 28th birthday. The mem- 
bers of the party all added to the pleasure of the day by giving 
some little present by which I shall be able to remember the giver as. 
well as the day. 

November 24th we spent on the beautiful island of Fernando Po.. 
We arrived there just in time for services and heard a good sermon in 
English by Rey. Boocock, the Methodist missionary of that place. We 
ten, with Captain Davis, took lunch with the missionary and his wife.. 
We stayed for afternoon service also, one of our party preaching. It 
Was a very pleasant Sabbath day, and a great treat for us, both phys- 
ically and spiritually. 

November 27th and 28th were spent at Kamerun, the headquarters 
of the German government in Africa. It is quite a large city, situated 
twenty miles up the Kamerun river. We were well entertained by 
the missionaries there. There we spent our first Thanksgiving day in 
Africa, and it was well spent. They set up a genuine American: 
Thanksgiving dinner—a great surprise to us, but we were able to take- 
it in with a great deal of appreciation. 

On the morning of the 29th, we reached reached Batanga. It 
was a fine morning. The sea was calm and the breakers unus- 
ually low, so the landing was very good, something which can hardly 
ever be said about Batanga. The Mission boat, the Chain, was soom 
at the side of the Niger. In it were Messrs. Ford, Roberts, Fraser 
and Schnatz. I need not say the greetings were cordial on both sides. 


-40 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


“We were equally glad to see each other, and to hear that both parties 
“were well. We were safely ashore at ten o’clock, where we met the 
rest of the missionaries who were at Batanga, namely: Rey. and Mrs. 
“Gault, and son Harry, Mr. Kerr, Mrs. Roberts, Miss Nassau, Miss 
Babe. We were received at the two houses which are at this place, 
which is two miles up the beach from the church. This location for 
sthe dwellings was selected because it is high and apparently more 
-healthy than in the town where the church is located. It is called 
Bethel. The Gault house is on a little rocky promontory, against whose 
“pase the waves are continually dashing. The Syracuse cottage, form- 
erly occupied by Dr. Laffin, but now the home of Mr. and Mrs. Roberts, 
cand Mr. Ford, is situated to the north, and back some four hundred 
feet from the sea. I am at present located in the latter house. Dear 
-friends, this is a beautiful place. It is entirely unlike what I had ex- 
pected. Bethel it is called, and surely it is “The House of God.” We 
sare having such pleasant and refreshing times here. Surely the Lord 
is with us. We are here just like one family. All the members of the 
Mission are present except Dr. and Mrs. Johnson, of Efulen, and a 
“few who are in America. We number twenty-four present and seven 
absent. We do have such blessed times in our meetings. Two days 
were spent at first in devotional exercises which were very helpful to 
tus all. 

Then for recreation we have the sea for bathing, and this is de- 
‘lightful. We go in in the cool of the evening, after the day’s work is 
done. We also have the beach for walks and shady paths in the for- 
-est. The temperature ranges from 70 degrees to 92 degrees. 


“Well, my disappointments began early. Saturday morning, in 
-looking around to see if our goods were all here, I found that two 
‘of my boxes were missing, and they were the ones I needed most, for 
“they contained all the clothing that I bought in Liverpool; all I have 
‘left is what I brought from home. Perhaps it will be three months 
“before they can be returned, for the Niger does not stop here going 
mnorth. They will go on to Kamerun and come back by the next 
steamer for the south. And then, if I go to the inland, when will they 
-reach me? Perhaps by next March; but I can get along very well 
*till they come. 

We have good news from the Bulu country. Mr. Kerr brought 
down to the coast with him twenty-seven of his boys and twelve men; 
the men as carriers, but the boys to see the ocean. They are bright 
‘looking fellows. Many of them can read and write, and they are 
“better dressed than the boys at the coast. They do their own sewing. 
“Mr. Kerr does only the cutting out. The first evening we were here, 
we were at the beach watching for the last of our goods to come 
zashore. The moon was shining brightly and the sea breeze was cool 
cand refreshing. The waves were rolling at our feet. It was a pleas- 


“THE BELOVED.” 41 


ant place naturally, and the circumstances made it more pleasant. 
Our hearts were full of gratitude to God for His goodness to us in 
bringing us safely to this place. As we were talking and meditating, 
Mr. Kerr gathered his boys around him and led them in singing. They 
sang, “Jewels,” and “Happy Day,” in their own language, of course, but 
the same tune as we use. It did sound grand. My heart swelled with- 
in me as I listened and thought. Only three years ago these boys 
were in the blackest of heathen darkness. Now they were singing 
the praises of God. And they pray too. Mr. Kerr says they pray earn- 
estly. There are thirty-five in his inquiry class, all of whom desire 
to become Christians. Who would not give up some of the pleasures 
of home and friends to reap a reward like this? I would rather live 
here among these degraded people and be the means of leading them 
to Christ, than to dwell in the finest mansion in New York City. Oh 
what joy, what rich blessings come to one’s own soul as he is thus 
laboring for the coming of Christ’s Kingdom in the hearts and lives 
of others. Trials, troubles, afflictions, privations; yes, all of these, 
but what are they as compared with the reward? Oh, tell the glad 
news abroad! Send workers out into this needy field. The people are 
crying out for the Gospel. Will we deny them this rich blessing? 

Sabbath morning, December list, we all went to church at Bong- 
ahele, two miles down the beach. This was my first introduction into 
church life. The ringing of the bell was a welcome sound as we 
approached. The church is not a model in architecture. It is a very 
shabby looking affair. But there was a goodly number of worshippers 
within, so no matter about the building. There were about 350 pres- 
ent and all gave good attention. I have no remarks to make about the 
dress, or rather undress. We enjoyed the services. Afterwards we 
all took lunch with Miss Nassau and Miss Babe, who live near the 
church. In the afternoon we attended Sabbath school, and you may 
be surprised to hear that there were 206 present. This is encouraging 
to see so many children and young people out. It is a hopeful sign. 

Thursday the Mission meeting began. Friday evening Pres- 
bytery was convened. The first two days were spent in devo- 
tional exercises before taking up the work for the coming year. They 
were days well spent. There are many different questions coming up 
and it takes a great deal of grace to be always submissive. So in these 
Meetings we were drawn closer together and closer to God, and thus 
better fitted for the work which was to follow. The Lord has won- 
derfully sustained us and given us only unity amidst diversity of 
opinion. 


Saturday, Dec. 14th, 1895. 
Yesterday, you will remember, was he anniversary of the death of 
Dr. Good. It so happened, unplanned by man, but what a happy co- 


42 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


incidence, that just one year to a day after his death five new mis- 
Sionaries were assigned to their definite fields of labor in the same 
Mission where he fell: Miss Engels, now Mrs. Schnatz, to Batanga; 
Mr. Hickman to Batanga for the present, but when help comes here 
he will go to Benito; Rev. and Mrs. Johnston to Efulen; your humble 
servant to the new station, Ebolewo’e. It seems to be a very happy 
disposal of the new forces, for all are satisfied and even happy. Rev. 
Fraser and Mr. Kerr are assigned to the new station, also. Now, the 
thing is settled. I go to the new field. It will take a great deal of 
strength, courage and grace to go to this wild place, but not so much 
as it must have taken to explore for our going. That was done by one 
we loved and whose memory will always be dear to us. We should not 
falter nor shrink from following up the good work begun. 

Nothing has as yet been done except that the ground for the Mis- 
Sion premises is secured. We will have to clear the ground, cut and 
saw lumber, and build all necessary dwellings. The Dear Lord only 
knows what the result will be. We will start about the first of Janu- 
ary. If I can, I will write once more before leaving. We are all well. 
Please give my love to all. 


A WEDDING. 


Batanga, December 13, 1895. 

My Dear Parents:—December 3d we had a wedding, and as this is 
something quite uncommon out here, a great deal was made of it. 
You will remember that I wrote you about the young lady who journ- 
eyed with us and who was to marry one of the men on the field as 
goon as we arrived. Her name was Miss Engles and the man was 
Rev. Schnatz. They had intended to be married by the German gov- 
ernor, but there was too much red tape about it and too much delay, 
so they decided to get into a boat and go out beyond the three mile 
limit, where no governor but the Almighty One had anything to say 
about the matter. So the bride and groom, the bride’s maid and the 
groom’s man, and the parson, (Rev. Gault), got into the mission boat, 
Chain, and started out on the briny deep to make one out of two. 
They unfurled the Stars and Stripes, went out four miles from the 
shore, and there in that little boat, tossed to and fro by the waves, 
with nothing but the blue sky above them, they were united, hereafter 
to sail the sea of life together. It was a romantic wedding and nice 
in many ways, but I would prefer mine somewhere else. This was, 
however, not from choice, but from necessity. While they were out 
the rest of us decorated the house and spread the table for the mar- 
riage feast. At 11:00 o’clock they returned. You ought to have seen — 
the landing. The surf was quite high and the landing a little diffi- 


“THE BELOVED.” 43 


cult. The sooner one gets out of the boat after it touches bottom the 
better it is. The natives know this and there are always plenty of 
them around to help. When the boat returned containing the bridal 
party, and as soon as it had touched shore, a big black fellow ran out 
into the water, grabbed the bride and unceremoniously carried her to 
the dry sand. So all the rest of the party. Following this was the 
dinner, the presents and a general good time. You might think there 
would not be many presents; but I never saw so many at a wedding 
before. They received all kinds of goods. The bride was a New 
York City lady, and her friends sent her many valuable gifts. All 
Kinds of china and silverware, bric-a-brac and dry goods. The best 
gift was a very fine organ. They are certainly well fixed for this part 
of the world. May God bless their united lives. 

There are many discouraging things about the work here, but 
more that are encouraging. The relation of the mission to the govern- 
ment is not what might be desired. The southern part is in French 
territory, the northern in German. I will be in the German. Both 
governments forbid the teaching of the English language, allowing 
only the native, or French and German, respectively. 

We are satisfied if they allow us the native tongue, for this is 
what we want. But there is some talk to restricting it to the lang- 
uage of the government. This would almost stop our work. 

We expect a steamer in a few days and I may not get to write 
more than this sheet now, but I will write again before leaving for 
the inland. I never felt better in my life, The sea bathing every 
evening, an occasional trip into the forest, a ride up the Lobe river, 
and a trial now and then of my Winchester, each and all go to make up 
some of the pleasures of my recreations. Mr. Kerr shot a deer the 
other day. There is a great deal of game here, but it is hard to find, 
owing to the density of the forest. I trust this will find you all well. 
Please give my love to all and remember me in your prayers. I go 
to a hard field, but I go cheerfully. With a heart full of love to you 
all, good-bye. 


JOURNEYING INLAND. 


Efulen, January 8, 1896. 
Editor Imprint:—Perhaps the friends will be interested in hearing 
about our journey from the beach to Efulen, as it was somewhat differ- 
ent from our usual way of travelling in America. 


There were five white people: Rev. and Mrs. Johnston, Rev. 
Fraser, Mr. Kerr and myself, 110 carriers, four hammock men for 
Mrs. Johnston, and 10 Bulu boys. This caravan of 124 souls left 
Batanga as the old year was drawing to its close. Seventy men started 
Monday P. M., December 30th. We white people with the rest, started 
December 31st. After thirty minutes walk we came to a river over 
which we were ferried in a canoe. Immediately we started into 
the bush, but now and then we passed a town, till about 3 P. M. when 
we passed the last town of the Mebayes, one of the coast tribes. For 
two days we did not see a habitation of any kind; nothing but a great 
jungle with swamps and streams. The path at times followed the 
beds of streams. It was scarcely wide enough for a man to pass 
through. On either side, and often above, the leaves and branches 
would brush one on the sides and head. The first day we camped at 
4:00 o’clock by a beautiful little brook. We set our tents and pre- 
pared for the night. It was New Year’s eve; cold at home, but there 
we were, out in the forest, sleeping under a big canvas open at all 
sides. My bed was composed of four forked stakes 18 inches long, 
on which were placed two poles. Between the poles was stretched a 
piece of canvas. But I slept soundly most of the night; sometimes 
I was wakened by the noise of some animal or bird, but I felt no 
fears. Around our tent the boys and a few of the men were stretched 
on the ground, with their camp fires smouldering in the darkness. 
At 6:30 New Year’s day we were on the march. It was a fine morn- 
ing and we made a good run, but about noon it began to rain, and we 
went into camp at 1:00 o’clock. We were in a forest now for sure. 
The trees were very large and high. I think they would average at 
least 100 feet and some were 200 and over. One peculiar thing is the 
way the roots spread out above the ground. On some trees the 
trunk does not touch the ground, but stands quite high. 


After the rain, one of the young men went out hunting. After 
an hour he returned with a large bird, two squirrels and a large 
deer. We had venison for our New Year’s dinner and we enjoyed it. 

The third day was much like the second, only it rained harder. 
We were drenched. At 3:00 o’clock we reached the first New Bulu 


The African drum. 


“THE BELOVED.” 45 


town, 28 miles from Efulen. The head man gave us the use of his 
house, which was in process of construction. There was nothing up 
but a skeleton of poles, over which we threw our tents and tried to 
enjoy it. 

We were now over the swampy part. The way was more hilly and 
more beautiful. This town was by a large creek of clear, beautiful 
water, flowing over a rocky bottom. Along toward morning another 
rain set in. Our tents leaked and we were a sorry looking lot the 
next morning. My clothes were dripping, but I wrung them out and 
put them on. It was not cold. The day was fine and we made a good 
march. By noon we had begun to climb steep hills, and to pass 
large towns. The farther we went, the thicker the people grew. We 
had planned to go through in four days, but the rain kept us 
back, and we lost all hope of getting through. But the men who 
carried the hammock did so well in the forenoon that we decided to 
try for Efulen that night. A fifth man was put on and away we went. 
It was hard work to keep up to them. But the desire to get to our 
destination urged us on. Town after town was passed, till at last, 
when three miles away, Efulen hill was sighted. They have a tele- 
phone system here, but use large wooden drums instead of wire, 
and strike the drum with a stick. Mr. Kerr called up Efulen for four 
fresh men to meet us, and the men met us at least two miles out. By 
this time there seemed to be nothing but towns and people on all 
sides. Hundreds came out to see the “new woman,” but we were in a 
hurry, for it was getting late. It was sundown when we crossed the 
little river at the foot of Efulen hill. From the river to the station 
it is a quarter of a mile, and a rise of 250 feet. We had traveled 28 
miles that day, but this last steep hill seemed as nothing; we were so 
glad to reach our destination in safety. Just at dark the house was 
reached. As Mrs. Johnston and Mrs. Dr. Johnson clasped each other 
in their arms, tears of joy filled my eyes. 

Seven happy souls gathered around the supper table that night. 
As we laid our weary bodies to rest, my thoughts ran back over the 
past three months. October 12th I left home; January 3rd, I reached 
Efulen; 10,000 miles lay between, but in all that long journey not one 
accident or loss had befallen me. God had brought me safely through 
it all. Ob, how my soul was filled with gratitude! Surely God is good 
to me! ; 

The next morning we were all up and well, except that our feet 
were sore. It was a beautiful morning. Nature seemed to smile upon 
us. And yet no ill effects have resulted from cur hard journey. We 
will remain here two weeks for rest and preparation, then three of us 
will push on to our new home, six days’ journey on into the interior. 

Sincerely yours, C. W. McCleary. 


DESCRIPTION OF COUNTRY. 


January 21, 1896. 


Editor Imprint—I promised to write something about the country 
and people. As we are delayed on our journey I will do it now. 


The whole country is covered with a dense growth of trees, bushes 
and vines, weeds also, and ferns, and some flowers grow to a great 
size. We have no forest at home with which to compare it. The 
ground is very damp all the time. Even in the dry season it does not 
dry, for the sun cannot reach it. Ferns grows up in the forks of the 
trees and on top of horizontal limbs. I have seen them as much as 
fifty feet from the ground. On the ground they reach the height of 
six feet or more. The underbrush is so thick that it is impossible to 
go through without a cutlass or ax. There are no roads. The natives 
have only winding paths. They have no wagons or vehicles, no 
horses, cattle or beasts of burden, so roads would be useless to them. 
For about fifty miles from the beach there is a low, swampy tract of 
land, covered with a dense growth, uninhabited except near the beach. 
After this jungle is passed we began to ascend, slowly at first, but 
later more abruptly. We got no good view, however, until we reached 
Efulen, then a grand view presented itself. The whole top of Efulen 
hill is cleared off, giving one a chance to see around. The hill is 250 
feet above a beautiful river, which winds its way through the forest 
on three sides of the hill. There is a wide valley all around. Out to 
the south is one of the finest landscapes I ever saw. We are in the 
mountains. The beautiful hills stand up before us on all sides. They 
are ever green, the leaves only falling as others come out to take their 
places. The new ones are often bright colored, giving the whole 
landscape much the same colors which you have in October, only here 
the bright green predominates. Here the climate is delightful. Dr. 
Johnson, whose home is in southern California, says this is a more 
even temperature than that. Since this place has been known, which 
is 4%4 years, the thermometer has not been above 88 or below 68. 
This hot season it has only reached 84. Still, there is something about 
the sun’s rays which we cannot stand. We dare not go out even for 
five minutes with our heads bare. We wear large pith or cork hats. 
In the shade, however, it is always pleasant. At night it goes down to 
about 70 most of the time. During the rainy season it pours, and that 
nearly every day. Even in the dry season we have some rain every 
few days. It is not a cold rain, however, one can get wet and not 
suffer, apparently. ‘ 


“THE BELOVED.” 47 


The soil down in the valleys is fertile; on the hills not so good. 
Many things in the line of food grow wild, such as bananas, plantains, 
sweet potatoes, limes, a fine large plum, and some others. They grow 
peanuts, cassava, beans, pineapples, corn (two crops a year), yams, 
squashes, etc. The missionaries have introduced some things, as 
Irish potatoes, radishes, lettuce, and other garden seeds. They have 
also a few flowers. Roses bloom all the year. It takes time to clear 
out, build and plant. A good beginning has been made at Efulen. 
They have three houses, a church, a school house, a hospital, mens’ 
home and boys’ home. This is a very poor description of the fair 
country in which we live. 


THE PEOPLE. 


All these valleys seem to be thickly populated. There are great 
numbers of them, perhaps a million speaking one language. In color 
they vary. They are not as black as the coast tribes. Some are a 
chocolate color. They live in towns, never separately. They clear a 
spot and build their huts of bamboo and bark in long rows having a 
wide street between. There is only one street in a town, usually. 
Sometimes more, but this one is very long and the houses stand real 
close. Each town has a head man who is a petty king. His word is 
jaw. The man who has the most wives is the greatest man. The 
Women are bought and sold like cattle. They are continually fighting 
among themselves and with different clans. Around here they are 
very friendly to the missionaries. The women do the work. The men 
talk and fight. They always carry guns and spears. They even take 
them to church on Sabbath day. They are great cowards. Each man 
is afraid of his neighbor. 


The climate demands no clothing, and the people generally have 
mone. Around the station they are beginning to wear a cloth which 
they wrap around them. The native dress is like that of our first 
parents in Eden. They like bright beads, buttons and shells, which 
they tie in their hair. The head is usually literally covered with these 
decorations. They wear brass rings around the ankle, and a coil of 
brass wire around the forearm and leg. Some are loaded down with 
these. The children wear bells. These things are the articles of trade 
that are in use among them. We use also salt, brass Kettles, and iron 
pots. These are traded for food, for workmen, schoolboys and carriers. 

These people live and that is all. They have no care for the future. 
They lay up nothing for old age. There are very few old people here. 
Somehow they are gotten out of the way when they cannot do any- 
thing. Can anything be done for such people? Yes. Everything can 
be done for them. The greater the need, the more can be done. That 
they are capable of being taught has been proved. There are fifty-six 


48 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


boys now in school. Many of these can read and write, and some 
‘very well. They sing the gospel songs as well or better than children 
at home. They are not afraid to sing out. Fifteen songs have been 
translated. Sixteen months ago not one of them knew the letters of 
the alphabet. The language is not hard. We use our characters and — 
have euphonic spelling. Some of the boys are very bright at school, 
and will equal boys at home. I like them. They are not like white 
boys. In the Sabbath school it is surprising how quickly they learn 
the Bible stories. There are thirty-five in the inquiry class. They _ 
want to become Christians. They pray, and have changed in so many 
ways, and all in so short a time. What a power for good these boys, 
educated as they will be, will be among their people! They are being 
taught how to live, also, by example and precept. 

On the whole, the work is very encouraging. They attend church 
well and pay good attention. The power for good is already noticeable 
in the towns around. They do not war so much. One girl who lived 
with Dr. Johnson refused to marry a man who had other wives. She 
wanted to live like the white people. Many of our boys say they will 
have but one wife. This is a wonderful step for good. Only one other 
girl can be found in all the towns around who is not married, and she 
is not over nine years of age. 

But things are very different here from what they will be up at 
the new station. We should have been off, but a war at the beach kept 
the carriers, with the exception of ten. So Mr. Kerr and I will start 
on the 23d with these ten, and ten or twelve Bulu and try and start the 
clearing and preparations for building. Rev. Fraser will come as 
soon as men can be found. We had expected fifty from the beach. We 
have no fear from the people. Fever is the enemy we must fight. So 
far I have escaped. My best wishes to all the friends at Crawfordsville. 


Efulen, January 21, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—The over-ruling hand of God has changed our 
plans somewhat. As I wrote, we expected to start yesterday, but the 
fifty carriers we expected from the beach did not come. We looked 
for them Friday. Saturday evening came and still no word. Sabbath 
day, Dame Rumor said there was a war at the beach south of us be- 
tween the Bulu and the Mebaye. One town was burned. So every 
man was afraid to start up here. The truth of this was established 
when a man came in Sabbath afternoon with a letter from Mr. Ford. 
He succeeded in starting seventeen of the fifty, and seven of these fled 
back. Ten came on, getting in Sabbath evening out of food. They 
had come a roundabout road. We were stumped. But we could only 
wait. These ten refused to go a step further. But on Monday we 
scared them into a promise that they would go. So Mr. Kerr and I, 


“THE BELOVED.” 49« 


with these ten, and ten or twelve Bulu will start on, leaving our things 
behind. Mr. Fraser will follow as soon as men can be had. It is bold, 
but the best thing under the circumstances, we think. We will take- 
only three weeks’ provisions, trusting that Mr. Fraser will be there by 
that time. We feel that we must go and start the work of building be- 
fore the wet season. I will take my mattress and several changes of 
underwear and two changes of clothes. It will be better, perhaps, after 
all to go through first with a small caravan. We had expected about- 
sixty or seventy in all. We will not create so much excitement. We 
are perfectly well and trust we will stay so. I may yet get mail again 
before April. Mr. Fraser will no doubt bring us word. I can also send: 
word back with the men at that time. 


ASKS FOR SEEDS. 


One thing I have always forgotten and that is about seeds. Will. 
you not send me a few seeds, both of flowers and garden seeds. We 
have beans, squashes, (the native squash is as good as any I ever 
had), radishes and lettuce; also “touch-me-nots.” Please send pink 
seed. We have pinks doing well only they never go to seed. Moss: 
does well, too. Please mark each kind. We want to try things and see- 
what they will do. Roses bloom all the time. bs 

Wednesday, Jan. 22.—The loads will be given out this evening~ 
for the advance guard. Mr. Kerr and I will go early tomorrow with 
about twenty men and four or five boys. My things are all packed. 
now, ready, except the waterproof bag which will take my clothes and” 
bedding. Every thing is left behind. We do not want to be burdened 
with anything nonessential. 

Well, I will start out on untried ground. This is the most diffi-- 
cult of all. But I have no fear, no more than a trip to Washington. 
The Dear Lord leads the way, and why should we fear. “If God be for- 
us who can be against us?” And if it is not His plan, man cannot 
change it. You need not worry, at least, for before you get this it will’ 
be all over. I am as well as ever and do not feel that I will have the~ 
fever. Of course, I do not know. This is the only thing to fear. I will 
write you all about it as soon as it comes along. But do, please, write= 
at least once a month. Give my regards to all, and tell the boys to- 
write me. 


Biton, Kamerun, January 26, 1896. 
My Dear Parents:—I am at the foot of a hill near by the spring~ 
where the people get water. A native is sitting by me watching the 
~ white man write. I cannot talk with him at all. We left Efulen on: 
Jaunary 23, and have had four very fine days. This day we are rest~ 


=50 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


‘ing. The path has been through the mountains. The first day we 
reached an elevation of 2,400 feet. The second, 2,500, and the morning 
of the third we reached the top, 2,600, then began to descend. Now we 
are 2,300, but still surrounded by hills and yalleys and fine scenery. 
“The path is different from the one to Efulen. 


January 28, 1896.—I was interrupted in my writing, but will now 
have time to write some more. We are now at Zingi, one day’s jour- 
ney from Biton. There is a great congregation of towns here at the 
foot of a large mountain. It is a beautiful spot. We reached here at 
2 o’clock yesterday. The path was very bad, the worst we have had. 
Fully one-half the way we were in mud and water. The path followed 
the beds of streams as they wound around the hills. Sometimes it was 
knee deep, so we were wet to the thighs all day, but it was not un- 
pleasant at all. Several times I stopped to wash the sand out of my 
socks. We saw some beautiful peaks on each side. The one just before 
‘us here is hid in the clouds. The people are very curious, thronging 
around the door so I can hardly see. We have to throw water on them 
-to drive them away. 

But I must tell you why we are here. Mr. Kerr is sick. He has 
“the mumps and fever, both. He dosed well with quinine all night and 
is not very bad.this morning, but not well enough for this wet road. 
We are about twenty miles from Ebolewo’e and had expected to get 
-there on Wednesday morning at 10 o'clock. God knows best. Thurs- 
day will find us there, I trust. 

I will tell you more of the first part of our trip. It ‘has not rained 
“since we left Efulen. The weather has been perfect, but the road very 
bad. The first day we made a good run, and when we stopped they 
treated us well. They gave us the use of three houses, and a goat to 
eat. (They have lots of sheep and goats). There are twenty-eight in 
-our caravan—twenty-one men, five boys and two white men. The men 
are very much afraid, so we have to get them in line, and we follow 
after to keep the people back. There are towns all the way, and people 
as thick as hops. We have been well treated, however. The first 
night I did not sleep much, for the bed was too hard. It was only 
poles with my rug and blanket over them. The second day we shot a 
large monkey, a bird as large as a chicken, and some small monkeys 
and squirrels. The boys feasted on them. The head man again gave 
us a kid. The house we are in has no windows, and the one door is 
about thirty inches square. Through this we have to crawl. The peo- 
ple assemble before it and darken it. 

We got into a swamp yesterday. The men with the loads had a 
hard time. I went in to my knees, and had only my rifle. We passed 
some very large and beautiful rocks by the way. One was as large as 
your barn. On the side of one we found a begonia in bloom. We took 
‘it with us. It was a fine little flower, and is the kind that is so highly 


“THE BELOVED.” 51 


prized at home. We saw a great number afterward, but we could not 
get them. There are more flowers up here, and not such a dense growth 
of trees. It is cleared off more. We still get all the pineapples, pea- 
nuts, bananas and plantains we can eat. They are just fine. The ba- 
nanas are far superior to those at home. There is one fine plum here. 
‘The tree is as large as our cottonwood. The fruit grows in large 
bunches on the side of the trunk and limbs. I saw a tree Saturday 
which must have had twenty bushels on it. The juice is as red as blood 
-and stains the mouth and hands. They are larger than any I ever saw, 
and as sour as swill. 


AN UNPLEASANT SURPRISE. 


Ebolewo’e, January 31, 1896. 


‘Home at last, and it seems like home, already. Praise God for His 
goodness. We were able to start next morning, and had a prosperous 
journey on Wednesday, getting to within five miles of home. Thurs- 
day morning we came in at 9 o'clock. But, much to our surprise, we 
found two small towns on our hill, and right on the top they were 
staking off ‘a very large one. We were stunned. There we were, and 
ithe hill we had purchased and partly paid for was occupied. Mr. Kerr 
was angry. The old chief was not at home. After a short rest Mr. 
Kerr ordered the carriers to take up the loads, and we started back 
after a few words with the hundreds of people who gathered around. 
‘The sons of the chief pleaded with us not to go, but to no use. We 
went about a half mile and stopped at a public house in the outskirts 
‘of the city. Here the old chief overtook us (just what we wanted. We 
only tried to scare him and it worked). He came puffing in, the sweat 
dripping from his greasy body. He is a very large man. He had on a 
red cap, a string of large beads and a cloth tied around his loins and 
reaching to the ground. He carried a small walking stick. As soon 
as he came in he saluted the whole company, then came up to us and 
saying something took us in his arms. He was stately, and yet at that 
time meek. Oh, but he was scared, for his son had run and told him of 
our feeling and that we ‘had threatened to go away. He made a short 
speech. Mr. Kerr replied, stating plainly what we would do, i. e.: 
They would either remove every house or we would not stay. He said, 
“Follow me.” We followed him back, and after pointing out the 
boundary trees he said, “All this building will stop. These towns will 
be removed. Only stay with us.” All right. The boys were sent for 
‘and soon they were back on the hill. We purchased two of the houses 
for our use. The rest will be taken away. We are getting along nicely 
with all the chiefs. This P. M. our old chief brought another to see 


52 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


us. He made a speech saying that he and Mr. Kerr were big friends, 
and then this other chief came to make a “big friend” for me. Of 
course, I said we would be “big friends.’”’ Old Mvondo, for that is his 
name, proved his friendship by giving us a big sheep this evening. We 
were glad to get it and the men had a big feast. They will start back 
tomorrow and I will send this with them. So we are happily settled. 


A word about the place. I thought Efulen hard to beat, but really 
this is a much finer place. The scenery is just as grand and the lay 
of the land is better. The valleys are wider, giving more tillable land. 
There is more farming done up here than farther down. It is older. 
Leading up to the top of our hill is a wide street or road, on either 
side of which is a grove of plantain and bananas. I think fully 400 
trees. There are pineapples, sweet potatoes, yams, and nearly all of 
it is cleared off. We can have gardens. They have good corn. Off to 
the south we look over the valley some ten miles, then the mountains 
arise beyond; to the west and not more than eighty rods away a long 
mountain fully 1,000 feet above us hides the evening sun. It will make 
a fine place for hunting. To the east it is much as to the south. The 
north we cannot yet see well. 

Everything is fine so far. I am ¥ery well and think I will remain 
so. We had no rain on our trip. Our feet were wet every day, but 
that, I think, will not affect us seriously. We get water from a fine 
spring at the foot of our hill. I have my mattress fixed up and will 
sleep better, I hope. 


FOOD SUPPLIES. 


February 8, 1896. 
My Dear Parents:—One week ago today I sent my last letter to 
you. A great deal has transpired since then on our hill. 


Evertything turned out better than we thought it would. The 
people are very nice. They bring more food than we cam buy. We 
had to stop them for four days. We get sweet potatoes for about ten 
cents per bushel. Chickens are from five to fifteen cents. Yesterday 
we bought a fine one for ten cents in trade. We have chicken nearly 
every day. It is better than canned meats. My friend, Nloze, brought 
me a fowl, some plantain and other food. One day they brought a fine 
young deer dressed ready for eating. We traded for it goods which 
cost us twenty-six cents. In New York it would have brought $3 or 
$4. It was fine. Our cook can stew or boil things in good shape. We 
have had no bread since leaving Efulen. All our cooking is done in 
little pots on a fire made of sticks on the ground. It takes very little 
wood, and any old log or sticks will do. Sometimes he cooks things 


“THE BELOVED.” 53 


wrapped in plantain leaves. The people do this almost altogether. 
They have about one pot or kettle to a town. We have good rice or 
oatmeal in the morning with two boiled eggs and crackers. For milk 
we have the condensed. It is nearly as good as at home. It is handy, 
for it will not spoil when opened. We have good canned fruit and 
jams, also peas, beans, (Boston baked). So we do not miss bread 
much. There are five bunches of bananas hanging in our house. We 
buy them for about eight or ten cents per bunch (about 100). The food 
for the men is as follows: Kank, a food made from cassava, the same 
as tapioca. It is ccoked and rolled in leaves about thirteen inches 
long and one and one-half inches thick. It will keep four days. These 
cost one-haif cent each. Then they get some plantains. These you 
could not tell from bananas until you are used to them. I can usually 
tell now. Five of these equal one kank. Then yams, or makobas as 
they call them (neariy like our potato). It costs about two cenis a 
day to feed the workmen and they get $4 a month in trade. Cheap 
help? But they are slow and do not know how to do things properly. 
It takes lots of patience to endure them. There are fifteen in all now 
who came with us from Efulen, counting the cook and five boys. Mr. 
Kerr has a boy and I have one. Three are with us to learn carpeniter- 
ing. One of the men is a Batanga man. He is a carpenter. He speaks 
very poor English. My boy also (a Mebaye) knows a little English. I 
have not done much with the language yet, for a good house is of more 
importance now. 


HOUSE BUILDING. 


Now about the week’s work and improvements. irst, one of the 
towns has been removed. We set the men at clearing the top of the 
hill. They worked at that two days. Then they leveled a spot for a 
temporary house. On Tuesday evening Mr. Kerr bought the palaver 
house which stood at the foot of our hill for $3.85. It was 19x23 feet 
with eaves not over four feet and ridge pole eight. We bought it think- 
ing we could move it and then get a home quickly and have a dry 
house. Well, Wednesday morning the men set stakes six feet high 
and two forks ten feet at the ends, and when that was done we all went 
down, cut the bushrope and lifted the whole roof and carried it up and 
set it on our poles. Then the sides. We cut two doors and four win- 
dows, and by Thursday night we were moved in. How is that for 
building? We have a large room 18x22, six feet eave and ten feet ridge 
pole. lt is all dry material, but the ground is freshly cleared and 
worked, so we have a fire on the floor ground at one end where 
the cook will do his work for a few days. The roof is of bamboo mats. 
The sides, doors and windows are of bark. We build our beds in one 
end. Our table is made of four sticks stuck in the ground, two poles 
across and a broken soap box for atop. It is four feet long and twenty 


54 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


inches wide. We have a bath towel for a cover. This will be enlarged 
when Mr. Fraser gets here. We are comfortable and will have plenty 
to eat and wear. My dress is an undershirt, drawers and socks, a pair 
of tennis shoes and blue denim overalls with a belt. Very simple! We: 
make good cocoa and coffee and so haye warm drinks. 


BULU PEOPLE AROUND THE NEW 
STATION. 


From the reports we had heard, I expected to find a wild lot of 
people at Ebolewo’e, but I must say I was happily surprised. They are 
indeed wild looking. They go almost naked. They paint the whole 
body with red powder, and fill their hair with buttons, beads, shells: 
and feathers. The men all carry weapons, either guns, knives or 
spears. It makes one a little timid to see fifty or a hundred of those 
fierce looking men running around prying into everything one has. No 
doubt, too, their hearts are desperately wicked. They are continually 
at war among themselves. Often we hear of some one being shot. 
Their fathers have done these things and they know no better. They 
know not God and have no fear of Him. 5 


But in their actions towards us all this has been ‘hidden, except 
their greed for goods. From the first they have tried to please us. 
They almost worship us and we have had no trouble at all. Buying 
food is hard on the patience, but it is wonderful how quickly they fall 
into line. They bring more food than we are able to buy. We have to 
tell them that we will buy every fourth or fifth day. This for the 
women. 

But the men are equally eager for work. They bring more build- 
ing material than we want at present. The great object of these peo- 
ple has been hitherto to get beads, buttons and bells, but already forty 
cloths have been sold. This speaks well for the first two weeks. Great 
changes have taken place since Mr. Kerr was up here last July. They 
were more wild then. He wrote of a society of young men organized 
for plunder and robbing. They wore bells, and shells, and hats of 
feathers fully three feet high, and daubed their naked bodies with 
white mud. Two of them came around the second day we were here, 
thinking to scare us. If met with in the forest I should think of run- 
ning, but Mr. Kerr led the way out towards them and began to make 
fun of them. They were the ones who soon got frightened. They 
went behind the house and took off their scare crow arrangements. 
Since then some of these very boys have worked and earned cloths. 

Myondo is the great chief of Ebolowo’e. Last July Mr. Kerr took 


“THE BELOVED.” 5b. 


one of his sons back to Efulen to school. They all said the boy would 
be killed, but when we came bringing him back after six months, 
they said, “We see now with our own eyes that the white man does 
not lie; we will believe him.” This boy is a great help, for he tells 
his people what he saw at Hfulen and about the ways of the white 
men. Mvyondo is Mr. Kerr’s “big friend.” Nloze, a lesser chief near- 
by, is my big friend. They have brought us a sheep, some fowls and 
other food. They are great beggars, but we keep standing them off, 
giving only enough to keep them in a good humor. (Pardon me, I 
keep saying we. Mr. Kerr does it all. I do not know the language). 

But let me tell you what makes Mvondo such a mighty man. He 
has had eighty wives. The man with the most wives is the greatest 
man, for they do his work. They are no better than slaves; they are 
bought and sold like cattle, and are beaten if they do not please their 
owners. 

These people are very superstitious. There is a high hill just 
west of us, which they will not ascend because spirits are up there. 
They wear a tiger tooth tied around the neck to protect them from: 
being shot; or they fill the horn of a goat or deer with medicine for 
the same purpose. They think the rainbow is a huge snake and shoot 
at it to drive it away. They make medicine for their guns, so as to 
shoot better. The young men of the society spoken of think white 
mud protects them. These are only a few of the many superstitions. 
These people build better houses than those around Hfulen. They are 
all low and have one little hole in the side for doors and windows, 
but they are well put up. Mvondo’s old palaver house is 30x60 feet,. 
the largest in the country. 

These people have a better physique than those nearer the coast.. 
They are powerfully built, and very straight and square. They have 
not a very thick lip. Some have sharp features, and a few are really 
pleasant looking. One can learn to like them, I know. 


For occupation the women make gardens and prepare food for 
the men. The men talk, eat, sleep and fight. They raise a good deal 
of corn, and great quantities of plantains, bananas, cassava, yams 
and peanuts. They have sheep (with hair on), goats, dogs and fowls. 
The great aim in life is to get goods and buy wives. That is what 
causes so much trouble. A woman is stolen—then there is war. 
Every day nearly, they have some woman palaver. Nearly every girl 
is sold before she is five years old. ; 

They are a hard lot, but they have some redeeming features. 
That they can be taught to do better has been proven at Efulen. They 
have souls, and hearts, too. They respect the missionary; by patient: 
effort the day will come, we trust, when fighting and wars will 
be at an end, and the peace of Jesus Christ shall reign throughout 
this fair land. 


06 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


Remember us in your prayers that we may hold up the banner 
~of the cross with unwavering hands in this dark land. 


HOME DESCRIBED. 


February 8, 1896. 


Dear Friends:—When I started on this letter we had heard that 
Mr. Fraser was on the way. But he is not here yet and we know 
nothing of him. 


We have had a little trouble with the workmen. They threatened 
‘to leave us, thinking they would scare us. Mr. Kerr told them if he 
heard another word they would all be sent home. So they shut up 
and went to work. We have moved our first house up for a kitchen, 
so we are rid of the smoke in our house. The kitchen is eight feet 
‘from the other house. Between the two we have a shed under which 
we do our trading. We are right on top of the hill. The ground 
sslopes in every direction. We will have a fine front slope and a grand 
view. Our house is about full now, and when Mr. Fraser comes it 
will be overflowing. We have 300 kank, eight bunches of bananas, 
six bunches of plantain, four bushels of sweet potatoes and yams, 
also three chickens. We have no coop or yard, so we tie one leg and 
let them run with the string. One morning one young rooster waked 
us by crowing. Then we have the kitten, Tom, which we brought 
with us all the way from Kamerun. Tom has traveled much by land 
and sea. He is very playful and makes much company for us. We 
have made some stools for chairs. They are better than boxes. You 
have read of primeval times. Well, we are living in the midst of them. 


It has rained three times since we came up. We are so high that 
the clouds drag the ground. Often our mountain is hid from yiew, or 
~part of it, at least. 

There are lots of large rocks on the top of our hill and all over 
it, in fact. On the west there are three springs. One of them is at 
“the head of a deep ravine about 100 feet below us. The water comes 
out among some large rocks. We can stoop down and dip it out from 
under a large one. All around the rocks lie piled in every shape. 
‘The big trees cover the whole thing so that the sun can hardly reach 
the bottom. It is a beautiful spot. Just beyond, the mountain rises. 
‘The people say there are spirits up there and they are afraid to go 
‘up. We hear monkeys and see large birds; we are going up for a 
hunt some day. Yesterday Mr. Kerr shot a large bird. Its bill is at 
‘least four inches thick. It is as large as a chicken. They are thick. 
‘Every day we see drove after drove of parrots. We have not seen 
cany lions, tigers, big snakes, or elephants yet. One day a man was 


“THE BELOVED.” 57 


killed by an elephant not far away. It caught him in the path and 
ran its tusk through him. 

These people are very much afraid of us. If they dared they 
would attempt to rob us. We show them our guns. They are afraid 
of them. We have two repeating rifles (15 shot), ome seven barrel re- 
volver and a double barrel breech loading shot gun. They hayve-old 
flint locks. 


SHORTAGE OF SUPPLIES. 


February 16, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—I hope you will not get tired of the patch 
work letter. But I always want to give you the latest possible. We 
have passed an anxious week. We heard on the 7th that Mr. Fraser 
was near. Hvery day we put up the little German flag and looked 
for him, but he did not come until the 15th and had only twenty-seven 
men instead of fifty as we wanted, so we are short of provisions. By 
some mistake no fruit or meat was brought. We are expected to stay 
here until the middle of April, two months, and have seven tins of 
"meat, six tins of fruit, two pounds of butter and five tins of vegeta- 
bles. We have plenty of oatmeal, rice, flour and milk. If we can 
trade for fowls and fruit we are all right, but if the people knew our 
condition, they would make us pay any price. The dear Lord will 
see us through, so we have no fears. 

Worst of all Mr. Fraser is in a bad way. He has been sick for 
several days, but had to tramp on. He has the fever now. We are 
doing all we can, and think he is not dangerous. We are both so well. 
But the best part about his arrival was the mail. He stayed long 
enough to catch another steamer, so I have word from home, the first 
Since the last of October, three and one-half months. I was getting 
anxious. It was written December 7th and reached me February 15th, 
being seventy days on the way. 


A BIG TREE. 


We have all the posts and sills for our house. Also about one- 
thalf the bark dried and ready. Now that the saw is here we will be- 
gin on the plank. You have heard of a pit saw? Well, that is the 
way we get boards. The log is rolled up on cross logs or else a pit 
is dug beneath. One man stands above and one below and they saw, 
saw away. We have some fine logs already cut. There was a tree 
felled by a native just outside our line. I thought it was so pretty I 
measured it. He cut it off twenty feet above ground. They always 
cut trees high. It was ninety feet from tke ground to the first limb, 


58 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


and it was as straight as a broom handle for seventy feet. At the butt 
it measured eight and one-half feet in circumference and seventy feet 
up it was seven and one-fourth feet. It was 140 feet long in all. This 
is a very small tree for this country. I have seen them 200 feet and 
as much as ten and twelve feet in diameter. 

We have our temporary house well fixed up and our kitchen near 
by. Mr. Fraser brought an experienced cook with him. He is a 
Batanga man who has cooked for nine years. He cooked at Gaboon 
for a French governor, so he will be stylish, I suppose. He knows 
how to make bread, but we have no oven. We will build one of stone. 
Won’t we put on the “dog,” as they say, colored cook and steward? 
He wears clothes and looks decent. These people here do not. They 
paint with red powder, and stick buttons and feathers in their hair. 
They cannot laugh in their sleeves. When they laugh they laugh all 
over, and you see it all, unless they stand behind a tree or stump. 

You said in your letter you put some of my home letters in the 
Imprint. Well, I pity the public, but if they can stand it I can. All 
right, Brother Wolf. We have no wolves out here, I think, but we 
have monkeys—four legged ones, I mean. Also deer. One of the boys 
shot a large one yesterday. Now this is the last for two months, so 
you better stretch it. If you know how much good it does me you 
would write more frequently, I think. 


March 11, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—When I wrote last Brother Fraser was very 
sick, much more so than I wrote. He was near the turning point be- 
yond which there is no return. We were helpless, but the dear Lord 
came to our aid. Mr. Fraser is now well and eating like a famished 
beast. He had no food for so long that he was poor. Now he is get- 
ting fat. 

Now the thoughts of this letter may be very scattered, but they 
will tell you something of our life here. There are some amusing 
things every day. Some are very interesting, but the most are com-- 
monplace. 

Our stock of goods is still limited. We have had but fifty loads. 
and most of these were cargo. Our personal things are left behind. 
I long for my guitar and typewriter. And I would like a chair to sit 
on for about ten minutes. But I will have to wait until July. Our 
provisions are like the widow’s oil. We have as much or more than 
we had when Mr. Fraser came. We have not opened a tin except 
milk. We have fresh meat and fresh vegetables and fruit every day. 
I wish you might have a taste of some of the venison we get about 
once a week, both wild and tame. The mutton here is much like deer 
meat. 


“THH BELOVED.” 59 


NEW COOK DESCRIBED. 


Our new cook (colored), is only so-so. He does some things well, 
but in others he fails. At last we have bread. We built an oven and 
he bakes three times a week. We have also the luxury of a colored 
steward. He has the faculty of always being away when he is wanted. 
He is a genuine darkey boy of fifteen years. He is as clumsy as a 
hog on ice. His heels turn up behind and he walks with one foot 
turned out at an angle of 45 degrees. But he is very willing and is 
learning rapidly. His work is to carry water from the spring, set the 
table, “pass chop,’ and wash the dishes. 


My personal boy, Ngili, has gone home. I was sorry to see him 
go, for I liked him. He was a bright little fellow. It is better for 
me, however, for I will now get a Bulu who can help me with the 
language. 

The people do everything by main strength and awkwardness. 
We had no logs on our hill fit for sawing, so we went over on 
then hired his young men to carry them up. They were 
eager for the goods, so about fifty of them went to work 
and by 3 o’clock had them up by the pit where they are now 
being sawed with a pit saw, as our ancestors used to do in early days. 
Some of the logs were very heavy, but the men are stout and they did 
not put more than twenty men on the largest. Other logs were 
brought from the other side, and now there are fifty in the log shed. 
These will be sawed for the fioor, doors, and windows. We will use 
bark walls, and poles for studding and rafters. 


SOME PESTS. 


I made a flower bed and some of the things came up nicely, but 
the mean old grasshoppers have eaten most of them. They have also 
taken our garden, all but the corn. We have corn four feet high. 
How is that for the middle of March? The hoppers are like those at 
home. But the worst thing we have to deal with is the driver ant. 
He is an enemy to be dreaded. You can have but little idea of the real 
thing from any description I can give. I had heard of the driver ants 
and always had a desire to see them. Now I am satisfled. They have 
made four visits. It gets tiresome and I hope they will soon postpone 
indefinitely their visits. They can bite like a bumble-bee. They dif- 
fer in size. The guards and soldiers are very large and have pinchers 
like a crab. These they stick in to hold on by, and sooner than let 
go they will let you pull the body from the head. This is one of the 
vexations of the inland missionary. 

Another annoyance is the way the natives come and gape at us 
through the doors, windows and indeed every crack they can find. 
We cannot keep them away. Now we would not object to a few at 


60 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


certain times, but when they come by the hundred and are around 
all the time, we cannot get time to write or read. We have fun out 
of it, though. Our windows are hung from above and open in. We 
fixed one up with a catch which we can touch off with a string which 
runs over to the table. When we get a half dozen faces, then we pull 
the string and flop goes the window. Some get scared and run. Some 
think it has a witch. We laugh in our sleeves. We have to laugh 
sometimes at their fears and astonishment. One old fellow ran away 
when I showed him my fountain pen. They have a fear of a “book.” 
Any piece of paper, written or unwritten, is called a book. They 
think it is medicine. One man came to swear one of his wives on our 
books. He was going away and wanted her to be true to him while 
gone. We laughed at him and he got mad. They are amazed at our 
tools. They have only knives, cutlasses, home made axes and hoes of 
a poor kind. When we use an augur, plane, or adze they are wild 
almost. 


A SHORT TRIP. 


Mr. Kerr and I took a trip five miles east one day. We passed 
some fine level land which looked very fertile. It would make good 
farming land if we only had a plow and a yoke of oxen. We saw, also, 
some fine scenery in the mountains. We found a blacksmith shop. 
It was a primitive affair, yet they had the idea and considering the 
tools they did well. One man was making an ax out of an old gun 
barrel. It took kim all day, but what of that? There is iron ore back 
in these mountains and if they had tools and training they might ac- 
complish a good deal. On this trip of five miles we passed through 
seventeen villages. You see how thick the people are. It is the same 
in all directions. 


One interesting thing about the journey was the meeting of one 
of our boys and a sister of his. Ezom is our best boy. He went with 
tus that day. He knew his sister was up there somewhere. She was 
sold when a mere child, and was taken away by her husband. She 
had never seen any of her people since. She did not know Ezom. 
When he told her she was completely overcome. He was overjoyed 
and rushed to his sister’s arms. It was a touching scene. She led 
him away from the crowd which had gathered around that she might 
inquire about her father’s house. She prepared food for Ezom and 
asked us if we would not have something. We had our lunch along 
and so could politely refuse. We could hardly eat the natives’ food 
as they prepare it, anyway. When we returned she came part way 
along the path, as the custom of the country is, to send us on our way. 


Another good this trip did, was to let the people know that we do 
mot belong to this one clan, of which Mvondo is the great head. He 


“THE BELOVED.” 6r 


is out with nearly all other clans around here. We passed through 
towns where he cannot go, neither can they come here. The people 
Were surprised to see us so friendly. They seem to think we are 
friends to Mvondo, and enemies to his enemies. So, little by little, 
we are gaining the confidence of the people. It will eventually bring 
the clans together. Now the clans are at war constantly. We can da 
little until this is rectified. Pray that it may soon come. 


THE DRIVER ANTS—A BATTLE ROYAL. 


March 12, 1896. 

One night in February we were aroused from our peaceful slum- 
bers to receive our nearest neighbors, who came to pay us a visit in 
our new home. We were strangers in a strange land and they wished 
to give us a reception. We first heard them at the chicken coop. We 
took our lights and went out. It was a dark night and they, being 
dark skinned, were hard to see. But, like the bumble bee, they were 
easily felt. They did not run but made for us, and as we retreated. 
they followed us into the house. You may think it queer that we 
should retreat before such an insignificant thing as an ant, but it is 
a fact. The Driver ant is the worst enemy we have. They came in an 
innumerable host. They went all over the house; into every crevice 
from roof to floor. The floor was black with them and we had to leave. 
Fighting them only made them worse. They are brave and will fight 
unto death. They are well organized and do their work systemati- 
cally. They have thehir soldiers who guard the path; they have 
scouts who hunt food, and they have workers and the home guard. 
When they reached our house, they were first up the walls and 
through the mats on the roof, chasing out every insect. If they catch 
the bug they kill him and let him fall to the floor, then when they have 
gone all over they come down and eat. When they finish they either 
go home or farther in search of food. When they start they all leave. 
You never see a straggler. They seemed to get a good fill that night 
for they returned about daylight. In the meantime we were running 
around in the dark hunting a place to stay. We were strangers and 
they took us in. 

But after all we were glad they had come, for they killed all the 
troublesome cockroaches. We could stand a sleepless night for the 
pleasure of getting rid of the bugs. But lo, and behold, the second 
night after, they came again. We were warned of their approach, 
and built a fire all along the front of the house, but they did not stop 
for the fire. Soon heavy rains set in, but they did not stop for the 
rain. Mr. Kerr was prepared for a siege this time. He had a mos- 


62 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


quito net which he hung over his bed, tucking the lower end under the 
bedding. We then lit all the lamps and candles so that we might see. 
He, and I, and the cat, crawled in at the hole at the side and pulled 
the hole in after us—we sewed it up. Mr. Fraser had gone to the 
logshed. 


We took our reserved seats—a box right close to the stage of ac- 
tion—and watched the performance. We were scarcely inside when 
they began to crawl over that net, and Oh! how we trembled, for we 
were not sure of the net. Thicker and thicker they grew. They knew 
there was fresh meat near and they tried every corner. A few got in, 
and when we killed them, it made the others mad and they came in 
greater numbers. There must have been a million around the bed. 
They tried for two hours to get in, and then gave it up, and went 
down to help eat the prey. When they once go down they never go 
up again, so we crowded out of our retreat and watched them on the 
floor. They did not get much this time so they went on farther, re- 
turning in the afternoon. They take everything which cannot flee. 
Sometimes they will kill and devour fowls. They would eat a person. 


MR. FRASER IN ACTION. 


It seems ludicrous now to think of our experience. There were 
some funny things. We put our socks outside our trousers to keep 
them from crawling up inside. We could not stand still a minute but 
had to keep stamping. Mr. Fraser got some inside his clothes and it 
was a whole circus to see him hop around. Their bite is like the fa- 
miliar touch of a hornet. It was raining outside and he had to 
hunt his umbrella. He had his hands full and could not open the 
door. If he stopped to pick one off a dozen others would get on so he 
just jumped up and down, and yelled, “gracious me!” “gracious 
Peter!” It was not a bit funny for him then, but he laughs over it now. 


The newness of the affair soon wore off. Twice more they came, 
and we had to retire each time. We vowed vengeance if the opportun- 
ity lent itself. Yea, we sought opportunity and we found it. One 
morning we noticed them moving their eggs, and knew they were 
moving their home. Following the trail we at last located them right 
near our house under a stump. We waited until they were all in—it 
took them thirty-six hours after we discovered them. Part of the way 
they tunneled, and when the way was above ground, it was guarded 
by the soldiers, they forming a complete covering over the path, which 
was wide enough for ten to go abreast. We tried to count how many 
passed in a minute, but could not. They moved at the rate of nine 
feet a minute, ten abreast and as close as they could go. 


When they were all in we began our work. We dug a trench 
around the stump and filled it with dry wood. Then we dug down 


“THE BELOVED.” 63 


into the nest, stuffed in dry grass and wood, poured on a can of kero- 
sene and touched a match to it. By this time the ants were out as 
thick as they could crawl, but they withered before the angry flames. 
When this burned out we put on more and kept it up for eighteen 
hours, but still they got the slip on us. They tunneled out under and 
removed some of their eggs. We discovered them the next day and 
‘burned them out in their new retreat. We succeeded in getting most 
of the eggs, but the number of ants seemed undiminished. Most of 
the soldiers were burned, however, and they now wander around 
without regard to order. They make no more raids but still they are 
around and every once in a while we get one up our trousers leg. We 
were strangers and we took them in. What the result will be is hard 
to tell. They are hard to deal with—harder than the Turks. 


So we have had a house warming and we have returned the com- 
pliment. This is one of our pests. The grasshopper is another. They 
are quite numerous this year. Another is the bush rat, like ours only 
larger; one we measured was thirty inches, tail and all. Then there 
is the pesky little chigger, something like a flea, which gets into the 
feet. If left alone they make great sores. The natives are seriously 
troubled by them. We have to get out a search warrant every two 
days, and double up and hunt. 


GLORIES IN HIS WORK. 


Now I have told you of a few of the things which might go to make 
life a burden; but all the hardships really amount to nothing, we have 
sO many pleasant things. True, we have to do without many home 
comforts but is it any worse to undergo hardships for the cause of 
Christ, than in serving one’s country or self? Look how our fore- 
fathers suffered in order to establish homes for themselves! Look 
how our fathers and brothers fought and suffered to save the Union 
and free the slaves. Shall we not endure some few crosses in trying 
to free men’s souls? Why is it that the adventures of Richard H. 
Davis in tropical America are lauded and given place in our best 
magazines? Or that Mr. Whitney should receive such praise for his 
daring, hazardous journey into “Barren Grounds” near the Arctic 
Circle, while the missionary is only criticised and called a fool; 
“he’s throwing away his life, he is squandering the Lord’s money, 
ete?’ I have heard such remarks in Washington; but they have no 
weight with true Christians. 

Oh, there is so much one can do here! These people have no light. 
‘They are in the blackest of darkness—as low as human beings can 
get. They fight and war continually, and have no written language. 
no schools, no church, no God. They have all nature can give and yet 
iknow not how to apply anything; for example, in moving a log in- 


64 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


stead of using a lever, they know only enough to pick it up by main 
strength. No roads, no beasts of burden, no tools save those to fight 
with, no vehicle or machine. If they only had the Light in their souls 
and minds all other things would follow as they ever have in past ages 
to people equally as degraded. Shall we who have all these things 
deny them to our unfortunate brother? 


We are all in excellent health and are enjoying the work. I do 
not expect to see another white face for a year or possibly two. It 
has been four weeks since we received mail and it will not come again 
until the middle of April. But we enjoy it all the more when it comes. 
You do not appreciate the mail service at home. I would not go back 
and leave my work here for the half of Washington county. There is 
a joy and blessing attached which the world can neither give nor 
take away. 


I trust this will reach you by the 4th of July, so I close wishing 
you all a happy Fourth. 


March 17, 1896. 


Dear Parents:—Ezom is a Bulu boy from Efulen who is a Chris- 
tian and can stand up in public and pray. Three years ago he was @ 
raw heathen. So we see fruit already of the work at that station. He 
is very neat and cleanly. He not only does our cooking, but he car- 
ries water from the spring, washes, waits on the table and cares for 
the house. It is too much for him, but our house boy had to be turned 
off. We caught him stealing, and set him to work outside. After 
awhile we will get- another boy. Our cook’s name is Davis James 
Bitombi. I like him and hope we can keep him. You may be sur- 
prised when I tell you he gets but $7 per month, and glad to get work 
at that. Labor is cheap, but most of it is dear after all. The great 
cost up here is transportation. Every pound brought up costs about 
twelve cents. For example, fish (dried), that costs five cents per pound 
at the beach, costs seventeen cents here. A can of peaches which 
costs twelve to fifteen cents at home, costs thirty-four cents here. If 
anyone of you should write me a letter weighing a pound it would 
cost twelve cents to have it carried from the coast up. 

We had parrot soup yesterday. It was excellent. We see droves 
fly over many times a day, some times as many as fifty at once. I shat 
two with my rifle. A shot gun will not bring them for they are too 
tough skinned. They are very strongly built, and as large as a half 
grown chicken. From our front door I shot a bird measuring four 
feet from tip to tip. My rifle is a beauty. 


“THE BELOVED.” 65° 


EULOGIZES MR. KERR. 


Now, I have said that Mr. Kerr is a carpenter. So he is by trade,. 
but he is far more. He is the mainspring of the station. He can 
speak good Bulu, being on the field over three years. He does all the 
preaching. He talks all the palavers with the people. He has charge 
of the workmen. He is a true pioneer missionary, able to build and 
evangelize. He is teaching a number of boys the carpentering. He 
did not have his strong constitution weakened by a long course of 
study, and can stand a great deal. He has push and energy—some-- 
times too much for his own good in this climate. Next Monday he 
will start back to Efulen, to try to get our cargo up. He will take a 
number of men from here, and, if everything works out as planned, 
will have a caravan of at least 100. It will be a hard trip, for the 
rains have set in and the road will be very bad. 


We have secured two ant eaters. You will remember the pic- 
ture. They are covered with large scales. They have long tails and- 
long tongues. I have the skin of one. It measures three feet from 
nose to tip of tail and has a tongue thirteen inches long. He ought 
to be a good talker. I am geting quite a collection of skins. I have 
two deer skins. One of the red and ome of the antelope. Our sheep 
skins are very nice for rugs, having fine hair on. You should see the 
African fiying squirrel. It is fully a foot across and eighteen inches 
long. The skin is very soft and fine. You would not like to see one 
of our blacksnakes, perhaps. The boys shot a young one the other 
day. It measured seven feet, six inches. What would a full grown one 
be like? The boys ate it. They eat everything which has meat on,,. 
even caterpillars. 


Mr. Kerr and I went hunting on the mountain last week. It was 
an interesting trip. We each had a guide and separated, intending to 
meet on the top, but we did not meet. I returned home at 12 and he 
came at 5 p. m. He feund a drove of monkeys and followed them: 
from hill to hill until he skot one. I did not shoot anything. The 
brush is too thick and we made too much noise. We saw large birds, 
but away off. We saw plenty of tracks and beaten paths of animals, 
also their holes under recks and stumps. But the best of all was the 
view from that high point. I found a precipice fully 200 feet straight. 
up. I could look down into the tops of high trees and then on to our 
hill. Our house looked very small. Then over all, that great valley 
stretching for miles and miles ending in the mountain peaks beyond.. 
I think it almost equaled anything I have ever seen. The boy with me 
talked with the boys at home, but it took us two hours to descend and 
cross the ravine. I found some beautiful spots. One large rock was 
covered with as fine begonias as I ever saw in any green house. I 
brought some home and set them out. I hope they will grow. 


66 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


You have heard of the giant trees of California. Well, I will not 
try to beat the record, but we felled a tree today not fifty feet from 
our house. We feared it would fall on us, for the root was decaying. 
‘There was a hole through the trunk large enough for we three to 
Dass together. The top was off. It was only a stump, yet when it was 
measured it was 120 feet long. There were scarcely any branches on 
it and it fell like so much lead. It crashed through every tree in its 
way and even tore great holes in the earth. This is only a small tree 
here. I told you this letter would be a ramble and so it is. 


When we wanted to bake bread we had no bread pans, so Mr. 
Kerr made some out of old tin cracker boxes. They, too, are primitive, 
put they serve the purpose. I think I told you that all our dishes are 
enameled ware. I dreamed last night I was home and purchased a 
whole wagon load of things which we do not have. Quite frequently 
I take a trip of this kind. 


MVONDO’S TRICK. 


A short time back Mvyondo’s boys began to clear on our ground. 
I was down and told them to stop. They did not. Mr. Kerr sent Ezom 
‘to the old fellow, telling him to stop immediately. It made him very 
mad. “To think of those three little white men ordering me, the great 
chief of Ebolewo’e, to stop work.” The next morning, Sabbath, he 
‘came with all his sons, with their guns, of course, and wanted us to 
come out and he would tell us a thing or two. Again Ezom was sent 
out to tell him he could not see the white men that day. That after- 
noon, it is said, he sent for all his clan to come and help settle the 
palaver. By Monday morning he had cooled off a little. He wanted 
them to settle the matter privately, for he knew he was in the wrong, 
for the boundary was plainly marked on the trees. Mr. Kerr said 
“no, he had talked about it in public, and now he must settle it in pub- 
lic. The public was called. He made-a speech. Then Mr. Kerr lit 
in on him and told him what he thought of his majesty. He then told 
*thim what we would do. If Mvondo wanted that particular piece of 
ground, then let him give as much on the other side and not try to 
steal it. He agreed and the result is we get as much more land, and 
we made him our friend again. So God makes the wrath of man to 
“praise Him. 

I enclose a small piece of cloth of native make. It is made of 
bark of a certain kind of wood. I am collecting quite a number of 
-curios which will be of some interest to you some day, I hope. 


“THE BELOVED.” 67 


NAMING OF STATION. 


March 22.—Mr. Kerr goes in the morning with about thirty men. 
We have a name for our station at last. Heretofore it has had the 
name of the town. Hlate, meaning “a covenant” between tribes and 
people, has been chosen. Mr. Fraser and I will be alone for three 
weeks and I fear we will want to hear from home by the time Mr. 
Kerr gets back. Five weeks ago yesterday I read your last letter of 
December 4th. All well. Love to all. 


March 18, 1896. 

Dear Brother Reed and Friends:—When I wrote last Mr. Fraser 
had just arrived and was sick, very sick. But Mr. Kerr did as well as 
a doctor could have done. He doped him with quinine and ipicac 
and some how the man got well. Mr. Fraser is now as strong as any 
of us. Ebolewo’e station presents a peculiar appearance at present. 
The development is slow, but it comes. Our house was first built right 
on the top of the hill. This is the center around which are clustered 
the various buildings. The kitchen joins on the south. The poultry 
house is only a few feet east. The work shed, where Mr. Kerr and the 
men will prepare the lumber for our permanent house, is to the north- 
east. In this shed, also, are piled the mats, bark and plank. On the 
north the workmen have their house and near them on the west is 
the log shed and saw pit where the planks are slowly and laboriously 
being turned out. The last thing built was what is called by the 
natives the “Sunday house,” because Sabbath services are held there. 
it is only a shed open on three sides with poles along the sides for 
seats. This is not our church, but it serves that purpose now. It 
is a public house. The school is held there now. And two good ser- 
vices have been conducted in it. A week ago last Sabbath was the 
first regular service we have had. It was interesting in many ways. 


DRESSED FOR CHURCH. 


There were about 100 people present. It was hard for me to keep 
from bursting out laughing when some of them came in. They were 
“fixed up.” Mr. Kerr had given Mvondo a suit of clothes. He did not 
wear them, but let one of his boys have the coat and trousers. They 
were eight sizes too large. Funnier still was a little girl of eight 
years who had the vest on. You can imagine the fit. Other striking 
costumes were out that day, but the most pleasing of all was the fact 
that two women departed from the usual manner and wore cloths. 
We have seen but one other woman do this since our arrival. 

But notwithstanding all the laughable things there was a true 

‘spirit of worship. The people kept quiet throughout the service. 


68 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


Ezom, a Bulu boy from Efulen, led in prayer. Our boys sang with alt 
their might and I feel sure the worship from this hill rose to the Hil 
of God—Zion above. So this desert place is beginning to blossom 
and yield praise to God. ‘ 


April 7, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—It is with a light heart that I write the “more 
later,” for contrary to expectation we received mail yesterday, mail 
which was fifty-six days coming from the coast inland. Some letters: 
were nearly four months on the way. One boy came from Efulen. 
with it. It took him fourteen days, for he went a roundabout road, 
fearing to come the regular way. But it came and we were rejoiced. 
I received eleven letters, but no papers. Yes, I surely do want papers: 
sent. How can I live without the Imprint? 


A DARK PICTURE. 


There are so many things to write about and I do not know what 
I have written already. I can never paint the scene as it really is. 
Oh, the misery and crime which surround us! Such ignorance! Such 
superstitions! A little over a week ago we were awakened by the 
firing of guns. When we arose we were told that a young man had 
died, and according to custom they were wasting a lot of powder. 
Afier breakfast I went down. It was a sad sight. They had just com- 
pleted the “post mortém” examination. The dead body had been 
dragged out of the miserable hut on two sticks. A man then cut the 
body open to hunt for the witch that had killed him. After much 
cruel cutting he declared he had found the witch, then the cut was 
sown up. There he lay in the sun, the flies swarming, no covering but 
some leaves, while his grave was being dug just behind the house. 
They were digging with a pointed stick and throwing out with their 
hands. The hole was three feet long, eighteen inches wide, by three 
feet deep. The body was rolied in like a dog, some bark put on top, 
and then the dirt filled in. Such was the burial of a Bulu man. While 
this was going on the men were shooting, beating drums, and dancing. 
The noise was made to drive away the spirit or witch, which they were 
afraid would return and hurt them. I returned with a bleeding heart- 
I could not help but think, “where is he now?” And where are all 
these thousands going to spend eternity? I do not believe their pun- 
isment will be as great as that of civilized people who refuse to obey 
the gospel call, but their reward is sure, else I would not be here try- 
ing to teach them a better way. “Nothing but the blood of Jesus” can 
redeem a scul. They know Him not. Neither do any of these people 
around here. Oh, friends, there is such an immediate, urgent need 


“THE BELOVED.” 69 


for the gospel! Pray for me that strength may be given me to learn 
the language and teach the dark skinned, dark souled race the way 
of life. 


OBJECTS OF CURIOSITY. 


Men, women and children gather around and peer in on all sides. 
Some come quite a long distance. One day three women came who 
had never seen a white man. They wanted us to come out and let 
them look at us. We went and stood patiently, while they gazed and 
‘stared with open mouth. I remember how I have stood in the zoolog- 
ical gardens and menageries and watched the animals. They seemed 
to be so disgusted at the many gazers who constantly surround their 
cages. I think I can now sympathize with them. I know I used to 
love to linger at the monkey cage and watch every move. Now I am 
the monkey, and a caged one, too. Some of these people come every 
day, and stay until they are sent away, and they just stand and gape 
at us. It is very hard on one’s patience. They make very funny re- 
marks sometimes. Everything is so strange to them. One day the 
crowd got into a big dispute. Mr. Kerr told me afterwards they were 
debating whether we had toes or not, some denying, others affirming. 
They sometimes ask if we are real men like they are. Some are 
afraid, and will run if we come near. Others are very familiar and 
get entirely too close for comfort. Sometimes we get a daub of red 
paint or grease from their bodies. If they do not have the paint they 
do have the grease. This grease is put on the hair, but so much is put 
on that it runs down over the body and they have to carry a little 
paddle to scrape it off and put it back on the hair. 

We raised a“flag pole today. It is forty-eight feet high and a very 
nice one. But the good old stars and stripes can seldom be found 
unfurled thereon. We are in German territory, so have to wave the 
flag of the country. On special days our flag will go up and some- 
time, perhaps, it will be put under the “Red, White and Black” of our 
adopted country. 

I have told you something about Tom, the family cat. Well, he 
grows like a bad boy. He is only five months old, but nearly full 
grown. 


HELP IN NICK OF TIME. 


April 138, 1896. 
Dear Brother Reed and Friends of Trinity Church:—In my last 
Jetter I told you that Mr. Kerr was going to Efulen. He left here the 
23rd of March and returned the 9th of April. He took twenty men 
from Ebolewo’e as carriers and secured sixty from the beach, return- 
ing with a caravan of eighty. We were just out of everything so his 


70 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


coming was timely. But best of all he brought Brother Ford with 
him. This was a great surprise to us and you cannot know how 
much good it has done us. He will be here about a week and will 
then return by a new route, going north to the government road, 
thence to the beach. 

You should see our house as it is now. It was nearly full when 
Mr. Fraser came. Now we have the eighty new loads and another 
man and food for sixty men for nearly a week. We have the dirt 
floor covered with saw dust and it looks better. But we are comforta- 
ble and that is enough. We have a home and that is more than our 
Master had. “It is enough for the disciple that he be as his Master.” 


We have had several unpleasant encounters with the old chief. 
The first was in regard to the boundary like between his town and 
ours. He cut the tree which marked one corner and then changed the 
line to suit his own tastes. We objected seriously and told him to keep 
off. His Bulu ire was stirred. He raged like a mad dog. His sons 
talked fight. It is reported that he sent to all the men near to come 
and help him. This was Saturday. We waited until Monday and then 
called a meetings of all the chiefs to settle the matter. Mvondo was 
somewhat cooled down, which made the affair easier. Mr. Kerr stated 
the facts and proved his statements by the marks on the trees. The 
men all saw it and agreed with us. Mvondo saw he was cornered 
and did not have much to say. Then Mr. Kerr said if he was so anx- 
ious to have that particular piece of ground, then let us have an equal 
amount on the other side. He agreed to this and so the land was 
measured off. After this was done he was very much pleased and 
renewed his friendship. He made a big speech to the chiefs telling 
them that the white man was all right. All went home happy. The 
result is that we have as much more land and the old chief is won back 
again. So the Lord causes the wrath of men to praise Him. 

Another experience with the same individual was one morning 
while we were buying food. He came up to superintend affairs. He 
was told to go, but he did not until he was shoved and that not very 
gently. It was rather humiliating for there was a big crowd looking 
on. He got very angry over it. 

Besides these special cases he is continually being crossed. He 
has had undisputed sway heretofore. He does not like the ways of 
the white man because he will not divide all his goods with their 
great chief. He considers himself the head man and as is the custom 
all the spoils must be divided with him. The white man does not 
agree with him on all these points. Nearly every day he asks for 
something. We humor him a great deal, but cannot go to the length 
he demands. We are looking for him to make a food law as they have 
done several times at Efulen. With all the rest we get along very well. 
If he was not such a big hog he, as well as we, would fare much better. 


“THE BELOVED.” 71 


A SOCIETY OF YOUNG MEN. 


I think I told you about the society of young men who are or- 
ganized for plunder. If they could rob anybody so much the better. 
They had the idea that when they had that mud on they could not 
be killed. They used to make medicine out in a little hut in the bush. 
Sometimes they would stay all night out there carrying on their 
heathenish practices. They had large hats made of feathers, and 
wore bells, shells, or anything that would rattle. When they came 
around with these things on we always made fun of them. After a time 
they grew tired of being laughed at, so decided to get out of it if 
they could. Mvondo was at the head of this as well as all other things.. 
He told them they could get out of it by paying him so much goods. 
They tried to get out the Sabbath before Mr. Kerr went to Efulen 
so that those who went with him could wear a cloth while at that 
station. But they did not bring enough goods for the old fellow and 
he told them they must wait. Nevertheless when at Efulen they did 
wear cloths, contrary to all precedent. They became thoroughly dis- 
gusted at the old chief’s tyranny and decided to get out at once. I 
think Mr. Kerr had much to do in turning them against it. They were 
ashamed of the whole affair. Last Sabbath night they all went to 
their hut in the bush and made medicine, staying all night beating 
drums and dancing. The next morning they went to the creek and 
washed the mud off for the last time. Then they went up to Mvondo’s: 
palaver house and put on cloths. After that they had a big dance and 
the thing was finished. Now they all wear cloths and it is a great re- 
lief. There were some small boys in it. One about twelve years of 
age I have taken as my personal boy. He is a son of my “big friend’ 
and is a very nice, clean boy. I hope I may be able to train him for 
our Master’s service. We are very much gratified by the way the 
young men act. They are all fine fellows and if it were not for the: 
old chap we would have only peace and good will continually. 


There is one old man here who has one foot in the grave. He 
tells a story that makes one tremble for his future. He has murdered 
twenty-two people in cold blood. Ten when his brother died and 
twelve when his son- died, that their spirits might accompany that of 
the one who died. This is very often done, especially when a big: 
man dies. 


MR. FORD’S VISIT. 


I am getting along slowly with the language. Can talk some 
with the boys. There is so much outside work to do that it is hard 
to get time to put on the language. We are all well. Brother Ford’s 
visit has been like medicine. It has put new life into us. I have not 
yet heard from any of you. Would be glad to get word from you. 


72 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


April 14, 1896. 


Dear Parents:—These seem to be days of surprises. You remem- 
‘ber I told you there was no American mail in the last mail inland. 
Well, yesterday Mr. Ford found some in one of his large account 
‘books. There were five letters for me and four for Mr. Fraser. I 
want papers sent. I have been looking for papers ever since I touched 
Africa and have been disappointed every mail. Send all you can get 
your hands on. We do not have any daily papers up here yet. We 
-are not ashamed to read last year’s papers. 


We are enjoying so much Mr. Ford’s visit. He is quite jolly and 
we have a good deal of fun. He will leave in a day or two, returning 
‘by a new route. He will go north to the government road, thence to 
‘the beach.’ He is hunting a better road than that by Efulen. We do 
hope he wi!l succeed, for the one from that station is very bad and 
“unsafe for a caravan without a white man along. Even when the 
white man is there he must be on his guard. Mr. Kerr had to protect 
one of his men with his rifle to keep him from being killed. These 
“poor black people have enemies all along the way. Even our big chief 
~cannot go far in any direction. He would be killed. This is the rea- 
son we have so much trouble in getting carriers. Every one is afraid 
-of his neighbor. 


April 16, 1896. 


Dear Parents:—Mr. Ford will leave tomorrow. He has been 
here one week, and it has been a very pleasant one for us. Mr. Fraser 
will accompany him until they reach the government station on the 
government road, three or four days’ journey from here. You need 
not look for word from me until July. We will try to get mail through, 
but have little hope of being able to do so. Possibly I will try to get 
down to Efulen to get more goods. Mr. Kerr does not want to make 
<so many trips for it is hard on one, neither do we want him to. 


Mvondo has passed the law that the women cannot bring a certain 
kind of food called “kank” until we raise the price. We have decided 
that they will wait a long time. They think we cannot get along with- 
-out it. 


Our workmen have gone on a strike. You see, the works of the 
devil are manifest out here, as well as in a civilized country. At first 
-all but five said they were going back to Efulen, thinking we would 
raise their wages. Mr. Kerr prevailed on three or four others to stay. 
“The rest will be fired tomorrow. They cannot stay now if they want 
to. So our trials come and go. But we have our joys and our fun 
-as well. 


“THE BELOVED.” 73 


A LEAP YEAR PROPOSAL. 


Yesterday we had a good laugh at Mr. Fraser’s expense. One of 
the young ladies standing high in society circles asked him to marry 
her. We all took it as a good joke and made a good deal of fun out 
of it at her expense, all the rest of us urging her on. She did not get 
much satisfaction out of it. When she got tired she started home, 
asking for some food. Mr. Kerr told her to ask her man. She turned 
to Mr. Fraser and he gave her some. This seemed to give her new 
hope, for she came back last night and pressed her case very strong- 
ly. She was very much in earnest and seemed to be in great agony 
if he did not smile sweetly upon her. The thing grew quite serious, for 
her at least. We three were just roaring with laughter. Finally she 
left very much disappointed. But they say this is leap year, so we 
need not be surprised. The poor girl could not see the ridiculous side 
of it and she did not know what we were laughing at. But Mr. Fraser 
is not alone; we all have our admirers. 


Mr. Ford has his camera along and has taken some pictures. I 
will send you some when they are finished. They will be finished in 
America and it will take some time. I hope they will be good for they 
are the first interior pictures. It is hard to get a good photograph 
of the natives for they are very much afraid. They say we are trying 
to kill them with medicine. 

I made some garden yesterday, planting beans, beets, radishes, 
squashes, tomatoes, and a number of flower seeds. We hope to have 
something real nice after awhile. 

Everything at the station is getting along all right. The school is 
still doing well. The church services are well attended. I counted 
six guns and a few clubs, besides knives and spears at church last 
Sabbath. It looks very primitive, but it is their usual way. They 
carry them everywhere they go. I am perfectly well as far as I know. 
ZI have no pains nor aches. Please give my regards to all the friends. 


April 25, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—In writing this letter now I am aware of the 
fact that it will not leave here for about a month, but when I have so ° 
Many to write it is necessary for me to begin early. 

At this writing everything is moving along smoothly. I spoke of 
the food law the old chief was trying to put on us. Well, it lasted but 
two days. The old fellow is now sitting at my side watching the ma- 
chine talk. He is in a good humor again. He is as changeable as the 
wind. The least thing in his tyrannical path will throw him off on 
the side track. A very small riffle will capsize his shallow bark, and 
then there is a great splattering, indeed. We are not much afraid of 


74 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


his talk, for we have all the other head men in the region on our 
side. His power is not so great as it was when we came up. Perhaps 
a little explanation of a Bulu town will help you to understand his. 
Situation and something of our surroundings. I think I told you 
a little. 


DESCRIPTION OF MVONDO’S TOWN. 


Ebolewo’e is one of the largest I have seen. A description of it 
will give you an idea of all. It is made up of a number of small towns 
built in a long row. “Jal” tis the name given to the small parts and 
“Nlam” is that which embraces the whole. There are nineteen 
“Jals” in this town. Mvondo has the largest, having perhaps fifty 
houses in which live his many wives and children. As long as he lives, 
all his sons will live with him whether married or not. When he dies, 
all who are married will go and start towns of their own. Thus the 
new towns are started. My “big friend,’ Nloze, has the next largest, 
having forty houses and about twenty wives. He has fourteen sons 
married and living with him. Some of the others have as many as 
twenty houses, but most of them are small. Sometimes they join 
closely; others are twenty rods apart. Mvondo is not only head man 
of his own town, but is chief of all this collection of towns. Nloze is 
next in power. The chief usually has great authority. But here he 
is too tyrannical, and the others do not do just as he says always. 
Nloze is as decent as any man can be. He comes up to see us often. 
He comes in and takes a stool. He looks around at the things for a 
while, then goes. He looks at what we show him and is satisfied. He 
asks for nothing. When we give him anything he is grateful. Mvondo 
is just the reverse. Every time he sees us he asks for something. 
Today he asked for a gun, a cloth, medicine for a poor fellow who 
has strained himself in lifting, and when he came in he asked us to 
show him all the goods we brought up by the last caravan. Small 
requests for a chief! And then he gets out of humor if they are not 
granted. He goes away and talks how mean we are. Nloze is our 

staunch friend and will not listen to his prattling. 


Our hill is in the center of the town. When it was bought it was 
at one side, but they have moved part of the town. Mvondo is north 
and joins us. One Jal is north of him. All the rest are south. So 
we are in the midst of life. Two, three, and four miles on all sides 
there are other towns, large and small. You will get a good idea of 
what a “Jal” looks like from one of the pictures I send you. It is 
Nloze’s town looking up to our hill, which can be seen in the distance. 
A long street with houses on each side. Just back of the houses are 
their plantain and banana trees, stretching their long broad leaves up 
to the sun. In the morning and evening there is no protection what- 


“THE BELOVED.” 75 


ever, for all the trees are cut out of the street, i. e., all the good shade 
trees. They do have a few shrubs or an oil palm tree sometimes. 


HOW BANANAS GROW. 


I believe I told you that plantains grew on a species of the palm 
tree. Well, that was a sad mistake. Plantains grow on plantain trees. 
Bananas grow on a species of the plantain. There are some things 
about the banana which might be of interest to you. There are four 
varieties here. Some which I never saw at home and which are far 
better than I ever ate there. I supposed that we could leaye them on 
the tree until they were ready for use, but it is not so. They are 
taken from the tree and hung up in the house for a few days or a week 
or two weeks. There is but one bunch on a tree and the tree is cut 
down to get the fruit. It is the same with the plantain. The tree 
grows very rapidly. The sprouts which start up around the roots are 
set out any time during the rainy season and in one year they are 
ready for use. They are ripening at all seasons, so we have them 
fresh all the year. The natives do not think much of the banana. The 
plantain, however, is important, for it serves the place of bread in this 
country. The tree grows about twelve or fifteen feet high, and is 
from six to ten inches in diameter at the base. It is very soft and 
watery, not as hard as a corn stalk. We have over 400 plantain and 
banana trees on our hill. They are very pretty. The leaves are from 
four to eight feet long and from one to two feet wide. They.are a 
bright green and as they wave gently in the mountain breeze, they 
make a beautiful appearance. We expect to have them all around 
our hill. The natives can live on plantain alone. They have other 
things, however, and fare better on a variety. It is very hard to get 
time to study. Every day we haye so many visitors. 


A PERILOUS JOURNEY. 


Batanga, May 15, 1896. 


My Dear Parents:—Man may plan, but God overrules. I wrote 
you a letter April 25th in which I stated that it would not leave the 
station for a month. But I carried it myself to the beach within ten 
days. When I went up, I fully expected to stay two years without 
seeing a white man except my two companions. I did not expect to 
get mail oftener than every three months. So we may plan. So we 
look for hardships. But all things have changed. I am now at the 
coast, sent on special business. I will state briefly the cause of it 
all and then tell of my rapid march of about 175 miles through the 
bush. 

You will remember that I told you that Mr. Fraser accompanied 
Mr. Ford on his return trip from Elate station, intending to go to Lo- 
Todorf, the government station, and then return from there. They 
took two guides, but they proved a hindrance rather than a help. The 
guides led them five days out of the way, taking them to Bipindi, a 
place on the government road only two days from the sea. Here they 
separated, Mr. Ford returning to the coast and Mr. Fraser going back 
to Lolodorf, being eight days reaching that station. He rested there 
over Sabbath and then with his four carriers started for Hlate by a 
new direct road. All went well until within five hours of Elate, he 
eame into a hostile tribe where he was robbed of three loads and his 
Winchester rifle, the chief taking the rifle and leveling it at him. 
With his revolver he succeeded in scaring the heathen away, but it 
was dangerous business. He passed on to the next town and here 
twenty-five or thirty savages came at him with guns, knives and 
spears, trying to get the remaining load. He drove them back with 
his revolver and succeeded in getting home that night, being only three 
days returning from Lolodorf when it took him eight days to reack 
it. So the matter stood. What should we do? We talked and planned. 
The officials must be told at once. Who must go? Mr. Fraser could 
net after his hard tramp and experience. Mr. Kerr was needed at the 
house building, so it was decided much against my will that I must 
go as rapidly as possible, first to Lolodorf and tell the officer of the 
robbery and attempted murder. Then they thought best for me to go 
en to Kribi and see tke District Commander, then to Batanga, and 
return with a caravan which had to go inland in May or June. This 
was on Thursday, April 30th. I began preparing for the journey at 
ance, and left Elate Monday, May 4th. I could not go through the hos- 


“THE BELOVED.” 17 


tile country. I did not want to follow Mr. Fraser on his roundabout 
road. I thought there must be a cross road somewhere if I could 
find it, and for this path I started to hunt. I had thirteen men with 
me, six of whom had loads. They gave me much trouble all the way. 
I wanted to go fast, and they all hung back. I wanted to cut across, 
and they wanted to go around. I had to be very harsh with them 
once. They came to a fine town at 1:40 p. m. and they said they 
would go no farther. I arose on my dignity, put the loads before my 
best men and ordered them to march on. They were a little afraid of 
me for I carried a Winchester in my hand and a large revolver in my 
belt. I guess I must have looked very cross. At last they all grabbed 
their loads and trotted off. I will give a little sketch of the route 
showing the relative positions of the different stations and the course 
I took, as well as that taken by Mr. Fraser. As near as I could 
judge from what I could hear, Lolodorf was two days west and one 
or two north from Elate. So I went northwest two days cn the same 
road that Mr. Fraser took. At a town called Melan where I stayed the 
second night, I heard of a road leadirg north to Lolodorf. So I hired 
aman to go part way and show it to us. He led us all right as far 
as the Bulu towns go but I could get no one who would show me 
across the long stretch of forest separating the Bulu from the Ngamba 
people. I got the general direction of the town I wanted to find, and, 
with compass in hand, started out at the head of my men to pick 
out the path. Many times we came to cross roads and forks, but God 
led us straight through without a mistake. It was a great relief to me 
to get into the Ngamba country for they are much more civilized than 
the Bulu. We found a Gaboon man who spoke good English. We 
found several coast people. The people were cleaner and better 
dressed. I was given a good house in which to sleep. The people 
had never heard the gospel, but had heard of it. They came and 
asked me to preach to them. I was weak in flesh but did the best I 
could. I spoke English to a Batanga man who was with me. He spoke 
in his language and a Mebaye translated that to Ngamba. They lis- 
tened very attentively and wanted more. So for the first time they 
heard about God and His love to fallen man. The next morning at 
9 o’clock I reached Lolodorf, being three days and a third on the trip. 
The distance is, I think, fully eighty miles. I stopped with a Rus- 
sian trader, for the officer at the station was sick. Was treated very 
nicely. I paid my visit to, and did my business with the officer, who 
promised to see that the goods would be returned and the offenders 
punished. I then spent the day looking around. Lolodorf is a beau- 
tiful place. From the station there is a grand view, I think equal to 
any I have ever seen. It is all mountain scenery. 


78 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


WICKEDNESS OF TRADERS. 


Here I had a good visit, but was grieved at the wickedness of the 
traders. They do everything that is bad, and teach the natives the 
bad things, also. I left Lolodorf on Friday morning for Kribi on the 
coast north of Batanga. The road was good, having been cleared all 
the way. Most of the way it was shady and we made good time. We 
reached Bipindi Saturday at 2 p. m. and as this was the last town 
before reaching the coast I put up for the Sabbath. I stopped with 
an Accra man who was trading there. He speaks good English and 
is a very nice man. On Sabbath day I held services. The people said 
when I had finished, “What you say is good. We like it. But when 
you go we will forget what you say. Who will come to stay with us 
that we may hear God’s words all the time?” But there is no one to 
send. Oh, for more workers. They have no rest day. Would that 
some one could live there and teach them. On Monday morning at a 
quarter of 6 I was on the march. After a hard tramp we stopped in 
a shed in the woods for the night. It rained hard, but I did not get 
wet. At 5:30, while it was yet dark, I left my shed and started on my 
last day’s tramp. A heavy rain came up at 11, and I was soaking wet. 
I reached the custom house at Kribi at 12:45, took dinner and changed 
my wet clothes for dry ones, then I took a sail boat for Batanga, 
reaching there between 3 and 4 p. m., May 12th. I was well except 
my left ankle. It was swollen and sore. It is better, however. I 
am all right now. 

I found the English steamer in port just ready to leave. Mr. and 
Mrs. Schnatz had gone off to go to Gaboon on account of sickness. 
Mr. Roberts was sick in bed. So at present the force is small. Mr. 
Hickman, Mr. Ford, Mr. and Mrs. Roberts and Miss Nassu. Mr. and 
Mrs. Gault, and Miss Babe have gone home on a furlough. 

The English steamer brought no mail this time, and the mail of 
the previous ship has been sent on to Efulen. However, yesterday we 
received mail from the German steamer, bringing me five letters 
from the home land. 

I expect to leave here on the 25th with a large caravan accom- 
panied by two soldiers. I am now preparing my loads. Will write 
more before I go. Steamer may come any day. Good-bye for the 
present. 


DEATH OF MRS. ROBERTS. 
June 16, 1896. 
Mr. F. H. Amerman, Pres. Y. P. S. C. E., Montclair, N. J. 
My Dear Young Friends:—My last letter was written at the 
beach, telling of my journey down. I did not leave when I expected 
to. On the 22d of May I was taken down with the fever, but not a 


“THE BELOVED.” 79 


serious one, being in bed only five days. The day I got up Mrs. Rob- 
erts was taken down. You have been informed of her sad death. It 
‘was my privilege to witness it. I call it a privilege because of the 
blessing I received. There were only five of us there, but I am 
sure we were all drawn nearer our blessed Lord than ever before. 
It was a sad sight to see one so young cut off in the midst of her 
work, but it was a thing to make one rejoice to see her pure life 
ebb away in perfect peace, and her spirit return to the God who 
gave it where she would see no more sorrow and suffering. She was 
ailing some Wednesday, but her first hard fever was on Thursday, 
about 3:00 in the afternoon. From that on to within two hours of 
her death on Saturday at 12:00 she suffered greatly, yet not a word 
of complaint did we hear. She had such a noble, Christian character, 
Her life was sacrificed for others. She was overburdened with her 
medical work, yet her heart was so filled with love for the poor 
heathen that she could not turn them away. 

Miss Nassau was the only woman near, so we men had to do most 
of the work, for Miss N. was not well. It was with sad hearts that 
we made the coffin and laid her cold form in it. She was buried on 
Sabbath morning by the side of Mrs. Laffin’s grave. Their history in 
Africa is so near alike, each being seventeen months on the field, 
living in the same house, dying in the same room, and in their last 
testing place, lying side by side. God grant that we all may serve 
Him as faithfully as these two whom He has called on before. 


GOES BACK TO ELATE. 


The day after the burial, June 1st, was a busy one for me. With 
the assistance of Bros. Hickman and Roberts, I gave out loads to 
about 60 men and secured 24 others to take loads from Efulen. At 7 
o’clock June 2nd, I left Batanga with my eighty-four men. As there 
is no danger for carriers between the beach and Efulen I did not 
wait on them but pushed on ahead, making the 70 miles in three days. 
The weather was fine and the path fairly good, so I made good time. 
The last day I tramped twenty-eight miles. This would be fast travel- 
ing on foot at home, I trow. I found the people at Efulen all well, 
including the Doctor’s baby girl, now three month’s old. This little 
one is the center of attraction at the station, and in fact in all the 
country around. She was a great curiosity to the Bulu. It is 
rather amusing to hear some old chief ask how much he would have 
to pay for her. ‘They cannot separate their heathen ways from the 
white man. It is their custom to buy their wives when very small. 
With them a woman is a woman, no matter what her character, color, 
age, or previous condition. She represents so much real estate 
and sometimes not so very real, either, for they often run off with 
a better looking man. 


80 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


GRAVE OF DR. GOOD. 


Dr. Good’s grave looks very nice with the new tombstone. There 
is a hedge of pineapples around it and inside the hedge on either side 
of the grave there is a nice rose bush. Mrs. Johnston had just. 
lately decorated it with ferns and flowers. I stopped at Efulen 
only three days but in that time I could see how the Lord was work- 
ing among those people. Surely the seed sown there has borne 
good fruit. There are 35 in the inquiry class, some of whom are men. 
Two of the men are attending school and when Bulu men come down. 
to the point of going to school, they mean something by it, for they 
ridicule the idea at first. There are a number of true Christians 
now and Dr. Johnson thinks the time has come for the organization 
of a church. They have a good Sabbath school which is well at- 
tended. Altogether the work is very encouraging. 

Monday morning my troubles with the carriers began again. At 
home you have but little idea how much trouble eighty black men 
can cause when one tries to control them. I had ten boys from 
Ebolewo’e with me. They told me they could not go the real road, 
but I must take the whole caravan around by a bush path. I set- 
tled them by taking their loads and sending them away at once. 
Then when we-were all ready to start we began giving out the food 
for the road. We wanted each man to take six kank, food for three 
days. Sixty of them said they would take only three. I told them 
they could go back to the beach then. So they untied their loads and 
started, thinking they would scare us, but we would not scare. In 
half an hour they came back and took their loads. This made us: 
very late in starting, not getting away until after one o’clock. Mr. 
Johnston accompanied me three days. After this they were more 
decent and did not give me any trouble. All along the way I was 
treated nicely by the people. It did not rain but the path was very 
bad. Every day I waded mud and water to my knees, but Saturday 
at 10 we reached Elate. 

I hope the day will soon come when a caravan can come through 
without one of us at their heels. But now it would be impossible. 
We hope some generous friend at home will become interested in 
this road and cut a good path. It would not cost over three hun- 
dred dollars, and that amount would be saved on the cost of trans— 
portation in a few years. But this is just by the way. 

When I reached Hlate I found Mr. Kerr in bed with the fever,,. 
where he Fad been for ten days. He is now up and rapidly improv-— 
ing. We think he worked too hard on the new house. When I left 
six weeks ago there was not a stake in the ground, but now the 
two brethren are moved in. Of course the whole house is not done 
but two rooms are nearly completed, and all the roof and outside 
walls are on. This is going to be a fine house, but I will tell you 


“THE BELOVED.” 8k 


about it when it is finished. Things look rather rough around here 
yet, but when the building is completed we hope to fix up the grounds. 


Brother Amerman asks if there is anything that would be =x 
help that your society could send out. Since the question is asked,, 
I will make one suggestion. At Efulen they have a Baby Organ which 
is a great attraction to the people. Every Sabbath after services: 
they gather around the house to hear it. It is carried to the church 
and adds much to the singing. I brought another up with me for 
Mr. Johnston. One man was able to carry jit. One of these would be: 
a help to our work here, I think. If you see fit, send one out; if not, 
well and good. I am sure it would draw the people to our services, 
for they come for miles to hear my guitar. This is merely a sug- 
gestion in answer to your question. 


There is nothing new about the work now. All things are mov-. 
ing along all right. The people are getting more troublesome about 
coming in the house and bothering the boys and workmen. We just 
have to drive them out. They take some things but not many, con- 
sidering the kind of pecple they are. 

I was delighted to get Mr. Amerman’s letter. I hope some one: 
will delight me in the same way. Do not forget to pray for us. Pray 
especially that the Holy Spirit may work upon these poor people. 


THE MISSIONARY A PLANTER. 


\ June 18, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—We kept three men here for three days to give- 
us time to write and send to the beach. They will go tomorrow. 
so I will send a few lines. I am still well. Mr. Kerr is better, and 
I think will be out in a few days. 


You will remember I told you that I had planted some seeds. 
Well, part of them grew. Today we had radishes and beans and our- 
flowers are just fine. Some of the flowers will not go to seed, but as 
long as they keep on blooming we are satisfied. I brought some 
orange and bread-fruit trees up with me; other seeds also, among: 
which are ten cocoanuts. We want to plant all the trees we cCan,,. 
so that we can have plenty of fruit without having it carried all the 
way from America. 

Did I tell you that I brought another cat up? Her name is. 
Bridget. She is as cute as Tom was. Tom is now a great big fel- 
low, and will not play like he did. I guess he thinks he has become 
a@ man and he, man like, wants to put away childish things. They 
keep the rats away and well earn their board. 

The people have been more bold than they were. They wil 


B2 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


‘insist in coming in where they are not wanted. We forbid them 
coming in the kitchen and into our house, but they will come in. 
Sometimes when we tell them to go out, they will not go until they 
sare shoved and then they get mad. We hate to treat them so, but 
if we give them an inch they take a mile. They have stolen some 
‘things and we have to be strict about it. They would take everything 
we have if they were not afraid. Four of the old chief’s wives ran 
off the other day, and it made him so mad that he caught a man and 
tried to cut his throat and would have done so if Mr. Kerr and Mr. 
Fraser had not interposed. They care nothing for killing a man. 
“They seem to like the sight of blood. But the boys are real nice. 
We get along well with all the young people. The school is doing 
well. Our only hope is with the young and our work with them is 
very hopeful. 

It is nice to get on a board floor once more. I can tell you now 
that the novelty soon wore off the old dirt floor and the rough 
house. We were thoroughly tired of it and we will know how to 
appreciate the good house when we get it. We kept four beach men 
~to work for us, so we have four men that know a little English. 

You are now having warm weather and we are at the beginning 
of the cool. You will suffer more from the heat than we will. The 
sun at noon casts a shadow on the south side. The dry season is 
here. What it will be like I do not know. I must close. With love 
“to all. Affectionately, your son and brother. 


EIGHT DAYS’ DOINGS. 


July 24, 1896. 

Dear Friends:—Perhaps you can better understand my work if 
I tell you the happenings of a week as I would write them for a 
diary. You may get something which would not be thought of in 
a letter long after the things have transpired. I will take eight days, 
beginning June 21st. We are living in the new house, which is only 
partially completed. I will speak only of my work, not of that 
of the other brethren unless it directly concerns me. 


MVONDO AGAIN. 


Sabbath, June 21—A bright morning. The sun rose from behind 
“the mountains in a clear sky. The first one up gave the food to the 
cook, and in due time we had breakfast. Just after breakfast as we sat 
near the window overlooking the forest we noticed a tree in which 
was a flock of wild pigeons; but it was Sabbath and we could not 
_Zo out to shoot. Soon Mvondo, the chief of Ebolewo’e came in. He 


“THE BELOVED.” 83 


had a palaver to talk. He wanted to know what was the matter 
with us that we did not give him more goods. The start of it was 
this: On Friday he gave us a goat, then, according to Bulu custon, 
he sent for the goods for it. This is what they call friendship. They 
give a fowl or a goat, then in a few days they ask three or four 
times as much as the gift is worth, and they call you mean if you 
do not give it. Well, Mvondo sent the same evening for his goods. 
We paid no attention to it. On Saturday evening he sent again, 
and when we did not heed, he sent his oldest son, whom he thought, 
no doubt, we would reverence, and through him he demanded the 
goods. Our patience was already well tried with the old fellow, 
and we just sent the goat back to him. It was a hard blow on the 
old fellow. The like had never been heard of in all Bulu, and espe- 
cially to a king. He immediately sent the goat back to us with an 
apology. So Sabbath morning he came in all his dignity to find out 
why we had treated him thus. We only made fun of him and gave 
him no satisfaction. We hated to tell him outright that it was on 
account of his mean behavior and avariciousness. 


At 9:30 we went to services in the shed we had built for that 
purpose. There are no seats in it, so the people sit on the ground. 
There were about a hundred there. I took my guitar and played the 
first time in church. The people like it very much, and it is a good 
drawing card. I cannot play, but they think I can, so it is just as 
well. In the afternoon we sang and read some. Mr. Fraser went 
to a town east of Elat. I sang with the boys in the evening. Some 
djazy Bulu men came in the boys’ house and demanded food. The 
boys appealed to me, and I drove them out with a stick, for they 
bother us greatly in this way. 

As the day was drawing to a close we heard the people below 
us making a loud noise—rallooing and screaming—long and pro- 
dJonged. We heard that two towns were fighting over some stolen 
goods. Knives, spears and clubs were used freely. Men, women 
and children fought. But this is the usual, not the unusual, in this 
dark land. As these sounds died away, darkness came on, and the 
day was finished. 


Monday, June 22.—A cloudy morning. The sun did not show 
himself all day. A cloud rested over the borders of Ebolewo’e, both 
in the heavens and in the heart of the great chief. At the station all 
things went on as usual. First, at 6:30, morning prayers were held 
for all the boys and workmen. We meet in the workshed. While at 
breakfast the boy who waits on the table told us that Mvondo had 
called a big palaver of all the head men of Ebolewo’e. The boys were 
excited over it, for they were afraid of Mvondo. Afterward we learned 
that he had called the palaver to get all the head men to unite with 
him in demanding more goods of the white man. He expected about 


84 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


one-half for himself, but he had received very little. It is our cus- 
tom to give the head men a little now and then, to keep them on good 
terms; but Mvondo had been so mean, that we did not give him as 
much as one of the others. He also complained that his women had 
not been getting more for their food than other women, and his sons 
were treated just the same as others. He failed to get the head men 
to join him, and he was afraid to try it alone, so he went home with 
a sore head. So the cloud did not burst, but was carried away by con- 
trary winds. During the day I studied some on the language. In the 
evening while out on the garden planting some paw-paw and orange 
seeds, the boys challenged me for a clod fight. I took them up and 
how the clods did fly for a while. No one got hit, however. It alk 
ended by my catching each one in turn and gently applying the palm 
of my hand to the place where their trousers ought to be, had they 
any. The boys enjoy a good play with us. In the towns they do not 
play for if they do, and anyone gets hurt they all take it wp and fight 
even the fathers and mothers joining in. We try to introduce some 
games on the mission hill for them. . 

This afternoon a fight took place near the station. A stranger 
was passing along, and a man of the town grabbed his gun. Soon a 
score of men were fighting over that gun. Our boys even got their 
guns and clubs and went out, although they had no part to take. They 
seem to enjoy a fight, but somehow they never get hurt. They are 
great cowards. 


THE MISSIONARY AS A BARBER. 


Tuesday, June 23.—Nothing of importance happened today. In 
the p. m. I cut hair for a change—cut both Brother Kerr’s and 
Fraser’s. We have to be our own barbers. Would that we could 
order a dozen hair cuts sent out C.O. D. We bought a goat and kille& 
it, keeping part, and giving the rest to the men and boys. This is one 
of the luxuries up here. We get sheep and goats cheap and they are 
very good. The sheep especially are fine—just like venison. It is 2 
relief to get something fresh. The tins get so old. 

Wednesday, June 22.—The day was almost wasted. While we are 
so cramped for room and the men are all around and need watching 
every minute, it is hard to do anything in the line of study. We give 
up trying, and pitch into the work most of the time, feeling that our 
house is the most important thing just now. Today we hung our new 
bell, temporarily, and it is a great attraction to the people. Mvondo 
and Nloze both called. At night I copied one of the Bulu songs and 
sang with the boys. They do love to sing and they sing well. 

Thursday, June 25.—After prayers and breakfast I took the co- 
coanuts which I brought from the beach and put them to soak near 
the spring. We are trying to introduce all the fruit trees, that we may 


“THH BELOVED.” 85 


not be dependent on tins altogether. Studied and read some. Mr. 
Kerr cut out coats of “many colors” for two boys whom we have at 
the station. They are favorites and we try to dress them a little dif- 
ferently from the rest. We showed them how to sew and work button 
holes. In this country the men do the sewing. It is not necessary 
for the women to know how to sew, for they wear no clothes that 
need sewing, and by the time the boys need any, they are able to sew 
their own. 


Friday, June 26.—Studied most of the forenoon. A middle aged 
man, who feels his importance more than we do, came into the front 
yard where we do not wish people to come. He was curious to see the 
bell and even rang it. This we did not like, for it is not for a play 
thing. I told him to go away; but he said he had come “to see.” 
Again he was told and he answered in a tone as much as to say, “I 
came and I am going to see.” Splash! went a pan of water which 
‘took him from head to foot, and Mr. Kerr appeared on the scene and 
told him a thing or two which he did not digest for about three hours. 
We have to do things like this sometimes, or be trampled upon. Talk- 
ing will not always answer when they take a notion to see some- 
thing even in tke house. 


Late in the evening our boys told us that they had discovered 
Some one stealing mats. The man threw them down and ran, but we 
found that he was from Mvondo town. We quietly waited till the 
next day. 


Saturday, June 27.—At morning prayers, Ezom, one of the boys 
from Efulen, led in prayer. This is very encouraging. Pigeons were 
seen in a close tree and Mr. Kerr, the crack shot at Hlate, went with 
his gun. He came back with a bird. The wild pigeons are very beau- 
tiful, as well as good to eat. After breakfast Mr. Kerr went to talk 
the palaver about the mat stealing. The old chief could not deny the 
fact, and, there being no jails here, all troubles are settled by paying 
goods. The result of this was that he paid us a goat for the stealing 
his men had done. Nioze was there and helped us out. Accordingly 
in the evening we sent him a small gift. Hzom’s girl came to sell] 
food, apparently, but I think she came to see her lover. HEzom is 
trying to buy her and she has to seem a little anxious about now at 
feast, and I believe there is a little love in this affair, though usually 
there is none in Bulu marriages. The dowry amounts to about $35 
in our money. 


86 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


A LEPER GIRL. 


Sabbath, June 28.—We rang the bell at 7 to let the people know 
it was Sabbath, for the Bulu do not now when the Lord’s day comes. 
Again at 9 the bell was rung, and at 10 we all went to the “Sunday 
house.” There were about 125 present, at least one-half of whom 
were children. They listen real well now, except in prayer. They 
get scared sometimes, and usually make a noise. Mr. Fraser con+« 
ducts morning service. The children were delighted with my guitar, 
and it seems to add to the services. In the afternoon I took my guitar 
and went down into the towns. I first came to two old men who are 
too feeble to come to church. They had never heard or seen anything 
like the guitar. They acted like children, clapping their hands and 
laughing. They hugged me and said it made their hearts feel good. 
They tried to get me to stay, but on a promise to return I went on. 
I stopped and sang at several places and the people gathered around. 
Some brought me fowls as presents, but I told them not for playing 
and not on the Sabbath. (The next day two were brought). I was 
returning with a glad heart, when I discovered a little hut in the 
bush at the side of the road. On inquiry I learned that it was the 
home of a little leper girl. I went to see her and it was a sad sight— 
a girl not over ten, covered with leprosy, living all alone in the bush 
so sad and lonely, no one to play with, no one to talk to, and not able 
to read, the time must pass slowly, indeed, for her. I played some for 
her but could not bring a smile to her face. She talked in such a 
mournful tone and looked, oh, so sad. I pitied her and hope some 
day to be able to tell her of Him who cures leprosy of the soul. I 
have seen three lepers since we came here. This girl received but 
little attention. The evening shades were gathering and I returned 
to the station with a sad heart. 


July 27, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—Another month has passed since I wrote. It 
has passed very quickly for we have been busy. I have turned car- 
penter and have been very busy trying to help with the house. Mr. 
Kerr has not been well since his sick spell, and tomorrow he intends 
to start to Efulen and may go farther if the doctor advises. A cara- 
van will get here the first of September if all goes well. We are just 
out of some things and its coming will be welcomed. Our bread stuff 
is nearly gone, but we have plenty of rice. We always have enough 
of something, so there is no fear. 

We have the large central room done, and we now have plenty 
of room for our stuff. Two rooms are yet to do, then Mr. Kerr has to 
make the doors and part of the windows. We have eighteen men at 


“THE BELOVED.” 8T 


work, but they are equal to about four or five at home. We have 
been trying to make paths or fences and have done a little grading. 
We want things to look as well as possible for two reasons. First,. 
that it may be more homelike, and second, for an example to the peo-- 
ple. They take no interest in trying to beautify their homes or towns. 
We can do more by example than by any other way, I think. 


EZOM BACKSLIDES. 


A dark cloud hangs over the station now. We are somewhat dis-— 
couraged, for the boys we had most trusted have proved faithless. 
You have heard me speak of Ezom. He has been with the mission 
ever since it started. He and another boy who have been working at. 
the carpentering, and we have trusted them in everything, but we 
found to our sorrow that they have been stealing from us for some 
time. We saw that they were eating fowls and other things which 
we did not buy. We also saw them gambling with goods that we 
never gave them. We made a raid on their house and found about 
$35 worth of goods. Ezom had been buying food for us, and he had 
helped himself to what he wanted. We have no jail in this country, 
so we fined them heavily. They seem to be sorry and will hardly look 
us in the face. They want to return to Efulen, and will go with Mr. 
Kerr. There were eight of them in the same house. They all had a 
guilty knowledge of it, but they did not all steal.. We are sorry, for 
they have been such a help to us in the school and in buying. The 
people of this place are doing real well now. 


My guitar still draws. I play it in church and go to the towns 
and they all enjoy it so much. The last letter I have received from 
you was written the 10th of March. 


August 24, 1896. 


My Dear Parents:—At last we have heard from our native land. 
Mr. Johnston arrived on Saturday, August 22d, with a caravan of 
eighty-five men. Mr. Kerr stayed at Efulen and will come up in Sep- 
tember if the Lord will. It is needless to say we were glad to get the 
mail. Your former letter was written the 10th of March and from that 
time to the 22d of August is a long while not to receive any mail at 
all. But such is life in this neck of the woods. We learn how to ap- 
preciate letters out here. And such a stack of them! They are not 
all read yet. I am in my own room which is a nice one. Perhaps I 
think so because I built the most of it. At last my bedstead is fin- 
ished, and I think it will pass in Africa. As Mr. Kerr will not be back 
for a month, I will take it a little easier and study the language som¢ 


88 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


DELIGHTS IN HIS BOOKS. 


Another thing which pleases me much is to see my books here. 
“They all came with Mr. Johnston. All my possessions are here now 
except those left at the beach for use when I go there. After this our 
<caravans will not be so large, for all our personal goods are here, and 
we have a supply of provisions which will last for months to come. 
However, we will have to bring trade goods constantly, also provis- 
ions now and then. 


I made my first attempt in public prayer in Bulu a few days ago, 
and the boys say they can understand me. It was a poor attempt, but 
I was glad to be able to make a start. Mr. Johnston speaks the lan- 
guage well, but he has been at the old station and has put most of his 
time on the study of it. 

Just now a stranger came in to see my room. He was afraid of 
‘my typewriter. He wanted me to swear one of his women on “the 
book.” She had been stealing some of his goods, and he thought if 
he could get her to swear over a book she would be afraid to do so 
again. He was delighted with my guitar and when he went away he 
said we were big friends. It was a funny sight to see him as he went 
down the path with thirteen of his wives following. It made quite a 
train and he was the proudest man in all Bulu. 


The white ants got into Mr. Fraser’s books and ruined them, but 
‘mine which were at the same place were not touched. I had mine 
wrapped in tarred paper and this accounts for it, I suppose. 

I received a letter from Rob and a picture from their boy. Heisa 
pretty good looking namesake. I will try to write them later. You 
‘may expect mail again in about a month. 


September 7, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—In your recent letters you ask a whole gener- 
ation of questions which I will now try to answer. 

Do we have a cook? Yes. He is a Batanga man by the name of 
‘Bitombi. A small, black, stoop shouldered fellow of about fifty corn 
‘eatings (twenty-five years). For nine years he was the cook’s mate 
cand afterwards cook for the French Governor at Gaboon. I do not 
know whether the Governor was troubled with dyspepsia or not. This 
has nothing to do with our cook at present, however. He does things 
a little different from what “my own mither” used to do them, but 
this might be said of many good cooks, in my estimation, and this 
is casting no reflection on the coming generation of cooks. Perhaps 
if some golden haired maiden should bake cookies and put right in the 
‘center a spoon full of cranberry sauce, they might taste just as good 
as mother’s old flap jacks. But this is an unknown quantity out here, 


“THE BELOVED.” 89 


and Bitombi cannot reach the golden haired variety. But our cook can 
be excused for not doing some things, for he has no stove and the 
out-oven is ‘a poor contrivance. Most of our cooking is done in pots. 
We have a large box of dirt on which the fire is built and over which 
there are some iron bars. On these the pots are placed and some 
times the frying pan. The kitchen is forty or fifty feet from the 
house and we have a shed walk to it. Bitombi is the lord of the 
kitchen. He is the best and most trustworthy black man we have. He 
has never told a lie to us, something very unusual for these people, 
nor taken a thing that we know of. When we want to go away for a 
short time, we leave him in charge of everything. He has not failed 
but once since he came in February and that was last Sabbath even- 
ing. He went to a town east of here and did not get back until dark 
when we were eating a cold lunch. 

The subject of cook naturally brings up the question you ask 
about bread. We have flour carried up and our bread is made from 
it. Some times the bread is good, but more often it is not good. This 
is not so bad when we have plenty of crackers. Unfortunately we 
have been without them for some months. We have a corn mill com- 
ing and we hope to have corn bread. The women grind corn between 
two stones, as they used to do in Bible times, and they can grind a 
large quantity in a short time, too. They soak it first, however, and 
use it right away. Every woman has a grinding stone. 

You ask how much did my voyage cost. That I cannot answer 
correctly for I do not know. I did not have to bother with that. We 
had one man appointed by the Board to carry the “bag” who paid all 
bills. The ticket from New York was something like $200. Then there 
were other expenses, especially while we were in England. The 
Board does all it can for the comfort of the Missionary. They have 
an agent in Liverpool who looks after the baggage and tickets, and 
helps us while in that city. 

How far am I from the desert? You have better means of finding 
out than I have. Get an atlas and measure. My guess would be from 
900 to 1,000 miles. I have not yet seen any sand in the air from there. 

Who is Mr. Ford? He was the Mission treasurer, a layman of 
some experience in bookkeeping. He is an excellent young man. He 
has gone home on a furlough and I hope you will get to see him. 

Would I like to have you send me a donkey? Now you strike me 
on a weak spot. Only one thing in the live stock line would tickle 
me more. We have been considering the advisability of getting a 
number of donkeys for the inland work. As yet the roads are not fit, 
put in the near future we do hope to have a way of getting around 
without walking so much. You could not send one from home, how- 
ever. They can be had at the islands on the way down. I think the 
donkey better rest for a while yet. Thanks all the same. 


90 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


We did try monkey meat once for an experiment. It was all right 
but we did not like the idea. It was most too much like cannibalism. 

Bitombi, the cook, does my washing. He puts the things in a box 
and goes to the brook and washes them in running water. It takes 
lots of soap this way, and the clothes get yellow after a time. Patent 
machine? No, we have not even a tub, and very few buckets. One 
thing we have, though, which I believe would be a good thing for you 
to try, is the self heating iron. It is hollow and we burn charcoal in 
it, thus having no smoke in the house. It saves the hot work over the 
stove, which is such a drudge and strain on strength and brain. 

What kind of stamps do I use? I never stamp a letter for we 
do not have them up here. All our letters are sent to the sea where 
one of the Missionaries tends to them. The stamp they put on de- 
pends on which way the letter goes. This is German territory and if 
the letter starts from here north it must have a German stamp. But 
if it goes south to catch some other steamer going north it will have 
the stamp of the country to which that steamer belongs—French, 
Spanish, Portugese, German. Don’t count the time it takes a letter 
to go from the sea. Count it from the time it leaves here. It takes 
from eight to twelve days to reach the sea, and then it may lie there 
for a number of days before the steamer arrives. The delay of some 
of my letters is due to the fact that they were sent by a slow steamer. 

I think I better quit on the question line for fear you will get 
tired, and will not ask me any more. I wish you might see an African 
rain. It doesn’t wait to rain, but it just pours when it starts. It 
looks pretty when we are not out in it. These people enjoy a good 
rain. They never stop for it, except our workmen. We very seldom 
have a cold rain, so they cast aside their garments and away they 
go, just like a herd of monkeys. 


McCLEARY TEACHING SCHOOL. 


September 22, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—I have a new kind of work which keeps me 
out of mischief. You may think it funny that I am teaching school 
in a language which I know so little about, but, as we had no 
Bulu help, if the school were to be continued one of us 
must take it. I wanted to try because it would help me 
to get the language. So after a week of rest for the boys, I started 
the school again on the 31st of August. I did not go to hunt any for 
I did not want many to start. I felt lost, for I never taught in my 
life, and there was the language in which I could not express myself 
freely. But with the Lord I went at it. I fixed up an old shed which 
the men had had to sleep in. I put slabs around the walls for seats 
and a big stool for myself. It was a queer looking school house, but 
the best we could do for the time. And it is not so much worse than 
the common Bulu house. Monday morning I rang the bell, and to 
my surprise forty-one of the black urchins came tumbling like a lot of 
pigs. Some were as dirty as pigs. A few had cloths, but most of 
them were nearly naked. The boys who had been in schoo! with the 
Efulen boys as teachers, were a help to me, but I found that they had 
not received much for not one of them knew a single letter by name. 
They had learned to read by hearing the teacher pronounce the words, 
but they could not do anything at a new sentence. They did not 
know “a” from “b.” It must be some new short cut method which 
I do not know about, so I thought best to start them all at the let- 
ters. We have a very limited supply of primers and they use them up 
very fast. Well, it was funny to hear them, for they all studied out 
loud and I did not stop them. Noise does not bother a Bulu as it does 
a white man. Some of the oldest boys learned the whole alphabet 
the first day, and some, who had never seen a book before, learned 
all the letters in three days. The second day I thought there would 
not be more than half as many but there was one more, and so it has 
been. The school is flourishing with an average attendance of thirty- 
nine. The lowest was thirty-four and the highest forty-four on any 
one day. Sixty-six names are on the roll, and I believe with a little 
care in hunting them up and watching that they come, we can have 
all we can care for. We are now building a new house for school, 
and we think the number will increase greatly. If it does I cannot 
take care of them all. We want to put great stress on the work, for 
in the children, we believe, is the hope of these people. The coming 


92 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


generation will receive the most from us, and will help us the most 
in return. There are two boys in school now who are at least eigh- 
teen years old, but most of them are much younger. There have been 
four girls quite regular in attendance, but most of them have to go to 
the gardens to hunt food for the men. Fifteen of the boys board here 
and work in the afternoons, there being no school in the afternoons. 
Two walk two miles and back each day. 


MR. KERR RETURNS. 


September 30, 1896.—We were made glad yesterday by the return 
of Mr. Kerr. He had eighty-four carriers and a nice lot of mail. I 
received five, two from home, those of June 26 and July 16. Letters 
and papers a great roll. And oh, how I have had to write since then, 
for some wanted answer by return mail. Here the machine comes to 
my aid. I cannot write well on it yet, but I can put on paper 900 
words in one hour. This beats writing by hand, and it does not tire me. 


We are rejoiced to see Mr. Kerr looking so well and strong, and 
to have him back with us. We have had to work hard while he was 
away. In this month we have put up two houses, and I have had the 
school to look after. 

You may expect mail in about six weeks, for then Mr, Fraser ex- 
pects to go down to Mission meeting, but when will we get our mail? 
This we do not know. We have at last applied to the officials to pro- 
tect our mail, and send it through with soldiers. If they comply we 
will get mail some time in December, but if not, then we must wait 
until Mr. Fraser returns in January or February. There has been 
more trouble on the road. Mr. Kerr had to use his gun to protect 
himself and men at one place. They are getting very saucy and im- 
pudent, but I fear they are going too far, for the governor will 
soon be after them, and when he begins he does not stop. We are 
glad to hear that they have started a government road to Efulen. 
This will be a great help to us for it will shorten the distance and 
lessen the danger. We are all right up here so do not be alarmed. 
We have provisions for six months and they cannot starve us out. 
The people here are very kindly disposed, and we are almost sure of 
no trouble to come. The road is the only place of difficulty. There 
was a big war between here and the sea, in which thirteen tribes or 
elans participated. There was also war at Efulen some time ago. 
Mr. Kerr helped to restore peace. He got them on the opposite banks 
ef a river, and there they talked the trouble over. It is so easy to 
start a war and it takes a long time to settle the trouble. But you 


“THE BELOVED.” 93 


civilized people are talking war all the time, so do not blame these 
poor heathen out here. 

My love to all the friends. I feel that I am in the path of duty 
and I would not change for anything. 


October 29, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—I re-read your last letters today and I was 
very much amused at one thing in mother’s. Like my dear mother you 
are much concerned about your “prodigal son,’ thinking, perhaps, 
that he has naught to eat and leaves to wear, and worst of all, “mir- 
abile dictu,” nothing but burdock leaves on which to wipe his long 
nose. Now, you kave forgotten to read between the lines. I have not 
made things quite plain. I forget that you, at home, do not know all 
the circumstances. I did say that after a thorough search I could 
find but one handkerchief, and that a red one, but think—I had but 
one or two trunks at that time in which to search. When the rest of 
my things came I suppose I forgot to mention the fact that my sup- 
ply of nose rags was increased, many of which I have not touched yet. 
Yes, and I have socks, too. Things like this we can get at the shops of 
the traders at the sea. But if you want to send some I will not have 
any serious objections. 


LOVER OF FLOWERS. 


I am so thankful for those flower seeds you sent in a letter. Three 
of the verbenas are up and six of the candytuft. I was surprised te 
see them come up, for so many things do not. You should see my 
flower bed; I take great pleasure in caring for it. The variety is 
limited but I make up in quantity. Lady-slippers do well. and it is 
nice to see them, for the ladies here do not wear slippers. Coxcomb 
also grows well. Besides these we have Brazilian morning glories, 
cyprus, zenias, and a native flower which is beautiful; I will try and 
send you some. Here it does not die but keeps on blooming—it is 
something like an everlasting flower, for it keeps a long time after 
it is severed from the stalk. The nasturtium, which was so very pret- 
ty, did not go to seed, so we are out. Any seeds you can send I will 
be glad to get. 

Now I have something to tell which I think will surprise you. 
Last rainy season, I think in March, I planted some lima beans; they 
did well and when the crop was taken, the vines did not die, but lived 
through the dry season and are now bearing again. This is the way 
the native bean does, and so with many other things. This is a lazy 
man’s country, surely. Thus we get two crops a year and with very 
little work. Corn will soon be in roasting ear, and we are now eating 


94 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


fresh beans, radishes, etc., and the second crop is just beginning to 
turn red on the tomato vines which were planted last May. It has 
been raining every day for two months with a few exceptions. Thus 
while you are shivering in your heavy clothing we are enjoying the 
freshness of a June morning, and last summer when you were swel- 
tering in the heat and choking in the dust we were welcoming the 
April showers. During the hot summer nights you roll and toss 
and wish you were an iceberg. In the winter when you touch the 
cold, clammy bed you tie yourself up in a knot and dream you are 
what is left of the north pole. You have storms and cyclones which 
scare you through the day and keep you awake at night. Our nights 
are always cool but not cold. I am now using a blanket and two 
light spreads. We never have a storm. The air is always in mo- 
tion, and sometimes a cloud comes up looking quite fierce, but our 
mountain breaks it all up so we do not get it. Is this not a fine 
place to live? A regular paradise. “Every prospect pleases and 
only man is vile.” So it is not so bad, after all, is it? We are getting 
fixed up a little, and it is more pleasant—if we just had some one 
to look after the cook. The black cook is quite limited in the va- 
riety of dishes he gets, and sameness is hard on the stomach. Our 
Batanga cook went home for awhile and we have a Gaboon man 
who used to be at Efulen. 

I am very much obliged for the papers you sent. Editor Wolf 
has my thanks, also, for sending the Imprint. There is one ques- 
tion I would like to ask. Who is responsible for the mistakes in 
my letters in the Imprint? If I am, I would rather be excused, for 
I have enough sins to answer for. Now that they are typewritten, 
there is no excuse, at least for leaving out a line or paragraph. I 
see in one letter that the cook and the Bulu boy, Ezom, are badly 
mixed up, resulting in eontradictory statements. However, we are 
all liable to make mistakes, and why should we jump on the editor? 
Please overlook the many I have made, and be lenient in the future. 

I am glad to hear of Dr. McLaughlin being at Crawfordsville. 
I was at school with Charley three years and roomed with him 
one, SO we are quite well acquainted. As a doctor, I do not know 
him, but as a student and as a man I do know him and can say 
only words of praise. If you want a leg cut off I think he can do 
it; don’t be afraid of him. And they say he is going to get mar- 
Tried. Well, I do not blame him, for he has such a nice girl. (I can 
say this, since she is going to get tied up and I am out of reach of 
Charley.) I know her, too. I wish they would come out here. 


A SHORT TRIP DOWN THE VALLEY. 


We had not been off the hill for some time, and as we had a 
little excuse to go to some neighboring towns, to see a Bulu wres- 
tling match, Mr. Kerr and I decided to go. All the boys on the 
hill went, and many people from the towns, so we made quite a 
procession as we took our way along the winding path. Shortly 
after leaving the towns we came to the gardens and corn fields. 
We saw some fine corn, most of it about to our shoulders, some 
above our heads, and the path wound around through it, the blades 
striking our clothing as we passed along. I can better understand 
how easy it was for the disciples to pluck the ears as they passed 
along, with the grain so close to the path. One would not have to 
go out of the way, or even stop. We were surprised to see so much 
corn, for these people work it all with a very inferior little hoe. 
We passed through fields fully eighty rods long and it looked splen- 
did. To vary the scene it began to rain, and it rained and rained. 
We had our waterproofs on and did not get wet. Mr. Kerr had 
rubber boots and I had on a pair of leather ones which came to my 
knees. After an hour of corn fields and forests we came to a stream. 
But what of that! In we plunged, and our high boots just saved us. 
Soon we came to some towns, but only a few women and children 
were left on guard, while the others were at the match. Town 
after town was passed, some very nice ones. We could hear the 
drums beating and the guns booming on ahead, and it was hard 
to keep up with the boys, who were, by this time, excited over the 
prospect of seeing a good match. It had quit raining and the day 
was fine. But we came to a stream where the path followed along 
its winding bed for twenty rods. Here our high boots did not save us. 
We waded until it became too deep, then Mr. Kerr took his boots 
off, and a man volunteered to carry me; I let him do so, for if I 
took my boots off, I could not get them on again. It was all some 
of the boys could do to get through. The big fellow who had me on 
his back did not fall, but I was fearful that he would. It was a 
funny looking procession. My boots were so heavy that I let them 
drag in,the water. After a short hill we were at the town where 
the wonderful match was going on. The street was full of people, 
all talking at the top of their voices. The drums were so loud 
that one could scarcely hear himself talk, and they never ceased. 
Guns were fired whenever any noted man was thrown. Dogs, seeming 
to catch the spirit of the day, were barking and fighting. It is 


96 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


hard to describe the affair, for everything is so foreign to you 
civilized people that you cannot understand it as it really is. The 
Hsakoi tribe had challenged the Yevo and the Yenjok. The people 
of Ebolewo’e are Yenjok. All the strong men were out, and there 
are some big ones. I think they would make great football players. 
A piece of bark cloth was the fashionable dress of the day. If one 
wanted to try his strength, he would start down the street, shaking 
his body and showing his muscle to the best advantage. This was: 
the challenge. Anybody can accept the challenge by stepping out 
in front of him. The first one looks well at the newcomer, and, if 
he thinks he can manage him, they set to work, but if he is afraid. 
of him, he passes on, and thinks it no disgrace to be backed down. 
They do not catch as boys do at home. They stand face to face, or 
rather, head to head, with the feet as far away as possible. If they 
break hold three times they say they are equal, and quit. When 
a man falls, the winning side makes a great fuss, dancing, and 
shooting guns. And so the thing goes on for three or four days. 
After watching for a couple of hours we returned, getting back 
just in time for supper. 


DEFENSE OF WRESTLING MATCHES. 


Now you may think it strange that we went all that distance 
to see a thing like this, where we could do no good. But are you" 
sure we did no good? This is about the only innocent sport these 
people have. How or when will we get acquainted with them? 
Here we saw hundreds of them at once, and they saw us and had 
a good look at us; this last is a very necessary introduction, for 
we cannot do much at helping them until they get to see and know 
us. I believe in mingling with the people to let them know we are 
not afraid to go among them. On this trip we gained many friends- 
We selected a town where we wished to start a Sabbath school 
soon. We talked with the people there and on the road. As we 
came home one woman came running out and said,. “why don’t you 
sever come and stop in our town?” She gave me some food and 
said she wanted to be our friend. She was the head woman of the 
place. The people were pleased that we went. They often speak 
about it. A few days later we went to another in our own town; 
it was Saturday afternoon and they talked of continuing it the next 
day. We kindly remonstrated with them. They were divided, but 
finally the head man of the town got up and. said, “We will not 
wrestle tomorrow.” ‘That settled it, and they waited until Monday. 


The wrestling match. 


“THE BELOVED.” 9F 


November 4, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—This will be but a note. I have more 
written now, but am afraid to send it, for we are not sure that- 
you will ever get this. I will explain. . 

On the second day of this month we were very happily surprised: 
to see our mail come from the beach. We had not expected it for two 
months, but Mr. Roberts thought he would try the experiment of” 
sending it by the north road, i. e. following the government road for 
a few days, then branching off to Elat. It proved a success and the- 
men who came say that it is safe. A load of medicine came also.. 
Besides our men, some Batanga traders came, so we have twelve 
beach men here now in the city. Two men want to go back to-- 
morrow, hence I am writing this note to let you know that we are 
all well at present. You may not get this any sooner than later- 
mail, but I will make the effort. I send every time there is a 
chance. Once I sent this way and it never reached the beach, so 
will save all our mail for Mr. Fraser when he goes to Mission meeting™ 
in a couple of weeks. 

We are all right on the hill. We have had varied experiences: 
of which I will write you later on. We have our ups and downs.. 
There is always compensation for any trial or difficulty we are 
called on to pass through. ‘“‘As serrowful, yet always rejoicing;- 
as poor, yet making rich; as having nothing, and yet possessing all 
things.” Corn is now roasting ears and the fields look fine. The 
rains are nearly over, they say. Today we had the hardest wind I 
have seen here, but it was very slight. Nothing was hurt, not even: 
a mat blown up on the roof. 

I suppose you know today who is to be your next president, but. 
when will we hear? In three months, perhaps. You seem to be 
having an exciting time. We do not have much to do in politics, but: 
we do hare to be diplomats sometimes. 

We have been doing a little shooting lately, and have all made 
good shots. Mr. Kerr carries a gold medal for his superior shoot- 
ing at home, and he certainly does know how to handle a gun. Of 
course he laughs at us sometimes, but we do not give up. There are 
some high trees near in which large birds like to rest. The boys 
are sure to see them and as they get most of them when shot, they- 
are not slow in letting us know. They make good targets. Distance 
does not count with our rifles, so we blaze away. I have shot three: 
of the large ones lately. In flying they are as large as a wild goose, 
but the body is not so large as the goose. There are many hawks= 
and eagles. We have not been able to get an eagle yet. But we 
have not gone off the hill much with our guns. But we do like a 
little recreation, indeed, we must have it. 

The day school, Sunday school, and services are all prospering... 


98 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


November 19, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—Mr. Fraser will start tomorrow for Batanga 
‘to attend mission meeting. Mr. Kerr and I will be here alone for 
about two months. We would like to go, but it is impossible. If 
we should leave here there would be nothing left when we got back. 
. I wrote you a note on the 5th and sent it by the north road with a man 
who was returning to the sea. I hope you have received it. We 
were much surprised on the 2nd to receive mail by this same man. 
He came the north route and liked it. He said there was no trou- 
ble. We had great hopes for this road, but now they are all gone, 
for there is now a war not more than twenty miles from here on 
that road. This, of course, will stop all travel there. And so it is, 
‘we never know what is coming next. The war is between the Yen- 
jok and the Yevo. As the people of Ebolewo’e are Yenjok they 
may soon be involved, as they are afraid they will be. The younger 
ones rejoice at the prospect. They delight in war and bloodshed. 
It will not hurt us, except it may hurt the work, and, of course, 
that always hurts us at heart. 

I have had a slight fever this week. It was not high and lasted 
only a couple of days, but it made me quite miserable for awhile. 


We are so tired of the Gaboon cook that we are giong to send 
him home and do with a Bulu boy until our good Bitombi gets back. 
‘The man is a good cook but he is a bad man. He believes he can 
do as he pleases in the lowest sins, and the next day be very good, 
and thus get forgiveness. His example is very bad. This kind of 
religion suits these pople first rate. 

The people of the town have been stealing plantains and some 
‘other things. We caught one fellow stealing a kettle. and we are 
going to make him pay dearly for it. But there is no law to protect 
us. Every man does that which is pleasing in his own eyes and 
usually displeasing in others’ eyes. Stealing is no sin if you are not 
caught, and lying is never wrong in Bulu eyes. 

I spoke in a letter about the short twilight we have here, and 
John asked why it was so. EHlat is about three degrees north of the 
equator; hence the short twilight. Pure atmosphere in the mountain 
region may help to shorten it. The effect here now is grand. The 
sun sinks behind our hill at 5:30, but it does not set for a half hour. 
Thus, after it is lost to us, we can see it shining on the mountain 
tops all around, giving a golden hue to everything. 

On the 6th of November Mr. Kerr and I took a trip to a place called 
Azem, some five miles from here. The chief of the Ezakoi tribe lives 
there. His name is Evine and he is our best friend among the chiefs. 
He is the most noted and popular man in this part of the Bulu world. 
‘Think of his greatness! He has seventy-eight wives and a large 
house full of other goods. He showed us an ivory which is five feet 


“THH BELOVED.” 99 


Jong and measures twenty-one inches in circumference, and weighs 
about seventy-five pounds. We have ten boys from there and are on 
good terms. We had a good visit with the people, ate with them, and 
held a meeting in the evening. On our homeward journey next day 
I found a very fine lily by the roadside; it was in full bloom. There 
are ten large white flowers on each stalk, as large and beautiful as 
any I ever saw; but I never saw any like it. I dug up a root and 
brought it home. It is now growing. 

I also bought a pet parrot this trip. Eba is his, or her name. 
Being in doubt as to his gender I will call her it. It is very cute 
and makes us lots of fun. It’s favorite place is on my shoulder. It 
likes to be petted. But I am writing at great length and must quit. 

Wishing you a Merry Christmas and a blessed New Year I close. 


November 21, 1896. 
Dear Editor:—To help you understand these children of nature 
in the midst of whom we Gwell, I will give you an account of some 
of the 


PECULIARITIES OF THE BULU PEOPLE. 


As the proverb goes, “Necesity is the mother of invention.” 
These people have few actual needs, hence “necessity” has but few 
children. They stick as close to nature as they can, and climate 
and soil assist them in this. 


THEIR HOUSES. 


A Bulu can sleep on the damp ground with only a bunch of leaves 
under him, if he can have a fire near by. I have seen them do this 
without any ill effect. This is on the road. In the towns they do try 
to build houses. The brush is cleared away and an attempt made 
at leveling the spot where the house is wanted. If the town is on 
a hillside, and it usually is, they do not grade up to a level, but 
leave the floor the same plane as the street. Sharpened sticks about 
five feet long are then stuck in the ground where the walls are to 
be. Bamboo is tied on to these about every eight inches, parallel 
with the ground. Bark is then tied on to the bamboo, usually two 
layers. For roof they put a large pole on three forks, to serve as a 
ridge pole. Over this they bend bamboo, tying the two ends to the 
side walls. On these they tie mats. And the house is done. It is 
about 10 feet by 20 feet. A small hole, 18 inches by 24 inches, is left 
in one side, which serves as doors and windows. It is all I can do 
to bump my head on the ridge pole, they are so high. There may 
He one, two or three beds in one house. The beds are made of 


100 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


bamboo poles supported by cross sticks not over six inches from 
the ground. Many a night have I slept on such a bed. Fortunately 
I had a blanket to put under me, but these people do not. A small 
fire is built between the beds. In one end of the house the cooking 
is done, either in clay pots or in leaves. They can cook a chicken 
in a bunch of leaves, so skillful they are in the use of this common 
article. There is not a nail in the whole house. Nature has provid- 
ed them with a vine from which they make a strong and lasting 
string simply by splitting it. With this “bushrope” the house is 
tied. The houses are built end to end on either side of the street. 


FARMING. 


They select a place in the forest, cut away the underbrush and 
burn it, fell the trees and plant their seeds. 'Fhey do not remore 
the trees for this is too much trouble. They have no plow or spade. 
A small hoe is the only farm implement. But they raise good corn 
and lots of it. Also cassava, plantain, ground nuts, sweet potatoes, 
squashes, bananas, etc. 


DRESS. 


When we came, the men wore a piece of cloth made from the 
bark of a tree. Now most of those near here have a piece of trade 
cloth which they tie around the loins, letting it come to the ankles. 
The women still wear their leaves. A cloth is too good for a slave, 
and as the woman is a slave, she is not permitted to have one. But 
they do have other ornaments, men and women both. Around the 
ankles they have brass rings or wire. If wire, it usually covers the 
whole leg from the knee down. On the wrists they have the same 
as on the legs. A gentleman or lady of leisure often has all four 
limbs covered with this heavy stuff. Around the neck they wear 
beads of all kinds, from a dog tooth necklace to 5 or 6 pounds of 
trade beads. Sometimes we see a man wear ivory bracelets. Often 
over one shoulder they hang three or more strings of beads and 
bells. They like to attract attention as they go along, hence bells 
are a good article of trade. They are not unlike a small sleighbell 
of a very poor kind. 


But the head is the place where they try to show their skill in 
decorations. The children frequently have their heads shaved, and 
some of the older ones. When they get larger they let their hair 
grow quite long. Some tie it up in funny knots, but most of them 
plait it very tight in ridges or circles. Then on these plaits they 
fasten beads and buttons which are previously sown to pieces of 
skin. The common little white button is mostly worn. Sometimes 
they have a string of beads dangling before or behind. Their heads 


“THE BELOVED.” 101 


re thus great awkward-looking masses, but they say they are 
Deautiful. Sometimes they daub part or all of their bodies with red 
wood powder, put a few feathers in the hair, hang on the shoulders 
a bunch of skins of small animals, tie some bells on somewhere, 
take an old flintlock gun, and away they go—real Bulu fashion. 


MARRIAGE. 


A dowery of $35 worth of goods is given, but not all at one time. 
This is the cause of much trouble. When enough goods have been 
paid to assure the father that his aspirant son-in-law is in earnest, 
then he goes to take his wife. The people of his town await his re- 
turn. As the bridal party nears the town they fire their guns. Then 
the cry is taken up, “Behold, the bridegroom cometh;” guns are fired 
and drums are beaten. When the bride and groom come, they go 
into a house and shut the door. Immediately the people begin to 
pound the house and call for them to come out. Soon they appear 
and stand on the street while they all get a good look at the “new 
woman.” Then the drums begin and the groom dances alone. After 
a while they all dance and so it ends. When the groom is an old 
toothless fellow and the bride a mere girl of 8 years it looks most 
ridiculous. There is no limit to the number, except the lack of goods 
with which to buy. One man near here has seventy-eight at present. 
‘The worst of the whole business is that most all are married very 
young—when only from five to ten years of age. 


EATING. 


In eating they are much like animals. They have no dishes, 
knives or forks. If they wish to eat soup, some have wooden spoons, 
‘but most all take a leaf and dip it up. All other things are taken in 
the fingers. They all eat out of the “mess pot” in the center, ex- 
mear the elbow and sliding the hand down until their hands meet. 
or meat of any kind, they are very crazy for every scrap they can 
get. When a bird or beast is killed, they leave absolutely nothing— 
head, feet, hoof, entrails, everything goes. And they eat all kinds 
of meat from caterpillars to snakes, and from rats to elephants. 
They singe the hair or feathers and put it all into a pot. One day 
last week a boy found a dead deer in the woods. It was in the 
last stages of decay, but what of that? The little animals swarming 
over it added flavor to the soup. 


102 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


MANNERS. 


They have no word for “please” or “thanks,” and no word of 
salutation. When a stranger comes in, he sits down, and after he 
has looked around, he goes to each one and clasps arms, catching. 
near the elbow and slinding the hand down until their hands meet. 
No word is said. If one is standing in the path, he never steps aside 
to let anyone pass; the one coming must step out. If two are talk- 
ing, another wishing to pass, goes between. When one is addressing 
an audience a passer goes in front, not behind. Very often when 
one is talking he turns his back, and very rarely do they speak 
face to face. There being no law, if one does something wrong, the 
offended goes and shoots a fowl or goat, according to the crime, and 
the offender must pay for the thing killed; if he refuses, he is apt 
to have his throat cut. The old custom of rending clothes came out 
not long ago. One mischievious boy put ashes on another boy’s 
face while asleep, and when he awoke they all laughed at him. He 
felt so bad that he tore his clothes. If one of a pair of twins gets 
sick, they give the well one medicine. .In dancing, the men and 
women dance separately. At the corn season they daub the body 
with white mud, so they can eat all the corn they want and not get 
sick. 

I have not space to touch on their superstitions, which: are “le- 
gion.” Witches and fetiches take the place of God to them. Born 
in sin, they live in ignorance and superstition, and die without hope. 

They are a hard lot, but they have some redeeming 
features. That they can be taught to do better has been 
redeeming features. That they can be taught to do better has been 
proved at Efulen. They have souls, and hearts, too. They respect the 
missionary; by patient effort the day will come, we trust, when 
fightings and wars will be at an end, and the peace of Jesus Christ 
shall reign throughout this fair land. For it is a fair land—perpetual 
June. 


WAR EXPERIENCES. 


November 30, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—We have seen something of the horrors of 2 
Bulu war. As I wrote you it was near and likely to be nearer when 
the mail left one week ago today. It started that morning, and the 
worst of it was that one of our workmen was shot. One of the 
young men from Efulen, who had no part whatever in the war, had 
gone to a near town of the opposite tribe and was returning a little 
before day when three men of Ebolewo’e who had gone there to 
start the war, seeing him and taking him for one of the opposite 
tribe, shot him. They do not have bullets, but pieces of old iron pots 
which make ugly wounds. One took him in the head, sinking two 
inches between the scalp and skull, fortunately at such an angle 
that we think the skull is not broken. A second slug is buried in 
his leg. We have done the best we could for him, but we fear his’ 
days are few, and will send tomorrow for his people to come. Hence 
the chance of sending this note. This shooting of the wrong man 
may lead to further trouble, but we have tried to take it out of Bulw 
hands as it is one of our boys. We will, if possible, turn it over to 
the governor. At least we will make them pay heavily for their 
folly, for it is costing us a great deal. 


On Tuesday another raid was made on a small town and six: 
people were killed and three taken prisoners. They make their raids. 
at daybreak. As we were at breakfast the victors returned, the place 
being near. They made it convenient to pass close by our house. 
It was a new sight to me. We heard them singing while a great way 
off. All the town went out to meet the conquering heroes as they 
came dancing and singing up the hill. Men, women and children, 
dogs and guns, some screaming, others singing—all went pell-mell 
down the hill. As the two crowds met, they all joined in the song 
of victory and came dancing into town, passing within sixty feet 
of our house. The prisoners were a mother with a babe in her arms 
and a small girl. They were a savage looking lot, but we are get- 
ting used to these sights. Now the town is in constant fear of an 
attack, and it will come soon. The enemy is in ambush, near by 
and it is not safe to go far out of shelter. These people are com- 
pletely hemmed in now, but they can never look that far ahead. 
We are in no danger, for we have sent word to the enemy that we 
will have nothing to do in protecting the people of Ebolwo’e. We are 
not in the fight, as Mvondo has tried to give out that we are. Our 


104 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


action makes Mvondo very mad, but he has promised not to drive 
“us away—how fatherly he is! 

I am feeling much better. “Oh, for a heart to praise my God. 
Pray, Pray, Pray; for me, for the heathen, for the world. Prayer 
“is the rope which pulls the bell in heaven.” Therefore PRAY. 

Very affectionately, your son. 


LETTER TO A LITTLE GIRL. 


December 12, 1896. 

My Dear Jessie:—Your letter of July 27th reached me December 
*8, being four months and 12 days on the way. It must have gone 
-a@ roundabout road. 

You ought to see these little black boys and girls out here. I 
‘fear you would run and hide at first; they are so dirty and scary 
looking. They are real nice, however... When I go through the 
-street they follow me, catching my hands or coat tail, or anywhere 
“they can catch. Like a flock of sheep they follow from place to place. 
But they have no games like you do at home. They fight and quarrel 
.a great deal. Before we came they had no schools, no churches, no 
‘Sabbath, no God, no Saviour. We have a school started and some 
of the boys are already reading in the Testament. 

I am away out of the world up here in the mountains. We do 
not have any white visitors; sometimes it is lonely, but there is 
‘so much work to do that we forget to be lonely. There are just the 
‘three of us; no white women. A little black man does our cooking. 

This is a beautiful place; mountains all around. It never gets 
~cold. The trees are always green, and flowers always blooming. 
Bananas are always getting ripe, and pineapples. We have all the 
peanuts we can eat. The trees are full of beautiful birds, and 
quite often we shoot some large ones. Monkeys play among the 
trees near by. Deer and antelope are abundant; sometimes they 
-come up to the house. This morning I saw an antelope. - 

We have two cats which we brought up from the sea. I have a 
“parrot whose name is Eba. He sings and talks and scolds. He likes 
to sit on my shoulder and pick at my big ears. He can climb up from 
the floor by taking hold of my trousers and shirt. If he falls (his 
wings are-clipped) he always says “Eba,” calling his name. We 
‘have many a good laugh at him. 

I am getting along nicely. One year has passed since I came. 
It will be four more before I can go home. Please remember me to 
your papa, and mama, and Jennie. Also all my little friends of 
Crawfordsville. Your far-away friend. 


“THE BELOVED.” 105 


December 14, 1896. 

My Dear Parents:—You will be surprised to get so many letters 
from me, but perhaps you will excuse me for writing when I have 
a good chance. I rather fear you would not excuse me if I did not 
write when the opportunity offers. My last note was sent by Kume, 
the Efulen boy. He returned on the 8th and had two letters for me. 
One was from you and was written away back in July. How it came 
to be so long on the way I do not know. Then we were surprised 
again on the 11th by receiving mail by the north road. It was over 
three weeks on the way but all safe. Yours of September 3rd was 
one of the letters. You speak of those pictures I ordered sent you 
from Chicago. The delay may be from several causes. The negatives 
were taken here by an amateur and they may have been faulty. 
They may have been damaged in shipping. Or the delay may be due 
to the fact that Mr. Ford who took them, is not home yet. He went 
by way of Syria, and we heard was sick there. He will straighten 
things out when he gets home. 


WORTH OF PRAYER. 


I like so much what you say about prayer. I could not stay 
here did I not know that you at home, and all over the country, were 
praying for those who are here, and for the success of the work. 
Prayer, united prayer, is a mighty power. In the “Passing of Arthur” 
by Tennyson, King Arthur said to Belvidere: 


“More things are wrought by prayer 
Than this world dreams of. Wherefore, let thy voice 
Rise like a fountain for me night and day. 
For what are men better than sheep or goats 
That nourish a blind life within the brain, 
if, knowing God, they lift not ‘hands in prayer 
Both for themselves and those who call them friends? 
For so the whole round earth is every way 
Bound by gold chains about the feet of God.” 


This is such a beautiful sentiment. Prayer and praise go to- 
gether. Prayer for help and praise that we are helped as much as we 
are. The baby birds cry when hungry and the mother brings food. 
Just now we have some tiny kittens in the house. They cry when 
hungry, and the mother cat rushes to them and fondly nurses them. 
Why should not God’s helpless children ery to Him, for He is just 
as quick to hear. Let us not be slack in prayer, knowing that God 
will hear, and that we, in the act of prayer, will be drawn nearer to 
Him. We get a little encouragement sometimes in seeing some one 
come out and try to do better. It is my lot to conduct morning 


106 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


prayers. A few days ago a Bulu boy, or man, for he is as old as I, 
from Efulen, who is working here, came to me and said that I could 
call on him to lead in prayer. The next day I did, and he made a 
good prayer. Since the war troubles, we have had most of our boys 
sleep in our house on the floor like a lot of pigs. Before going to 
sleep they sing and one leads in prayer, and it is wonderful what 
good prayers they make. All these things are noted with great hope. 
We feel that they are the forerunners of better things, the evidences 
that God is going to bless our labor among these dark hearted 
people. 


DEATH OF MR. MARLING. 


We just heard of the death of another member of our Mission. 
Mr. Marling died the 12th of October. You perhaps knew it long 
ago. It is sad in one way, for our ranks are being thinned. But he 
is with Jesus, and what more could we wish? He has the best that 
earth or heaven can give. I did not know him well, so I will quote 
a few words written me by my African Grandmother, Mrs. Ogden, 
who was at Angom during his sickness. ‘Our beloved brother, Mar- 
ling, is no longer in the flesh. ‘He entered in, through the gates,. 
into the City.’ O, blessed change for him. I do rejoice for him. I 
do thank God for taking this brother to Himself. O, the victory he, 
through the Saviour, has attained.” 

We have just now seen a little of Buluism. A man passing 
through the town of our noted (?) chief accidentally upset a little 
powder which was on the path. The chief gave instructions to 
catch him. The young braves did so, and they beat and abused him 
for 15 minutes. They catch nearly every one who goes through. 
Our mail carrier was held up two weeks at one town as he came 
up. It is reported that Mr. Fraser had trouble on the way down, 
and they say no more caravans can pass. Mr. Fraser will likely 
come the north road. But the governor will soon be up in these 
parts, and we fear for Bulu when he comes. They have many 
palavers to settle. But after a good lesson, they may behave. 

Mr. Johnson wrote us that he and Mrs. J. expect to make us a 
visit in January. We will spend all the month getting ready, I 
expect. My, what a time we shall have. No white woman was ever 
seen here. She will be the “new woman” in these parts. 


NEAR DEATH’S DOOR. 


January 7, 1897. 

My Dear Parents:—I am thankful to be able to write you again, 
for there was a time not long since when I thought my writing of read- 
able letters was at an end. I have passed through a stormy sea since 
my last letter. Fever was the first cause, but I have suffered more 
from the medicine than the fever. Mr. Kerr and I were here alone 
and of course he was the doctor. He did well, too. He broke it, but 
in doing so he almost broke me in two. December 28 was the day 
it started and it lasted six days. On the 25th, when you were enjoy- 
ing your Christmas dinner, I was having a warm time. The tempera- 
ture went up very rapidly and Mr. Kerr felt quite anxious. He was 
afraid that if it went up again he would lose all control of it, so as 
soon as it came down again he just fed me on quinine; in four days 
he gave me 210 grains. The result was that on the night of the 26th 
I was totally blind. I could not see the lamp. Those were dark days 
for me, for I did not know what would be the result. I could see a 
little the next morning, but for two or three days I could scarcely 
tell Mr. Kerr from the Bulu boys. I am thankful that I can read a lit- 
tle now, but I fear my eyes will never be what they were. Every- 
thing is hazy and I have to look quite a while before my eyes seem 
to focus on any object. 


SABBATH NIGHT VISIONS. 


Sabbath night, the 27th, I will never forget. I was completely 
broken with the quinine, had had no sleep for forty-eight hours, had 
very little to eat for four days; you can scarcely imagine my condi- 
tion. Mr. Kerr thought he would give me a good rest and gave me 
a half grain of morphine. It did not put me to sleep but made me 
more restless. It put me into a sort of trance part of the time. I 
had a very vivid imagination. I could hear sweet music and the queer 
part was that I could call up any song or piece of music that I wanted 
to hear. Or any friend that I wished to see would appear before me 
as natural as life. All day and all night when not off on one of these 
imagination tours I thought the Bulu boys were singing. I asked 
several times if they were not and could hardly believe it when they 
told me they were not. The song which they seemed to be singing 
was one translated by Mr. Kerr to the tune “Happy Day.” The 
English of it would be something as follows: ‘Every word which I 
shall speak shall only praise my God. Every thing which I shall do, 


108 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


shall only show His love.” I enjoyed it much for it did seem so real 
all day. I was brought very near the Saviour and made many re- 
solves if I should be spared. I am spared and my daily prayer is that 
I may be able to do more than I have ever done. One sweet remem- 
brance is that when my fever went up the second time, and we did 
not know whether it would come down or not, I had not the least 
anxiety as to whether I should live or die. My prayer was for life 
that I might do something for these people. “To die is gain” I know 
for me, but is it for some one else? God only knows, and I was quite 
content to leave it with Him. He has something more for me to do 
here. Perhaps one soul must be saved through me, perhaps many, 
so to abide in the flesh may be more needful for some one here. I 
am all right now except my eyes, and they may soon be well. 


CRUELTIES OF PAGAN WAR. 


Nothing of special importance has happened on the hill, but we 
have seen more of the heathenism of these low creatures since I last 
wrote. The war is still on. Every day we hear of some one being 
killed. These people do not go out in open warfare and have a big 
battle. They mostly go at night, hide near the town till daylight, 
then sneak up to the houses and shoot in through the bark wall at 
the place where they suppose the beds to be. They shoot their guns 
but once and then run back home. So they do not kill very many at 
a time. Then they hide along the paths and shoot anyone who may 
happen to pass. This makes it very dangerous for one to go any- 
where, for he never knows where to look for those in ambush. They 
do this day after day, and after a while they do get some one, and 
usually an innocent one, too. It is reported that the Yemveng have 
come twice to fight here, but both times they got scared and ran home. 
Once eighty of them came and were near the town, but when they 
heard our boys singing some of the gospel songs up in our house 
they got frightened and went away. Again they came and cut the gar- 
dens, plantains, bananas, and corn, etc., in the night, then hid near 
by to shoot in the morning, but when they heard our bell call to 
morning prayers they again fled. This reminds one of the time the 
uncircumcised Philistines fled when there was heard “the sound of a 
going in the tops of the mulberry trees.” Or when the host of the 
Syrians” heard ‘a noise of chariots, and a noise of horses, even the 
noise of a great host; wherefore they arose and fled in the twilight.” 
Rabshaken also heard “a rumour’ when he was encamped before 
Jerusalem, and returned to his own land. So the heathen rage, and 
imagine vain things. They have threatened to come and plunder our 
house, but we have no fear of it. They are not above the deed, how- 
ever. A man who will kill his own son and throw him in the bush, 


“THE BELOVED.” 109 


as our worthy chief, Mvondo, did two years ago, just because he was 
sickly and hung around the old fellow’s house, is not above robbery. 
If they were not such big cowards they might make short work of 
us. But “the Lord of hosts is with us; the God of Jacob is our 
refuge.” ‘Therefore will we not fear, etc.” 

The subject of cannabalism came up yesterday, and I was sur- 
prised to hear one of our workmen say that he saw his people eat a 
man killed in war, at a town not more than ten miles from here. 
This could not have been over ten years ago, for he is not as old as 
I am and he took part in the war. Our cook said he saw the Fang, 
the people just south of the Bulu, catch and kill, flay, cook, and eat 
three people about three years ago. But is this as bad as the woman 
who boiled her own son and did eat him? These people are low, in- 
deed, but they are not lower than millions of others have been. They 
are not irretrievably lost. 


January 14, 1897. 
Rev. and Mrs. Johnston arrived here yesterday, with a caravan 
of fifty men. Mrs. Johnston walked all the way. We were so glad to 
see them. It seems good to see another white face. It is nearly 
eight months since I saw a white woman. But the new woman is 
creating quite a stir. The people are just wild over her; hundreds 
are hanging around all day. “We want to see the woman.” 


January 23, 1897. 

My Dear Parents:—One year ago today I left Efulen for Ebole- 
wo’e. The time is going fast, but a lot of things have happened in 
that time, too. We have been able to do quite a good deal of work up 
here. The working season never stops. No winter storms block the 
roads. We do not have to stay at home on account of the cold. It 
is work, work, the year round. But work keeps one out of mischief. 
Two of our pests here are sweet potatoes and beans. The vines run 
over everything, and it is hard to keep them down. They are both 
good food. We intend to try to raise big potatoes by cultivating them. 
Also yams and another nearly like yams, (I forgot the English of it). 
We hope to get rid of so much transportation of goods and the trou- 
ble of buying so much food. The hill is: beginning to look quite nice 
and is becoming a little town all by itself. There are forty-two in all 
living on the hill now. We had to bwild a fence along the north, be- 
tween us and our big (?) chief’s town, to keep his people from run- 
ning over us. They ran into all the houses and made themselves 
quite at home. Now it is quite shut off. The people all come up the 
front when they want to see us. 


110 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


THE CARPET MYSTERY. 


You have me in a pretty box because I have missed some mail. 
You talk about a certain carpet being nearly done, when I can only 
guess at what it is. I have missed an Imprint, too. In one number it 
speaks of some rags coming for my carpet after a previous mention of 
those who had contributed. Now I feel a little bashful about this, 
for I am in the dark. I hope earlier letters not yet received will come 
in later. If the carpet is for me—oh, my! what shall I say? A car- 
pet on this muddy floor? Can it be? But I will wait for further news 
in regard to it. I may be mistaken. 


That roll of pictures and other things came all right. It was just 
six months in reaching me. Everything was all right. I was glad, 
glad to get it. I will ever remember the givers and will try to have 
a word for each one later. Please tell them of my appreciation of the 
things sent and give them my hearty thanks. Mrs. Johnston was 
kind enough to fix that cushion, and now it decorates the only chair 
within seventy miles of here. The pictures are doing duty on the 
walls. Their fame has already gone into the interior. People come 
and ask to see a certain picture which some one has told about. The 
children are delighted with them. They never get through looking 
at them. It is only within the last year that they ever saw anything 
of the kind, and we have had but a few. They are more delighted 
than children at home. I think if you could see them, you wou!d not 
regret sending them pictures. 


Mr. Fraser did not return direct from Mission meeting. He was 
asked to go to Angom to stay, till some one would come to take the 
place of Mr. Marling, who died in October. We do not know when 
he will get back. I will have the pleasure of Mr. and Mrs. Johnston’s 
company for a while, which I think will be appreciated. Mrs. John- 
ston has already created some changes in the kitchen. You will re- 
member I wrote about catching our cook stealing goods from us. We 
had trusted him too far and he fell. We “cut” his palaver today. As 
he is an old hand at it, and has been working his sly games for some 
time on us, we thought it right to put it on heavy. In the absence of 
law, we put our own price on, and told him if he did not like that, 
we would hand him over to the Governor. We fined him fifty marks; 
two months and a half in work, or about $12.50. He has not drawn 
all his wages so we are safe. He may go home, but we do not Care, 
as long as we have a lady around the house. 

My eyes are getting better slowly and I am thankful. I will have 
eharge of the station for a while, and there is not a person here who 
ean talk English. Everything must be in Bulu—I mean to boys and 
workmen. Mr. Johnston will take the school and part of the Sabbath 
services. We will just have to talk Bulu if we do anything. I am 


“THE BELOVED.” 111 


getting so that I can understand quite a good deal of their language, 
and can be understood a little by those who are used to us. It is a 
teal pleasure to talk to those who appreciate what you say as these 
sseem to do. Every day we see some one who never heard of God, and 
it a joy unspeakable to try to tell them of Jesus who died to redeem 
them. 


January 25, 1897. 
I have time for just a word this morning before Mr. Kerr starts. 
Anotker palaver is on, because a man of Ebolewo’e stole a woman 
yesterday. It delays Mr. Kerr some, but he will go nevertheless. 


We had a good day yesterday. At least 600 people heard the 
gospel. The school house was crowded in the morning. In the af- 
ternoon Mr. Kerr and Mrs. Johnston went to Mekalat, a large town 
east, and I went in the lower part of Ebolewo’e with my guitar. It is 
ta joyful work. Pray always for your weak boy that strength may be 
given him to speak and live with power from on high. 


LETTER TO TRINITY CHURCH. 


February 5, 1897. 


Rey. Orville Reed and Dear Friends of Trinity Church:—We 
were greatly rejoiced yesterday to see our lost mail come in. Decem- 
‘ber 9th two men left the sea with the mail trunk. After coming part 
way they got scared at the prospect of passing through towns where 
there was war, and turned back. They left the trunk at the home of a 
black man in the Mission employ, and he returned it to Batanga. It 
was started again about the middle of last month and reached here 
February 4th. ‘So it was two months getting in from Batanga. We 
had heard that it was in the bush and were quite anxious about it. 
I was rejoiced to find word from Trinity church. The following are 
the names of those who kindly remembered me in writing: Rev. 
Orville Reed, the “Carter Family,’ Miss Laura E. Ferris, Sarah J. 
Walker and Miss Eleanor Mills. I want to thank you all heartily for 
these letters. They did me more good than I can tell. 


Some one said tell us your “ups and downs.” I am glad that 
most of my “downs” are “ups.” Whatever trials or discouragements 
come the Dear Lord always adds enough to make them a blessing, 
sometimes in disguise. One of my down-ups was a fever I had the 
last of December. It was the most serious one yet and we thought 
for a time it would result quite seriously. 


112 ; CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


About the last of November war started between two tribes over — 
one ivory tusk. Soon two other tribes were dragged into it and they 
have been fighting ever since. The morning Mr. Fraser left one of 
our workmen was shot in the head and leg. He came near dying, but 
has now recovered. He was shot by mistake. The next day the peo- 
ple of Ebolewo’e went over to a near town of the hostile side and 
shot three or four, and took three captives. We heard the shooting, 
and saw them as they came back. The whole town went out to meet 
the victors singing and dancing. Ever since that time we have been 
in fear lest the enemy would come and fight here, fearing not for our- 
selves, but for our boys who are unprotected. For nearly two months 
they kept fighting at other places, but now we are in the midst of it. 
On Saturday morning we were awakened by the firing of guns near 
by. Jumping to the window I saw our boys running in all directions, 
but saw that the firing was in the town to the north of us. As soor 
as the enemy fired their guns once they all took to the bush. Ther 
the people of Ebolewo’e grabbed their guns and took after them. 
When we got dressed and out the young warriors were pouring out 
past our house by the score. We called to them but they would not 
hear. Mvondo, the chief, went puffing past and would hear to noth- 
ing. They foolishly went on and fell into an ambush where one man 
was killed, and the old chief himself was wounded in the ear—a close 
call. The dancing of a few weeks before was now turned into mourn- 
ing. In the first shooting a woman had her arm badly torn by four 
shot. The one killed was an old man. It was a mournful sight when 
they carried the dead home. The women were weeping and wailing, 
mourning as in olden times. Some daubed their bodies with white 
mud. Of course they had to hunt for the witeh that killed the man 
so the corpse was subjected to cruel cutting. The verdict was that 
he died of “bravery.” All Saturday and Sabbath great crowds poured 
into the town. There was much excitement. They all talked of fight- 
ing. Hundreds came to help avenge the dead man. On Monday more 
fuel was added by the return of the enemy in daylight. They sneaked 
up to the town just on the brow of our hill and shot a woman. Agaim 
the young men started after them but more cautiously, and agai 
they ran into an ambush. Several shots were fired from both sides; 
but no one was shot except the poor woman in the town, and she had 
her leg broken just above the ankle. This is getting very close, but 
we fear only for our boys. Mrs. Johnston dressed the wounds. This 
is the usual thing in Bulu land. Fighting all the time. We talk and 
talk, but they will not stop, and we think it is because they love 
bloodshed. It is nearly always the women who get hurt. The men 
are mostly too cowardly. Sometimes they happen to get killed and 
80 die of “bravery.” We have offered to go over to the other side and 
talk to them, but these people here do not want us to go. Mr. Kerr 


“THE BELOVED.” cans 11 


and Mrs. Johnston did go over some time ago and Mr. and Mrs. John- 
ston are planning to go tomorrow. I do hope they can accomplish 
something in the line of peace, for this constant warring hinders our 
work. While it lasts we cannot go as we would like among the peo- 
ple. It is not safe to go out in the bush lest some one get hurt. In 
your prayers please remember the war and pray that it may soon be 
settled. 


FIRST SERMON IN BULU. 


I must tell you about my first effort at taking charge of the Sab- 
bath services. I will not call it my first sermon in Bulu, for I fear- 
it would not pass as a Sermon. Mr. Johnston and I are taking it turn 
about now. Last Sabbath was my first turn. It so happened that 
that day was the first day of our second year at this place—the first 
anniversary. It also happened that the cruel war was at its height. 
Hundreds of strangers were in town. There was a big dance going: 
on all day. Yet we were much rejoiced to see the house crowded. 
The two head chiefs were there, and many went away to the dance 
because they could not get in. The windows and doors were full of 
heads. From thirty to forty guns were standing around the walls. 
I wish you could have stepped in and seen us. You would have- 
laughed at my pulpit gown, no doubt, or rather at the absence of it. 
Neither coat nor vest, collar or tie; I must have looked like a funny 
preacher. But it was comfort I was after and I had it. Notwith-- 
standing the war excitement they kept real still and seemed to un- 
derstand what I was saying. There were many there who had never 
heard the gospel and it is a joy to tell them of the way of life. I 
made some great blunders in the language but I think they got most 
of what was said. One young fellow was kind enough to tell me that 
I talked good white-man talk, but he did not understand white-man’s- 
language. I suppose he was surprised to find the two languages so 
near alike. I was very much encouraged by the effort and am anx— 
ious to try again. Of course I have been talking in the towns and on 
the hill, but it is a little harder when it comes to taking the regular 
service. 

Our Sunday school is doing well, also. Mr. Johnston has the 
boys, Mrs. Johnston the women, and I take what is left. I have all 
the way from fifteen to fifty men. We enjoy this work and the people: 
certainly do or they would not come. 

Altogether we feel that the work is progressing nicely. It is a 
little discouraging to see them turn right around and do just what 
they say they will not do, but people do that at home. They will stop: 
by and by. With my best wishes for all and a prayer that God will 
pour out of His Spirit without measure upon you ail, I remain, 

Your Brother in Christ. 


NEW STATION—LOLODORF—THE 
DWARES. 


February 24, 1897. 

My Dear Parents:—Mr. Kerr returned from his exploring trip on 
‘the 19th. He had a nice tramp and is in good health. He was gone 
a month. From Efulen he and Mr. Roberts went northeast three or 
‘four days, and then looked around for a location. They finally de- 
cided that at Lolodorf, where the government station is, was the most 
‘suitable place. I was there last June, and as far as I know anything 
about it, I think it will be a good place for a station. It will have 
several advantages over this location. It is on the government road, 
where there is a great deal of travel, and the transportation will not 
‘be so great. Mail can come through every week and there will be no 
danger of robbery. Being close to the other white people will have 
some advantages and some drawbacks. The white traders are not 
sgood teachers of morals, and much which the white man has done 
will have to be undone. The location is on the bank of a beautiful 
river, and there is mountain scenery all around. It is close to the 
Tplace where the Dwarfs are supposed to live, and so they can be 
reached from that station. I may say that the money for founding 
this new station was given by a lady in Glasgow, and it was her idea 
‘to found it for work among the Dwarfs. But it was found that the 
“little people” do not stay in any one place, and that it would be im- 
possible to live among them. They attach themselves to other tribes, 
and from them get their supply of worldly goods made by the white 
man. They live by hunting, and trade the fruits of the chase to 
other tribes for what they want. It is only within the last few years 
that a white man has had a chance to get to see the Dwarfs. Mr. 
Roberts has been to see them a few times, and it is these curious little 
-people for whom the station was first planned. Whether or not they 
can be reacked is a question, but the money was given for them, and 
‘an effort will be made to give them the Gospel. They have been ne- 
glected a long time, and the Lord has moved Miss McLain, of Glas- 
gow, on their behalf. The Board accepted her offer, and we must 
-carry out the plan as best we can. Who will be sent to man the new 
station is not yet known, but there will be one taken from Elat and 
‘some new man. The one will not go from here, however, until a phy- 
sician is sent to our station. We are looking for one all the time now. 
“There are two iin correspondence with the Board, one of whom may 
7be chosen soon. I hope so. Who will be sent from here we do not 


‘ 


“THE BELOVED.” 115 


know. We leave it with the Mission. Whoever is sent will be ex- 
pected to go unless he has a very good reason for objecting. We do 
not know what rebellion is out here. The will of the Mission is final 
in most cases, and we trust it is the will of God working through His 
people. My preference would be to stay here, but that is not for me 
to say. Very likely, however, they will not want me there, and so I 
will get to stay where I am. After spending the labor I have here, 
I would like to stay and enjoy it for a while. I like this location, if 
it is out of the world. 

Mr. and Mrs. Johnston had intended to leave on the 22nd, but 
Mr. J. took the fever on the 21st, and they are here yet. He was in 
bed four days, but is up today, the 26th. (You see I do not always 
finish my letters the day I start). They hope to start the Ist of March. 
We are sorry they have been delayed, for the rainy season is here 
and they may get wet. They are both good trampers and have good 
nerve, so think they will get through all right. 

We were surprised last night to see three beach men come in at 
dark with salt and beads. They came through by themselves, and no 
one troubled them. They had a note rolled up in a piece of water- 
proof cloth and tied on the load of one man. Small though it was we 
were glad to get it. It was from Mr. Fraser, who had just returned 
to Batanga from the south. He expected to start for Efulen in a few 
days, and would wait there until Mr. and Mrs. Johnston could re- 
turn, then he will come on to Elat. We did not expect’him so soon, 
and will be glad when he gets back. 


OFF IN THE BUSH. 


I must tell you of a couple of trips off in the bush which I, for 
one, enjoyed. On the 12th inst. Mrs. Johnston and I started off to the 
northwest to visit some towns where we had not gone often. Mr. 
Johnston was left to guard the station. We had six of the school 
boys along who live out in that direction, and one man who under- 
stands our broken Bulu, to help us out if we stuck in talking to the 
people. I had my guitar. Mrs. J. had on her African traveling suit—a 
short skirt, not bloomers. Ske looked like a great big girl, but she 
can walk through the swamps and climb over logs like a boy with 
that suit on. She certainly would not look very proper on Main 
street, but in Africa she did look well. The useful is beautiful. We 
soon came to a stream, and she had to get on a black man’s back and 
be carried over. In about an hour we came to the first town of any 
size and sat down in the public house, where the people soon gath- 
ered. After a rest and a good look from the people at the new woman 
I played, and the boys sang some gospel songs. Then*I talked about 
twenty minutes. They all listened attentively and semed glad that 


116 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


they were permitted to hear of the love of Jesus. We then passed on 
through some small towns, greeting the people as we went. Coming 
to another large palaver house we sat down, and again the people 
gathered to hear the songs and what we had to tell them. We thus 
had four good meetings on the trip. The last place was some five or 
six miles away, and the people were nearly all strangers to us. Most 
of them had never seen a white man, and they were so curious and 
asked some funny questions about us. We would like to have gone 
farther, but had to return on account of the day being far spent. We 
got back just in time for supper. We had one very steep hill to climb, 
having to sit down and rest three times before reaching the top, and 
some places were so steep that we had to hold on to the trees to keep 
from falling back. I had to wade water nearly to my knees. So you 
see it is not as agreeable traveling here as it is at home. But we all 
enjoy the road. We see so many beautiful things along the way, and 
then we see strange faces and talk to those who do not get to hear 
or see much that is uplifting. 

On Sabbath we had another good walk in the opposite direction. 
It was my day for preaching. There was a good house, and some at 
least, understood what I said. After dinner Mr. Johnston and I start- 
ed for a place called Ebai. Seven or eight boys went with us to 
help with the singing. We had a good walk through bush and garden. 
Crossed two small streams and one small river. We stopped once 
on the way, and after singing, Mr. J. talked to the crowd which had 
assembled. We passed many towns, but did not stop again until 
Wwe reached Ebai. There we called the people together and sang. 
I had the guitar again and they were wild over it. This may sound 
big, but if you could have seen these people jumping and clapping their 
hands as I picked at the strings you would understand what I mean 
by saying that they were “wild.” They cannot keep still, it seems. 
There were at least 100 people gathered in that old public house, 
most of them had never heard of God or His Son. I enjoyed talk- 
ing to them. I tried the question plan. -I asked them questions, 
which, of course, they did not know, but it excited their curiosity, 
and they would listen for the answer. When I was through the chief 
got up and handed me a big chicken, as he said, for friendship. 
I refused, and told him that we were to be friends, but that friend- 
ship was a thing of the heart and not a matter of giving goods. 
The Bulu do not know any friendship but that of goods, and their 
custom is always a source of trouble. They give today and ask 
nothing, but in a few days they want three or four times as much as 
they gave. So to avoid trouble, we will take nothing, but as we buy 
it at the time, and then there can be no kick. The old chief under- 
stood it and did not take offense when I refused his chicken. It 
was getting late and we had to return, getting back just before 


“THE BELOVED.” 117 


dark. It is at least six miles over there, and you may know a 
twelve-mile walk is no little task in an afternoon, especially on > 
the roads we have here, but we were both in good shape. Mr. J. 
took the fever a week after, but it certainly was not due to that 
trip alone. Much of our work will be such as this, but as soon as 
we get bridges over the streams it will not be so bad. 

The young people of Trinity Church, Montclair, N. J., have sent 
me a Baby organ which will come perhaps the same time the carpet 
does. It will be useful, as well as a real pleasure to us all. I am 
all right, so far. Love to all. Good bye. 


A LETTER TO MOTHER. 


March 14, 1897. 


My Dear Mother:—It was my privilege to have the Sabbath 
services today and they say I got along all right. The house was 
crowded, every window was full of fiaces and the ground was 
covered inside and near the door. They paid good attention and most 
all understood. Some of those who have never heard before, could 
not, for they do not know what we are talking about. If a Bulu 
would talk about God and the things of God to a man who had never 
heard of Him, that man would not understand. So if strangers do 
not understand, I cannot feel bad. One man came up after I was 
through and I asked what I said; he told me most of the points I 
had tried to make. Mr. Kerr told me they could understand me. 
This is all very encouraging and will incite me to greater efforts in 
the language, for I do want them to understand. I put on a neck- 
tie today, the first time for more than a year. Oh, I am away back 
in the week, and it does not make any difference; I do get into some 
clothes sometimes, the buttons do come off, and they do get torn. 
My boy does not know much about fixing them up. By the way, 
my boy, Ze, son of Nloze, has gone home and I have another; the 
new one is the son of an Hsakoi chief. His name is Mekuku. I do 
not like him very well and may change soon. All the school boys 
want the place, so it is no trouble getting a boy. I told you about 
our cook; you know the old one stole. We fined him 50 marks and 
sent him home. At that time Mrs. Johnston was here with her cook, 
and they looked after things while they were here. She taught the 
Mabea boy something and he was our cook for two weeks, but his 
mother died and he had to go home, and we are left without any- 
body. We are training a Bulu now and hope to get along all right. 
‘We are in mourning today because our best pet was killed by some 
dogs. The parrot was the nicest pet I ever saw. He was always 


118 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


happy and always doing something to make us laugh. He would 
come in the house while we were at the table eating, and climb up on 
my shoulders and talk in my ear. He knew his name and he knew 
me, but the poor fellow is gone. While we were at services he was 
killed and eaten by those miserable dogs. We feel lost without his 
constant chatter. Now I must tell you about the pictures you sent. 
All the large ones were hung up when they first came, but the 
others have lain around, waiting for some one to fix them up. The 
other day I took the black you sent me and pasted some of the 
smaller pictures on it. It looks very pretty. Then I took a big sheet 
of wrapping paper and pasted the light colored flowers on it, with 
one of the “Standard Delineator” ladies in the center. It is very 
attractive to the Bulu because of the bright colors. The pretty ones 
with “Mother” on the back, are not hung for we do not have ready 
made frames. Those big hangers father sent, are quite attractive and 
the Bulu will stand and look at them for a long time. The one with 
the strong man has a fame reaching many miles away. Strangers 
come and ask if they can see the “strong man.” But the funniest of 
all is the two Darkey babies sitting in a tub of water. The boys stand 
and look at it for a quarter of an hour at a time. It is from the 
“Ram’s Horn.’ There were at least 100 people in the house today 
looking at the things; they never get tired looking, but we do some- 
times. As a usual thing, we can’t turn around without running into 
a black man, woman or child; they are our constant company. But 
as to the names on the pictures, please give them my hearty thanks. 
The one with “from Baby Charlie” on its edge, hangs in a conspicu- 
ous place. I hope soon to get those sent by mother, framed. You 
have no idea what a help they are—they hide many an ugly piece of 
bark, and they break the monotony. I have planted flowers again. 
The verbenas did not die in the dry season and they are now bloom- 
ing again. My prayers are with you always. 


Mr. M. H. Kerr. Rev. C. W. McCleary. Rev. Melvin Fraser. 


vl 


FRASER BACK AGAIN. 


March 18, 1897. 

My Dear Parents:—Mr. Fraser reached Elat yesterday. He was: 
absent nearly four months but comes back looking well and strong.. 
He had a trunk full of mail for us, and you know what a feast we 
are having. 

You will notice a change in the way of-spelling the name of our 
station. The ‘“e”’ which we have always put on the last does not be-— 
long there. It is simply Elat. You have no doubt seen the name 
spelled in two ways. We used to write it Bule but they never say 
it that way. It is Bulu (booloo). 

Our chiefs are much exercised over the Governor. They have 
heard that Mr. Kerr called him to come down and catch Mvondo.. 
They called a palaver one day and after much talk said that if he 
came they would go way back in the interior, and live as they used. 
to do before the white man came around. It all came out later that 
they thought we would get scared and offer them some goods if they~ 
would not go. They were a little surprised when they found we were 
quite indifferent as to whether they went or stayed. We do not hear 
so much about it the last few days. We have a good laugh at them: 
for being afraid and we do send it home to them sometimes, telling 
them that it is their wicked hearts that make them fear so. 


DEATH PALAVER. 


We saw some heathen superstition a few days ago. Nloze, the- 
second chief, called a palaver, called a “palaver of death.” He got. 
it into his head that some of his people wanted .to kill him. It is this 
way: Everybody has a witch. He said that three of his sons and 
three of his wives were conspiring against him; that their witches 
would unite with those of the hostile tribe, and the witches thus. 
united would kill him or cause him to be killed. He laid the charge 
before all the people of the town and told them that if he died, they 
must cut the throats of these three sons and three wives of his. This: 
is an old custom with the Bulu. It is done to inspire fear into the 
people of the town. The old fellows are in constant dread of some- 
thing. Full of fears and fighting, what a life they must live. 

The can of seeds came by this caravan. I am delighted to get 
them. We also received some “spuds” from the beach. It is nice to 
see the old familiar Irish potato once more. We will try our best 
with all. I would like to try a little blue grass seed, too, if you will 


220 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


Send some in a letter. I have the school now, which has an average 
sattendance of about thirty-five. I like the work first rate, and can 
talk a little more than I could when I started. 

I am well. Love to all, and prayers on your behalf. 


April 11, 1897. 

My Dear Parents:—Mr. Kerr kas not been real well for some 
‘time and now his teeth are giving him so much trouble that he an- 
nounces today, noon, that he wants to start for Efulen tomorrow. 
His jaw is very much swollen, and he did not get much rest for sev- 
eral nights. He cannot eat well and is run down generally. He will 
go as far as Efulen and if the doctor advises he will go on home. So 
‘another unexpected chance to send mail and not much time in which 
to write. Fortunately I wrote Lee yesterday, and perhaps he will 
let you read his letter. 


WORK FOR THE YEAR. 


At our station meeting after Mr. Fraser’s return, the work assign- 
ed to me was as follows: The school, one-third of the regular Sab- 
bath service, the “ladies” class in Sunday school, and station chair- 
“man and treasurer. Taken all in all this means work; but that is 
what I came for, and I am going to do my best with the Lord’s help. 
‘There are twenty-four “kids” in the school and it keeps me busy from 
8 o’clock to 12 to get all around to all. We had planned to divide the 
school and Mr. Kerr would take part, but he is going so I will have 
it all. We have put up an addition to the old house with lifting door 
between. For services the two rooms are thrown into one and it 
‘makes a nice room. 

There are many strangers coming around these days. Of course 
they all have to see the house and all the things in it. They often 
ask, “show us everything,” and they expect us to open boxes and let 
them handle all they see. Some are quite timid and will not come 
in. Yesterday some young braves got scared while in my room and 
tried to jump out through the window. They all have their fetiches 
and medicine. One day a man showed me three kinds of medicine. 
One was supposed to protect him from being shot. I asked him if 
the medicine had the power to ward off the bullet if hung up by itself; 
he said it had. I asked him then to put it up on a block and let me 
shoot at it with my rifle. He had such confidence in its powers that 
he let me shoot at it. It was merely a small piece of wood of some 
peculiar kind and you may know the result when a 44-caliber ball 
took it in the center. He hunted and hunted and only found a small 
piece of it. We had a good laugh at him, but he said that his medi- 


“THH BELOVED.” 121 


eine was all right for Bulu, but I, being a white man, had stronger 
medicine. He, however, lost faith enough to let me buy all his 
fetiches for a few bells, and I have them now. 

We are having a great time with the culinary department. As 
you know our celebrated cook was sent home. We have only a raw 
Bulu and he knows about as much about cooking as a snow-bird. 
The yeast gave out and I tried to make some new. It is still in the 
drying stage and I do not know what it will be like. We have not 
had good bread for a long time. We have a corn mill and are going 
to try corn; we can cook it and we like it. Roasting ears came for 
the first, yesterday, and received a glad welcome. Everything is fresh 
and green after the rains. Our peanut patch is about as large as a 
block, is very beautiful, and my flowers are doing well. 

I made my first effort at translating hymns by putting into Bulu 
the twenty-third Psalm as written in our hymnal. We sing it to the 
tune Siloam. 


ENJOYS WORK WITH THE BOYS. 


April 20, 1897. 

My Dear Parents:—I have just returned from the school house 
where I had a meeting with the boys. When Mr. Kerr was here he 
had them twice a week for Bible instruction. In his absence I have 
them and I do enjoy it. I wish you might hear them sing and pray 
and answer Bible questions in regard to the creation and the life of 
Christ. They have splendid memories, and their prayers are so child- 
like and original. We have to laugh sometimes at the way they put 
things. Some are quite frivolous, and do not always mean what they 
say, but they are on the right road and we hope and pray that the time 
is not far away when they will be in earnest, and will carry into 
every day life what they are now learning in the school room and in 
our meetings with them. I have never yet seen them get enough 
singing. Tonight they kept me a half hour after the meeting was 
over, and expressed their regrets when I took the lamp and went to 
the house. They like especially, “Everywhere with Jesus,” “Whiter 
Than Snow,” “Happy Day,” ‘Jewels,’ and “Jesus Calls You.” 

Some of the boys got disatisfied some time ago and a few have 
gone home. We are sorry, for we have put much time on them in 
the way of teaching and other things. The whole trouble is that they 
want more goods and they somehow think they can make us give 
more for what they do. There are others, however, who want to come. 
We can get all we want in a day, but they are those who are close 
enough to come without boarding here. Mr. Fraser went out the 
other day and returned with six, four of whom went away this morn- 


122 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


ing. Their fathers came to get their goods because they permitted 
their sons to come, and because they got nothing they took the boys 
home. One of the hardest parts of the work is the unappreciative 
way these people receive what we try to do for them. They think 
they are doing us a very great favor by letting their boys come here. 
Many of the fathers here in the town will make their children sit 
at home all day doing nothing rather than let them come, as most of 
them would come if they were not hindered. And when they see so 
many things in our house, they think we are so very rich and they, 
having nothing as compared with what little we have, think we are 
the meanest and stingiest people living because we do not give them 
things. We cannot help even a friend whom we would like to help, 
for it immediately makes hard feeling. If a gun flint is given, every- 
body in town knows it before a day and then they come, “You gave 
to him, why won’t you give to me?” I sent an old man a flint the 
other day, and when ‘he saw there was but one he was quite provoked, 
and expressed himself so, because there was only one. About two 
weeks ago I gave a little fellow who has been very faithful in school 
a little jacket. This was the opening for him to ask me every time 
he sees me for something. If you do the least little thing for one, he 
takes it for granted that you are going to give him everything he asks 
for and they are legion. And he gets quite provoked if you refuse, 
and he will ask, “Is friendship finished?” And never a thank you 
for what has been done, but rather we get such as “stingy, hard, mean, 
merciless, unfriendly, etc.” Year in, year out, never ceasing—it takes 
quite a store of grace to stand it all with a smiling countenance. 

Last Sabbath was an interesting day for me. I have the children 
in Sunday school while Mr. Kerr is away. There were forty-four out 
last time. It is no easy task to keep them all still and interested, but 
it is an interesting class. After Sunday school I had the services. 
The house was full and they gave good attention. I talked about 
Christ’s final judgment of all men, and of the separation that there 
will be that day between those who have done evil, and those who 
have done good. After dinner I went to a near town and had three 
different meetings with the people who could not come, mostly on ac- 
count of laziness, for it is only about one mile. One chief, whom we 
had rebuked about having so many women, tried to make sport for a 
while at one meeting but at the other two everybody was anxious to 
hear and they wanted me to come again. I had my guitar, and it 
draws a crowd any time and any where. Four of our boys went along 
and helped with the singing. The only unpleasant thing about such a 
trip is that we must wade through water and sit with wet feet as 
long as we stay. 


CRUEL SURGERY. 


April 24, 1897. 

Cruel war did its work yesterday. There has been quiet for a 
few weeks, and the women have been going to their gardens quite 
regularly, but mostly when some of the men would go to guard them. 
Yesterday nearly the whole town was out and only one man with a 
gun. It is just such a time that the enemy comes. They found a 
woman working in her garden, and, running up quite close fired their 
guns and ran, for they did not know how many guards there might 
be out. One piece of old iron pot crushed through the woman’s skull 
and lodged inside. It would have killed a white man instantly. She 
was unconscious for a few minutes, but was able to walk home with 
assistance. Then they began digging to get the broken bone and iron 
out. They first cut the scalp away down to the bone, then began 
working to get the bone. A big jack knife and their fingers were the 
only instruments they had and they could not get a hold. They came 
and asked me if we had a hook with which they could pull it out. We 
happened to have a small pair of pincers or tweezers which I gave 
them. They got a hold of the bone, but the hole was too small and it 
would not come. Then they took the knife and cut and hacked at 
the skull until the hole was large enough. After much stabbing they 
removed two pieces of bone and iron. In looking in one could see 
what I took to be the brain in which every heart throb was visible. 
But she still lives. 


SCHOOL WORK—LIGHT AND SHADOWS. 


April 11, 1897. 

Dear Friends:—I wish you might visit my school. This work has 
been assigned to me for the coming year. If you were to visit it you 
would better understand what I shall have to say about it. First, as 
to the house in which it is held: It cost about $30. There are four 
openings for windows and one for a door, but no door or shutters 
with which to close them. For seats we have two large logs, one on 
either side, running the long way of the house. Then on top of these 
we have split logs which will slide back and forth; on these the boys 
sit. There are no desks and no backs to the seats, yet they think they 
are fine.. We have a little blackboard about three by four feet. Until 
Within the last few months we had but sixteen slates. Now we have 


124 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


twenty-five. The only books printed in the Bulu are a small primer 
and the Four Gospels. The slates and primer are Station property, 
but each one has to buy his Bible. It is quite a primitive school. Into 
this house with the above mentioned improvements and advantages, 
about forty of the coming generation of Buluites gather five days in 
the week to receive instruction in the higher arts of the white man. 
It is an amusing sight to look in upon them. You have heard of 
dressed kid, but not so much perhaps of undressed kid. Well, this is 
mostly the latter. Not more than eight or ten make any pretense at 
wearing a cloth. A piece of bark, a small rag, or a few leaves, com- 
pletes their toilet. Nearly all have the skin disease so common 
among them. It is very like the itch in a bad form. Frequently a 
place the size of one’s hand gets entirely raw. The cause of this is 
their dirty habits. They hate to wash and they do not if they can 
help it. The other day a boy did not come and the next day I asked 
him why. He said he stayed at home to wash. He looked like a new 
poy and I wondered at the time if it was his yearly wash. There is 
but one girl in school now. Sometime ago two or three came quite 
regularly and one especially was doing well. She was nearly through 
the primer and had already bought her Bible by bringing ashes (for 
fertilizing) and firewood. But her father took her from school and 
married her to an old man of a tribe quite a distance away. She is 
not over twelve, but this is Bulu custom. Two have thus been mar- 
ried and the one who is still in school will soon go. About one-half 
of the boys are living on the hill and the rest come from the towns 
near by. Some are very bright and learn rapidly. One who started 
in September is reading well in the Bible and repeats the multiplica- 
tion table as far as the nines. Many others seem as bright, but there 
are some who cannot tell one letter from another after two months 
trial. When they once learn a thing they remember it. It is both 
interesting and encouraging to hear them sing the gospel songs and 
repeat the many catechetical questions we have taught them. On 
the whole the school work is the most interesting and encouraging 
part of the work. The bcys as we!l as the fathers( reputed as such), 
are always complaining about not getting paid for coming and let- 
ting their boys come; but this is one of our “thorns.” 

We had intended to divide the school and have just built an ad- 
ditional room to the school house with lifting doors between so that 
for services on the Sabbath we could accommodate all who came. But 
Mr. Kerr has gone and I must keep it all. We are getting on quite 
rapidly, you see; preparing for a graded school. 

I preached my ‘first sermon just one year after arriving at the 
station. I do not say that everybody understood what was said. It 
wil! be some time before I am able to talk so that everyone will un- 
derstand all; but they do get a little and it is a real pleasure to be 


“THH BELOVED.” 125 


able to tell them of the love of Jesus, for they have never heard the 
good news. I now have to take the services every other Sabbath. In 
my Sunday school class last Sabbath there were forty-four children 
and Mr. Fraser had more grown people. The Sunday school will 
average about 100 each day. There are some funny things which 
come out in this work. In asking the question “Or if he ask a fish 
will he give him a serpent?” the answer will come, ‘He will if it is 
bigger and he doesn’t want it himself.” A big snake is better than a 
small fish any day and if they are left to choose, the snake goes first. 
The other day the boys saw a snake in the roof of the school house. 
There was a general scramble for it and when it was killed there 
was a long and hot discussion about who should have it. About two 
weeks ago one of the fair sex brought a “nam” to sell. This is a 
very good native food and makes a fine dish, but when we turned it 
out of the leaves in which it was cooked, there was a snake chopped 
up and mixed in with it. Our boys got a treat that day. So the 
question about the serpent seems ridiculous to them. 

Again, it is hardly necessary to urge upon them the verse, “Take 
no thought for your life, what ye shall eat * * * nor yet for 
your body, what ye shall put on,” fer they are not guilty of thinking 
of the future. They like to have cloths, but it is quite immaterial 
whether they have or not. And they think that the white man does 
not live up to what he teaches when he tries to explain the verse, 
“Give to him that asketh thee.” They are asking all the time and 
they never get and they cannot understand it. The first day I tried 
to talk, right in the midst of a very forcible argument (as I thought) 
the old chief looked up and licking his hand, said, ‘“‘Why do you tell 
the people to sit down and let their hearts be at rest when we are 
all so hungry for salt?” Quite good logic from their standpoint. 
Scarcely a day passes that we do not hear such questions as, “Give 
me that shirt you have on,” or those shoes, hat or trousers, anything 
they see, in fact. It gets very tiresome and it takes grace and grit 
to stand it for a whole year from the same person every time he sees 
you. But the boys who have been with us all the time are beginning 
to see that we do not hand out the goods. They are beginning to see 
that we have made a little sacrifice for them, and they are showing it. 
It is hard to do so much for these people and then be called mean 
and stingy while we are doing it. But I have written too much and 
said too little already. Pray for the boys. 


A HEART TO HEART TALK. 


May 12, 1897. 

My Darling Mother:—I wonder how you all are tonight? I sup- 
pose you have your ups and downs. I know I have mine. I felt 
“down in the mouth” today, and must confess—shamefully—have for 
several days. It is all my own fault, I know. I don’t trust as I 
ought. But several things have helped Satan out, or rather he has 
made use of them. We have been expecting mail every day for two 
weeks and no word from it yet. Fearful lest it is lost we have wor- 
ried some over it. JI never think much about it until the appointed 
time for it to get here—then, if it does not come, we all get anxious. 
Then every once in a while (as today) the deplorable condition of 
these people comes up before me and the thought nearly overwhelms 
me . We have been shocked by their way of warring and other 
cruelties—their lies, inconstancy, debasing talk and impurities. In 
fact, at times, there seem to be no redeeming features or lovable qual- 
ities about them. I know I ought not to feel discouraged, and I don’t 
long, for the hand of the Lord has not slackened. But I want to tell 
you what I did and wherein I got comfort. I took down a book en- 
titled “The Closer Walk,” by Darling, and oh, how the Lord used 
those words in driving away all care, fear ,incredulence, etc. And 
now you know where that old book is. Did you ever miss it? When I 
was coming away it was among my books upstairs, and I put it in, 
thinking it might help me some time. So it has. Please do not be 
hard on me for taking it without asking as I should have done. I 
don’t remember when it was bought, or who ever read it, but it had 
its mission, and is not done yet. It has so much scripture in and so 
much that is uplifting. I must strive for the closer walk. I read 
another book not long ago by Marion Harland, “The Royal Road, or 
Taking Him at His Word.” It was very helpful. This book was sent 
by Miss Parsons of the ‘‘Woman’s Work,” to be sent around among 
us. I enjoyed it much. Myrtie sent two by mail which were delight- 
ful as well as helpful. I enjoy the day school if it is hard on nerves 
and patience and nese. You ought to see my flowers—a fine display 
and constant bloom. Drop a few seeds in your letters, and send 
many many prayers up to God for your boy, baby boy. 


“THE BELOVED.” 127 


A FUNERAL, 


May 20, 1897. 

My Dear People at Home:—That poor woman who was shot lived 
mine days in terrible agony and then died. As is their custom, she 
Was examined to see what killed her. The verdict was that a witch 
gave her up to the enemy. In fact they found the witch in her body 
as they always do. She was buried in the center of the street, and 
in the evening a fire was kindled over the grave, and over the fire 
was hung the witch. Then there was great mourning. I went over 
to see the husband but the house was so full of mourners, all wailing, 
and weeping, and covered with ashes, that I could not get in. The 
Man was sitting on the ground in the center, literally covered with 
white mud and ashes. He had but one other wife. This state of af- 
fairs is considered a great calamity and they have a custom of perse- 
cuting a man who is left thus. For one month he is to wear no cloth; 
he must keep to the ashes, and is subject to ill treatment by all the 
Women of the town. They pounded him and he could not pound back, 
‘but rather must give something to quiet them. He carried a little 
basket of flints and buttons all the time to give to any who might ask. 


Just a few days after the death of this woman, about 5 in the 
evening we heard firing in a near town and soon learned that three 
people were shot. One, an old man, died that night. His son is badly 
torn, but still lives. He has about twenty wounds. The wife-mother 
is not very badly burt. This was a hard blow on the little town. 
‘They were unprotected and it is to such places that the enemy nearly 
always goes. So the trouble is farther from being settled than it was 
some time ago. What the end will be God only knows. 


CAKE BAKING. 


We, too, have had our battles, but in other lines and with other 
‘weapons. I think I told you that I tried to make some yeast and that 
it did not seem to be good. Well, it was splendid and our new (raw 
Bulu) cook is making the best bread we have had since we came. 
We now kave a good out-oven, and this helps. Overjoyed with the 
success at the bread, I thought we might celebrate and try a cake. 
We had had but two cakes since we came and we were cake hungry. 
Now, such a thing I had never tried, but we do not know what things 
We can not do until we try. It was not a failure exactly, for we could 
eat it and wished it were bigger. Then Mr. Kerr tried his hand at a 
cake. Somehow he missed the connections, at least it fell to pieces, 
but one spot. ‘That spot came to me somehow, and in trying to get 
at to my mouth I discovered the bond of union of that homogeneous 
spot. It was the cloth out of the butter tin. Since that time we hear 


128 CHARLES W. McCLEARY.. 


considerable about “that rag cake,’ and the suggestion that all old 
rags be saved for cake baking. 

Another victory has been in making our own jams. We have 
more pineapples than we can use, and after many efforts we have 
succeeded in preserving some of them. They are fine. We have not 
used any fruit from home for a month. Such is life in bachelor hall 
in “darkest Africa.” 


June 14, 1897. 

This letter is being written on the installment plan. Our last 
mail to the coast was April 12, and the next will not be at least for 
a month yet, so you will get three months’ mail in one. We had 
five weeks of anxious waiting for mail after date appointed. In the 
meantime we heard a rumor that there was a new doctor and his 
wife coming to Elat. We were quite jubilant over it, but our high 
hopes were dashed to the ground on the 5th of this month, when Mr. 
Kerr returned alone. We were glad to see him return, for as I told 
you he had thought he might have to go home. He brought three 
months’ mail, with the exception of the letters of January and Feb- 
ruary, which were sent by the north road, and which are still in the 
bush somewhere. I received your letters of January 7, March 20 and 
25. We are still in hopes of getting the lost letters. I received eighty- 
seven pieces of mail so I have been quite occupied. “As cold water 
is to a thirsty soul, so is good news from a far country.” We were 
almost starved. It is either feast or famine in the mail line. The 
report we had heard was not all false, for there is a new Doctor on 
his way to us, but like the rest of us he is a bachelor. He will arrive 
perhaps next month. 

I am having a little vacation now. For four months the school 
kept me quite close and I thought best. to take a rest rather than 
have one forced upon me. The average attendance for those four 
months was 34.5. Considering the war troubles and all things to- 
gether this, we think, is not bad. 

The fight is still on. Four attempts have been made by the cow- 
ards of this town to reach the enenry but without success. In one 
attempt they had one man killed and another wounded. This makes 
thera very mad and they have collected a great crowd to help them. 
On Saturday they began to collect, and most of them came to see the 
“white pets in the high house.” There were perhaps over 100 callers 
that day. More collected yesterday and the town is full of brave (?) 
warriors. Last night they had a big- dance and made ‘brave” medi- 
cine. But with all their bravery they cannot screw up courage 
enough to go out in open war. ; 

It fis one year since I came up from my trip to the coast. It does 


“THE BELOVED.” 12% 


not seem so long. We have a few “reminders” of that trip in the way- 
of trees. I brought pawpaw seeds, planted them, and they are now 
trees loaded down with fruit. Some of them are twelve feet high and 
eight inches in diameter at the bottom. There are at least a dozen of 
these. The oranges are more slow in their growth, but they are well 
started. During this year I have been away over night but once, and. 
I have made few trips even for a day. I am quite a “home” boy. But- 
there is no place to go except to the bush. The first part of the year- 
I was not able to understand or be understood so it was useless for 
me to go alone among the pople. Lately I have been doing a little- 
itinerant preaching, and have gone hunting a few times. 


MONKEY HUNTING. 


During my little vacation I have taken a few trips to the bush.. 
Being so constantly surrounded by inquisitive people, and having so 
many little cares whenever around the station, it is a grateful rest: 
one gets when he goes off into the bush to be with nature a while. 
Three of those refreshing times I have enjoyed within the two weeks. 
They were all deeply interesting to me and possibly some account of” 
them will be to you. 

To the west of our hill, about eighty rods distant, is a beautiful_ 
little mountain rising perhaps 1,000 feet above the brook which 
winds its way over the rocks into the valley which divides the two 
hills. It is always green and its moss covered rocks and shady nooks. 
ever invite one to come over and investigate its mysteries. There is 
something grand about this wooded height even from a distance. One- 
never tires of gazing upon it, and he is always anxious for a closer~ 
investigation. There are three bold crags which project out from 
among the trees about half way up, from either of which ,we are told, 
one has a grand view of the surrounding country. Not long ago we 
heard a distant voice calling to the people of the town. After some 
time we discovered a man standing on one of these bare rocks. He 
was plainly heard by the people on our hill. As usual for Bulu_he- 
was telling a big lie. He said the chimpanzees had caught a man 
and were beating him. But the man was in town and the lie was. 
soon found out. But seeing this man up there made me more anxious 
to go up and look around. Shortly after this we heard monkeys on 
the mountain so I could not stay any longer, for there was a chance- 
of getting a shot at the monkeys as well as seeing the sights. But I 
must have a guide. So I sent for an old medicine man who claimed 
to be the “headman” of the mountain, and he has since proved his: 
Enowledge of every part of that rocky height. I must tell you a little- 


130 CHARLES W. McCLEHARY. 


about him. He is the most inoffensive Bulu we have. He is a great 
fellow to make medicine. If any one wishes to go on a trip they first 
come to him to make medicine. He is supposed to be able to tell 
whether the trip will be successful or not. He is a regular attendant 
at our services and he does not believe in fighting as most all do. He 
is on our side in almost every palaver. He seems to try to do better. 
Whenever he goes anywhere he comes and tells us. I was quite 
surprised one day when he came to me in great trouble. He said 
some one had stolen his goat and he was going to have revenge. He 
was going to the town where the goat had been taken and was going 
to kill something, either a goat or a man, he did not know which, yet. 
He said he came to tell us so I would not feel bad when I heard he 
had done bad for he knew we did not want people to do bad. So you 
see he is quite an innocent fellow. He has two wives and seems to 
think much of them. He walks much in the bush and knows every 
path, and the haunt and habit of every animal. He can tell if an 
animal is near by turning his nose up and taking a few sniffs. He 
can mock nearly every animal which lives in the bush, and he says 
he can charm them to him. He tried to do so the day we were out, 
but it was a failure. It was wonderful how he could tell just where 
the monkeys were, and he could see a dozen where I could not see any. 


Imagine a short, stubby fellow in a blue denim suit, with a double 
barreled shot gun on his shoulder, a boy behind with a 44-40 Winches- 
ter rifle at hand for long range, and an old medicine man cautiously 
picking his steps ahead, now waving us back, now forward. So we 
wound our way up the steep ascent, holding on to roots, branches, 
vines, now on hands and knees, now climbing over high logs and 
Tugged rocks, stopping every little bit to catch our breath and listen. 
I had a chance to look around. Sometimes I felt quite content to sit 
down and feast my eyes on the beautiful scenery and let the monkeys 
go. At times we passed along narrow paths with an awful precipice 
on one side and a perpendicular wall of rock on the other, rising from 
fifty to one hundred feet above. If in a damp place the rocks are cov- 
ered with delicate ferns and mosses, and many beautiful begonia (or 
elephant’s ear), and other plants with delicate flowers which I do 
not know. (I wish I were a botanist). In some shady nooks all 
the trees were covered with moss to a height of fifty feet or more, 
cand the ground was made invisible by the carpet of green. About 
one-half way up we came to a more level place and could get along 
with more ease, following a horizontal, rather than a perpendicular 
path. Soon the guide said, “there they are,” pointing out ahead. I 
listened and sure enough I could hear the monkeys jumping from 
‘tree to tree. We slipped up closer and at every step the old man 
pointed out a monkey but I could not see them. In a dark forest of 
thigh trees it is hard for an inexperienced eye to see anything. We 


“THE BELOVED.” 131 


worried along, however, not letting them know we were trying to fol- 
low and at last I did get a good view of a whole drove as they ran 
out a large limb to jump to another tree. There were three kinds 
and all sizes in the one drove. Unfortunately they were too far for 
a shot gun and it was too dark for a good sight with the rifle, so 
hoping for a better chance I let them all pass and then started for 
them again. After following them for some time without getting a 
shot, they finally saw us and such a scattering and rattling of leaves 
as there was. Soon every monk had disappeared, and they went 
down such a steep place that we could not follow. I had seen the 
trees shake where the monkeys went, but never before had I had a 
good view of them and I was too much taken by their capers to do 
any shooting at them. We were all a little disappointed not to have 
a gun fired, but I felt quite repaid for my tramp, having had a good 
sight of the cunning fox of the forest, and having seen some of the 
wonders of the “bewitched” mountain. We turned our steps upward, 
climbed to the top, descended the opposite side, and did not see 
another animal. Coming down we passed by one of the bare rocks 
and I ventured out upon it. It was a hard place to reach and not 
very safe when there. It was not quite perpedicular, yet steep enough 
to prevent any dust lodging or even moss growing. This bare rock 
was about 100 feet high and sixty feet wide, about one-half way up the 
mountain side. There was a little ledge about the center on which 
one can stand after a hard climb to reach it. Here I sat gazing at 
the mountains around and the valley which lay at my feet. Our hill 
was just opposite and I called to the boys and they answered back. 
I could not distinguish the exact position of any of the neighboring 
towns. The whole country is wooded and the houses are all so low, 
and surrounded with trees. But smoke rising from gardens told 
that there were many people living up and down the valley. I was 
loth to leave this rock for it was pleasant to be there. That view was 
as good as one monkey so I went home well pleased with the trip. 


Just three mornings after this fruitless trip we heard the monks 
again and Mr. Kerr and I, with three Bulu, started out with “blood 
in our eye.” We followed the trail of the previous trip and thought 
we heard the monks about the same place as before. We separated, 
intending to get on both sides of the wily fellows. I had not gone 
ten steps when my old medicine man pointed out a big fellow sitting 
in a high tree about sixty yards ahead and up the mountain at that. 
I raised my rifle to shoot, but he thought I was a fool trying to shoot 
at that distance and told me to creep up eloser. But I was too anx- 
ious for a shot and let him have it. To my surprise and the utter 
amazement of the old man, down he came and lodged in another tree. 
After much hunting we discovered his hiding place. Another shot 
and he was at our feet. We looked around for others but not one did 


132 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


we see. After a turn around the mountain we returned. This was 
my first monkey and I was quite elated. He measured five feet from 
tip to tip—two feet ten of which was tail. He stood eighteen inches 
high, and weighed twelve pounds. 

My third trip was unsuccessful, so you see I am not much of 2 
hunter. I find since my blindness in the month of December, my 
sight is not so sharp and it takes a time for my eyes to focus on an 
object. Mr. Kerr has a better record. He was out camping four days 
while at Efulen and shot three monks, two deer, and twelve squirrels 
and large birds. 

I believe you started my carpet, some seeds and some photos last 
November all at the same time. It is peculiar the wa ythey come. 
The seeds arrived in March, the pictures in June, and the carpet is 
not here yet. The seeds were planted but nothing grew but the corn. 
Both the popcorn and the yellow field corn have matured and both 
are good. The wheat, sent, I believe, by Mr. McFadden, did not come 
up. He nevertheless has my thanks for the same. We planted some 
potatoes which we got from the coast but they did not do very well. 
The rice which I brought with me a year ago matured once, was 
planted again and it now looks fine. It is seven feet high and is just 
beginning to head. 


Efulen, July 25, 1897. 

My Dear Parents:—What a long time you have been without mail 
from Africa! From April 12 to July 21 not one scratch of mail left 
Ellate, (or Elat, or Elate). There is a great evolution in the name 
of our station. There was a mistake made first—hence the changes. 
In Bulu we spell it “Elat;” the Board wants it spelled Elatte. The 
pronunciation is “A-lat,” long sound of a for first syllable and second 
sound of a in the second. 

On July 17 we were gladly surprised by the arrival of our new 
Dr. Bennett. Dr. Johnson, of Efulen, came up with him. I liked Dr. 
Bennett very much, what little I saw of him. It was suggested that 
I return with Dr. J. to get a rest, change, mail and some more 
trade goods. So I am here at Efulen. Dr. and I left Elatte on July 
21 and came down in four days. It rained hard, wetting us through 
and through, the first day. The roads were very muddy. Most of the 
time we were in mud or water. We were never dry on the road. 
The second morning out we had to cross a small river first thing and 
we waded through water up to the thighs. It was a hard trip but we 
got through all right, reaching here Saturday at 1 p.m. Found every 
one well; had a good rest. After going to bed we heard a knock on 
the door and found a man from the beach had arrived with mail. I 
got up and read the mail, tired though I was. 


“THE BELOVED.” 133 


I may go on to the sea before I go back. Will return in five or 
six weeks. We expect to go camping and hunt monkeys, deer— any- 
thing, from snakes to elephant. What do you think I found on reach- 
ing Efulen? “A carpet for Africa.’ It has been a long time on the 
road and will not reach the end for at least six weeks yet. But it is 
all right. It is now opened and I have charge of it and am grateful 
for it. No one in this mission (that I know of) has such a luxury. 
And it is a luxury—not a necessity. I very much appreciate the kind- 
ness of those who had anything to do with it. And I would like if 
you would thank them all for me. The picture of the group is nice, 
but I cannot tell one-half of the faces. The large pictures were all 
torn and nearly ruined. The carpet was so heavy that it tore. Many 
thanks to Ed Maxwell for the pictures. The old colored woman with 
the melon takes the eye of the Bulu. 

I can now write more frequently than at Elatte. 


Efulen, July 28, 1897. 

My Dear Aunt Mary:—I am prompted to write you because I found 
two beautiful towels in that roll of carpet marked from you. I want 
to thank you for this kind remembrance. They will be very useful. 
I wish to thank you, also, for what you did on the carpet, and for 
those pictures you sent me. It does me a great deal of good to know 
that I am still remembered by loving friends. Once in a while I get 
lonely,—not often,—and my thoughts wander back to Crawfordsville 
and home. But when I remember that you are all so interested in my 
work and welfare, I almost forget that we are separated by ten thou- 
sand miles of sea and land. Sympathy helps one along. The fact that 
I know you all pray for me does me more good than I can tell, and 
how much we all need your prayers We are all so weak and the 
work so great. Pray. From the address you see I am not at home. 
Knowing that you get to see my home letters I will take it for granted 
that you know all about the recent changes. I am now down on a 
rest trip and will return in about a month with mail and a caravan. 
Being so recently on the road perhaps a short account of the trip will 
be of interest. 


134 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


A VERY HARD TRIP. 


July 21 was the day appointed for leaving Elat. Dr. Johnson of 
Efulen had arrived a few days before with thirty-seven men. We were 
to return together. The day before leaving, I got down my rubber 
bag and began putting in such clothing as I needed for the trip, and 
such bedding as would be necessary for the road. On the 21st we 
were up early. We put on our traveling suits, which consist of blue 
denim trousers and jacket, a pair of rubber tennis shoes with socks 
outside of trousers and tied with a string to keep sand and mud out. 
We each had a rubber bag for our things. These bags are so made 
that if the carrier falls in the river not one drop of water can get in. 
Dr. Johnson had a small box with lock and key in which we carried 
provisions for the road. We can get nothing of any account on the 
road except chickens. So we take enough to carry us through. We 
also gave each man enough food for the road. We did not get started 
until 9 o’clock. 


July is one of our dry months, but this year it is very wet, so the 
roads were bad. We began wading in mud and water immediately 
and were not out of it in all the four days of the trip. About noon 
it began to rain and it did rain, oh, so hard. We were wet through 
and through, but on we went. We came to a swamp—a dangerous 
place where every step one took he would sink to the knees in the 
spongy mass. There were roots and grass enough to keep one from 
breaking through. . If a foot would go in, then one must throw him- 
self lengthwise, else he sinks. It is much like hickory ice. When one 
steps on it, it goes down and returns after passing on. One can find 
no bottom with a stick. But we crossed all right. About 2 P. M. we 
got tired of the rain and finding a nice town we put up for the night. 
The chief gave us a house with two good Bulu beds in, and a good fire 
on the ground between them. It was very smoky but welcome. We 
removed our wet clothes, took a rub, and were soon warmly dressed 
in dry clothes by a blazing fire. Then we had to prepare our meal. 
We had two or three tin cans with bails—something like paint tins 
in which we cooked our food. After supper we prepared our beds. 
Bulu beds are made of bamboo poles, round ones, and not a thing to 
cover the ridges. They are not over six inches high. On these we 
spread our blankets and after a meeting with the people we retired for 
the night. One learns to sleep on one of these beds—from sheer ex- 
haustion, not from comfort. 


Next morning we were on the road at 5:40. First thing we had 
to cross a river.and waded water up to our thighs. Oh, but it was 
cold! The water is always cold out here. The mud and water was 
dreadful the second day. Hour after hour we waded—splash, splash! 
There was no help for it. Where there was no water the path was 


“THE BELOVED.” 133 


tramped into a jelly of nasty, sticky mud. At 10 A. M. we stopped for 
lunch and warmed by a good fire. At 3 P. M. we stopped for the 
night. And so we went on for four days, reaching Efulen at 12:40 
on Saturday. My feet were nearly worn out because of tight shoes. 
Otherwise I was all right and am still. This bad state of the road is 
not the usual thing. We try to go in the dry months and at such 
times the roads are quite passable. I never want another such trip 
as this. 


The people of Efulen are all well. They are as follows: Rev. 
and Mrs. Johnston, who came out when I did. Dr. and Mrs. Johnson, 
and their sweet little girl, seventeen months old. I am stopping with 
the Johnston’s but the houses are within calling distance of each 
other. 


LETTER TO TRINITY CHURCH—A SUP- 
POSITION. 


I want to call on your imagination a little. If you are a smalg 
boy just imagine you are a Bulu boy. Think yourself into his sur- 
roundings and see how you feel. You cannot go to school, for there 
are no schools. You cannot wear nice clothes and go to church, for 
boys do not wear clothes and there are no churches. You cannot hear 
the name of Jesus, so dear and sweet to little boys, for your own 
father and mother know nothing of Him, and there is no Sabbath 
school teacher to teach you. You cannot play nice games, for Bulu 
boys fight when they try to play. You cannot have a pocket knife, 
for you have no pocket, and some one will steal it if you lay it down. 
You cannot enjoy yourself at home, for your own father does not love 
you-and your big brothers will whip and beat you if you do not run 
their errands. And every stranger will catch or kill you if you wander 
away from your town. You are taught to hate and not to love. You 
are taught to lie, steal, gamble, curse, fight, and kill. You are full 
of fear, and altogether wretchedly miserable, day after day. Would 
you like to give up all your toys, books, clothes, playmates; your lov- 
ing papa and mama, your brothers and sisters, your home with all 
its joys? Would you give up all these and take up your abode in a 
native hut, to wallow in the dirt and be treated as a mean dog? 


- 


And you little girls, just imagine yourselves growing up in the 
native huts of the African bush. You have not as many privileges as 
your little brothers. Your fathers rejoice when you were born, but 
why? Only because they can sell you, and it means more goods for 
them. For they do not love you and will not turn over on their lazy 


136 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


‘beds to help or please you. You must begin work in the gardens at 
an early age. And when you are anywhere from five to ten years old 
you are sold for a few goats, guns, beads, and handed over to another 
‘tribe. Perhaps to some old ugly man whom you cannot love or bear 
the sight of, yet you are his wife, (or better, property), and must go 
off with him to his tribe, to be treated as a slave or worse. Or per- 
haps you are given on some palaver to a hostile tribe. So your misery 
begins early. Your lot is even worse than the boys. Would you like 
to live as Bulu girls live? ; 

Ye young men, the strength and pride of the nation, lay aside 
your education; your skill in the use of tools; your knowledge of 
agriculture; all your attainments which are the result of years of 
toil and training; all your cherished ambitions; leave them all behind 
and just for a few moments imagine yourselves in the place of the 
Bulu braves. You know nothing of the world but what little you can 
see in a few days’ tramp through the bush. You have no books. No 
entertainment to go to, except the heathen dance. You do not know 
how to till the soil. You do not know how to 4ise a single tool. You 
have no skill, except in the use of the spear, crossbow, gun and in 
‘beating the drum for the war dance. You are taught to steal all you 
‘can without being caught; cheat everyone with whom you trade; get 
‘all the goods you can, by fair or foul means; go to war at the call of 
your chief, whether there is a cause or no; kill everyone who contra- 
dicts you; avenge every wrong; trust no man; hate all men. What a 
fall from your exalted position! Would you like the exchange? 


Ye husbands and fathers, let each one of you leave your dear wife 
‘and children. Give up your pleasant home; turn your back on all that 
is lovable and sacred; break every fond tie which binds you to your 
loved ones, your home, your friends, your country. Think of them 
as existing only in imagination, and your real self as in Bulu land. 
No, do not even imagine your previous existence. Whip all civilized 
thoughts from your memory, and take up your abode in an African 
village, as chief of the town and surrounding country. You have per- 
haps thirty, fifty, ninety, or more wives to look after, and a score or 
two of children. One of your wives runs off with a better looking 
‘man and you are pretty mad. You are in constant fear lest others do 
the same, and thus your chattels vanish. You see your neighbor whom 
you hate, getting more wives and goods than you have, and your 
heart rebels. You see a man pass your town with some goods and you 
stone, rob, and perhaps murder him. You get thirsty for the sight of 
blood, and you send your young men to fight. You are growing more 
and more avaricious every day. You have no peace of mind. You 
get into palavers. Your wives run off. Your children curse you to 
your face. They even plot to kill you and get your wives and goods. 
Every man hates you and you hate every man. Oh, wretched man 


“THE BELOVED.” 137 


that you are, what can you do? Only the sight of blood will quiet 
you, and the first stranger who comes along is the victim. But your 
fears remain. Some one will bewitch you and you must constantly 
make medicine. Medicine for guns, goods, wives, and your own baby. 
You have no rest. Even your sleep is disturbed by the thoughts that 
your enemy is sneaking up to shoot into your house. So day after day 
your wretched life is prolonged. Fearing to live, dreading to die. 
May God pity you, and forgive us for leaving you in this hell on earth 
with no hope for eternity. Now go back to your loved ones, and, on 
comparison, see if you have anything for which to be thankful, and 
pray for your unfortunate brother. 


But ye wives and mothers, listen. At eight years you are sold by 
father. Your owner (he cannot be called your husband) has many 
other wives, and you have a very small portion of his love, if love it 
can be called. You care nothing for him, but for fear you obey him. 
Every time you offend his tyrannical will he gives you a terrible flog- 
ging—not with a switch, but with a club, butt end of a gun, or any- 
thing at hand. If you try to run away and are caught, your body will 
be gashed with the cruel knife. You must provide food for your own 
house, and give to your owner every time he demands it. If his friends 
come to trade, you must give them food as long as they stay, which 
is not less than one month and sometimes three. You are not al- 
lowed to wear cloth, or eat meat. For if you did, the lazy man would 
not have enough—in fact they have not as it is. You may be sold to 
a stranger at any time. Or if you do not please your owner he may 
send you away, and in such cases you are not wanted anywhere. If 
you have children, blessed are you among Bulu women, for then you 
have some one to love and care for, for a few years at least. But, 
alas! how few are the blessed. You must toil in the sun and rain, day 
after day, with no ambition but to keep your life within you. Your 
heart knows no love. You are moved only by passion, hate and fear. 
You have no honor, no respect, no shame. You are bought and sold 
as a beast and treated as such. Can you imagine such a person with- 
out sending a prayer to God for her? 

Once more. Ye, whose heads the frosts of many winters have 
glorified— the glory and honor of the home and church— lose your- 
selves in the jungle; forget your former days; transfer your abode to 
heathendom, and look around you. Your glory and honor are gone. 
Your snowy head is no protection now. Gray hairs are the signal for 
Tidicule and laughter, and even for persecution. You can no longer 
go to war. You can no longer go to the gardens for food. Why cum- 
ber ye the ground? Why don’t you die and give place to strength? 
Many of your old friends have been put out of the way, by starvation 
or worse, why are you left? You are not wanted any more. Why don’t 
you die? Die, die! what is death? Where shall I go? Oh, I fear 


138 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


death! Oh, catch me, for I am going to fall! What is this awful 
abyss I see? I cannot cross it. Oh, save me. Quick! What! Shall 
I perish forever? Must I die? Yes, you must, and be laid in a hope- 
less grave. All your life in bondage and fear, no one to comfort or 
love you, no one to care for you now, you are still in the hands of 
Satan. No hope here, none hereafter. Hell is your future home. 


I have thus tried to paint a little word picture to show you how 
the heathen lives. But the colors are very faint. The real picture 
must be kept from you. What your eyes see cannot be told. You 
cannot even imagine a picture black enough to embody what is daily 
seen in this dark land. But I trust enough has been revealed to re- 
enlist your sympathy and your prayers. Can you compare your lot 
with man, woman, or child of the bush and not feel thankful to God 
that He has not left you as they are? He hath given us much. Shall 
He not require much of us? The harvest is so great, and the laborers 
are so few. “Strengthen ye the weak hands, and confirm the feeble 
knees,” by your prayers, your lives. 


A SCHOOL IN THE BUSH. 


I had fixed up an old shed with slabs for seats where I thought 
I could accommodate all who would come. But when the bell was rung 
on the last day of August, the children came in such numbers that I 
had to carry more slabs and prepare more seats. Some even sat on 
the ground the first day. And the interest was not slackened or the 
number decreased as the days go by. There are sixty-seven names on 
the roll, and the average attendance has been 39%. This we think 
good for these people, for they do not know the value of an education, 
and there is so little inspiration for them to come. Only fifteen are 
boarding here. Two walk two miles every morning and return in the 
afternoon, and they are doing splendid work, too. Many boys have 
been refused as boarders because we have no house for them yet. 
With the new school house and a “dormitory,” (a rough, cheap struc- 
ture) which we hope to have soon, the number of scholars will be 
limited by the appropriation for the school work. We can have all 
the boys we can take care of. They are bright and seem to stick at it 
as well as any children I ever saw. One boy has, in twenty-five days, 
learned to read simple sentences and can print and write in a legible 
hand. The school lasts but three hours a day at present, and six days 
out of the seven. This boy studies hard the whole three hours, which 
is a difficult thing for a beginner to do. Several others are about up 
with this one, and only a few are of the slow order. Some of them lead 
in prayer at the opening or close of the school. Most of them can re- 


“THE BELOVED.” 139 


peat the Lord’s prayer, and some of them seem to believe the simple 
gospel truths which have been taught them. I have never heard a boy 
or a man gainsay, ridicule or scorn one thing which we have said, al- 
though to their minds most of the Bible stories are clear out of their 
range of thinking. 

On the whole the school work is very encouraging, and we all feel 
like pushing it as far as our limited means will permit. It was this 
encouraging turn of affairs which led us to build the school house. 
We were a little over one week at it, and it is a real good house as 
Bulu houses go. It is 16x24.feet, with a high roof. For seats we are 
having medium sized logs sawed once lengthwise, and we will put 
them on stakes driven in the ground. They will thus be very firm if 
not handsome, and will serve the purpose as well as carved mahogany. 

The morning services and the afternoon Sabbath school are well 
attended and are encouraging in every way. These are a hungry peo- 
ple, for they sit and listen to the Gospel story for a long while, and 
sometimes ask for more. They want to hear more of Jesus, that won- 
derful Son of God, and of His love to them. They will sit for hours 
after the services and listen to the songs and the guitar, and will beg 
us not to go. They are delighted when we go to the towns. But they 
are so many and we are so few. What can we do for all this starving 
multitude? 


DOWN TO THE COAST. 


August 15, 1897. 

My Dear Parents:—These are busy times. I am at the coast. I 
left Efulen on August 9 and arrived here by noon of the third day, 
and you will remember it is seventy miles. Seventy miles in two days 
and one-half. I had a good trip, too. No rain at all and most of the 
path was dry. 

I found every one well. Mr. and Mrs. Gault have just returned 
and are getting straightened up. I am now staying with them. They 
are well. Mr. Gault tells of his talk with father at the General Assem- 
bly. I am so glad to see some one who saw you so recently. 

I will have a lot to write when I get back and settled. Now every- 
thing is rush. On the morning of the 13th we were surprised to see 
the steamer anchored near by. I went out with three of my Bulu boys 
and showed them the steamer. They could not take it in very well 
but I think it did them good. It opened their eyes a little. They got 
very sick going out and while on the ship. We have to go out about 
two miles in a small boat for the water is not deep enough for the 
steamer to come in. 

Now, this morning we have another surprise; another steamer is 


140 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


in sight and may be here today as it is at a point eight miles north. 
If they get through there and come to us we must go out even though 
it is Sabbath. One thing which grinds is that if they come on Sab- 
bath we must go out and take our things or have them carried on. 
They never stop for Sabbath. Sometimes nearly the whole day is 
taken up by going out for boxes for the mission. But this is the only 
Way we can get our things. 


I expect to start back on Thursday, August 17, and stop over 
Sabbath at Efulen, then go on to Elat. 


DANGER ON THE WAY. 


Efulen, August 21, 1897. 


My Dear Parents:—I left Batanga August 17, and spent four days 
en the road. Had but eighteen carriers, all Bulu. We could not get 
one man from the coast to come to Bulu. There is so much robbing 
and trouble on the road that all are afraid. Two days before I left 
the coast a caravan was robbed of everything between here and the 
beach, and as we came along, just as we stopped for the night, we 
heard the guns. Soon two men came in and said they had been 
stopped on the path. Two guns were fired, but no one was hurt, only 
the caravan was scattered; everyone ran his own way. 


I had no trouble at all. Saw no one who looked suspicious. Slept 
out in the bush one night, and it rained. The little shed under which 
I slept leaked some, but I did not get wet. I gathered all my most 
valuable loads in a pile and tied them together so no one could run off 
with one. Two of the loads were worth $50 each, and I kept my eyes 
en them. 


Just the day before I left Batanga that little box arrived, and I 
brought it up. Soon after getting here I opened it and found every- 
thing all right. The slippers are nice and fit well. Please thank Ed 
Maxwell for the pair he sent me. The photos are splendid. I will 
try to write you about the pictures, now that I have all. I am 
thankful to get the seeds. Will plant them as soon as I get home. I 
am so grateful for all these things you send me. 


My carpet may be left behind, for I could not get carriers. I left 
fifteen loads at the coast and there are eleven here. The carpet, being 
so great a luxury, may have to luxuriate a while at Efulen. Hope 
not, but cannot tell how many men I can get to go. The necessary 
things must go first. 


I am feeling perfectly well. May God bless you all, is my prayer. 


“THE BELOVED.” 141 


August 30, 1897. 

My Dear Parents:—I am home once more and I am very glad to 
get safely back. On the way from Efulen we had rain every day and 
night. But we were not hindered much until Friday, when we did not 
get more than ten miles on account of high water. The men had to 
put their loads on their heads. From 6 to 12 I was in the water. One 
stream we waded took me just where my upper vest pocket ought te 
be. On Saturday morning we crossed the Mvile river with the water 
about one foot above the foot log and very swift. But we all arrived at 
Elat at 12:30 in good condition. I was away just five weeks and a 
half. I enjoyed it all but the last half day or two but they say I 
look worse than when I went away. 


Mr. Fraser has had several spells, bilious attacks, etc., and is 
not in good shape for working. Mr. Kerr has been down again with 
the fever and has decided to go home at once. It will take him some 
two weeks to pack up and at that time I hope to tell you all about my 
trip. I have not the time to do so now. I could not get many men as 
carriers, so had to leave many things behind. There are some twenty 
loads waiting to come. Among other things my carpet was left. I 
am sorry, for I am afraid it will not get up for some time. It is all 
right, however, and safely tied up at Efulen. 

The work is moving along nicely. The new Doctor is doing a 
Tushing business. On Sabbath day the meeting house would not hold 
the people. The windows and doors were full and many could not 
even see inside. The new organ is a great attraction and a great help. 
The singing does a great deal better with it, for it makes a noise. 

I will not write much this time for we do not know that this mail 
will ever reach the beach. 


THE FATHER’S CONCERN. 


New York, September 9, 1897. 
Mr. J. H. McCleary, Crawfordsville, Iowa. 

My Dear Mr. McCleary:—I am sorry to learn from your letter of 
the 6th instant addressed to Mr. Hand, that you have not heard from 
your son at Elat for so long. We have no letters direct from that 
station, either, but I have not felt any concern as there is frequently 
interruption of mails. Dr. Bennett, to whem you refer, arrived out 
in Africa some time in June. Writing to me under date of July 3, 
from Efulen, which point he had reached on his way to Elat, he says: 
“We leave for Elat, Dr. Johnson and myself, God willing, on Wednes- 
day morning next and hope to walk there in about six days.” As there 
is frequent communication between the two interior stations, and 


142 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


these brethren were expecting to start on their journey to Elat, I see 
no ground for apprehension. You are aware that those insignificant 
but troublesome tribal wars have interfered a good deal with our 
transportation, so that our missionaries have been afraid to send car- 
avans without the presence of a missionary. As it is not always easy 
to spare a man from the station, they have no doubt delayed sending 
I think, however, that we shall probably hear in the near future. 
When we do hear I shall let you know. Yours sincerely, 
Jobn Gillespie. 


A VACATION—A HARD TRIP—MR. KERR. 


September 10, 1897. 

Dear Mr. Reed and Friends of Trinity Church:—Dr. Johnson and 
I left here on July 21st. We had a very bad road for four days to 
Efulen. I enjoyed one week of rest at Efulen, then Rev. Johnston and 
wife and I went out camping for five days. We went about two hours 
walk from town and camped on the bank of a beautiful stream, right 
out in the jungle. We each had a guide who was well acquainted 
with the place, so had no fear of getting lost. We thoroughly en- 
joyed tramping around after game, being clear away from all the care 
and responsibility which weighs on us at the station. We secured 
twenty-three animals, eight of which were monkeys. The boys and 
men who were with us had a great feast for once. There is nothing 
quite so good to the Bulu palate as a piece of monkey. We saw four 
deer but did not get any, but we did get a good supply of squirrel, so 
we white people had a feast, too. This little outing did us all good. 


August 9th I started for the coast in order to accompany the car- 
avan all the way, for it is now unsafe for cloth and other trade goods 
to come even to Efulen without a white man along. I enjoyed getting 
to the sea after a year in the bush, but was glad when the time came 
for returning. Leaving Batanga August 17th with twenty men, and 
stopping at Efulen over Sabbath, I reached Elat on the 28th in good 
condition. It was a hard trip for the streams were up and we had 
rain every day. One day we did not get more than four or five miles 
and all the way we were in water. Hight times the men had to put 
their loads on their heads to keep them out of the water. The deepest 
I waded was very near to my shoulders. It is only due to the goodness 
of our dear Heavenly Father that I am not sick after such a trip. So 
far He has kept me in good health. I most sincerely hope that the 
time will come soon when we will not be compelled to expose our- 
selves thus. This being the dry season we cannot account for so 
much rain, but it came when I was out and I had to make the best 


_ “THE BELOVED.” 143 


of it. I was glad to get back to our dear home. There is no place in 
Africa, that I have seen, where I like it better than Elat. 

Mr. Kerr is going to start for home in a few days. He has prom- 
tsed to go to Montclair, and he can tell you more in an hour than I 
can write in a day. Don’t be afraid to ask him questions. I am sure 
you will enjoy his visit for he has been through all the interior work 
from the start and can tell all about it. I cannot say enough in 
praise of what his brother has done for the work, and for me. He 
has been like a brother to me. When I stepped on shore at Batanga, 
he was the first to grasp my hand, and we have been going hand in 
hand ever since. He has helped me in so many ways. He has been 
the leading spirit at Elat, and we will miss him so much. But he 
needs the rest and we give him a God-speed, praying that he may 
have a blessed time in the home land and a safe return to us. 


MORE LAND PURCHASED. 


We have just purchased a piece of land joining our hill on the 
east. We consider it quite a valuable acquisition, for on it is the 
spring from which we get our water. Now we have full control of the 
spring. Dr. Bennett has analyzed the water of the several springs 
near the hill and this one has the best water and it is the closest. 

Since Dr. Bennett came the medical work has gone on nicely. 
There is but one drawback—we do not give medicines away. The 
fee is very small, yet they think we ought to give to all who come, 
without charge. Many come and pay, however, and we feel much is 
being done in this way. 

The Baby organ is doing good service. People come from far in- 
land to see and hear the organ. And on Sabbath days some have even 
jumped up on the seats to get a better look at the wonderful box 
which talks. It is quite comical when some old chief loses all his 
dignity and jumps up in the midst of the service to come and get a 
good look at the instrument. They will sit for hours, if any one will 
play so long, and listen to it. 

Wishing you a merry Christmas, I close. 


DR. BENNETT’S GOOD WORK. 


Batanga, October 20, 1897. 

My Dear Parents:—Dr. Bennett returned the 18th with a small 
caravan, lots of mail, and for the most part good news. As we see 
it now it was the all wise ruling of Providence that took Doctor on 
this journey. When he reached Lolodorf he found Mr. Roberts dying, 
and was, with the help of God, able to restore him. Mr. Roberts was 


144 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


taken down with the fever, and having no medical advice, took too 
much narcotics and was at the point of death. The Governor had 
taken charge of him, taking him up to his own house, but was able 
to do nothing. Doctor arrived just in time to save him. Fortunately 
he had with him just the right remedies, and after a few days they 
were able to take Bro. Roberts to the beach, where he speedily recoy- 
ered. Another thing Doctor was able to do on this trip was to gain 
the good will of the government by caring for some soldiers who were 
shot in a late fight with the Bene people to the north of us. On ac- 
count of the lack of ammunition the soldiers had to return to the 
station, and some were badly hurt. Eight hundred thousand rounds 
of ammunition have now arrived and more soldiers, so it will go hard 
with the poor natives. 

Mr. Kerr reached the beach safely and started for home by S. S. 
Congo. He will reach New York long before this letter does. The 
returning carriers who will take this letter will start tomorrow and 
I will accompany them at least one day of the way, for they are 
afraid. This is the rainy season and we may get very wet. I will not 
write much for we are always afraid that mail sent in the care of 
natives alone may never reach the beach. But one of us will go down 
in a month to attend Mission meeting which meets in December. Then 
you can look for some mail. It is likely I am the one who will have 
to go, for Mr. Fraser is not able to go on the road. I would much pre- 
fer to stay here, study the language, keep in touch with the people 
and the work of the station, etc. But all things point to my going. 
It will take about two months. One pleasant side of it is that I will 
get to see many of the co-workers, and it will no doubt be a good 
spiritual feast. 

That watch you sent came this mail and it is all right. So far 
it has run well. I am very thankful to you for it. I sent my other 
one home by Mr. Kerr, who will get it fixed and send it back. 

Our cook broke out with a very loathsome and dangerous disease 
the last of the month. He had to go to town, and is now living in a 
house by himself. One of the school boys is cooking for us and he is 
doing well. It is so strange the way these boys take to our ways- 
The first trial he made good bread. 


A COMICAL SIGHT. 


November 3, 189T. 

My Dear Parents:—One of the most comical sights we have seen 
for a time was the appearance of a newly married couple at church 
a few weeks ago. The groom was that old medicine man I told you 
about who went with me as guide up the mountain. He is quite an 


“THE BELOVED.” 145s 


old fellow and has three old wives. But he wanted another, so he: 
began paying goods on one. Finally the day came when he had paid 
enough to warrant the taking of the bride unto himself. We knew 
when he went for her and we heard that she was quite young, but 
were quite unprepared for the spectacle which presented itself on his- 
return. The marriage train arrived on Saturday. There was a big 
dance that night, and the next day, Sabbath, they danced most of the 
forenoon. Guns were fired and the drums roared and as his town is: 
not far away the noise disturbed our services some. About noon the 
old reprobate came up and he looked like one just out of the pen.. 
We lectured him for allowing a dance on the Sabbath. He said he: 
could not stop them and I believe there was some truth in what he 
said. We asked him where his new wife was and he promised to 
bring her up. Sure enough next morning he came with her to morn-- 
ing prayers. 

As he came in at the door I almost rolled off the seat with laugh-- 
ter. He was carrying the new woman on his back and when he let 
her down he took her in his arms. She was so shy, so cunning, and. 
she clung to him like a leech. But she was only about six years old 
and small for her age at that. And so he comes every Sabbath and 
frequently to morning prayers with his bride on his back for she is not. 
large enough to walk the short distance through the weeds. While. 
this has a comical side there is also a very serious one. Think of the- 
lot of that poor little one taken from her mother’s knee into such a 
life of wretchedness and shame. But it is the common lot of the Bulu 
girl. 

A sad event occurred a short time ago. An old man went up on the 
mountain to look after his traps. He did not return in the evening~ 
and the young men of the town went out on a hunt for him. They 
hunted all night and found him the next morning dead. What he died. 
of no one knows. He had been at church the Sabbath before and it~ 
is hoped that he heard the word which if he believes he shall live. 


A SAD SIGHT. 


I have told you that the Bulu believe that every person dies of a: 
witch. Whether one has a witch or not is never known till he dies 
and the way they find out is to have a post mortem examination. I. 
saw the whole performance and it is a disgusting affair. An old 
woman died last Sabbath and I went down to the town. The women 
were wailing, as is their custom when one dies. I asked if they~ 
would hunt for the witch and they said they would soon. I came 
back for Dr. Bennett and we went down to see what they would do.. 
A young witch doctor came and began his cruel cutting with a big- 
jack knife. To the Doctor it was an old story but to me it was very” 


246 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


‘strange. He was inclined to laugh but I was inclined to run. I man- 
vaged to stand it through, however, for I wanted to see to what length 
he would go. The operation did not last long, neither did it take him 
long to come to this startling decision. In less time than it takes me 
to write it he was done and with a knowing toss of his shaggy head 
he said, “Six witches. She saw a witch doctor.” If a woman sees a 
witch doctor she will die soon. Now, these doctors pass through the 
towns frequently, but the women are supposed to hide their faces. 
"This unfortunate woman saw one and death was the penalty. You 
-See here some of their superstitions. When will they ever know better? 


SCHOOL REPORT. 


November 8, 1897. 

My Dear Parents:—Last Friday was the last day of school for this 
‘year. I have just made up the report for this year. I will give it 
‘and you can see what has been done in this line. 

School opened January 12, and closed November 5. During this 
time there was a vacation of five weeks. Number of days taught, 174; 
‘total enrollment, 117; lowest number present on any one day, 19; 
highest number present on any one day, 44; average daily attendance, 
35 3-7; number reading the Testament, 20. 

This has put quite a number of boys under our care and it is to 
be hoped that a little good has been done among them. Some have 
been very regular in their attendance and have tried to learn. I send 
in this letter a sample page of the work of one boy who has been here 
‘only fourteen months. He is now our cook and is a promising boy. 
His name if Mfu’u. It is a pleasure to see these boys grow from the 
start. When they come they are as raw as the law allows, but they 
‘soon begin to take on a new appearance. When they come they are 
usually covered with itch and dirt, and sometimes sores which are 
very offensive. 

The above record is of the whole school, boarders and day schol- 
-ars. Now a word as to those who live with us on the hill. The whole 
number during the year has been 48. Not more than 20 have been 
here at any one time and the average daily attendance has been 11. 
“These have all come from a distance and work to pay for their food. 
These we call the boarders or the “Industrial School.” However, the 
most industrious part about it is to keep them at work. They do like 
to play. But boys are boys in Bulu land as well as at home. We 
earn to love them. They have become to me about like white boys. 
In many ways they are just as bright. 

There have been many visitors these days, and it is amusing to 
ssee them look at the pictures and listen to the organ. I have a few 


Mr. McCleary and three native boys. 


“THE BELOVED.” 147 


stereoscope views and even the old chiefs lose their dignity when they 
look at them. The fame of “that thing which you look through” has 
gone far in the interior and it is always asked for if any one comes 
around. There is one view of Christ on the cross and it is astonishing 
how they will look at it. One chief from the tribe east of us came one 
Sabbath with six of his wives and looked at the pictures for two hours. 
He looked especially long at “Christ on the Cross” and talked over 
it. It makes a good opening for one to talk to them and we feel that 
just this is a good education for them. We can talk to them better 
and they can understand more of what we say. 


PERSONAL REPORT FOR YEAR ENDING 
NOVEMBER 15, 1897. 


Before beginning to magnify what little I have done I wish to 
tell a little of what God has done for me. Every day of the year He 
has revealed himself to me in some new light. Some new manifesta- 
tion of His divine attributes has been given. He has given direct 
answers to prayers, and so established my faith more firmly. He has 
made me feel the power of His Spirit working within me. He has 
made me feel more than ever before how He, and He alone, can more 
than satisfy every desire. He has wonderfully kept me from every 
fear and has been more to me than I asked. Many a victory He has 
given me. Many a burden he has lifted. Few have been the sorrows 
and many the joys. His love has been so great. Communion with 
Him has been so sweet and refreshing. I cannot say enough in praise, 
or use words strong enough to express my gratitude for His goodness. 


HEALTH. 


I have had but one sickness. In the last of December I was down 
seven days with the fever. God was very near at that time. The 
medicine taken during this sickness so affected‘my eyes as to render 
them useless for a time and has perhaps slightly affected them per- 
manently. But I was soon restored to my usual strength and have 
been well ever since, with the exception of a day now and then when 
I felt a little too stupid for regular work. With a tramp out in the 
bush it passed away. 


RECREATION. 


TI enjoyed a good rest during the visit of Rev. and Mrs. Johnston 
at our station in February. In June we had three weeks of vacation 
in the school, and at that time I had a few days off hunting which 


148 CHARLES W. McCLEARY 


were very refreshing. On July 21, at the suggestion of my fellow 
workers, I went on a trip to Efulen for a change. Had a hard tramp 
down but a pleasant time while there. We went out camping for five 
days and had a delightful rest. Then I went on to the coast and re- 
turned in a few days with a few carriers, arriving at Elat August 
28, having been absent a little over five weeks. The change was 
good, but on the whole the trip was hard on account of the rains and 
bad roads. At the end of the year I find myself much poorer in flesh 
but on the whole strong and well. 


WORK. 


By the help of the Lord I was able to begin taking the Sabbath 
services in the native tongue the last of January, and have in all con-= 
ducted sixteen of the regular services, taking my turn with the other 
brethren. Have taught a class in Sabbath school every Sabbath and 
have made twenty-eight trips to the near towns, talking to the people 
as I went. All this work I have enjoyed much. Have received much 
good myself, and hope that I have been able to do a little good to 
those who tried to understand what I said in a stammering way. It 
is so blessed to be able to tell those who never heard of Jesus some- 
thing of His love. 

Most of my time and exertions, however, have been put on the 
school. I taught 133 days. This work has also been a source of joy 
to me. It is a pleasure to start a boy who has not known a letter 
and soon see him reading in a Testament, or going over the multipli- 
cation table. Here one can see his work bearing fruit. The boys 
grow in knowledge before one’s eyes. Then one is able to explain 
much of the story of Jesus to them as they read the Testament over 
and over. This part of the work, humanly speaking, has not been 
in vain. We see the fruit even now. 


STUDY OF THE LANGUAGE. 


I regret to report again that the study of the language has been 
crowded out somewhat. But the work in the school has, in a measure, 
taken the place of the more systematic study and I have been greatly 
helped from this source. I have also tried to write all my Sabbath 
talks and this has helped much in fixing the language. 


OUTSIDE WORK. 


Having spent most of my forenoons in the school I have tried to 
get outside in the evenings, and work in the garden or wherever my 
help was most needed. In this way a little was accomplished and re- 
ceived much needed exercise. All in all it has been a blessed and 
profitable year to me, and I trust what little I have done has helped, 
or will help, some one else. 

Humbly submitted in weakness. 


LETTER TO WASHINGTON GAZETTE. 


November 18, 1907. 
Dear Editor Gazette:—In a few days I will leave for the coast to 
attend the Mission meeting. We cannot all go to this yearly meeting 
and leave things in care of the natives, for we are not sure we would 
find much when we returned. Some one must stay by the “stuff” and, 
as it is not wise for one to stay alone so far from aid, two will stay 
‘and one go. It is my turn this year. 


How quickly the year has rolled around. When it comes time to 
make out one’s yearly report to the Mission and Board, there is so 
little to tell and the time has been so short. The dear Lord has been 
very good to us all in keeping us from sickness and danger of all 
kinds. And just here let me say a word in praise of Him who knows 
how to satisfy every desire of the longing heart. He has been more 
to me than I have asked. His love has been so great and communion 
with Him so uplifting. God draws very near to us out here, and, as 
Hudson Taylor said, “It is worth going to the ends of the earth to get 
nearer that great heart of love.” He is more than father, mother, 
brother and friend. 


The year has brought one change in the personnel of the station. 
In July Dr. A. L. Bennett arrived from the home land and rejoiced our 
hearts, indeed. We had been anxiously praying, hoping, trusting, 
waiting for a medical man to come to our station. Our prayers were 
heard. It is a great source of comfort to us to know that there is 
medical aid within reach. For nearly two years we were without such 
aid. He is the first doctor these people ever saw and it is wonderful 
how soon they learned to trust him. He has been able to relieve a 
great deal of suffering. Surely this is a work of the Lord. 


While we were thus rejoiced to have Dr. Bennett come to increase 
our number we were made sorry by the hasty departure of Mr. Kerr 
in September. He left because he very much needed the bracing up 
in health which the home land can give. We hope to see him with us 
by another year. 


The school report for the year is quite encouraging to us. 
There is a great deal of satisfaction in seeing the boys grow in knowl- 
edge. When they come here they have not so much as seen a book. 
Soon they begin to read and when they get into the Testament it is 
a real joy to explain the story of the Cross to them as they read. 
They are no longer black skinned boys to me, for I have learned to 
love them like the white skinned ones at home. 


150 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


The war troubles have subsided for the present. This trouble 
was a source of much suffering from wounds and was the direct cause 
of nineteen deaths. Then it hindered our work much. Friendly rela- 
tions have not yet been established and until they are we will work at 
a disadvantage, for nearly all the other tribes are afraid to send their 
children here to school and it is harder for us to go among them and 
do good work. It has also greatly hindered our Sabbath services. 
The average attendance at Sabbath school has been about ninety and 
that of the regular services about 100. These are interesting services 
and it is a joy to take part, even in the stammering way we use the 
language. We have made many trips to the near towns, telling the 
people of Jesus. They are always delighted to see us come to their 
town and will listen and promise to do better. We are trying to sow 
the seed and we have faith in God that sooner or later, we know not 
when, they will not only promise but they will do as they promise. 
There are many disappointments and discouragements, but they all 
clear away as the morning mist. The joy in knowing that we are 
trying to do the Master’s will makes it a blessed work. 

So the year has rolled on, bringing many things which have filled 
our hearts with gratitude and hope. Even now we see some fruits of 
our labors, but the Lord alone knows what the harvest will be. 


MUCH SICKNESS. 


November 30, 1897. 

“Man may plan, but God overrules.’” You will notice that in my 
letter of November 3, I said that I was going to attend Mission meeting 
and would leave here on the 22d. It is now the 30th, and I am still 
here and will be for a good while to come if I take the advice of the 
doctor. The spirit was willing but the flesh was weak. I had all my 
things packed on Saturday night ready for an early start on Monday 
morning, the 22d, but on Sabbath morning I was quite sick and it 
took several days to find out what was the matter. Doctor pronounced 
it inflammation of the bowels, and it is due, perhaps, to over-ripe 
pineapple. It is still with me. I am up and around now, but have a 
very uncertain feeling and the Doctor says the hot sun or bad water 
might bring on a chronic state which would last for a long time. 
Hence I am going to stay at home for a while. Mr. Fraser has de- 
cided to go but he is far from well, and we are fearful of the result 
of the long tramp. To add to the complication Doctor took the fever 
on the 28th, and is still not in the best of condition. So we are all run 
down somewhat. But those who stay are going to try to take it easy 
for a little while. This is the first sickness I have had since last De- 
cember. The dear Lord has been very good to us all. He knows how 


“THE BELOVED.” 15t 


to take care of us and give us just what we need-for our good ané 
His glory. 

The Doctor is doing good work. From his report I take the fol- 
lowing which covers a period of nine weeks. New cases, 91; return 
visits, 423; prescriptions refilled, 326; teeth extracted 14; operations, 
2. He has relieved a vast amount of suffering and is doing a grand, 
good work. The people have complete confidence in him. 

It is wonderful the way they trust the white man. If they want. 
to go away they will bring any thing to us which they want in safe 
keeping. They trust us before any of their own people, and as they 
never get cheated or deceived they grow more confident. 


A GOOD SHOT. 


The other day we had an exciting, and in the end gratifying, 
little chase. A man came up and said there was a big monkey in a 
tree at the foot of the hill. I grabbed my rifle and ran after him. 
When we arrived the monk had started for the mountain but hearing 
him we took after. Soon we saw him on a high tree letting himself 
down from branch to branch by the tail. I took a flying aim and fired 
and to my surprise he came crashing down through the trees and 
struck with a thud. We ran to the place and found that the ball had 
passed through his heart. This is the best shot I ever made, I think. 
The tree was fully 100 feet high and 60 yards away, and the monk 
was running. He weighed fifteen pounds and measured five feet and 
eight inches from tip to tip. I have the skin and the boys had the 
soup. This is a mixed letter, but so is our life in Africa. 


LETTER TO TRINITY CHURCH. 


January 10, 1898. 

Dear Brother Reed and Friends:—Even before I write this letter 
I feel ashamed of what it will contain. There is so little to tell. Very 
little, indeed, has been done since my last letter. Dr. Bennett and I 
have been holding the fort while Rev. Fraser was at the coast. He is 
now back with good news, a great stack of letters, and provisions, 
~some of which we were needing badly. 

Your unworthy representative has not improved as was hoped, 
but he has been doing what little there was which seemed necessary. 
We have had services every Sabbath and they have been well attended. 
“That little organ is the life of the service. In fact they would rather 
hear it than my elegant addresses, which seems very strange consid- 
ering the quality of my Bulu. But I praise God that they do under- 
stand what we say sometimes, and it seems to encourage them to tell 
‘them that they must hear God’s words, and then they can hear the 
organ. The other day some elderly men jumped up on the seats to 
get a better view of that “box which talks,” and they come every day 
and want it played for them. It always opens up a way to talk to them. 

We have no school now, and it is encouraging the way the boys 
-come and ask when we are going to “make” school again. They say 
they are tired resting and want to come back. I am so sorry that 
we will have to go slow for a while for we are not yet fit for good, 
earnest work. We must look first to our health. But by God’s help 
we want to start up soon. 

I have spent several delightful days in the forest. How I should 
love to conduct a party of Trinity people up our beautiful mountain. 
It would cure me sure. During my wanderings I have shot my eighth 
‘monk. You may think I have little respect for our hairy ancestors 
-and I fear it is too little. 


January 11, 1898. 

My Dear Parents:—The mail will leave in three hours and I have 
not written you anything yet. Fortunately I have written John and 
Rob. Mr. Fraser arrived unexpectedly on the 8th. We were rejoiced 
‘to see him and to get the needed provisions and the mail. He is well, 
far better than either of us: Dr. Bennett is very sick. He has had 
-haematuria with his fever, and other complications, and we have 
thought best that he go to the coast for a change and try to get help. 


“THE BELOVED.” 153 


He has fought bravely, but has not been able to get ahead of his 
troubles which are all very serious; especially serious is the fact that 
he is losing albumen. If this is not stopped, he says it will run into 
Bright’s disease. So there will be but two of us here. I see that you 
thought that I had been here alone. This we will not allow if possible. 
No one has been here over night alone. It is not best for one man to 
be at such a place alone. It is too far from assistance. I had a little 
more of my bowel trouble the other day but we think it is not so bad 
as it was at first. 


THE CARPET ARRIVES. 


My carpet is here at last. Now I will put it down as soon as pos- 
sible and try to get some comfort out of it. It is very nice and I wish 
you to express my thanks again to those who had any thing to do with 
the making of it. It has been a long time on the road, but it is all right. 


Mr. Fraser brought up some yeast and we will have bread again. 
And he brought butter, coffee, tea, milk, etc., for which we are so 
grateful. He also brought some potatoes and onions. 

I have not time to write more now. There are about 200 natives 
all around the house selling food and talking. The carriers are tying 
the Doctor’s loads and so I will say good bye. 


CULINARY TRIALS. 


February 21, 1898. 

My Dear Brother and Sister:—I am the cook this week, or rather 
have charge of the pantry, and must try to scrape up enough for our 
African appetites. We have a Bulu boy whom we call cook. He builds 
the fire, cooks the porridge and all the Bulu dishes we use, and does 
other common work about the kitchen. He used to make the bread, 
but of late he has not made it good, and we have to try it. It is great 
Sport (?) to make bread. The other day I tried to make some light 
cakes, and they are not quite a failure, either. They are the best kind 
of bread we have had for some time. Our trouble seems to be with the 
yeast. I have made all the yeast we have had at the station since 
Bitombi left, except when Mrs. Johnston was here and once when Mr. 
Fraser made a glorious fizzle out of it. But something is wrong some- 
where in these days of trial and tribulation in Bulu land. Our cook 
does not heat the oven evenly and so our cakes often burn. Some- 
times the bread is sour, and the biscuits are like bricks. We need 
cast iron stomachs with brass lining to stand the wear and tear of the 
various concoctions originated in our culinary department. Or if we 
had our alimentary canals made out of gutta percha we might live 


154 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


longer. But perhaps we ought not to try to improve on God’s plan, 
but rather fall in line with it and let some one get married. Thus, 
perhaps, we would have a decent cook. This strikes the root of the 
whole matter. But some of us are too old. Other’s can’t. So the 
trouble remains. One thing sure, I am not in the condition I was two 
years ago. But I praise God that I am as well as I am, for it might 
be much worse. I have had no sign of fever for over a year, for which 
I am profoundly thankful. 


A MUTTON FEAST. 


February 22d:—Long live the memory of George Washington. I 
was disturbed in my reveries yesterday and it is perhaps a good thing, 
for I might have said something if I had kept on. The disturbing cause 
was a big sheep which our workman was vainly trying to catch. I took 
my rifle, which is a terror to all Bulu (many of whom were standing 
around when I went out), and as Mrs. Sheep stopped to get her breath, 
I sent a ball through her head and neck, cutting the jugular vein. 
And now I must tell you why this slaughter of the innocent ewe. It 
is our custom now and then to give the school boys a little feast. At 
present we have several sheep and goats and they are making us some 
trouble. So to get rid of the care of the animal and to please the boys, 
and also that we might have some fresh meat, were the objects in kill- 
ing the beautiful animal. After the skin had been removed, the meat 
was chopped into small pieces and put into the big kettles with rice. 
These were placed on the fire and boiled for three hours. The hair was 
singed off the skin and feet, and they were placed in a separate kettle 
and boiled, for nothing is thrown away when an animal is killed. Af- 
ter we had our supper, and had cleared out the main room, we opened 
the doors. I wish you had been there to have seen them rush in. We 
had invited all those who attend school, and our workman and his 
wife. One of the school boys is married and his wife came. They 
came in like a flock of sheep, seventy in number, and squatted down 
on the floor. About one out of ten had a cloth on. It was a black 
looking crowd. We sang and played for a while and then the ket- 
tles were brought in. Each boy had been told to bring a spoon and 
they were ready for work. We divided the rice and meat out into small 
kettles, dishes and pans. We had “kank” and bananas, also, and 
water to drink. So they feasted and cried for more. The supply was 
not as great as the demand, but they all said it was good, what there 
was of it. At 9 o’clock we dismissed them. This is the only social 
time we have at Ebolewo’e and we all enjoy it, heathenish though it 
may seem to you civilized people. 

Mr. Fraser has the school now and it is more prosperous than 
ever. I have charge of the boys in the afternoon, and am supposed 
to show them work and keep them at it. It is a hard task to keep them 


“THE BELOVED.” 155 


at it for they are very lazy. However, I manage to get some work out 
of them. We have thirty-three boarders now, and some, who do not 
live here, want work. We have done some clearing on the new piece 
of land, and will plant plantains, corn, etc. We do not expect it tao 
pay, but we must have work for the boys if we expect to keep them, 
We have put up a house over the spring. The boys would wash in it 
and we had to protect it. We also dug out a place where they can 
wash. If left to themselves they will not wash and soon get covered 
with itch and sores. They are as dirty as pigs and their hearts are 
more filthy than their bodies. Oh, but they are low in some things; 
lower than the beasts. Their conversation is vile. Their thoughts 
are impure and they imagine vain things. Their deeds are those of a 
Nero inspired of Satan himself. 


WAR TROUBLES. 


It does us good these days of war troubles with the Governor to 
see them scared. They are trembling at heart. Their bravery is all 
gone. They all try to keep on our side, and many accuse us of being 
on the side of the Governor. We are in a helpless condition if they 
want to be mean. We have no redress. We praise God protection ig 
coming. They are cutting roads so we can get to the sea without so 
much trouble, and perhaps we can get the mail regularly. Hindrances 
to our work may come, but for these we must be prepared. 

I have killed another big monkey, making nine in all which I 
have shot. One time when I was out in the bush I saw tiger tracks 
just freshly made. We see gorilla tracks, also, and often see the 
nests, or houses, of the apes up in the trees. 


February 24, 1898. 

My Dear Father and Mother:—We have an unexpected chance to 
send mail by a Bulu man of Efulen. So I will send a note, hoping 
you may get it. We received word from Efulen today by this same 
man. We are all right. The Governor is making war on the Bulu 
but we are safe in the arms of God. Great changes are being wrought. 
Roads will soon be cut out to the sea. The work is more prosperous 
than ever. We have thirty-nine boarders and there have been seventy= 
six in school on a single day. Sabbath services are well attended. All 
is working smoothly. Will have lots to write in my next letter. Thig 
is only a note of greeting which may never reach you. 


MANY TRIBULATIONS. 


April 17, 1898. 
My Dear Parents:—My head hurts too bad to write on the machine 
so you must bear with my writing. 


Surely ‘all flesh is grass,” and “the grass withereth.” How weak 
we all are! We have been waiting long and anxiously for the Doctor 
and now comes the word that he will not return to us. So we are 
left but two to carry on the work of this station. We were also expect- 
ing a caravan for we have had nothing since January 8th, and our 
goods and provisions are getting low. Neither have we had mail from 
home since that date. The loads were ready to come but there was 
no white man ready to come with them. There has been serious sick- 
ness at Efulen and it is hard for anyone to get away from there to 
us. So we have talked and planned and this is what we are going to 
try to do. I will leave here tomorrow for Efulen and possibly for the 
beach. I will have three-fold reason for going, to bring up a caravan, 
to settle up station accounts with the Mission treasurer and last, but 
not least, to try and get some relief from the terrible pains in my face 
and head. For nine weeks I have had the toothache. Had one tooth 
pulled but no relief. Neuralgia then came along and has kept up a 
song and dance in my upper story. From the crowded feeling up there 
there are surely no rooms to let, but I fear there will be soon if this 
feeling does not stop. But the dear Lord knows best. His hand is in 
this, and knowing this, I have nothing to say. When the pain goes 
away, as it does sometimes, I am so thankful. Perhaps I do not 
think of Him often enough and He takes this way to remind me, or per- 
haps this is punishment for some of my many, many sins. However, 
if He will it, I am going to seek relief. If I go this will leave Mr. 
Fraser here alone. He stays willingly, but it is a brave undertaking. 


Dr. Bennett goes to Angoin. He could not come back here on ac- 
count of not being able to stand the long walks, and Dr. and Mrs. 
Friend had to leave Angoin on account of sickness, so he fell into 
their places very conveniently. 

Angoin is on the river and all going is by water. We need help 
out here, but the Board is short of funds. Where, then, does the re- 
sponsibility lie? Is it not with the Church, and with the individual 
members of the Church? We will do the best we can, and God is ever 
near so we will get along somehow. But we feel that we ought not 
to tempt the Lord in this way. 

We have dismissed school. Mr. Fraser has had it for twelve weeks 


“THE BELOVED.” 157 


and good work has been done. We had forty-four boys as boarders 
for a while and eighty-nine was the highest limit on any one day. 
This is more than ever before. 


“OUR FARM.” 


You ought to see our farm. We have put a fence all around our 
land, a picket fence, so no one can get in except at the two gates near 
our house. Then we have planted corn—four or five acres—and plan- 
tains. There are about 4,000 plantains growing now. The corn is just 
coming out in tassel. We have quite a patch of old Iowa yellow corn, 
the start of which was twelve grains, which you sent me. The sweet 
corn looks nice, also; but that which pleases me most is the way the 
Irish potatoes are growing. They are out in blossom. Then we have 
rice, cotton, beans, pineapples by the hundred, beets, peas, okra, etc. 
In our flower garden we have roses in bloom, oleander, balsams, 
cypress, zenia, morning glory, etc. As to live stock we have six cats, 
seven goats and one monkey. Then there are fowls which we cannot 
keep count of, perhaps sixty or seventy. As to fruit trees we have 
nine cocoanuts, eight som-sap, four mango, twenty date palms, forty 
palm oils, pawpaw without count, eleven orange and about ten limes. 
So you see we have quite a farm. Come and see us. 

Our Sabbath services have been well attended. I have had the 
boys and there have been from forty to fifty all along. Sometimes the 
meeting house will not hold the crowd which comes. At the last 
service about fifty went away because there was no room. 

In another letter I have written something of the transformation 
which has taken place among the Bulu. It is marvelous, but it is 
also disgusting the way they do. There is no more shooting and rob- 
bery of caravans, but there is more robbery being done than ever, 
and this all in the name of the Governor. It is absolutely impossible 
not to offend these worthy men who have been elevated to the posi- 
tion of petty governors. If any one does not speak he is fined for 
disrespect. If one talks in the presence of his worthiness he is fined 
for disrespect. If one spits he is fined. Only yesterday a man was 
fined eight strings of beads for winking one eye. One cannot whis- 
per, smoke a pipe, wear a hat, wink his eye, etc. The big chiefs are 
imposing on the lesser ones, but the German Governor is coming to 
visit us and he will fix these things up, perhaps. Everything is now 
unrest. 


MORE TRIBULATION. 


Efulen, April 25, 1898. 

My Dear Parents:—I arrived in Efulen in good condition after 
four days’ tramp. The road is being cut and the streams bridged, so 
ere long we will not have to wade in the water. But I was grieved to 
find affairs so bad at this station. Mrs. Johnston is very sick and help- 
less—paralyzed in upper and lower limbs. On March 13th she gave 
birth to a little boy. The boy is all right but the mother came near 
death’s door. She will have to be taken home and Dr. and Mrs. John- 
son will accompany them as Mr. Johnston cannot care for the wife 
and child both. Then it will soon be time for Dr. and Mrs. Johnson 
to go on a furlough. So they will close Efulen station for a time. I 
will stay here and help get ready and help them to the coast. Then 
I will go back to Elat. Mr. Lange will go from here now to keep 
company with Mr. Fraser. I am all right. From the time I left Elat, 
my teeth have not troubled much, but the Doctor says I have two 
very bad ones. 


Efulen, April 30, 1898. 

My Dear Friends of Montclair:—As I am away from home you 
must bear with my poor handwriting. I am sorry that my letters 
lately have been written in such haste. There are so many changes 
that we cannot tell three days ahead where we will be or what we 
will be doing. Perhaps you have not been able to keep up with us in 
our rapid movements on the field. It must be very discouraging to the 
people at home to see so much sickness on the field and so many re- 
movals from the work. The last stroke will no doubt be the hardest 
for it necessitates the closing of Efulen station for a time. All mem- 
bers of this station expect to leave within a week. You have no doubt 
heard that Dr. Bennett is not coming back to us. This will leave but 
three workers in the interior, namely, Mr. Lange of Lolodorf, and Mr. 
Fraser and myself. You will, perhaps, see the minutes of the Batanga 
station in regard to Dr. Bennett. He goes to Angoin. This leaves us 
in a bad way, humanly speaking, at Elat. But God has led us hitherto, 
and He will lead us on. We were three months without word from 
the coast, and were anxiously awaiting the return of Dr. Bennett, 
when word came that he was not coming, and worse, that there was 
Serious sickness at Efulen. 

The word came on Friday and I left Elat on Monday, leaving 


“THE BELOVED.” 159 


Mr. Fraser alone. It was hard to go away and leave only one person, 
so far from any other white man, but we both thought it best, for 
three reasons. We needed supplies and wanted mail. No one could 
come to us, so one of us must go, not knowing that the road was safe 
for a caravan without a white man. Then we wanted the station ac- 
counts settled up, which could not be accomplished without a meeting 
of the station and Mission treasurers.. Arriving at Efulen I found 
them on the point of leaving for home. But found, also, Mr. Lange. 
We persuaded him to go to Elat. I will help here to care for the sick, 
and the baby, and to pack, then help them get to the coast. From 
there I shall return to Elat and let Mr. Lange go to his station, Lolo- 
dorf. You see our force is too small. We need help. We cannot ex- 
pect to do more than hold the ground already gained. We can do no 
aggressive work. I fear our reports will be very unsatisfactory to 
the people at home. But we will do the best we can. Word has come 
that we must hurry off to the coast to catch the north bound steamer. 
Will try to write more at the coast. 


A TRYING JOURNEY. 


Batanga, May 13, 1898. 

My Dear Parents:—I think I wrote you last from Efulen. We 
finished packing and left that station on May 4th. We had about fifty 
carriers, seventeen of whom were hammock men. Mrs. Johnston had 
to be carried on a stiff bed, and she and the bed were so heavy that 
it took eight men to get her down. They carried two at a time and 
walked ten minutes, then changed. It was very hard on them. Then 
Mrs. Dr. Johnson had six men for her hammock, and two others car- 
ried Mary, their little girlk One man carried the baby. Fortunately 
the Commander came down just ahead of us, and he made the Bulu 
cut out a good road. Still we were six days on the road. We had a 
tent along which was put up every night. One night we camped in 
the bush. It rained one day, and we were kept back. But we were 
Tejoiced to get to get to Batanga a little after noon on May 9th. Found 
the coast people all well. They came out to meet us. Found Mrs. Reut- 
linger of Benito at Batanga. Was so glad to see her for she is my 
African Grandpa and was on theNiger with us when we came toAfrica. 
I room with Rev. Knauer and take meals at Mr. Gault’s. Mrs. John- 
ston stood the trip well. Dr. J. had fever but would not give up, and 
he is much better now. Carriers arrived today from Elat with Dr. 
Bennett’s things and word that Mr. Fraser and Mr. Lange are well. 
We look for the English steamer every day. A German steamer called 
yesterday, but brought us nothing. i am busy with the station ac- 


160 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


counts. It is a hard job for in some cases I have to go back in the year 
796 to get what I want. But with the Mission books and treasurer we 
hope to get out of the hole. Thanks be to God the roads are cut to 
Elat. Men came through this week, and no one thought of molesting 
them. We are going to try to have mail go through every month. I 
will go back as soon as I can get off. One day I was a little under the 
weather. I received a box of handkerchiefs for Christmas on the 
10th of May. They are very nice. They came from Mr. Hickman’s 
sister, Mrs. C. D. Hunt of Philadelphia. Had a ride on the sea yes 
terday in a canoe. Must close, with love to all. 


THE BATANGA STATION. 


Batanga, May 26, 1898. 
My Dear Young Friends:—I am now at Batanga on the coast 
I want to tell you a little about this station. Heretofore I have writ- 
ten principally about the work at Elat and perhaps you are not famil- 
iar with Batanga or our relation to it. 


Our Mission has three stations on the Atlantic coast, viz: Batanga, 
Benito, and Baraka, or Gaboon. Gaboon and Benito are in French 
territory, and Batanga is in German. Some years ago Gaboon was the 
center of our work, but of late years it has shifted somewhat to the 
north, so that Batanga is now our principal station. It is at Batanga 
that we gather for our yearly Mission meetings. Sometimes you will 
see it written Great, or Big Batanga, and perhaps you have an idea 
that it is a great city. In this you are mistaken. It is called great to 
distinguish it from a place some twenty miles north of here, which is 
called Small Batanga. There are perhaps 2000 natives in what is 
known as Big Batanga. At this place there are three trading posts, 
called factories, where there are from three to five white traders most 
of the time. Miss Nassau, one of our oldest missionaries, is also lo- 
cated here. But our Batanga station proper is located some two miles 
north of the native town, and is known locally as Bethel. Do not get 
these things confused. Bethel is the local name of the Mission sta- 
tion situated near Batanga. At Bethel there are dwelling houses for 
missionaries. Their names are: Seaside cottage, Syracuse cottage 
and Prospect cottage. The school house is at Bethel, but the church 
is at the native town near Miss Nassau. They have a new church 
about completed, and the lumber is there for a new school house. 


“THE BELOVED.” 16# 


AFRICAN NEW YORK. 


All our mail and supplies are landed at Batanga. This is our sea 
port, our New York. How do our supplies get here? By coast steam— 
ers. There are two lines, one English and one German, each of which 
sends a vessel down the coast every month. Thus there are two steam 
ers a month from the north, and these usually stop on their way home,,. 
so there are often four steamers a month which stop at Batanga. 
There is no harbor here, so the steamers anchor some two miles out 
from the shore and we must go to them in surf boats. Now, this is no 
fun and often extremely dangerous when the surf is high. Those of 
you who have not seen the ocean cannot understand this surf. The: 
water is always in motion. Even when there is no wind, there is a 
constant rolling of the waves on the sandy beach. Wave after wave 
comes rolling up day and night. These break near the shore and may 
be anywhere from two to ten feet high. When the breakers are from 
six to ten feet high we make no attempt at going out, and the steamer: 
must wait for a quiet sea. Very often we get wet and our goods 
usually get a shower bath or two before they can be carried on shore. 
When we missionaries go out the boat is first launched, then a big: 
black man comes, picks us up, and carries us out to the boat which 
is tossing up and down on the breakers. Sometimes they let us fall 
into the salt water and we both feel and look queer. We always feeF 
happy if a breaker does not go clear over the boat. As soon as the 
men row out beyond the breakers, we are in no danger for the boat 
rides the waves in safety. There are places along the coast where it 
is impossible to land for the surf is so bad that it would capsize the 
boat. , 


Thus all our goods and mails are landed at Batanga and are car- 
ried up from here by the natives. Now you see why everything sent 
to me must be addressed to Batanga. Elat is not known to the seamen 
and mail addressed to Elat, W. A., might never reach me. But every 
one knows Batanga, and at Batanga they know where we are and so 
send our things on. Now I hope you understand our relation to Ba-— 
tanga. It is pleasant to get down here and catch some glimpses of 
civilization and meet our fellow workers, but I am always in a hurry 
to get back to our mountain home, where the air is cool and bracing. 
Down here it is stuffy and the air is full of moisture. We are 2260: 
feet above the sea and the change is very gratifying. Yet many pre- 
fer the coast, and those who are here are doing a noble work for the 
Master. There are many native Christians here, and it is nice to see 
them and hear them preach to the others. Many of the natives speak 
English, but up in Bulu not one word can be understood if we speak 
in our native tongue. We must talk Bulu if we want to be understood.. 


This is my third trip to Batanga since I came out in November, 1895. 


162 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


I will go back to my work in a few days. Oh, my dear young friends, 
there is so much to do out here in this big field. So many who have 
never heard of God or Jesus, and who want to hear. They are crying 
for more “white men who talk God’s words.” Remember us in your 
prayers. On my trip home I will meet hundreds who have never heard 
the Good News. May God help me to preach to as many as I can. 

Do not forget to pray and study God’s word. If you want to be 
really happy, forget self and think of and work for others. Self is 
your greatest enemy. Tramp that enemy down now, for every day 
he grows more powerful. Watch, work, and pray. Satan is ever ready 
sto seize the careless, idle, and non-praying boy or girl. May the dear 
Lord bless you all abundantly. 


Batanga, May 28, 1898. 

My Dear Parents:—I have been so busy, and have written so many 
letters since I came to Batanga, that I really do not know what I have 
written to you. We arrived at Batanga May 9th, at 12:30 P. M. We 
were met by loving friends who came out a piece to meet us. We had 
all stood the trip quite well. The home goers left on the steamship 
Congo May 18. I was not well that day, and did not go to the steamer 
~with them, but as I stood on the shore and watched them, as they 
“were rowed out, I felt a little lonely. They were our near neighbors. 
‘Now we have no half way station as we go to Elat, because Efulen 
is closed for the present. But worse, the truth dawned upon me that 
it left the interior work with a small force, indeed. Just three of us, 
“Mr. Fraser and me for Elat, and Mr. Lange, a newcomer, for Lolodorf, 
‘and the latter station is not opened yet. There is such a broad field— 
extending even to the center of this great continent, with millions 
dying without the Gospel, and there are but three of us weak men to 
tell them the life giving news. Oh, how we need more workers. Pray 
for us. As to the friends here there were three surprises for me. 
First, Mr. Merkel and Miss Babe were married some few weeks before 
we came down. This was a surprise to us all, but strange things will 
‘happen. May they live long in the service of the Master. Then Mrs. 
‘Reutlinger of Benito was here. She was on the same steamer with 
“us on our trip out and was one of our counselors. We young mis- 
‘sionaries used to call her “Grandpa,” and some of us do yet. It is 
ta blessing to be in her presence. She came to this field before I was 
born. She is filled with the Spirit, and naturally is very earnest in 
the work. Then Mr. Bates, whom I met the first time I came to Ba- 
tanga, was here for a few days. He is not one of us officially, but 
he is doing some missionary work on his own hook, as well as doing 
much in the study and comparison of the languages and in collecting 
specimens. I enjoyed his company for a few days. The friends here 
mre well. 


“THE BELOVED.” 163 


THE BEAN BOX. 


As you know I am Elat treasurer. We handle no money. Every- 
thing is done on paper, and is very much confused. This was my work 
for nearly two weeks—to straighten things up with the aid of the 
Mission treasurer and his books. It was a happy day when we finished, 
and most gratifying because we came out so near even. There was 
over $4400 to account for, and we were able to find where all of it 
went save $2.39. But in the midst of these accounts the steamship 
Niger came in. This is my old ocean home, and I went out to see 
her jolly captain, Fred Davis. He was just as jolly as ever. The 
Niger brought eighty-one boxes for the Mission and one of these 
boxes was an old bean box marked C. W. McCleary. Somehow it at- 
tracted my attention at once, and as soon as I could get at it I opened 
it. And there were those things, packed by loving hands at my old 
home—dear old home! Why am I thus remembered? I do not de- 
serve it. You are all so thoughtful, so good to me. I cannot thank 
you enough. Everything was all right. The quilt, of course, was the 
center of attraction. What patient work of loving hands is here repre- 
sented. I want to ask you to express to each one who had any part in 
it my most hearty thanks. And especially am I grateful to the one, 
or ones, who started it, and kept up interest in it until its comple- 
tion. It got a few stains from the fruit but not enough to damage it. 
The fruit looks nice. Thanks to the senders. And the fruit cake was 
all right. ,Mrs. Gault put it in the oven a few minutes, and it was as 
fresh and nice as ever. The candy, too, was nice. The pictures from 
Rev. McAulay are fine. He has become quite an artist. Please thank 
Mr. and Mrs. Thompson for me. I think that picture book from Beth 
and Anna will please the Bulu children very much. I will tell them 
about it when I show it to my boys. The potatoes are growing. I will 
try to plant them when I get home. That little sachet bag is very 
pretty—the more so because of the hands which worked on it, and the 
mother’s love which is woven in with every stitch. This box arrived 
nearly two weeks before the letter telling about it, although the let- 
ter was started first. So I wrote Mr. McAulay a few days ago, and sent 
the letter south. But another chance has come of sending mail much 
quicker, so this will perhaps reach you before his letter does. The 
mail is very uncertain as to time. I think, if we give it enough time, 
all our mail comes. 


The last few days I have been buying some trade goods, and pack- 
ing it ready for a start to the bush May 31st. Yesterday I was out to 
a German steamer and took three Bulu out to see her. Today I had 
three teeth filled by Dr. Cox. He did not hurt me and I feel that he 
did a good job. Two of my teeth were very bad. The one I had pulled 
at Elat is perhaps not the one which gave me the trouble. Too bad 


164 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


to lose a good grinder. They will be getting few soon, but I trust 
they will not cease altogether. I am feeling first rate now and I hope 
to get home soon. 


HOME AGAIN—A CORDIAL WELCOME. 


Elat Station, June 13, 1898. 


My Dear Parents:—Home again. Oh, how nice it is to get home. 
I was away nearly nearly eight weeks and things have changed some, 
but I am glad to get back. I love this place. I love these people. I 
love to work among them. The other day when I came near Elat the 
people along the road would gather around me, not from curiosity, 
but because they had a kindly interest in me, and they were glad to 
see me coming back. They called me their father, their white man, 
etc., just as though they owned me. And when I appeared at the top 
of Mvondo’s street a shout arose which went echoing down the length 
of the town, was taken up at Elat by the school boys, and then passed 
on to the lower end of Ebolewo’e. The children came pouring out to 
see me, and it did my heart good. May God give me strength to help 
them all. 


I left Batanga on May 31st, and arrived here on the 9th of June. 
Had a pleasant trip. I came the north route, by Bipindi, where I took 
breakfast with a German scientist on the 8d. Thence to Lolodorf, 
where I was kindly received by the German trader on Saturday even- 
ing. Sabbath day I sent the boys out to call the people and we had a 
good little service in the morning. In the afternoon I went out in the 
towns. On Monday morning, by appointment, I called on Herr Von 
Stein, the commanding officer of the German military station. This 
short visit was a treat. He is such a fine man. He could neither speak 
or understand much English, and I knew no German, but we got on 
nicely nevertheless. Monday night we reached the first Bulu town. 
I was glad to get among the Bulu again, and enjoyed the three days 
walk from there to Elat. So here I am, well and happy, and ready for 
work again. 

Mr. Lange will return to Lolodorf tomorrow and Mr. Fraser will 
accompany him. This will leave me alone at the station. But we are 
no longer alone at Ebolewo’e now. Two white traders have come up 
and they are building stores. Now we will have to work and pray 
for there are new influences at work against us. The rum is here 
and these people have no restraint, no strength of character. Then 
these traders lead immoral lives. But the people are already express- 
ing themselves as to their real friends, and some at least will stay 
by us. 


“THE BELOVED.” 165 


You ought to see the fine yellow corn and the sweet corn which 
has just matured. And best of al! we have grown fine Irish potatoes. 


A LETTER TO ENDEAVORERS. 


June 21, 1898. 

My Dear Christian Endeavorers:—The chairman of your Mission- 
ary committee has reminded me of your annual meeting in October 
and asks for a letter from me. What shall I write? Or how shall I 
address myself to you, my true-yoke-fellows in the Master’s cause? 
Your letters to me are so kind; your words so encouraging. Just 
now I am the only missionary at Elat, Mr. Fraser being away for a 
fortnight, but I am not alone. I realize the fact that I am upheld by 
the many earnest prayers which you offer for me both in public and in 
private. It rejoices my soul to read such expressions as these: “We 
are hand and heart in all that you are doing,’ and “You are not 
alone, but all that we can do or give to you is the thing we most want 
to do.” Expressions like these come with almost every letter and they 
are like wells of water to the thirsty traveler. And then you are al- 
ways asking me, “What would you like to have?” I am afraid you 
are too kind to me. Last year I asked for a Baby organ because I 
thought it would be a help in the work. And it has been. It draws 
these people to the services. Only last Sabbath I had a second audi- 
ence just because the organ was here. We had a house full and a 
good service, and just as we dismissed, a crowd came from a distant 
town saying they wanted to hear the organ. So I told them to sit 
down and we had another meeting. They like the singing and they 
nearly all try to help. They also like to look at pictures, and I have 
thought if you can send “Bible Lesson Pictures” such as have been 
used in the Sabbath school, they would be of great service. We have 
a few but they are much torn. If they were pasted on cloth they would 
Tast much longer. Several members have asked, “Would you like a 
camera?’ This is like asking a school boy if he would like a twenty 
dollar gold piece. He wants it, but he does not want to impose on the 
generosity of kind friends. I am not slow to ask for things which will 
help the work, but for personal gratification I can ask for nothing. 


I wish to acknowledge, with thanks, letters from the following 
persons: Misses Edith and Annie Carter, Keller, Meade, Raabe, 
Laura Ferris, Debevoise, Caroline and Eleanor French. Messrs. Priest, 
Alin, and Edward Carter, and Strong. Madams Brown and Mills. 


166 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


THE MISSIONARY’S MODESTY. 


Now, what shall I write about? Do you not get tired of me telling 
you so much about what I do? The big “I” comes in so often. But 
please know that it is not me but the work which I try, with God’s 
help, to do, that I want you to know about. I feel indebted to you, and 
feel that I ought to let you know where I go and what I try to do. 
With each letter I try to give a little personal report as your rep- 
resentative. 

I left Batanga on May 31st with only twelve men, eight of whom 
were Bulu and four Mebae. Most of our cargo had been sent on ahead 
the week before. Now, things do not always run smoothly even in 
Africa. I had more cargo than I had men. Each man can carry but 
about fifty pounds. I had more than this amount for each one, but I 
could find no one that morning who would go. So we started out 
hoping to find some one on the road. After a half hour tramp and an 
hour of waiting at a little river, we secured a man who took part of the 
plunder. We went by what we call the north route, by Kribi and 
Lolodorf. Kribi is on the coast north of Batanga about seven or 
eight miles. We reached Kribi about 11 o’clock. I called on the Dis- 
trict Commander and paid my respects to him. He was very kind; 
asked me to dinner, and even to stay all night. But my men were 
waiting and I had to refuse. From Kribi we took the Government 
road, which is a good wide road cut through the heavy timber, or jun- 
gle, and is a pleasant path to walk, for it is always shady and cool. 
A little after noon we came to a Mebae town and here we stopped for 
a rest and lunch. While we were thus engaged, the new man who 
came to help with the heavy loads took to the bush and did not return. 
I tried to find a man in the town who would help, but no one could 
be found, so there I was with an extra load. I could not leave it, and 
I had to retrace my steps to Kribi to hunt another man. After much 
Tunning about I found one, but when we got- back to where the men 
were it was time to put up for the night, so we made but about eleven 
or twelve miles the first day. The chief gave me a good house with 
a good bed, as native houses and beds go. He gave me a fowl and 
tried to treat me well. After supper I called the people to the public 
house and had a service, but after this was over they rewarded me by 


PAYS FOR LODGING. 


In the morning I had breakfast by candle light and was ready to 
start by daybreak. I gave the chief a candle, three boxes of matches, 
a comb, three bells, and a red handkerchief. The total cost of these 
articles is about 20 cents, but they made him very happy, and it 
abundantly paid him for his fowl and the use of his houses. The first 
thing we saw on the road was several men skinning a deer which 


“THE BELOVED.” 167 


they had caught in a trap. It must have weighed 200 pounds. At 6 
o’clock we passed the last town of the coast tribe, and were not to see 
another for days. But there are sheds all along this road where 
travelers sleep for the night as they pass. We made a long tramp 
that day, and passed many travelers on the way. At 3:30 P. M. we 
came to a fine shed and stopped for the night. This “nice shed” was: 
built by sticking a few poles in the ground, with cross sticks tied. 
across the top, on which were laid some large pieces of bark. The 
beds beneath the bark were the regulation pole beds. One never knows 
hard a piece of wood is, till you have slept on it. It was in this shed 
where I learned what a conglomeration of clans I had in my small car-- 
avan. One boy joined us on the road, so we were fifteen in all. There 
were four Mebae, eight Bulu, one Ngumba, one Kribi, and one white 
man. But of the four Mebae there were three different clans, and of 
the eight Bulu there were four different clans, so in all there were five 
tribes and ten clans represented. Such a thing would have been an 
impossibility a few years ago. The coming of the white man has 
brought the clans together, which is a hopeful sign. The only lan-- 
guage which all could understand was Bulu, and we had evening pray- 
ers in Bulu. As we sat there in that great dark forest with our flick- 
ering little candle, how small it seemed and how immense the dark- 
ness. Those dim little rays did not penetrate very far. I could not 
help but compare the candle to myself; dim is my light and unavailing- 
my efforts to lighten up the great mass of darkness around me. But 
praise God, it does not depend upon the size of my light. Wait till the 
morning and watch the darkness disappear as the sun mounts on 
high. So when the Son of Righteousness comes, all lights will be lost. 
in the one Light and all darkness will be dispelled. God help us to 
labor and to wait. 


The next morning I gave bells, red caps, and matches to the men 
with which to buy food, and I, with three men who carried my cloth-- 
ing and food, pushed on ahead, leaving the rest with their heavy loads 
to come at their leisure. This third day was much the same as the 
second, simply walking through the dense forest, passing sheds and 
meeting carriers on their way to the coast. On the morning of the 
fourth day at 7:30 o’clock we came out of the forest belt into inhab- 
ited land. At Bipindi, which is situated on a beautiful river, I called 
on a German scientist and took coffee with him. Crossing the river, 
we found a fine path which winds its way from town to town—a path 
well kept and well beaten by many foot passengers. We were in a 
new country called Ngumba. About 11 o’clock a rain came up, and we 
stopped in a public house where I took my lunch. I asked the chief 
for some water. He called one of his women and she brought a kettle 
full. He took it and drank out of it and then handed it to me. This: 
seems rude to us, but it is the custom here. The host always takes a 


368 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


taste of whatever he hands to the guest, to show that there is no poi- 
50n in the food or water. After the lunch I talked to the people who 
had collected for twenty minutes. We passed on through several large 
towns. At 2 P. M. the boys were very tired and we stopped for the 
night. I had a good bath in the river. In the evening we called the 
people together, (about sixty), and I talked for an hour and still they 
wanted more. In the crowd there were some Bene boys who talk and 
understand Bulu well. They followed me and asked many questions. 


EMBRACING OPPORTUNITIES TO PREACH. 


They said a white trader had lived in their town for three year, and 
the never told them anything about God. They asked that one of God’s 
white men might come and live with them. Next day, (Saturday), a 
heavy rain delayed us an hour, and I spent the time in teaching some 
young people who collected around us. At 3:20 P. M. we reached Lolo- 
dorf, where is situated a military station of the German Government, 
several trading posts, and where our Mission has started a station. 
Mr. Roberts opened this station up, but had to leave on account of 
sickness. I got our keys from a German trader and took possession of 
the Mission house for the Sabbath day. Had a pleasant time while 
there. Some of the natives talk English and most all understand some 
Bulu so I could converse with them. Lolodorf is a central point and 
Ts an ideal place for a Mission station. So many people pass going to 
the coast, and many come here to trade. There were crowds of inter- 
jor people around all the time. If these men could be taught, and they, 
when they return, would teach their fellows, what a spread of the 
Gospel there would be. On Sabbath morning I called the people and 
had a little service, then I went among the towns and to the resting 
places and talked to both towns-people and travelers. On Monday 
morning, by appointment, I called on the commanding officer, Herr 
Von Stein, and was cordially received. Left Lolodorf at 10:15 o’clock 
and set my face southeast toward the Bulu country. Left the last 
Ngumba town at 1:30 P. M. and walked through the forest in a heavy 
rain till 4 o'clock, when we came to the first Bulu town. Oh, how 
rejoiced we were to get back to Bulu land. And the people were glad 
to see us. They showed us a good new house and were kind. After 
we had our dry clothes on and had taken a few bites of food, I went 
out to talk to the people who had collected. It was raining and I sat 
under the eaves of the house and the people stood out in the rain 
while I talked for about twenty minutes. This shows that they want to 
hear. On Tuesday we had a very bad piece of road to go through 
where it had not been cut out. About noon we came to the cut 
road, and from there on it was good. Had a good meeting where we 
put up for the night. Wednesday was a fine day and we passed through 
many towns. I stopped four times and held meetings with the people. 


“THE BELOVED.” 169 


All seemed anxious to hear. We put up for the night in a small town 
mear the Mvile river. When I talked to the people they seemed well 
informed on some of the more common truths about God and Jesus, 
and I asked them who taught them, and they said Ajom, a small school 
boy from Ebolewo’e who had been with us for two years, and was now 
stopping in their town. This made my heart rejoice. Here was a boy 
not over ten years old, teaching the people in the town where he was 
visiting, and he was teaching them well. Here is a little bit of fruit 
of our labors. Thursday was an interesting day. We were nearing 
Elat and everyone knew me. People came out all along the way to 
greet me, and sometimes they would follow from town to town after 
Ine, singing and dancing. I did not stop to talk much for I wanted to 
reach home. At 9:30 we reached Eboclewo’e and as the people saw 
me coming a shout went up which passed from lip to lip till it reached 
Etat where the school boys took it up and then it passed on to the 
lower end of the towns. The people were rejoiced to see me get back, 
and I was equally glad to get back to my people again. We call them 
our people, and they call us their fathers. We used to think there was 
no appreciation in these people, but there does seem to be some at 
times. About 10 o’clock I reached Elat and found the brethren well. 
I was absent nearly two months, but it was not a vacation by any 
means. It was a grateful change, however, and I feel that it will do 
me good. 

And now I am left alone for two weeks. Mr. Fraser accompanied 
Mr. Lange to Lolodorf where they will look after the Mission property 
and Mr. Fraser on his return, expects to do evangelistic work on the 
road. At present we are not doing much at the station except keep 
up the Sabbath services. 


QUICK CHANGES. 


We are not in the same land we were six months ago. The condi- 
tions have changed very materially. We now have cut roads to the 
coast and many of the streams are bridged, so that it is a pleasure to 
make the trip. There are two white traders in Ebolewo’e, representing 
different firms, who are building houses. Old Bulu customs are pass- 
ing away like the morning mist. The hearts of men are still the same 
but the outward appearance is a revolution. But with the traders 
come new evils. Rum, the curse of Africa, is becoming like water. 
The white traders are nice to us but rotten in their lives. They are 
immoral, they care not for the Sabbath, and they impose on the people. 
But they are here to stay and we must work the harder to fight the 
new forces which the Devil has brought to bear on these people. Dear 
young friends, I beseech you, pray more earnestly than you have done 
for us and for these people, laden with sin, held in bondage, and 
abused by so-called civilized people. 


“REMEMBER THE MAINE.” 


July, 4, 1898. 

My Dear Parents:—I suppose you are having fireworks in good 
earnest today. Just think, we have not yet had any definite word 
about the trouble between the United States and Spain. We heard 
of the Maine disaster, but that was about the last. Reports come that 
there is war, and we are anxious to get mail. We sent two men down 
and they made the quickest trip on record—eighteen days to the coast 
and back, and they say they were detained two days. But they had no 
foreign mail. The last English steamer did not stop and the last Ger- 
man steamer was wrecked on the rocks up the coast. We heard that 
the mail was rescued and will come on later. These men arrived here 
July 2, and tomorrow we will send two more down. The road is safe. 
Oh, what a relief that is to us. 

One of the men who went down before had some trouble. He 
started with a large tin of kerosene and the tin began to leak. The 
hole became so large that he had to stop, buy gin bottles with his salt, 
and put the oil in them. He was a fine looking specimen when he 
came in with twenty gin bottles and the oil shining over the whole 
outfit. The local mail was saturated. 

A funny thing happened in church yesterday. The house was 
crowded and many were sitting on the ground. Suddenly there was 
a great commotion in one corner. The children screamed and the 
men laughed. Soon the cause of the commotion appeared. It was @ 
sandy wild pig. It is no longer wild, however. In fact. it gets a little 
too familiar with most people. It was captured when young, and is 
now tame, and follows one around just like a dog. It came to church 
with a trader and as he came up the isle every one got out of the way. 
He is cross at times and will chase the children. 

The school has started up in good shape. There are about twenty 
boys on the hill and forty in school. We are now digging peanuts. 
and gathering corn. Mr. Fraser was away but a little over a week. 
We are very well and are enjoying the work. Dr. Bennett was married 
June 23 at Gaboon. Mr. Hickman has gone to Benito in the south end 
of the field. Would that some one would come and help us in this in- 
land work. 


August 1, 1898. 
My Dear Parents:—We expect to start mail off tomorrow. We 
received our mail on last Tuesday and were made glad on Saturday 
by the arrival of Mr. Lange, who will stay perhaps three months. 


“THE BELOVED.” 171 


He belongs at Lolodorf, but has no one to stay with him, so he comes 
to stay here. He is a German and was in America but three years 
before coming out. He is teaching German in school and we are very 
glad to have him with us. We had a visitor last week. A German 
trader from the interior stopped over two nights. He came to get med- 
icine for a sick man. ; 


Last Sabbath the meeting house was overflowing. Mr. Lange is 
a fine musician and we had good singing. When the boys sang “Jewels” 
my heart swelled up as big as rain barrel. We also sang in the evening. 


Our cook (?) and house boys went home to rest (?) so we have a 
lot of greenish black bipeds around the house peeling potatoes, wash- 
ing dishes and sweeping. It is lovely these days. Yesterday, Herr Von 
Stein, the officer at Lolodorf, sent to us for some fruit, and for goods 
for the natives. 


Our latest war news was June 2, when Schley bottled the Spanish 
fleet at Santiago de Cuba. Hope the war is over and those people set 
free. Seems to me this is almost a religious war—a crusade of mod- 
ern days. 


AN AGREEABLE EXCHANGE. 


A man brought us some nice wild honey today and I gave him a 
brass arm ring for it. He went off with dancing eyes and I came in 
with a watering mouth. We have fine bread now—light and flaky, 
and plenty of good corn meal which we use frequently. Mr. Fraser 
played Job last week and left the work for me. The other day I gave 
my gun to a native and sent him to hunt me some game. He found 
game, but ran for his life, without shooting. We had a good laugh at 
him. A rain came up and he made for a cave in the rocks. As he 
entered the cave out burst four chimpanzees. All parties were scared 
and the chimpanzees ran one way while the man ran the other. The 
hunter stopped when he reached home, but we have not heard whether 
the chimpanzees have stopped yet or not. They look so much like a 
native that one can hardly tell at first sight whether it is man or ani- 
mal. I am very well and happy. Hope you are all the same. 


August 24, 1898, 


Our new mail service is a great joy to us and perhaps it is to you. 
We send men down to meet every English steamer and usually be- 
tween times some of the traders send, so we have it very different 
from what it was a year ago. These days we tell the men to rush, 
for we want the war news. The last trip was made in sixteen days, 
the fastest ever made. They had heavy loads. 


172 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


A SCENE AT CHURCH. 


We had a lively time about two weeks ago in the meeting house. 
While we were in Sabbath school a man came running in and took a 
Seat, panting like a frightened bird. Soon two other men came run- 
ning and crying, “Catch him, stop the thief!” They were going to take 
him out of the meeting house but we objected to a row then and told 
them to wait. So they did till we were through and then the tussle 
began. Fighting dogs and cats with all their yelps and spitting is no 
comparison. Oh, how they did fight! We tried to get them outside 
and when Mr. Fraser laid his hand on the thief the fiend caught him 
around the wrist and held on for dear life, thinking Mr. Fraser would 
protect him. He pushed them outside and let them have it out. We 
did not feel like protecting a thief. They pounded the poor fellow 
pretty hard, but he deserved punishment and as there is no law, noth- 
ing was to be done but let them fight it out. I wonder that Spain 
did not form an alliance with the Bulu. They are about ona par. The 
effect of the sermon was somewhat disturbed, but such things do not 
happen often. Of late we have been having our house crowded on 
the Lord’s day. Mr. Lange has been teaching German in the school 
and he is helpful in many other ways. But just now he and Mr. Fraser 
have gone inland on an evangelistic tour and I am alone. They will 
stay about ten days. 


August 23, 1898. 
Dear Friends of Trinity:—Two months have passed rapidly since 
I wrote you. I have not much to write now, but am prompted to do 
so to try to express my gratitude to you for your beautiful gift, the 
camera, which arrived August 17th, being just two months on the way. 
This is as quickly as we have ever received anything, I think. 


Now, I fear my debit is becoming so great to you that I can never 
think of repaying it. If words could express my grateful thoughts, 
I would be happy to make them known, but words are too weak. I 
can simply say, thanks—a thousand thanks—for every thought, for 
every prayer, for every penny. I trust I may be able to do some good 
werk with the instrument, and that in the future you can look upon 
us as we really are in our lovely bark house with its beautiful sur- 
roundings, and that you may get a better idea of the true condition of 
the people. 

On account of the box being too heavy for one man to carry, it was 
opened at the coast and part of the things taken out. The dark room 
lantern was put in the mail trunk without any protection, and the 
result is that it came with two sides broken, and no one is to be 
Dlamed. I have ordered three colored shades to take the place of 


7 


“THE BELOVED.” 173 


those which were broken (I do not know the proper name for these 
pieces of glass in the side of the lantern) and will have one to spare 
for a future accident. This is the only thing broken. 

Now, I am only a “Yankee pig” and know about as much about 
photography as a “pig” does about skating, but I am bound to root 
around, and perhaps grunt a great deal, till I turn something up, if 
only an acorn, or perhaps only an escaped “Don.” 


AN EVANGELISTIC TOUR. 


Last week I went out on an evangelistic tour of four days. f 
had two carriers and a boy. We started south then turned some to 
the east. The road was quite dry and partly cut out, so the traveling 
was nice. The people seemed very anxious to hear about God, and 
was sorry to have to turn back. We held sixteen meetings in all, with 
an aggregate of about 1090 people. Many of these had never heard the 
Gospel and a few towns had never been visited by 2 white man. On 
the second day I learned that Dr. Good had taken much the same 
route and had gone about one hour beyond the place where I turned 
back. The turning point for him was the top of a big rock which 
could be seen from the town where I held our last meeting. The peo- 
ple say Dr. Good went to the top, surveyed the country all around, 
fired his rifie off in the air a few times, and returned. I wanted to go 
and climb to the same point, but my food was gone and the loss of 
time there might delay us another day. So we set our faces homeward. 
Some time I hope to be able to go again with “our camera” and send 
you a photo of that rock which marks one of the turning points of 
that brave, untiring man whose memory is so fondly cherished br 
you all. As we returned we had to walk fast, so did not hold meet- 
ings by the way. As we passed along the people would beg me to sit 
down and tell them more about God and Jesus. Oh, how I did wish 
for more strength and time. And it is the same every day. The day 
is too short and the fiesh too weak. There is so much of this blessed 
work to be done, and we cannot do it. Pray for these poor people 
that the Light may be given them. Pray for your poor, weak, sinful 
representative, that he may be given grace and strength to do the 
work waiting on him. Pray, also, for my associates. 

While Mr. Lange is here, the Baby Organ gives forth its sweetest 
strains to the praise of God, to the enjoyment of the people, and ta 
our delight. Mr. Lange is a professional musician and he thinks the 
organ excellent. He makes it talk. 

Messrs. Fraser and Lange have gone on an evagelistic tour and I 
will be left alone for a week or more. 

May God bless you all and Keep you as in the hollow of His hand. 


NOTES BY THE WAY. 


August, 1898. 

1. Gambling is forbidden by the new “Governor” of Ebolewo’e, 
and lying is a punishable offense. 

2. The Bulu ate a dog which had been killed by the bite of a 
poisonous snake, and no ill result followed. 

3. In early days at Elat, our raw Bulu cook prepared us a stew 
of wild fowl and when we came to the table we found that he had put 
in the feet, claws and all. (Exit stew). 

4. One of the attractions at Elat is a large mirror which hangs 
under the eaves of the front porch. It is the only one to which the 
Bulu have access in all the land. Some say it is bad, for it makes them 
look ugly. Still, it is visited by hundreds. Hardly one comes to 
the hill without a peep, and some stand and gaze for an hour at his 
or her beauty(?) Some of the older ones do not care for a second 
lock. In this they have the advantage of us for we have to look at 
some of them more than once. 


5. African sheep have no wool on their backs. It is hard for a 
tenderfoot to tell a sheep from a goat. 


6. Some time ago a young man who worked for us took his pay 
and went to the coast to “buy himself rich.” One of his purchases was 
an umbrella. It was amusing to see him come to church with his 
umbrella over him, and nothing on his body save the skin of an animal 
tied about the loins, and a broad smile on his face. Just why he 
wanted an umbrella is hard to tell, for the sun could not tan him, and 
the rain would do him good. Tastes differ. 


7. We had a good laugh at the expense of the new “Governor” 
of Ebolewo’e not long since. One of the young men of the town went 
to a trader near the coast and there was crowned. He came back 
with a hat and dignity enough for a John Bull. He said the man who 
made him “governor,” i. e., gave him a hat, also gave him a certifi- 
cate. When he came home he “crowned” two chiefs and he became 
one of the Lieutenants. This was some two weeks ago, and they have 
been running the “government” around Ebolewo’e about like a Texas 
steer would do. After some time had passed we asked to see the cer- 
tificate. Remember, it is a state document, and has to be kept with 
care. It was nicely folded up in leaves, but the mice had gnawed it 
some. We saw at once that it was a fraud. It had been cut down the 
center and only one-half the page was there. We could not make out 
a single word, but saw that the date was 1895, three years behind. 


“THE BELOVED.” 175 


It is probably a piece of some letter which had been thrown away 
by the receiver, and picked up by some black man, then sold to some 
ignorant Bulu as big white man’s medicine. So this is the authority 
on which our chiefs act, and the greater part of these new “governors” 
have probably the same backing. We laughed but the man was mad. 

8. Oba, the old medicine man who has been my guide up the 
mountain, was out working on the road the other day. Growing tired, 
as Bulu do, he sat down to smoke his pipe. While sitting thus, fumi- 
gating, one of the new “governors” came along. When his highness 
saw that Oba did not remove his pipe his dignity was offended and 
he demanded two goats to make amends. In talking the palaver Oba 
said that he was a governor himself. This, being a lie, was resented 
by the Governor of our town, so poor old Oba had another palaver on 
his hands, and the last was the greatest. Mvondo, our greatest chief, 
demanded pay at once, and took one of Oba’s wives, his favorite, as 
surety for the pay. Of course Oba would redeem his wife, so next day 
he took all his goats, fowls, boxes, cloths and even his trousers, the 
only pair he possessed, and went and got his woman. But still their 
greed was not satisfied and they were about to catch and whip Oba 
and try to squeeze more out of him. Oba ran for our gate, but was 
caught and dragged back. I chanced to come along at this time and 
perhaps not too quietly expressed my opinion of the whole matter. 
it was like of on troubled waters. All the goods were returned next 
day and no one has troubled Oba since. 

9. Within the last eight months two men have been killed, roasted 
and eaten between Elat and Efulen. And yet they say cannibalism 
is a thing of the past in these paris. We missionaries of Elat have 
all slept in the town where the deed was performed, (Zinzi). Perhaps 
we are too tough looking to tempt their appetites. 

10. The people are anxious for Mr. Kerr to come back. They 
say he must bring a wife with him. Since he would not marry a real 
woman—i. e., a Bulu—he must put up with a white woman. They say 
she must be very young, ten or twelve years old, and let her grow up 
here. Their arguments for a young woman is—‘“If you were buying 
a pair of trousers you would want a new pair, not a second hand pair. 
So with a woman.” 

11. The pale horse and his rider have visited Ebolewo’e this 
month. The oldest man im this region died in his sins. He used to 
boast that he had killed twenty-two persons in cold blood. He never 
seemed to care anything about the Gospel, and about a year ago lost 
his mind. From that time it was useless to talk to him for he could 
not understand anything. No one seemed to be sorry he died. On the 
other hand his people seemed to be glad to get him out of the way. 
What a miserable end. No one to love him here, no one to receive or 
dove him yonder. 


176 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


12. A few days later the call came nearer home. Our cook, 2 
Bulu boy of seventeen years, took sick and died suddenly. He belong- 
ed to the class of inquirers and spent most of the last night in prayer. 
His death was peaceful and we have every reason to believe that he 
received the welcome, ‘‘Well done, good and faithful servant. Enter 
thou into the joy of thy Lord.” On his death bed he was heard to 
say, “Oh, Holy Spirit, let us go home.” When called by name he said 
his name was not Uso, “My name is Jesus. My mother’s name is 
Mary.” 

13. Four days later a white trader died and was buried on the 
Mission grounds. We had to make the coffin. At his graye was the 
largest gathering of white people ever held in Ebolewo’e. There 
were thirteen, and they were not all there that day. (There are now 
over twenty white people in Ebolewo’e). Mr. Dager had charge of 
the services. After he was through Lieutenant Von Bulow made a 
few remarks. Three days after the above a Bulu chief, a young man, 
was shot by hostile natives and died at the Mission the next day. 

14. More touching still was our experience with a little boy 
about five years old. He was very sick and one day was reported dead. 
The next day we heard that he was still alive, though hopeless. Mrs. 
Lippert went to see him and found them putting his grave clothes on 
him with the intention of-burying him, though not altogether dead. 
Their argument was, “He cannot get well, why not bury him and be 
rid of the trouble of caring for him?” Mrs. Lippert thought there was 
a possible chance of his being restored and had him brought to the 
Mission. Dr. Lippert gave him stimulants and restored him a little, 
and then began treating him. The boy was literally being. eaten by 
by worms. The Doctor removed fifty-three large ones, an almost in- 
credible story. In one week the boy was walking around. We told 
his people that he was no longer their boy and that he must stay at the 
Mission. They consented and the little fellow is now in my charge. 
(Later I gave the child back to them). 

15. We have dismissed school. Mr. Fraser has had it for twelve 
weeks and good work has been done. We had forty-four boys as board- 
ers for a while and eighty-nine was the highest attendance on any one 
day. This is more than ever before. The school work is very encour 
aging. I have had charge of the boys out of school hours, and of the 
workmen, and we have done a lot of work. You ought to see our 
farm. 


GOING TO MEET NEWCOMERS. 


October 18, 1898. 

My Dear Parents:—Since we have had more chances of sending: 
mail I have done less writing, it seems. I always put it off till it is: 
too late. I expect to start for Lolodorf tomorrow, and will write a. 
leter now for fear I will have no time there. 


As you have heard, we are to have new help. It faHs to my lot to 
go and meet the newcomers at Lolodorf and bring them up to their 
future home, Elat. We have been having very heavy rains and I anti-- 
. cipate a wet, muddy trip, but will tell you about this after it is over. 


The other day I let a Bulu man take my shot gun out to the bush. 
In about three hours he came in with a big deer, the first venison we 
have had in Africa, and it was splendid. The next day he went out: 
and shot a monkey. The second day he shot a large bird. He seems: 
to know how to hunt. We will let him go often at this rate. The bush 
abounds in deer, antelope, wild hog, monkey, etc. 


Last week two elephants were killed two days east of us. The: 
leopard which took so many goats here was killed by a Bulu man in 
a near town. The leopard caught a child, when a brother of the chilé 
shot the leopard, killing it. 

Day before yesterday a man died near us, and at the funeral they~ 
“talked” to find out who killed him. One of his wives was pronounced. 
to be the guilty one, so she was killed and buried in the same grave 
with her owner. This is raw heathenism, sure. 

A week ago last Sabbath I went to a town some two hours journey 
and held a meeting in the afternoon. Highteen of the school boys: 
went along to help in the singing. We had a good meeting. About 150: 
were there. Coming home we were caught in a very hard rain. 

We have about forty boys boarding at Elat now. They keep ug: 
busy. Now that I will be away some two weeks I do not know what 
Mr. Fraser will do with them all. 


Lolodorf, October 28, 1898. 

My Dear Parents:—As I wrote you on the 18th that I was going 
to Lolodorf, now I write you that I am at that station. It took three 
days to come over. The streams were very high and made us some 
trouble. One river was one-fourth of a mile wide and we had to wade 
to our waists feeling our way. In the stream proper it was waist deep» 
above the foot log. But we came through all safe to Lolodorf, arriv— 


178 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


ing on the 21st. Found Mr. Lange and Dr. Lehman here. Sat down 
and waited for the new missionaries. On Monday, the 24th, Dr. Leh- 
man took the fever and I turned nurse. His temperature went up 
quite high and for three nights I did not have my shoes off. He is up 
for the first time today. 


Mr. Kerr and wife and Dr. Lippert and wife came last night. 
‘They are well and we are rejoiced to see them. Mr. Kerr will stay 
here and I will take Dr. Lippert to Elat. We will start, God willing, 
on the 31st. Everything is moving on nicely. The new people seem 
very nice. I am rejoiced to see my old co-laborer, Mr. Kerr. He is 
‘much the same only he is married. They have very fine outfits, wed- 
ding presents, etc. 


SELECTIONS FROM ANNUAL REPORT. 


Annual report of Elat Station for year ending November 15, 1898: 


When our force was reduced to two members, near the beginning 
of the year, we feared that much aggressive work was out of the 
question. To keep up the work of last year was all that we could 
hope for, praying in the meantime for reinforcements. As to the lat- 
‘ter our prayers are answered. The needed help has come, thanks to 
our God. As to the former we feel that the work of last year has been 
enlarged upon a little, in that the school has been larger, German has 
been taught, Sabbath services have doubled in attendance, and some 
-evangelistic work has been done. 


School.—Perhaps the most encouraging feature of the work has 
“been the school conducted by Mr. Fraser, with the help of Mr. Lange 
in German, for fourteen weeks. The report is as follows: Number 
of days taught, 158; total enrollment, 189; greatest number on any 
one day, 89; least on any one day, 8; average daily attendance, 42.8; 
-one boy attended every day; number reading the testament, 25; girls 
enrolled, 3; number of tribes represented, 14. 

The attendance has been very gratifying and encouraging. The 
-old tribal troubles have cleared up somewhat, hence the mingling of 
the tribes as never before. One great trouble is that we have no way 
-of holding the boys. They come and go as they please, so we must 
make the school attractive in some way. We give them a chance to 
earn something outside of school hours, which aids some in this direc- 
-tion. In connection with the school, and included in it, Mr. Fraser 
has had some catechetical work with the boys each week. The greater 
‘part of these boys have been boarders on the self supporting basis,. 
giving work equivalent to what they receive in books, food and goods. 
"They are all required to work two and one-half hours for their food. 


ys. 


The schoolbo 


“THE BELOVED.” 179 


if they work more than this credit is given at the rate of 1 cent per 
hour, on which they can buy Testaments, books, paper, pencils, ink, 
etc. During the year there have been 120 boys at the station on the 
above basis, with a daily average, while school was in session, of 26. 
“The work they do is mostly cutting weeds and hoeing in the garden. 
In large measure these boys take the place of yardmen. 

Sabbath Services—Another encouraging thing has been the good 
attendance at Sabbath services. There have been services every Sab- 
bath with one exception, and we have estimated the average attendance 
at 200, just double that of last year. The so-called church is far too 
small and uncomfortable for the numbers which come, so that a 
larger and more comfortable house is much needed. 

The Bible school, which has been held immediately before the 
preaching services, has also been well attended, the average being 
about 150, one-third of whom were children. In this connection 
should be mentioned morning prayers, held at 6:15 A. M. every week 
day, which all the boys and yardmen are compelled to attend. 

Evangelistic—A mere beginning has been made in evangelistic 
work this year. The small working force has made it impossible to 
leave the station for much of such work. Two trips were made by Mr. 
Fraser. One of seyen days to the east of Elat, and one of nine days 
to the northwest, taking in Lolodorf. Mr. McCleary was out on one 
short trip of four days to the south. In addition to these, several one 
day trips were made to the neighboring towns by both members of 
the station. 

Attendants and Work.—There have been on the average two yard- 
Men at the station. Most of the work has been done by the school 
boys. We have even had to hunt work for them, who at different 
times reached the number of forty-four. To give them work and at the 
same time get returns from it we cleared a part of the new land and 
put it in plantains and bananas, about 4,000 of which are now on the 
mission grounds. We have also built a picket (pole) fence around the 
premises at a cost of about $25. The reasons for building this fence 
were as follows: Goats were overrunning the grounds, people were 
stealing from the garden and also from the out houses, our spring was 
open to all, and some natives were cutting gardens near and there 
was danger of their coming over the line and causing trouble. No 
definite boundary line marked the limit of the premises. Now we are 
enclosed, the only entrance being near the house. 

In closing the report we wish to speak of the changed conditions of 
affairs among the Bulu, which will affect our work from this time on. 

Under pressure of the German government, whose colonial troops 
came within the border of Bulu territory, great changes have been 
wrought. The old custom of carrying weapons has been prohibited, 
walking sticks taking their places. Hats, coats and trousers are com- 


180 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


mon now, where two years ago there were none. Tribes are mingling 
as never before. Natives are now beginning to trayel even as far as 
the coast. We can send men for mail and provisions without fear of 
their being robbed, relieving us of much anxiety for the safety of our 
goods, and of much trouble in accompanying our caravans. The open- 
ing of these roads has brought in the traders, colored and European. 
The former can be found in every town of any size, and two white 
men have established trading posts at Ebolewo’e. They, of course, 
bring in rum, disregard the Sabbath, and, in fact, break all the laws of 
God, setting a bad example for the people. New influenees are at 
work both for good and evil. The relations between the natives and 
the Mission have been good all through this change, although at first 
there was some talk that we had called the Governor to come and 
kill the Bulu. The feeling is now better than ever and they are be- 
ginning to distinguish as to who are their real friends among the 
white men. 

Along with the-external changes are to be seen many evidences of 
the inward working of the Holy Spirit. While we cannot point to 
any man and say, “there is a Christian,” yet we can point to a goodly 
number and say, “there are men who are trying to lead better lives. 
They are seeking for the Light.” There are many who pray, regular- 
ly attend worship and show evidence of a great change of life. We 
have great reason to praise our God for His marvelous works in our 
midst. Great changes have taken place. Whatever the agents used 
we know that God alone has all the glory, and to His name be praise 
and thanksgiving for evermore. 


LETTER TO DR. REED. 


December 8,1898. 

Dear Mr. Reed:—It is again a long time since I wrote you. These 
have been busy days. The working force has been small and the 
work great. Only a part has been done. But we are now re-enforced. 
Our prayers have been answered and we are rejoicing at heart. On 
August 30th, five new missionaries arrived at Batanga, and they were 
all for the interior work. Dr. and Mrs. Lippert for Elat, Dr. Lehman 
for Lolodorf, and Mr. and Mrs. Kerr to stay at Lolodorf till the new 
house is-built there. I went to Lolodorf to meet our new Doctor and 
his wife and while there had the pleasure of meeting all the others. 
We returned to Elat in the rainy season but we did not get wet. It 
took us but four days, arriving here November 3rd. Now, we cannot 
tell you how glad we are to see this addition to our station. We have 
never been sufficient for the work, and are not yet, but we feel greatly 
strengthened by the arrival of these new workers. Dr. Lippert has 
taken hold of the medical work in good earnest and is making a start 
in the language, while Mrs. Lippert has revolutionized the culinary de- 
partment. This is a great relief to us. 

Mr. Fraser has gone to Mission meeting. I send you a copy of our 
station report that you may have some idea of what has been going on 
the last year at Elat. Every department of the work has been en- 
couraging. The natives come to Sabbath services in such numbers 
that the house will not hold them. Our church is too small and we 
have asked for a larger one in next year’s estimates. And the school 
has grown rapidly. One great drawback to the school is that we can- 
not hold the boys long enough. They leave when they please. There 
were fourteen tribes represented this year. Old troubles are being 
settled, and the outlook for the school is bright, for now, most every 
tribe can send their children. Two forces are at work among these 
people. The Governor and the Holy Spirit. The former is working 
most forcibly among the chiefs and older men, but the latter is in- 
fluencing the young men and the boys. The day is soon coming we 
feel when there will be an awakening. Pray with us that the Lord 
may hasten the day. 


This letter is only a supplement to the report, which contains the 
news of the year boiled down. 

Will each member and supporter of Trinity church hereby accept 
my deepest gratitude and kindest regards. May you all have a happy 
and blessed New Year for work in our Master’s vineyard. 


182 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


December 15, 1898. 
My Dear Parents:—It is a long time since I have written you 2 
long letter. I have not forgotten you, however. These days have been 
very full, and they will be so for some time to come, but I must take 
the time to write a little. November 23 I wrote you a card just as 
the mail was being tied up. This time will try to write more. 


LACK OF FAITH. 


You cannot realize just what life is here. One has to be here to 
really know it.- The year has been full of blessings. The work has 
progressing nicely and we are not so run down as we though we 
would be when our force was reduced to two members. I am frank to 
admit that my faith was too small at the beginning of the year, as it 
always is, and that I did not count enough on the Lord. We have been 
taught that it is not by numbers, but by His spirit, whereby great 
things are done. With Him on our side we have the majority. We 
can never be alone or weak if we only have enough faith. Right here 
is where we fail. Oh, for more genuine faith, faith which will lay 
hold of the promises of God, faith which will wrestle until the breaking 
of the day. “Lord increase our faith.” I wish to add my testimony in 
praise of our God. He has been good to me a thousand times, yes, 
ten thousand times, better than I deserve. I know not why His won- 
drous love should be extended so to me, 2 worm. But it is so. Help 
me praise Him. 

It fell to my lot to go to Lolodorf to meet the new missionaries. 
While there I saw Mr. and Mrs. Kerr. He told me why he did not go 
to see you. When the workers were taken from Efulen it left but 
three for all the interior work, and there was no doctor nearer than 
the coast. When the board realized this fact they urged all who were 
coming to come at once, that those on the field might have relief. 
Mr. Kerr was among those who were to come out a month later, but 
hurried up when this news reached him. He had to go all the way to 
St. Joe, and had but a certain number of days to make the trip. If 
he had gone to Crawfordsville he would have lost a day more. When 
he wrote you he did not know about the changes to be made in getting 
to you. Why he did not write I do not Know. He was marrying a 
wife and therefore could not come. Please forgive him, he never did 
it before. 

Dr. and Mrs. Lippert and I arrived at Elat November 3rd. We are 
rejoiced to have these new helpers. We are making some changes in 
the house. I will give my room to the new comers, so that they can 
have one side of the house to themselves, and I will go to the other 
end. I am putting on a little addition to my new room, and I will tell 
you how I am making plank for the floor. I split logs about eight 
inches in diameter and plane the flat side. It is not very smooth, but 


“THE BELOVED.” 18 


is substantial. The sides are of bark, of course. Them we are going 
to build a store room for our provisions, trade goods, tools, ete. 

They have no bushrope over at Lolodorf and we are buying it here 
and sending it over. I have bought 1,100 so far. So much of our time 
is taken up in such work. But we get to meet the people and have 
opportunities for teaching them by living examples. 


WHITE TRADERS. 


Heretofore we have been on friendly terms with the white traders, 
but fear we are coming to an issue. Rum is doing it. One of them 
gets dead drunk and stays so for days. The natives come and tell us 
and it makes him mad. He has threatened to floe our workman for 
he blames him for telling us. He refuses to let our workman buy in 
his shop. The traders are all trying to make the people drink, but 
some will not and so they try to make it uncomfortable for those who 
refuse. If the white traders do this we will shut down on them. We 
have the hold on most of the people, especially the youmge men, and 
the rum war will be om soon. Pray for us im this regard. New forces: 
are at work. But the Lord is on our side and we cannot fear as to the 
outcome. 

We have a man who takes my shot gum and goes out hunting for 
us. He has killed seventeen animals, four of which were deer. We 
are having the finest kind of meat, venison, squirrel, wild pigeon, etc. 

I have been taking many pictures, but will not send them until 
later when I can send a good lot. Piease remember me to all. 


THE WAR IN BULU LAND. 


December 29, 1898. 

Dear Friends:—You will be interested in the details concerning 
the war in Bulu land, for our work is and will be affected in many 
ways by this war. The future we cannot tell, but we can predict 
more certainly and lay plans more definitely if we know the present 
thoroughly. It shall be my purpose to tell, as far as I know, some- 
thing of the causes of the war, the manner of warfare and details 
about the fighting, the relation of the missionaries to the Bulu during 
hostilities, and the probable effects of the war. 


CAUSES OF WAR. 


The causes of the war are complicated. It was not born in a day 
as are so many of the tribal wars among the natives. It has been 
long coming. The Bulu have never known what law is. They never 
had a ruler and are slow in accepting one. They do not know what 
it is to be told “you must do this” or “you must do that,” and like 
small children which have been spoiled, they resent the idea. They 
want their own way. They are jealous of another’s power. Added 
to this is their greed for goods which is perhaps the root of it all, 
causing the Bulu to rob and plunder. But these things might have 
been overcome and peaceful relations established between the Gov- 
ernment and the Bulu, who have great fear and a certain reverence 
for the white men, had it not been for the middle men who caused 
trouble. Between the Bulu country and the Government stations at 
Kribi and Lolodorf there are other tribes who have taken upon them- 
selves too much conceit and authority. These people have either 
stolen, begged or traded for a few shirts, hats, and trousers, put them 
on and gone among the Bulu, pretending that they were sent by the 
Governor. They treat the Bulu as dogs, beating and stealing from 
them. They take goats, fowls, food, rubber, all kinds of goods, often 
women, and give nothing in return. They style themselves Governors 
and are very offensive. The Bulu were. afraid not to obey them and 
submitted for two or three years, paying dearly for it. But this kind 
of thing could not last. It was carried too far and the Bulu resented 
it at last. Another cause of trouble appears through the jealousy of 
the different Bulu tribes. The natives close to where the white men 
settled naturally had the advantage. They reaped good rewards and 
became conceited and no doubt offensive. Other tribes grew jealous 
and in order to get even, wanted to drive out the white men. 


“THE BELOVED.” 185 


Another hard thing to bear for most of the Bulu between here 
and the coast, is the fact that trading posts have been established 
all through this part of Bulu land. This brings trade, but it also 
brings many foreigners and it takes away many chances which the 
Bulu near the coast had of making a fine profit. Formerly all the rub- 
ber and ivory were handed along from town to town till they reached 
the coast, and the pay for these things was likewise handed back 
from town to town, each man handling them taking out his share. Now 
this source of gain is gone. The goods are carried direct to the inter- 
ior, and the rubber and ivory are likewise carried direct to the coast. 
Therefore many of the Bulu would like to see all foreigners driven out. 

All these causes were at work and having their effect. Then, the 
Governor kept putting off coming so long after the report was out 
that he was coming. Some of the Bulu in their ignorance and conceit 
said that the Commander was afraid of them. Others said there was 
no such thing as a Governor. When they saw that those who began, 
from time to time, to rob and plunder were not punished, they be- 
came bold and began their mischief in good earnest. Caravans and 
trading posts were robbed, and violence was done to many of the 
black traders, most of whom fled from the country. These reports 
reached the ears of the Governor at Kribi, who sent out soldiers and 
caught two or three big Bulu chiefs. This last act was the immediate 
cause of the war, the Bulu say. 


THE WAR BEGUN. 


The war began. Soon after the capture of the Bulu chiefs by the 
Officials at Kribi, the Bulu near the coast, around Efulen, and up to 
within one day of Ebolewo’e, rose in great numbers and made war on 
the Mebaya and other coast tribes, killing many, robbing all, and burn- 
ing their towns. Many trading posts were robbed and destroyed, also. 
Great quantities of goods were secured. This success crazed the 
Bulu, and they went to attack Kribi. Here they met with sterner 
stuff in the persons of four white men, the Governor, custom house 
officer, one trader, one priest, and four colored soldiers, who kept the 
Bulu back by hard fighting for two days until troops came from 
Kamerun, when they were driven back, leaving, it is reported, 172 
dead on the field. No one was killed on the side of the Government. 
Flint lock guns are no match for Mauser rifles, but the Bulu cannot 
see it that way, it seems. This was early in October. At this same 
time two chiefs were caught who have brothers near Ebolewo’e, and 
these brothers talked of violence to the white men of Ebolewo’e. But 
the reports died away as soon as the chiefs were released. Another 
attack was planned and attempted against Kribi, but it ended in dis- 
aster to the Bulu, who were surprised at night by a body of soldiers 
and dispersed. 


186 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


Reports of this outbreak were sent to the Commander of the 
troops, who was at the time far in the interior in the direction of 
Lake Chad. One Lieutenant, with a white under officer and sixty 
black soldiers, was sent down to look after the white men at Ebole- 
wo’e. He arrived October 24th, and had his first fight with the natives 
the next day after his arrival. The fight took place in Ebolewo’e in 
full view from the Mission house. It was not with Ebolewo’e people, 
however. Other tribes collected in the town to see the new creature 
so long talked of and feared. They brought their guns with them. 
When the Lieutenant heard that there were armed Bulu in town, he 
took twenty-eight soldiers and went down to disperse them. He was 
very mild and asked the leading chief to come and shake hands. This 
was refused. Then the Bulu were commanded to lay down their guns, 
which they refused to do. After the third command was refused, the 
soldiers were bidden to fire. In the fight which ensued, two big chiefs 
and many other Bulu were killed. One chief of Ebolewo’e was killed. 
This caused much bitter feeling and there was a general uprising of 
the Bulu. 


THE MISSIONARIES REMOVED. 


A guard was put around the Mission premises and the 
missionaries were taken into the camp near by. All portable goods 
were taken to the same place for protection. On October 28th, the 
missionaries were escorted out of the Bulu into the Bene country and 
started off for Lolodorf. When the missionaries were out of the way, 
and the main body of the troops arrived, the fighting began in earnest. 
The troops were sent out and fought the Bulu and burned their towns. 
The Bulu collected for an attack, and on November 2d an attack was 
made on the guard and the Mission station. The shooting was heard 
and soon four white officers and a squad of soldiers were on the 
ground and the Bulu were driven away. They returned several times 
that day, and the next day made one assault, but were easily kept 
from doing any damage. There is one mark on the dwelling house 
made by a shot from a Bulu gun, and many bullet holes through the 
church, out buildings and trees, but otherwise there is no visible sign 
of the attack except the path through the bush where the Bulu fled 
dragging their wounded and dead. The reports differ as to the num- 
ber of Bulu killed—from seven to fifteen. Two soldiers were wounded. 
During this fight the Bulu collected in the lower part of Ebolewo’e, 
so, to prevent this, the soldiers were ordered to burn all that part of 
the town, which is the greater part. They burned 150 houses in 
Ebolewo’e. They followed up the Bulu and burned the town of the 
leading chief in the fight and this destroyed his plantains. 


“THE BELOVED.” 187 


THE MISSIONARIES RETURN. 


So the matter stood when Mr. Fraser and I returned to Elat sta- 
tion November $th. That same day an officer and sixty soldiers were 
sent east from Ebolewo’e, who fought and burned towns everywhere 
they went. When they returned, peace was made with the leading 
tribe which was in the first fight. The chief, Evina, gave 100 men to 
go as workmen to Kamerun. Then an expedition was sent south 
about thirty miles, destroying the towns as they went. This expedi- 
tion lasted till Christmas. On Christmas day word came that the 
Bulu had made another attack on the coast, and on December 27th 
the Commander started for the coast, leaving two white officers and 
forty soldiers to protect interests at Ebolewo’e. The troops will go to 
the coast and come against the Bulu from that side, so war news may 
grow scarce at Ebolewo’e. 

Summary to date. We have nothing definite, but reports have it 
that about 300 Bulu have been killed, and nearly that number taken 
prisoners. About fifty towns were burned. Perhaps fifty soldiers 
were wounded, four died from wounds, and one guide was killed in 
battle. Most of the chiefs from nearby have come and made peace 
with the Commander. 

The fight has been a very unequal one. The Bulu have only 
flint locks, a poor quality cf powder and no bullets. They use broken 
iron pots for shot. The only chance the Bulu have is that which the 
bush affords. They hide in the bush, wait their chance, shoot and 
Tun. If it were in the open they could not get within gunshot of the 
soldiers with their old guns, ere they would be shot down. 


RELATIONS BETWEEN THE MISSIONARIES AND THE BULU. 


The relation of the missionaries with the natives has been good, 
for the most part. There has been some blame put on the missionaries 
by a few who live at a distance; but those who are acquainted have 
only good feelings for them. Some of the traders tell us this is not 
true and the officials were inclined to doubt it; but as proof we can 
cite the following: The leader in the war made on the coast, lives one 
day east of Efulen station. Mr. Johnston went to his town to see him 
and stayed in his town all night between the two attacks made on the 
coast. Efulen station has been unmolested and the missionaries go 
and come as they please. On the night of October 25th, Dr. and Mrs. 
Johnston and baby and I put up in a town near Efulen, where one 
man had lived who was killed in the fight at the coast and we were 
well treated, though the brothers were thirsting for revenge. They 
told us that they had nothing against the missionaries. Since our re- 
turn to Elat we have been joyfully received by all the Bulu we have 
seen. We have been out among the towns which were burned and 


188 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


everyone has been glad to see us. As to the attack on the guard at the 
station, I have talked with the leaders in that fight and they say if 
the missionaries had been there the attack would not have been made. 
They wanted to kill the soldiers and thought that the small guard 
would be the easiest to get at. Moreover, our station is so situated 
that they had to pass it to get at the camp. All missionaries were 
away and soldiers were there, so it was natural that they should begin 
fighting there. Had they wanted to burn buildings they were in the 
boys’ dormitory and the school house, which are off to one side and 
why did they not set fire to them? On the contrary they were told by 
their leader not to touch anything at the station; but only to shoot 
the soldiers. If there is any change I would say they are warmer 
friends than ever; but this does not include those who live at a dis- 
tance and do not know us. 


RESULTS OF THE WAR. 


The effects of the war. There can be no doubt as to the outcome. 
The Bulu will get a good whipping and they deserve it. Whether they 
can take the lesson or not time will tell. For the present it will be 
very helpful. Roads are and will be cut out and the streams bridged. 
People can travel in safety. They have seen the power of the Gov- 
ernment and will learn to respect it. We told the Bulu to quit their 
mischief or they would be punished. Many of them laughed at us; 
but now they see that we told the truth and they seem more ready to 
accept our words. They see the difference between the harsh, com- 
pelling power of the Government and the easy drawing power of the 
good old Gospel and they like it all the more. There will be a ming- 
ling of the tribes. There has been established at Ebolewo’e a Govern- 
ment station (it may be only temporary) which will have a bearing 
on our work. There seem to be new desires on the part of many, 
especially the young men. They want to get away from the old things 
and take on the new. There is a feeling of unrest. May this continue 
until they find rest and peace in Jesus. 


P. S—I was not at Hlat when the troops arrived, haying gone to 
Efulen to help open up communication with that station. 


January 14, 1899. 
My Dear Parents:—Mr. Fraser returned from Mission meeting 
January 15th, bringing with him the home mail and other good things. 
I am always pleased to get your letters. 


“THE BELOVED.” 189 


STRANGE PROVIDENCES. 


Perhaps you have heard of the death of Mrs. Boppell. Mr. and 
Mrs. Boppell reached the field in August of last year. She died No- 
vember 20th, of fever, and he has had a sunstroke. Mr. and Mrs. 
Kerr arrived the last day of September and they left for home the 
last of December on account of Mrs. Kerr’s health. She received an 
injury, coming out on the steamer, which developed after she reached 
the field and became so serious that the Mission thought best for her 
to go home. Mr. Kerr will accompany her home and then come back 
alone. These are all sad providences which we cannot understand. 
So many have been taken from this field this year. It seems hard to 
keep the work going. But all things are in His hands and He knows 
best. It has been said that experience has shown on this field, that 
for every new station opened, it requires the sacrifice of one life. So 
far there has been but one death in the interior and three stations 
have been started. But even if the experience of former years should 
be repeated, is it not a very small price to pay for the salvation of 
these people? What is a life given for the Master’s cause, if there- 
by even only one soul should be brought to a knowledge of a Savior 
mighty to save? So, however discouraging it may seem to the people 
at home, we here are but spurred on to greater effort, lest our day 
be too short. 


“WHEN ARE YOU COMING HOME?” 


Mother, to your much repeated question, “when are you coming 
home?” I cannot say when. Unless my health fails it will be at 
least two years. I am just getting into the work nicely and the 
longer I stay the better I like it. The last month has been the most 
encouraging of all. Our prayers are being answered. The Holy 
Spirit is working in our midst. Increasing interest is being taken 
in our work. Let me tell you about it. On Wednesday night, De- 
cember 15th, about twenty young men and boys came without invita- 
tion and asked for a little meeting. In answer to questions as to 
why they came, they said they were thirsty for the “good news.” 
They wanted to hear more about God. We took them onto the porch 
and had a good little meeting, after which they asked very prac- 
tical questions in regard to how they should live and act. They 
asked to come again Sabbath night and at that meeting one young man 
led in prayer. Another stood up and said he wanted to live a better 
life. He said he had been very wicked: but he had not known any 
better. Now he wanted to learn to walk aright. They came again 
the next Sabbath night, and last Sabbath night forty came just after 
Supper and we took lanterns and went to the meeting house and had 
a good meeting. This has originated with the people. We did not 


190 ‘CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


suggest these meetings, so it comes with more force. We are greatly 
encouraged. Then every Sabbath the meeting house is so crowded 
that we can hardly stand it, and many stay on the outside, while 
others go away. The boys, too, are anxious for school to begin. It 
will open the 23rd, and I will have charge, except. the German, which 
will be in charge of Dr. Lippert, who speaks German. 

A new kind of work comes up this year. The Mission has as- 
signed to Mr. Fraser and me the work of revising the Bulu gospel 
and translating the book of Acts. This has to be santioned by the 
Board before we can go at it, for all such things must come from 
them as well as from the Mission. The Board may say no, but we do 
not think they will. Now, in the face of all this work and these en- 
couragements, together with good health, could you expect me to 
come home? Impossibie. Do not ask it, for I must say no. 

Now you have one more hope of getting to see a worker from 
this field, who can tell you all about us out here. It is Rev. W. C. 
Johnson, who went home last May with his sick wife. He has been 
appointed to represent our Mission at the General Assembly, which 
meets in Minneapolis. If he has time he will surely make you a visit 
and I know you will enjoy it if he does. He is very enthusiastic in 
the work. He was raised on a farm in western Pennsylvania, and has 
a good supply of good sense, mistakenly called common. Write him 
and urge him to come. 

We have just completed a new store room, which it took thirteen 
days to build. We have always been crowded and since the new 
missionaries came we have been living on top of boxes almost. 


January 24, 1899. — 
My Dear Parents:—I cannot write much tonight. We are getting 
on nicely. School opened yesterday with thirty-nine boys. The 
dirty little brats smell like—sixty. Two young men went out last 
Sabbath and talked to the people, and they say they are going next 
Sabbath. This is encouraging. God is giving us great victories. 


esiietsinnicome caeemccetrant! 


The church. 


HOPEFUL SIGNS MANIFEST. 


February 20, 1899. 

Dear Fellow Workers:—You will be rejoiced to hear of the en- 
couraging trend the work has taken at Elat of late. The power of 
the good old Gospel, fresh every day, is being felt. The Holy Spirit 
is working. It is quite possible for one to labor on for years, and even 
for a lifetime, without seeing results, leaving that to God’s own time, 
but how helpful it is to weak mortals to see that something is being 
accomplished as the time passes. We of the Interior are being helped 
in this way almost every day, for which we are so grateful. One en- 
couraging thing is that these people really want to hear the good 
mews. Curiosity might, and no doubt does, bring them to our ser- 
vices for a time, but curiosity will not make them come for three 
years, with a gradual increase in attendance. I think I told you 
our meeting house was too small. Well, we have abandoned it alto- 
gether, and are holding services in a little grove near our home. 
We put bark and sticks on the ground and the people enjoy them as 
much as Fifth Avenue people do their cushioned pews. People come 
for two, three and even six miles to attend these services. Old men 
and young; women and children; chiefs and chiefs’ sons; all in one 
crowd. Yesterday there were 150 in my Sabbath school class. Just 
imagine a very wicked man in America walking five miles to hear a 
preacher who can speak his language very imperfectly; rake him 
over the coals for his bad conduct, and tell him if he doesn’t mend 
his ways he will land in the house of fire. That is just the position 
of these people, and yet they come over and over again. 


KEEPING THE SABBATH. 


But merely coming to services is not enough, if those who hear 
do not heed. Here, too, we are encouraged. A trader from a day’s 
journey east of us, told me yesterday that he could not get men to 
work on Sabbath, and that they have a little piece with seven heles 
burned into it, with a peg which they move one notch each day, lest 
they forget when Sabbath comes. He also said they would come to 
him and ask him to tell them of God. 


The young men are refusing to work for the factories. They are 
regular in attendance on Sabbath; they go out into the neighboring 
towns and hold meetings; they are building better houses and are 
trying to fix them up decently. They promise to marry but one wife, 
and they are being abused by their people for their actions and be- 


192 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


liefs. Now, all this is very encouraging to us on the field, and we 
trust those at home will be encouraged to pray more earnestly for 
us and these people. May we not pray for a great awakening, and 
trust and pray till it comes? 

In January we put up a new store room, 18x24 feet, which cost 
the great sum of $28.00. Heretofore our store was in one room of 
our dwelling house. Now that there are four missionaries, we needed 
the room, hence the new building. 

There are some trying little things which come up here, which 
are interesting only in that they show the dependent, childish nature 
of the people. Lately some of them have bought white men’s axes, 
and they think because we sell them the axes, we must keep them 
ground. This we can do sometimes, but not always, and if we re- 
fuse they get very much out of humor and abuse the white man. So 
with their boxes. When the lock breaks, they invariably come to the 
Mission to have it fixed. So with guns, umbrellas, etc., they seem to 
think the Mission is a general repair shop. So if they want a hole 
bored in a stick or a door made, there is but one place to go. These 
demands are so numerous that we have to shut down on it, and so we 
are mean. And they do not want to pay anything for our services. 
Why should they? We came to help them, so we tell them; “Why 
should we pay?” 

Let me close with one incident—A big, burly man was caught 
for stealing. He put his mother in fetters and went free himself. 


February 22, 1899. 

Dear Parents:—Mail will leave for the coast tomorrow and Ef 
must write you a little. School opened January 23 and we now have 
eighty-one names on the roll. But they are not all regular. We have 
forty-seven boarders on the hill; more than at any one time before. 
They make it lively day and night. 

Dr. Lippert has taken a little girl with a written pledge from her 
father that he will not sell her off in marriage for at least one year. 
She is the first Bulu girl or woman around Elat to wear a dress. 

February 27—We started mail to the East a few days ago but 
the carrier has returned, reporting the roads as impassable. He met 
some men who had been caught and robbed. Later one of our car- 
Tiers whom we had sent two weeks before, came in without his load, 
and said they had been caught, and two loads and one man taken. 
The excuse for this work was that some one near us had stolen a 
woman from the robber and he wanted us to call the man who took 
his woman, and make him pay up; then our loads would be released. 
This is very disagreeable for us. We have not yet decided what to do. 
Tomorrow we will start men on another road, hoping they will get 
through. 


FOR THE LITTLE FOLKS. 


March 21, 1899. 

My Dear Little Friends:—I wish you might all spend a day with: 
us. Just one day, for more than that might give you the dreaded 
fever. I could show you more in one day than I could write in a year. 
You would see our bark house, set up on posts, with a roof of mats. 
There is no chimney, for we do not have any fires in the house. This 
is the only house you would see within sixty miles of here that has a 
board floor, and it is a palace as compared with the native houses. 
Then you would see the native towns with their low huts, about as. 
high as a man’s head. These huts have no windows and only one 
little door. In them are the native beds, made of bamboo poles and 
not over six or eight inches from the ground. There are no bed clothes: 
but there is a fire on the ground at the side of the bed, to keep the 
occupant warm. The smoke having no outlet, spreads through the: 
whole house, making everything black and dirty. In such houses are 
kept all earthly possessions. Now go out into the street and see 
the children playing in the dirt like little pigs. One good thing is 
that they do not have any clothes on to get dirty, so that their mothers: 
do not have the trouble of washing and sewing for them. The girls: 
and women do not know how to sew. The men and boys do all this: 
kind of work. Before we came they did not have needles and thread,. 
so they made their own. For thread they would take the fibre of the 
pineapple or plantain and twist it into a sort of thread. For needles: 
they used to take pieces of bamboo. They did not use to have cloth 
either, but would make bark cloth. You could not see a native with 
shoes on. They go barefoot all the time. If you stand on the street 
a while you will see women coming home with great loads on their- 
backs in huge baskets. The women do most all the work. The men. 
are too lazy. The women go out to the gardens near the towns in 
the morning, work till about noon, then gather a load of food or- 
fire wood and carry it home. Then you can see them take up a big” 
earthen jar, native made, and go to the spring or river for water. 
Then they. cook the food and take it to the men, who eat first. Women: 
seldom eat with the men. If you stay long enough, you will see 
some chief whip one of his wives. Our big chief has eighty wives: 
and some of them are very bad, and when they displease him he 
takes a big club and beats them, till, down at the Mission house, we 
Can hear their screams. Then I would take you into school, where 
you would all laugh to see fifty or sixty little black fellows sitting: 


194 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


‘on long benches and trying to keep out of mischief long enough to 
get their lessons. Most of them have their feet up as high as they can 
get them, to keep them away from the jiggers. Oh, the pesky jiggers! 
What misery they make! The jigger is a small insect of the flea 
family, which lives in the dust and gets on the feet. They penetrate 
the skin and there hatch, if not removed soon. If left long, they make 
bad sores, which sometimes deform the feet. They are very numerous 
and are one of the worst pests in this land. Many of the boys have 
‘ulcers and they are all very dirty. Sometimes one can scrape the 
dirt off with a stick, and often I have to send them to the stream to 
‘wash, before I can permit them to stay in the school room. 


But you would laugh the hardest when I call the roll, if you 
eould understand the meaning of their names. Let me give a few, with 
their meanings: Nloze, leopard head; Mba Zok, beautiful elephant; 
Edu, rat; Okos, thunder storm; Ngu Zok, strength of an elephant; 
Edun Niam, noise in the town; Ngon, moon; Leopard, Heart, Prisoner, 
‘Doubt, Two Legs of an Animal, Free man, Open Door, Biscuit. And 
s0 I might go on with their ridiculous names. 


After school you should go to the house where the boys live while 
-at Elat. It is a long house with ground floor and a row of beds all 
around the side walls. Here thirty boys sleep, eat and live. They cook 
‘their own food in kettles, tin cans, or leaves. They are not at all par- 
‘ticular what they eat or how clean their food is. Some days ago they 
found a caterpillar’s nest up in a tree and there was a great scramble 
‘as to who should have the most, for they are very fond of these. 
“When they had secured all there were to be found they put them 
con the coals to singe the hair off, then cooked and ate them. We have 
seen them eat grasshoppers in the same way, and they think snake 
soup is fine. 


But the thing which would grieve you most is that they are so 
“very wicked. They do not love each other. They do not love their 
fathers and mothers. They love only self. They curse each other. 
‘They even curse their parents. They tell lies and steal, and do ev- 
erything which is bad, and nothing which is good. They do not 
know God, who made them and cares for them. You look at them 
‘and see their bright-looking faces, but you see only human animals; 
‘the image of the Creator is gone. There is no love in their hearts; no 
response when appeal is made to their feelings. They are moved only 
‘by passions and fear. 


But some of them who have been here the longest, are beginning 
‘to do better. Some try to pray and they all learn to sing the gospel 
‘songs. They are not afraid to open their mouths, which are very 
large, and sing loud. It is pleasant to hear them sing, and a real 
joy to be able to teach them about God. 


“THE BELOVED.” 195 


Now you must bid them good bye for the present, but do not for- 
get to pray for them always. May God bless you all. 


NATIVES MAKING MORE TROUBLE. 


March 28, 1899. 

My Dear Parents:—Since the scare of the Governor is over, the 
Bulu are returning to some of their old ways. Some troubles are 
starting up on the road and we fear the Bulu will soon suffer, for the 
Governor will make a raid on them that will count. Last month our 
caravan was stopped on the road, and one man and a boy and two 
loads were taken. We sent word to the chief of the town that he 
better let them go without trouble, but he only laughed at our mes- 
senger and asked what we could do. In the meantime we sent word 
to the Governor, telling him of the trouble. We received word indi- 
rectly that he could not do anything at present, but would come soon. 
We took this as another put-off, and so we took the matter into our 
own hands. We did not want to go on police duty, but we wanted the 
Mail and our goods, and more than all else we wanted to free the 
prisoner. So Mr. Fraser and Dr. Lippert, with about ten natives, 
went to the place, which is two days from here, walked into the 
town and released the prisoner, and brought away the loads. The 
natives were there with their guns, but they could not scare the 
white men one bit. And since that time we have word that the 
Governor is coming this week. If he comes, there will be a lively time 
about here, we suspect. Our last caravan was twenty-eight days 
making the trip. They found the road very bad, and some of them 
were sick. They were so long coming that we feared something had 
happened, and the word reached us that in crossing the river the boat 
capsized and seven of them were drowned. At first no names were 
given, and not knowing who was dead, the whole town set up a great 
howl. Friday night, word came that one young man, a favorite son 
of one of our chiefs, had been drowned. This caused great excitement. 
Some of the young men went to see if the word was true, the women 
wailed all night long, and the people in the neighboring towns, hear- 
ing the news, came and added to the confusion. Some of the mothers 
of the men who were in the caravan, came to us wringing their hands 
in despair, and oh, such looks as they had on their faces. And we 
were quite restless at Elat, too. But the best part of it was that it 
was all a big lie. The next day the caravan came in all well. Then 
the mourning was turned into rejoicing, and we were more firm in 
our belief that it is easier for a Bulu to lie than it is for him to tell 
the truth. We now have men out hunting carriers to go to the 
eoast tomorrow for more loads which are there. We want sixty men, 


i 


196 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


but it is,doubtful if they can be had at present. The traders take 
many of them. 

Our hunter was out today and killed a monkey, a squirrel, and 
two big birds. He shot at and crippled a chimpanzee, but it got 
away. He is a good shot. 


April 13, 1899. 

My Dear Parents:—Your letter of January 17 arrived at 8:30 
this morning, and twenty-six men are now waiting to go to the 
coast. I will write this note to let you know that I am all right and 
all at Elat are well. I was never so busy as I am this year. I have 
not time to write you a decent letter even. But we will take a little 
rest soon, I hope. “When will I be home?” The Lord only knows— 
in two years, perhaps. 


IN LABORS MANY. 


May 6, 1899. 

My Dear Parents:—This is the busiest time I have ever spent and 
it will remain so for three or four months, so if you do not get long 
letters, you will know that it is because time is too precious. Mr. 
Fraser and I have been assigned the work of translating Acts into the 
Bulu language, and of revising the Four Gospels which were trans- 
lated by Dr. A. C. Good. This, with the work of the station, makes us 
“hustle,” as they said of the man who wanted to catch the train after 
it had started. Mr. Fraser wants to start for home not later than 
September ist, and this work must be done before that time. It is rery 
confining, and will, no doubt, tell on us, but so far, we have stood 
it well. One cannot do the work here that he can at home. The 
climate is very trying on one in every way, and especially on the 
nerves. It is almost necessary to be in bed by nine in the evening, 
and it is hard to get up early, and when one does get up, he very often 
feels worse than when he lay down. } 


It is peculiar the affinity the colored man has for the chicken 
coop. It is commonly reported of him in our land, and it is certainly 
true in Africa. Some months ago we had a number of nice fowls, 
but gradually they have disappeared and we did not know what be- 
came of them. Just lately I found a boy with one which he had killed, 
and on investigation we learned that our school boys had been steal- 
ing them for a long time. And not only fowls, but tins of meat and 
trade goods have been stolen. Nearly all the boys are implicated and 
especially those in whom we had the most confidence. They can not 


“THE BELOVED.” 197 


stand any temptation. If they are where the goods are, and no one 
is looking, they can not keep their hands off. And we can not blame 
them very much either, for their parents have taught them to do this 
very thing. With a Bulu it is not wrong to steal if he is not caught at 
it. Our confidence is well-nigh gone in the Bulu honesty. This last 
affair was a disappointment to us. We feel these things. After trying 
so hard to teach them, and doing so much for them, then to find that 
they are trying to cheat us at every turn is one of our trials in the 
work. But the troubles and the trials are not to be compared to the 
joys in the same work. We cannot be too hard with these people, for 
they are very low in the scale and have a great leap to take. They 
will fare better than thousands in Christian lands who know better 
and do worse. 


The white population in Ebolewo’e now numbers seven: four 
missionaries and three traders. The traders are building new houses. 
Mvondo is moving his town from the hill above Elat, down to the east 
of us. It is the Bulu custom to move their towns every few years. 
It makes them lots of work, but they must rebuild their houses every 
three or four years at the most, for the posts and the roofs rot in 
that length of time, and so it is not much more trouble to go and 
build in a new location. A Bulu town is a very temporary affair. It 
is somewhat like a tent life they live. 


Please tell Mr. McAulay that I received the “class letter” by the 
last mail, and I am sending it this mail to Mr. J. T. Pence, B. A,, 
of Lamoni, Iowa. It was a treat for me. Thirteen letters in one and 
much good news. 


June 1, 1899. 


Dear Parents:—Another month has gone, and mail will leave 
tomorrow and I can write only a few lines. I have some very import- 
ant news to tell. There is a brand new girl at Elat—Miss Nellie 
Lippert, born May 22. Mother and child are both doing well; indeed, 
much better than we feared they would do. Things looked very ser- 
ious for a few days. Two lives were in the balance, but God held the 
balance. Our prayers were answered, and Elat has a new missionary. 


It is 10:30 P. M—Raining hard, my roof is leaking, and I am 
sleepy; think I better quit or I might say something. We have fin- 
ished translating Acts and are now revising the Gospels. It is ex- 
tremely hard work, and we are working night and day at it. The 
white traders are both sick with the fever. They lead such wicked 
lives they deserve to be sick. 


198 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


HEATHEN CRUELTY. 


June 2, 1899. 

Dear Co-laborers of Trinity Church:—Yesterday the want of 
parental love was exemplified. An old woman died with the “Mebate,” 
a loathsome and painful skin disease. She had been sick about two 
months, but died more from hunger and want of care than from the 
disease. She ‘has two strong sons, grown men, and one nephew, 
living in the same town. Soon after she took sick and was not able 
to care for herself by hunting food, carrying water, and fire wood, 
they all left town on a visit, leaving only one woman, a wife of one 
of the dutiful sons, to care for the old lady, and this woman had three 
children of her own to provide for. Thus the old woman, covered with 
running sores, unable to walk or provide for herself, was left to 
suffer and die, with no one to love and care for her; no one to comfort 
and cheer her. Her own sons even deserted her in her time of need. 
She was a pitiable sight. Three days before her death I was in to see 
her, and tried to tell her of Him who did care for her even if all men 
did not. Whether the spirit took her to himself, we can never know 
on this earth. Pray for such neglected ones. 

In another town near by, a young man died of heart disease. His 
relatives came to mourn his death, and when they were about to 
leave, they asked the unfortunate man in whose town the young man 
died, to pay them. This seems to be a custom among them. In their 
manner of thinking, no one dies a natural death, but all are bewitched 
by some enemy, and so the relatives demand pay when one of their 
kin dies. This is no doubt a scheme whereby their insatiable greed for 
goods is partially satisfied. 


We have just seen how cheaply human beings are held by the 
Bulu. A trader, black, from Kamerun, gave out goods to the amount 
of $12.00 and for security took two little girls. These girls were kept 
by the trader for many months, but the father did not come to re- 
lease them. When the trader left for the coast a few days ago, 
he was going to take the girls along, but was stopped on the way 
and the girls taken from him, as well as some of his rubber, and his 
gun. So the trader gets nothing for his goods or trouble in caring 
for the children, and he deserves none because he was dealing with 
human souls. This shows how little a father thinks of his child, and 
especially if that child is a girl. They are bought and sold like so 
many cattle. 


WHITE TRADERS DESCRIBED. 


But the greatest objects of shame to us are the white traders. It 
is impossible to tell you the depths to which they go in sin. Some 
of them are well educated and respectable men when they arrive, and 


“THE BELOVED.” 192 


some are fugitives from justice. Most of them come because of 
trouble or failure at home, and come out here to get away for awhile. 
But whatever their station in coming, they soon all arrive at the 
same place, namely: drunken, licentious, brute-beasts, lower than 
the lowest native. They are a curse to the soil on which they tread. 
Even the natives recoil from them. They bring in the cursed rum 
and teach the native to drink, both by example and precept. They 
are unrestrained in every vice and surpass the natives in the lowest. 
They are a great hindrance to our work. Would that they were gone. 


THE WORK OR TRANSLATING. 


At its last meeting the Mission asked Mr. Fraser and me to trans- 
late the book of Acts, and revise the Four Gospels as translated by Dr. 
Good. This is a very interesting kind of work, and we are spending 
most of our time at it these days. Mr. Fraser expects to start for 
home in the early fall and we must have this work done by that time 
so that he can take the copy home and see it through the press. We 
have been in great need of more literature in the Bulu language, and 
are glad to see this addition coming in the near future. Then, too, the 
Gospels need much correcting. As you well know, Dr. Good was. 
called to his rest before he had completed his work, humanly speak- 
ing. His manuscript was not prepared for the press as it would 
have been had he lived. Consequently there are many mistakes. Dr. 
Lippert has kindly taken the school, so that I may have all my time 
for this work. We have finished translating Acts, first copy, but will 
go over it again. ‘Mr. Fraser has the odd chapters and I have the 
even. We are now revising the Gospels. Mr. Fraser has Matthew and 
John, and I have Mark and Luke,. We find it very hard to express 
some of the Bible thoughts in this poverty stricken language. The 
thoughts are entirely foreign to them and so there are not words in 
their language to express them. Such words as justification, sanctifi- 
cation, redemption, regeneration, spirit, etc., all so rich in meaning 
to us, have no place in their thoughts and never have had. In many 
cases we have to introduce words and teach them the meaning. It is 
like making something out of nothing, to try to translate some of our 
most beautiful thoughts. But this is no more than could be expected 
of a people as low as these are. 

The work of the station goes on as usual. Sometimes the sky is 
clear, and sometimes the clouds arise, but ere the day is done the 
clouds disappear and the sun sets in all his glory, leaving a quiet, re- 
freshing glow of hope for the coming day. 


June 29, 1899. 
My Dear Parents:—Mail will leave tomorrow. Something was. 
wrong with the last mail. We did not get home letters and many 


200 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


papers were missing, but we think it will come by the next time. So 
I did not get your letter telling about that box you sent. The box 
came but, I am sorry to say, everything was spoiled. The box smelled 
so badly that they opened it at Batanga, and a few things only were 
worth sending on. Everything is saturated with spoiled fruit. It is 
best not to put fruit in with clothing. I am very grateful to you for 
sending these things. Even if they are spoiled, your good intentions 
are manifest. Please thank Margaret Twiman for the cards. Part of 
them are good. I will try to wash the blanket. The socks are all 
right. I cannot at this writing tell who all the senders were, so 
please tell them that I am very grateful for these kind remembrances. 

Mr. Presset, our French teacher at Benito, came up today for a 
little visit and rest. He came out when I did. He has not been very 
well, and no wonder for he has an average of eighty-four boys in his 
school. We are getting along nicely, only we do not have enough time. 


GREATLY HELPED BY MONTCLAIR 
CHURCH. 


June 29, 1899. 

Dear Co-Laborers of Montclair:—You must not set your hopes 
for an interesting letter this time. I feel that a note of thanks must 
be sent for your kindness, and then I want to ask for a few more 
favors. 

First, let me thank you most heartily for your offering for the 
school work. It is a great stimulus to me to know that your hearts 
are in this work out here, and that your interest goes deeper than mere 
‘words. When one gives he is in earnest. Words are good but deeds 
are better. You young people seem to be descendants of Dorcas, who 
was “full of good works.” The Bulu, perhaps, will not be able to 
show “coats and garments” which you have made, (much as they 
would like to),but they ought to be very grateful if only they had 
sense enough to understand what you are doing for them. As to what 
will be done with your gift we have not yet decided. I will tell you 
about it later. 

I wish also to express my gratitude to you for the scrap books 
you sent to me. Whoever made them did excellént work, and if they 
could see how tickled the natives are, they would feel well repaid for 
their work. The scrap books arrived on Saturday and on Sabbath af- 
ternoon I took one of them and went down into the towns, and showed 
the pictures to the people and explained them. Not only children, but 
old men and women were delighted with them. The second chief in 
power in Ebolewo’e looked, laughed, and questioned, like a five year 


“THE BELOVED.” 201 


old boy. They were delighted, especially with three of the pictures, 
namely: “The Infant Jesus,’ “Jesus Blessing Little Children,” and 
“The Crucifixion.” These books will be very useful in attracting at- 
tention, and can be carried around without any trouble. But they are 
too small for large crowds. Now, if you have any of the large size, 
about 2x3 feet, such as are used in some Sabbath schools, they would 
be of service here. These are what I had reference to when I first 
wrote. We have a few on the life of Christ, and a few from Old Testa- 
ment scenes which we show nearly every Sabbath, and the people 
never tire of them. They are a great attraction. Many people come 
just to hear the organ and see the pictures. And they are instructive 
as well as attractive. If you can get ten or twenty of these and put 
them on cloth so they will not tear, (old ones will do, and any kind of 
cloth), and send them out, it will be of more value than many ser- 
mons. Think a moment. These people have no pictures of any kind, 
BO you can imagine how delighted they are with any thing in this line. 
If any of the little folks have old scrap books with pictures of people, 
horses, dogs, animals of any kind, etc., they can be put into use. Fancy 
pictures of flowers are not so suitable as animals, people, ete. 


BLACK TRADERS. 


Another line of work has been suggested recently, in which you 
can help. There are many black traders among the Bulu who have 
come from various stations on the coast. Most of them have been 
taught at some Mission school and many can read English. They 
come up here away from their people and soon go into sin if they are 
not looked after. Some have asked for Bibles but we are not sup- 
plied with English Bibles. Could you get for me a dozen Testaments, 
and two or three cheap Bibles? (I have reference to the five cent 
Testaments). Sometimes, too, they call for English dictionaries. Is 
there such a thing in print as a 5 cent, 10 cent, or 15 cent dic- 
tionary? If there is, and you will send say six, it might help some of 
these men in reading their Bibles intelligently. It may be of interest 
in this connection to Mr. Ben. Strong to know that the Observers 
which he so kindly sends me, are passed on to traders after I am 
through with them. The traders, both black and white, are glad to 
get them. 


“How is the camera getting along?” I have been out of material 
and so have not done much for a while, but by last mail a fresh sup- 
ply came. Will try to get some films soon. When I sent “our nega= 
tives” I suggested that they be put in the hands of a photographer. 
Perhaps that was not wise. They are at your disposal; do what you 
see fit with them. 


202 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


July 4, 1899. 

Dear Parents:—We have a chance of sending mail tomorrow se 
I will write a card. Mr. Presset has been with us five days, and we 
have enjoyed his visit. Yesterday, he and I went up on the mountain 
and had a good day. He is a fine musician and we ‘have been enjoy- 
ing his music. Last Sabbath the baby was baptized and there was 
such a crowd out that we could hardly control it. We are rejoiced 
to hear that we are to get $50.00 for a new church. This will build 
a good shelter from sun and rain, and that is all we need. A great 
deal of robbing and plundering is being done by the natives. Many ap- 
peals have been made for protection, but the Government has made 
no reply yet. ‘ 


July 26, 1899. 

My Dear Parents:—I was very much chagrined the other day 
when I read one of my letters to you which was printed to find in it 
a glaring grammatical mistake. Now, my letters to you are usually 
rattled off in a hurry and often not gone over after they come from 
the machine, knowing that you are not at all critical. But when these 
things are printed they go out to the cold, critical world. The parental 
love no longer guards them, and sometimes when I see some of my 
mistakes printed my temperature seems to go down several degrees. 
But the tropical sun soon thaws me out again, and I am disposed to 
believe that at such long range the critical eyes will learn to forgive 
and forget. 


DIFFICULTIES IN GETTING MAIL. 


The mail, which I spoke of the last time as not reaching us, came 
in just one month late. I remember at college when the fast mail 
was even an hour late it was a topic for discussion. Something serious 
had happened. But here we can wait for a month and not worry much, 
either. We get mail now every month and we are glad to get it so 
often. One peculiar thing was that the box you sent arrived a mont 
before the letter which was started at the same time. Now let me 
send my thanks again for those kind remembrances. Most of them 
were spoiled, but the kindness was none the less for that. Please 
tell John Buxbaum that the Bulu boys say that tie he sent is “aben”™” 
(beautiful). Please thank him for me. The boys say he must be my 
“big friend,” and want to know why he won’t be big friend to them. 
They are very fond of those little cards, also. They cannot read the 
writing, but can look up the references in the Bulu Testament and 
find out what the picture is about. May I suggest that when you send, 
you must keep the perishable and the unperishable separate, if not iz 
separate boxes, at least with a tight partition between. 


“THE BELOVED.” 203 


GETING AN ANTELOPE. 


A few days ago we had a little sport which turned out nicely for 
us. One of the boys came and said he had seen a little antelope just 
outside of our fence. I took my shot gun and went down and hunted 
a while, but we did not see it. Getting tired, I gave the gun to a boy 
and started back. I had not gone far when he shouted that he saw it 
hiding in the weeds. It started to run and he shot, breaking one of 
its hind legs. It got out in the path and tried to run on three legs, 
and I took after it. My two legs were better than its three. When 
I came close it tried to jump through the fence, but bounded back 
and fell, and I fell on top, grabbing it by one leg. The boys say that 
I did not run, but flew. We all had a good laugh and a good stew. 
Yesterday our hunter, whose picture I will send you this time, came 
in with a red deer. This makes the fourth deer, or perhaps better 
antelope, which he has shot for us. It costs us nothing but the am- 
munition, and we give him one-half the game. Wild pigeons are very 
plentiful now and we get some every few days. We do get so hungry 
for fresh meat that this game is thankfully received. 


A DAY OFF. 


Week before last I took one day off and went out among the 
towns. We heard that there was to be a great gathering of people 
about three hours’ walk east of Elat, for the purpose of establishing 
the society which is called “So.” I have told you of this society be- 
fore. It is a secret organization. But one secret which is not a 
secret is that one object of the society is to band together and rob 
caravans. But is was reported at this time that many big chiefs 
were to meet and try to fix up some of their old troubles. They said 
they were going to “make friendship,” and they would use the “So” 
society medicine when they took tke oath of friendship. Here was a 
good chance to see a lot of people at one time, have a talk with them 
and ask them for school boys. So I took my camera and went. The 
day was fine and the people were kind. I had a nice trip and took 
eleven pictures. I went one road and came another, and passed 
through nine towns and villages. Most of the crowd had gone home, 
they said, but still there were 250. Six big chiefs were there talking 
when I arrived. I took their picture standing together shaking hands. 
Some time ago they were at war. It is gratifying to see them settle 
their old troubles. When I had finished taking the picture I gave 
them a talk on friendship, and especially friendship with God. They 
Were as meek looking as school children and listened attentively, 
notwithstanding one of them is said to have 100 wives. (It is a good 
thing for him that they do not have to wear hats and dresses). That 
day I saw some people who had never seen a white man, and most 


204 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


of them are not at all familiar with the animal, so there was a staring 
crowd. Would that we could get out more among the people. Three 
of those towns had never been visited by us, and that within three 
hours’ walk from the station. It is a shame. But our numbers are 
so limited and there is so much work to do at the station. When we 
get through our translating we hope to do more of this work. One 
of the most interesting parts of the work is to go out this way and get 
among the people. They gather around us and listen so attentively. 

A few days before the above gathering four or more chiefs met 
in Ebolewo’e to “make friendship.” Mr. Fraser and I went down 
and I took a picture of them as they stood in the bush where the 
“So” society used to have its den. The old medicine is still there and 
they swore friendship over the medicine. Those who had not “ridden 
the goat” had to blindfold their eyes, for if they should see this medi- 
cine they would die. They told us not to go in, for we were not mem- 
bers and we would surely die. But we were not so superstitious as 
they were and strange to say we have not died yet. The same day 
I took a picture of the sign of this society, which you will see in the 
picture. It is a log on which has been carved three animals, name- 
ly: A hog, an elephant, and a lizard. It used to be up on posts, but 
has fallen down. It would be nice to send home to some museum. 

The translating is slow work. We have translated Acts, and 
revised the four Gospels, first copy. Now this will all be gone over 
again, but will not take so long next time. We have started and are 
in the 8th of Acts reviewing. 


Mvondo and one of his wives. 


WEST AFRICAN CUSTOMS—A TASTE OF 
HEATHENISM. 


August 14, 1899. 


“Happy is that people whose God is the Lord.” The force of the 
psalmist’s words is being manifested now among the Bulu. This peo- 
ple have not God for their Lord, and they are in most abject misery. 
The heathen nature is asserting itself these days. It would seem 
that Satan -himself is here working out his fiendish designs. A great 
black cloud hangs over this place. It appeared first about a week ago 
and is growing blacker and blacker. May God forbid that it burst 
and pour more misery on these wretched people. “The dark places 
of the earth are full of the habitations of cruelty.” Even though at 
times quiet and peace reign, yet wickedness lurketh near. The “hab- 
itations of cruelty” are here and when opportunity comes the bounds 
of those habitations break, like the dam before the Johnstown flood, 
the black winged monster bursts forth and spreads desolation and 
sorrow over these people. 


MVONDO’S DEATH. 


The immediate cause of this outburst was the death of our chief, 
Mvondo. Many people have died since we came to Bulu, but no death 
has caused such an uproar as this one. There was a time when “a 
man was famous according as he had lifted up axes upon the thick 
trees.” But in the Bulu land a man is famous according to the num- 
ber of women he has married. There is only one Bulu chief in all 
this region who has more wives than Mvondo had, so he was counted 
a “famous” man, and when he died the four corners of the Bulu earth 
were shaken. 

Mvondo was feared more than loved. There was a certain awful- 
ness about his person which impressed one at first sight. He was 
large and bony, with small, squinting eyes which would penetrate 
one to the very bones. He was always begging for something and one 
could see at a glance that he fully expected to get what he asked for. 
Usually people were afraid to refuse his requests. He had a mind 
of his own and did not want to be crossed. He was “fierce” as the 
people say, and very heartless. His tender mercies were cruel. He 
used to beat his wives unmercifully for the least offense. A hus- 
band’s love! About four years before his death one of his sons, a mere 
boy, took the “mebate,” a very bad skin disease, and was a constant 


206 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


trouble to his father. The boy was forbidden to get on his father’s 
bed. One day the father found him on his bed and became so angry 
that he went and took his gun and shot at his boy. The wounded 
lad ran for his life, and the father after him, beating him till he final- 
ly killed him, and then threw his little form into the bush. A father’s 
love! One day one of his brother’s refused to obey his orders and 
Mvondo took after him with a handful of spears. The brother fled 
across the Mission premises with the old man after him. Fortunately 
the young man was the fleeter footed and escaped unhurt. A brother’s 
love! He attended church about eight times in three years. The last 
time he came he was drunk. Once as the missionary was talking to 
him about God’s love and how he ought to love God, he refused to 
hear him more, and told the one talking to stop. Love to his God! 
Self was his god. None was of such consequence as Mvondo. In his 
mind the whole world knew Mvondo. The white man heard of his 
fame and power and came to seek his protection. Nearly all the 
white men (seven) are in his town now. After the arrival of the 
white men his fame increased among the tribes. He became quite 
noted as the man whose medicine had captured the foreigners with 
all their countless riches. Trade was drawn to his town. He married 
and gave in marriage many days. He grew and became great in the 
eyes of the Bulu. He said he had eighty wives, but this is doubtful 
at any one time. Possibly he had married that number, but many have 
Tun away with better looking men, and others have died. Sixty would 
probably be nearer the number. 


Like most great men this king started out in a humble way. His 
father had about sixty wives at his death, but as he had been dead 
only about fourteen years and Myondo was about fifty when he died 
this would leave Mvondo an “obedient son,” and one among many, for 
about thirty-six years with no prominence whatever. But when his 
father died Mvyondo was the most fierce of all his brethren, and in the 
scramble for the spoils, he took by force the greater share of his 
father’s wives. Starting from this heritage he built up a great town, 
and drew many people after him. His brothers, as well as chiefs of 
other tribes, came to fear him, so that he stood first man of the Yen- 
jok, his tribe. Moreover, he formed an alliance with a strong chief 
of the Esakoe tribe who lives about five miles to the southwest. He 
was feared and hated everywhere. So when his sudden death was 
proclaimed from town to town and from tribe to tribe, there was 
naturally a commotion, for a “mighty man” had fallen. 


“THE BELOVED.” 207 


MOURNING FOR MVONDO. 


As if to add trouble to the affair Mvondo died in a distant town. 
This makes it more complicated. About July 20th, Mvondo took three 
of his grown sons, four boys, and seventeen of his best looking wives, 
and went on a trading expedition into the interior. He took sick and 
after three days died there. The word reached here late in the even- 
ing of the next day, the whole town set up a great howl, and nearly 
everyone, especially the women, went to his house to mourn. His 
brothers, wives, and children rolled in the dust and yelled as loud as 
they could. They did not cry, but just screamed themselves hoarse. 
They poured dust on their heads and beat the ground. It was a piti- 
ful sight. All night long they mourned and groaned and gave forth 
their hideous sounds. There was perhaps but little genuine sorrow 
in this mourning. It was more from custom and from fear as to the 
consequences. The next day brought hundreds of people from various 
towns and all the women kept a continual wailing. Most of them, 
especially the relatives, were daubed from head to foot with white 
mud. This is a sign of mourning. 


The people of the town caught all of Mvondo’s wives who did not 
go with him, put them in a house, and tied the door. And most of 
those women are there yet—one week—without being permitted to 
set foot outside. Some of them were released at the intercession of 
the missionaries, but their lot is worse in some ways than those who 
are still penned up. The sisters of Mvondo came en masse and began 
to beat and abuse his widows, demanding goods from them, because 
they say the wives were responsible for his death. This is the Bulu 
eustom. No one dies a natural death. All are bewitched. Somebody 
is responsible for every death. The greater the man, the greater is 
the demand for pay. Greed for goods is at the bottom of it all. 


But those who put in the greatest claim are the people of the 
tribe of Mvondo’s mother—that is, his cousins and uncles on his 
mother’s side. They came and sacked the town the first night while 
the people were excited and mourning. If they would only stop with 
their desire for goods it would not be so bad, but they demand that 
at least six people be killed to avenge Mvondo’s death. He was so 
great in their eyes that it will take six ordinary mortals to equal him. 
And to make good their claim they have caught those sixteen wives 
and four boys who went with him on his trip. There is another tribe 
connected with Mvondo in some way or other which demands the 
death of five or six. And some of the chiefs around here say some of 
his widows ought to be killed on general principles. They wish to 
instil fear into the hearts of all the wives of great men. 


Myvondo’s own sons and brothers are itching for the spoils, and 
are watching like crows for the carcass. And as though the matter 


208 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


needed more complications, the tribes from which his wives come are 
on hand to protect their daughters from being killed and threaten 
war if they are killed. 


Now you will agree that this is a sorry mess. It has stirred the 
whole country. “For wheresoever the carcass is, there will the eagles 
be gathered together.” Brothers and sons are waiting for the spoils. 
Uncles and cousins are demanding pay in goods, and revenge in the 
blood of from six to fifteen souls. The fathers and brothers of his 
widows are ready to fight for their daughters and sisters. In the 
meantime the poor women are half starved, beaten and bruised, and 
skinned of everything they possess. The missionaries, much to the 
discomfort of certain chiefs, are pleading for the lives of the inno- 
cent women. Some tribes at a distance lay all the blame on the white 
men, and in revenge are capturing cargoes from the traders and mis- 
using their agents, even threatening to kill some of the black ones. 

So the cloud hangs black and lowering. The palaver will be 
talked in four or five days. Surely wretched is that people who know 
not the Lord. 


A VERY INTERESTING LETTER. 


August, 1899. 

Dear Parents:—On Sabbath evening I was in one of the towns 
near by about the time the natives eat their principal meal of the day, 
which is anywhere from 4 to 8 o’clock P. M. The school boys happened 
to be there and some one in the town gave them food. Before they 
ate it they asked a blessing aloud. As this took place in a publie house 
it must have taken some courage. Another young man who lives 
about a 40 minutes walk east of Elat, and who comes to service quite 
Tegularly, seems to be trying to lead a better life. He says when he 
asks a blessing the people all laugh at him, and sometimes when he 
opens his eyes his food has disappeared. You see there is but one big 
mess pot, and the first hand gets the biggest grab. It costs these 
people something to be religious sometimes. 


There is an old woman in Ebolwo’e who has a very bad cancer on 
the back of her head. It is one of the hard kind which, in this case, 
the doctor says cannot be cured. She used to attend services regular- 
ly, but cannot come now. She suffers greatly, and still there seems 
to be a bright spot in her life, too. We tell her that she cannot get 
well and that she ought to prepare to meet her God. She says she 
prays, and I know she does, for as I passed ome evening I heard her 
praying. I believe the light is dawning on her dark soul. May God 
claim her from this mass of darkness and polfution. 


“THE BELOVED.” 2092 


-Sometimes these people are exasperating in the extreme. They- 
lie, beg and steal so much. They will lie when the truth will serve: 
them better. They steal fowl, foods, goods, in fact anything they can 
get their hands on. There is only one crime with them it would seem,. 
and that is the crime of being caught when they are doing something: 
bad. It is no crime if they are not caught. They break down our 
fence for firewood. The boys take their beds for the same purpose.. 
They give our fowls and goats poison to make them die, so they can: 
eat them; for it makes no odds to them how or when a thing dies. 
They do not beg as much as they used to, but some are at it contin-- 
ually. It tis not the poor people who beg the hardest. The chiefs are 
the worst. Sometimes their begging takes a funny turn, as when a. 
woman who came to have her tooth pulled asked the doctor to pay~ 
her for letting him pull her tooth. Sometimes a man will come to ex-- 
change a cloth for one he likes better and almost always asks for 
something on top, although he alone is favored. They want pay for- 
coming to church and school. But with all their faults I love them: 
still. 

The attendance in school has fallen off this year for some reason.. 
Perhaps because we have not put so much stress on it on account of* 
the other work taking up our time. But we are much encouraged by~ 
the good attendance at Sabbath services. We have Sabbath school at: 
9 A. M. and preaching immediately after. In the school we have but- 
two classes. Mr. Fraser has the children and I have the grown peo-- 
ple. The former averages about forty, but sometimes goes as high 
as sixty. Last Sabbath there were 121 in my class and there are: 
scarcely ever less than 100. We have not built our new meeting house - 
yet, but are gathering the material and preparing for it. It is badly- 
needed, for at least twenty-five stood up last Sabbath and others went- 
away for lack of room. It is peculiar the way they come, for we hit: 
straight out from the shoulder and strike everybody—and some very” 
hard—yet they do not become offended. The glorious old Gospel has: 
a drawing power which tis hard to understand. We speak the language: 
in a very unattractive manner. Why do they come? Is it not the: 
power from on high which draws them? 


DEATH OF A GERMAN TRADER. 


September 9, 1899. 

‘My Dear Parents:—This has been a peculiar day. I was awakened 
at 4:15 A. M. by a boy who brought a note from Dr. Lippert stating that 
a German trader whom he had been attending had just died. Doctor 
had treated him several days and had been with him all night, but 
was not able to stay the poisonous effects of the dreaded black-water 
fever. Death claimed him. Now that it was over the first thought 
was where and how to bury him. There are two other white traders 
here, but they were as helpless as children. They were scared and 
had no suggestions, so Doctor and I took the affair into our own hands 
(Mr. Fraser is absent). There was not a coffin within 300 miles. There 
was not a board over two and one-half feet long at the traders’ houses. 
they had no nails and there is no carpenter here, so it was Hobson’s 
choice. I started out to hunt up some boards which were lying around 
the station. They were unplaned and very crooked, but they were the 
best we had or could get. Now, I am not in the habit of making cof- 
fins, but have found out that a missionary in Africa at least must be 
prepared to do any kind of work from preaching the glorious Gospel 
tte digging stumps and graves. I did not plane the boards, but nailed 
them together roughly, making a box six feet long by eighteen inches 
wide, a little narrower at one end than the other. By this time the 
Doctor came to help me. For a cover we took box lids and nailed 
them to two poles. After it was all nailed together we covered it 
outside and in with white muslin so that it looked real pretty. It 
took us until noon to finish it. By this time the men had the grave 
dug, on Mission premises, and they came and took the coffin from the 
workshop to the trader’s house to receive its burden. The burial took 
‘place at 3 o’clock. I, being the only minister here, took charge. We 
had a short service. There was nothing to say about the man, for 
there was nothing good to say. He had no friends here. In the cold 
earth we laid him. No tears were shed. 


This was a sad case. This man came from a wealthy Catholic 
family in Germany. But when a young man he took to drink and 
kindred evils, and went so low that his own father turned him out of 
‘his home. Giving him 5,000 marks ($1,250) he sent him out to look 
after himself. The outcast went to England, where he got a good posi- 
ction through the influence of an uncle, but he soon lost the place 
as well as all his money. Thus cut off and in disgrace he came to 
trade in Africa for the firm of C. Woermann. He arrived at Ebolewo’e 


“THE BELOVED.” 211 


about the first of May. He led a very wicked life here, but did little 
trading. He had the fever slightly two or three times, and did not 
take care of himself. He drank hard, dissipated and took no care as 
to the kind of water he drank, using water from a small stream. On 
September 7 he took sick suddenly and called for Dr. Lippert. When 
the Doctor returned he said there was no hope for his recovery. He 
could not retain either food or medicine. His organs refused to work, 
and the Doctor could not free his system from the poisons which were 
rapidly collecting. He turned very yellow, and lingered along until 
4 A. M., September 9th, when he died. A vile life; a hopeless death. 
Some days before his death he received word that his father had for- 
given him and asked him to return home. He did not go. How willing- 
ly his Heavenly Father would have done the same thing if he had 
only gone to Him. How sad a blow it will be to his earthly father. 
How much sadder it will be to his Heavenly Father. 


DEATH OF MR. GAULT. 


About one hour after this man was buried Mr. Fraser returned 
from Efulen with the mail and word that our beloved brother, Mr. 
Gault, was dead. You will perhaps ere this know more of the partic- 
ulars than we do. It seems that he did not die of any particular dis- 
ease, but that the machinery ran down and he passed away perfectly 
at ease and conscious up to the last, giving detailed directions to his 
wife and son, Harry, concerning his affairs and their future. This is 
a sad loss, humanly speaking, to our Mission, for Mr. Gault was a pil- 
lar in the work.- But what shall we say? It is the Lord’s work and 
He can supply the workers. Mr. Gault has been at work in Africa 
since 1881, about nineteen years. He always seemed to me like a great 
elephant, if I may use the term. Large and strongly built; a little 
reserved, but always at work; a steady, even, powerful tread, unmoved 
by little ‘“fly-bite” annoyances. Others might worry and fuss, but he, 
quiet and unruffled, would go on his way. Nothing flashy or dashy, 
but doing his work well and commanding the respect of all. He could 
always be depended on. A giant, a mighty man has fallen. 

What a contrast in these two deaths. The trader, a vile outcast, 
not fit for the society of man, dying in a strange land with no one who 
cares six straws whether he lives or dies, for such is the love of 
traders. If he dies, well, for there will be less competition. A Cath- 
olic, indeed, (and a good one, I trow). It is not ours to judge, but 
when one sees a man do deeds which make the heathen turn away 
in shame, deeds which cannot be mentioned for vileness, committed 
not once but repeatedly, in the light of God’s word, what is to be the 
lot of such a brute when he dies unrepenting? Better for him if he 
had never been born. 

- But it is a joy and comfort to think of the earnest, Godlike life 


212 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


and sweet death cf Brother Gault. A goodly number of years, not = 
long life, of active service; loved, honored, respected. And at death 
calm, trustful, fearless, he went to sleep in the arms of Jesus. His 
reward is sure. He hath entered into his rest. His memory is re-- 
freshing to the soul, his example stimulating. May God help us to 
live lives like this, spending and being spent for others. 


JOTTINGS. 


September 17, 1899. 

The cruelty of these heathen comes out in almost every act. The 
boys are always catching little birds. This is not cruel in itself for 
they catch them for food, but when they catch them they do not kill 
them immediately. They break their wings and legs and hang them 
up to suffer and die of pain. Sometimes they run a splinter through 
the beak and hang the poor bird up to die. When they want to kill a 
goat they often beat it with clubs till they pound the life out of it. 
They seem to enjoy killing animals, and like to prolong the act as: 
long as possible. They even killed a woman this way not long ago. 
They beat her with clubs and left her for dead, but she got up and 
started to run away. They repeated the act five times before they 
succeeded in killing her. “The quality of mercy” is surely “strained” 
among the Bulu. It is not so plentiful as the “gentle rain whick 
droppeth from heaven.” 


COCKROACHES. 


My recollection of cockroaches at home is not very vivid, but it 
has become painfully vivid here in Africa. A Bulu house is a perfect 
hotbed for roaches. Between the pieces of bark on the walls and be- 
tween the mats on the roof they find excellent hiding places for the 
day, from which they sally forth on their nocturnal raids. Nature 
having provided them with three pairs of jaws( it is well they do not 
talk) they are peculiarly fitted for their destructive work. Like Cap- 
tain. Davis’ goat on the steamship Niger, they have a great literary 
taste, but preferring the covers of books to the inside. They especial- 
ly like the titles. It is not pleasant, to say the least, to have a fine 
volume completely disfigured in a single night. Much as we dread the 
driver ants, we would enjoy giving up the house for a night that they 
might come and make a raid on the cockroaches, They cannot es- 
cape the drivers. But the drivers have not made us a visit for a year 
or more. We are praying for them. The roaches cannot fly up, but 
they can come sailing down like Darius Green and.his flying machine. 
When one is snoring serenely and dreaming of pleasant stenes, or 


“THE BELOVED.” 213 


‘even when he has the nightmare, he does not like to be suddenly 
brought to his senses by a lubberly cockroach floundering in his left 
ear. But there are worse things than cockroaches. We had a native 
-work for us once whose name was Cockroach. 

When the Lord turned the captivity of Job, and his friends and 
companions came to comfort him, “every man also gave him a piece 
of money, and everyone an earring of gold.” This would seem like 
a plausible thing to do. Job had been in trouble; he had lost all his 
earthly possesions. He was brought very low. But when he ab- 
fhhorred himself and repented in dust and ashes, the Lord came to his 
tTescue. So why should not his friends give him a “lift” to get started 
again in life. Not so the Bulu. When one has been sick or in trouble 
and gets well or relief he must pay his friends instead of receiving 
pay. A few days ago a woman who had been unable to walk for many 
years was sent home well from the hospital. Ten minutes after she 
-was sent out some women began begging from her. She ought to pay 
because she had been healed, they said. She was happy at heart, and 
ought to show her joy by paying others, “iest she get sick again.” 


PURCHASE MORE LAND. 


Batanga Kamerun, W. A., Elat Station, Sept. 21, 1899. 

My Dear Parents:—The Mission premises at Elat had a peculiar 
growth. Mr. Good and the committee sent up by the Mission selected 
a very fine little hill. It has proved a splendid location, but as they 
took in only the top, it has been too small. Two years ago we bought 
more on the east side, taking in a good spring. But still we felt 
erowded for sometimes the people would build or make gardens 
too close, so we asked for more money this year with which to 
buy more land. We have just now completed the purchase of a strip 
on the southwest and north. Most of this new land is good soil 
and has much food on it. There are near 300 plantains, pineapples, 
20 young palm-oil trees which will be valuable later on, and other 
food. The trees and food made the cost quite high, in fact the land 
was the least valuable of all in the eyes of the people, for they never 
‘sell land among themselves. We took in about six acres and it cost 
about $25. There must be about 20 acres belonging to the Mission 
now, in all. It will be sufficient. You see we are expansionists. 


A WOMAN TALKS, 


It is very hard to trade with these people, for time is of no value 
to them. They are never satisfied, and will talk an hour for one 
needle. In buying the land one old lady (?) who had some plantains 
made a great fuss. She made a speech praising the property. She 


214 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


lifted her masculine voice up to the sky and belched forth like 2 
volcano. She walked about, she stamped her feet (of the Chicago type} 
she bowed and scraped, and stretched out her brawny arms as if she 
would encircle the eastern hemisphere in her maternal embrace. She 
wanted goods in abundance. Had Dewey met her in Havana harbor 
I fear he would have fled and gone Maying in other waters. Macbeth’s 
witches were good looking compared with her. She has a hole 
punched through her nose, into which one could stick a lead pen- 
cil. How she talked! And when she finished, she turned to the Bulu 
and asked if she were not telling the truth, to which they all assented 
with a great shout. We finally settled with her and her illustrious son 
and all parties concerned, and the land now belongs to the Mission. 

We are greatly rejoiced that our Mission is to get seven new 
missionaries about the end of the year. We do not know whether 
our station will get any of them or not, but we are glad, nevertheless. 
Would that the church was as good at sending out reinforcements as 
the government is. Our brave soldiers are waging a good warfare 
and freeing a needy people, and they deserve all praise. They care not 
for hardships and exposure. But they go well equipped. When 
needed, they ask for recruits. They get them. They win. But how 
about our Christian soldiers? The ranks are thin. The enemy is 
strong and aggressive. Recruits are called for. The volunteers are en- 
listing, but the means are wanting. What are seven men and women 
when we look over this great field? We could use them at Elat. Here 
are perhaps one million Bulu, with seven missionaries located at 
two stations seventy miles apart, with no helpers in the way of 
Sunday school teachers, Y. P. S. C. E. workers, or elders. What 
can we do? And other portions of the field are as needy as this. 
One thing we are not going to do is, that we will not be discouraged 
because we are few. The Lord is on our side. Though a great host 
encampeth round about us trying to overcome us and our work, we 
know that a great host, invisible to the eye of flesh, is on our side. 
The influence of the missionaries does not die with them. A good 
illustration of this came out the other day. When Mr. Good first 
came to Ebolewo’e he got a promise from the chief Mvondo that he 
would not kill any more people, as was the custom, when some big 
man died. Mvondo kept that promise and it was mentioned many times 
when they were talking the palaver about the death of Mvondo himself. 
All who were here at the time remember Dr. Good very distinctly 
and often refer to things he said. 

The mail has been delayed on account of the trouble over the 
death of Mvondo, but will go today, so this partly finished letter 
will go with the rest. 

P. S.—Two people were killed in town the night of Sept. 4. 


MORE ABOUT MVONDO’'S DEATH. 


October 14, 1899. 
The king’s business requires haste, but when the king is dead 
affairs move more slowly. Over two months have passed since Mvondo 
died, and the affairs of state have not been entirely settled yet. 


In order to get the thread of the story, recount the events of the 
previous chapter. Mvondo died August 6th, in a town two days east 
of his home. Seventeen of his wives and four boys who were with him 
on his trip, were caught and held by the people there until some 
pledge would be given that some one would be killed, or goods paid, 
on account of the death of this great man. The oldest son came to 
talk the affair over with the chiefs here, who were great friends of 
Mvondo. Thus the matter stood when the last letter was written, 
August 14th. That same day they took one of his widows for a pledge 
and went back to get the prisoners. The woman was given to the 
people who had the prisoners, and they killed her. Remember that 
she was entirely innecent. No blame was put on her. Only, some 
one must die, and she was selected as the first one. She was beaten 
with clubs till her life was gone. This done, they gave up the cap- 
tives and they were brought back. The party arrived at Ebolewo’e 
August 22nd. The first act was to catch and tie one of Mvondo’s: 
brothers. His screams reached our ears at Elat and we went down. 
to see what the trouble was. We found the man tied hands and feet. 
His arms were tied behind his back so tight that his elbows met. 
He was screaming with pain. This man, they said, had killed his 
brother and must be killed. Several men were preparing logs, “stocks,” 
for the feet of this man and all the widows. They were afraid the 
Women would run away. Three women were secured with special care 
for they, too, must be killed, it was said. No blood was shed that day, 
however, for the chiefs must meet and talk, and make some pretence 
at a trial. The next twelve days were anxious ones for those poor- 
Women, and also for the missionaries. The outlook was very dark. 
People began to collect in Ebolewo’e from all directions and tribes. 
By Saturday, August 28th, most every one was here who expected to- 
take any part, and they said they would talk the next day; but at 
our request they put it off till Monday. This was quite a concession, 
considering the fact that there were some 2000 heathen concerned. 
But they all acquiesced and scattered out in the near towns to wait. 
There were 500 of them at our services on Sabbath day, and they 
Temained very quiet during the day. In talking with the sons of 


°216 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


-Mvondo and the chiefs, in the afternoon, they said at least three of 
‘the accused must die. All that we could say or do would not influence 
them to change their minds. I had a talk with those accused, and 
‘tried to point them to Jesus, so that if they were killed they would 
‘be prepared to stand before their great Judge, who is a just one. One 
-of them laughed at all I said, but the others seemed interested, and 
‘one broke down in tears. 


WHO KILLED MVONDO? 


Monday morning the people began to assemble. The place where 
‘the trial, so-called, was to be held was in the street of the town 
where Mvondo had lived. His section of Ebolewo’e consisted of one 
‘street 140 feet wide and one-fourth of a mile long, with houses on 
both sides; fifty-five houses in all. In the upper end of this street 
‘the*people gathered and settled down under the eaves of the houses, 
“or, when the shade was all taken up, built booths of plantain leaves 
-and gathered under them. About eleven o’clock the men of Ebolewo’e 
came in. (No women appeared.) There were 100 of them, all with 
‘their guns. They came in single file and paraded the street, amidst the 
booming of guns. After the parade they stopped long enough to 
have their picture taken and then settled down. Just at this time 
tthe orator of the day, Nloze, meaning leopard ‘head, the second 
‘chief of Ebolewo’e came in and took his seat in the street. All grew 
quiet and every one seemed a little uneasy, for there was a sound 
heard in the east, in which direction the opposing tribes had assem- 
‘bled. There was much fear that there would be a fight between the 
different tribes, and much “medicine” had been made to prevent it. 
‘The hour had arrived and many hearts were fearful. The sound drew 
nearer. Drums were beating and war songs were heard. Soon they 
appeared at the lower end of the street, and came tramping up to 
the place where the crowd was. There were 200 of them, mostly with 
guns. They made a circuit of the town and then spread out and 
came up with a rush as though they were making a charge. They 
did very little shooting, presumably because they had bullets in and 
wanted to save ammunition, expecting trouble. They soon settled 
down on the opposite side of the street from the Yenjok. Then the 
Yenjok and their friends paraded again, this time about 200. After 
they were through, the orator arose. He was an old man, and usually 
slow and feeble looking, but new life seemed to stir in his darkened 
ssoul that day. He carried a fetich in one hand and an old “fly-killer” 
in the other. His first act was to run, actually run, all the way round 
‘tthe assembly, making a hissing sound, thereby attracting their atten- 
tion. Then he began to talk and kept it up for one and one-half 
‘hours. After each point made he would run up and down the street 


“THE BELOVED.” 217 


for 15 to 25 rods, each time yelling at the people and trying to get 
them to yell at him and give assent to what he was saying. All along 
the guns were booming, and when he had finished every one who had 
@ gun, even the white men, began firing and kept it up for half an 
hour. Tke town was enveloped in smoke. They all seemed to agree 
to what he had said. The sum of the speech was this: Six people 
were accused of killing the chief. Three of them were brothers and 
three widows of the deceased. They were accused of various things. 
One man ran off with one of his wives, so these two were accused 
of taking part in his death. Another man was accused of stealing 
his lordship’s box in which he kept his medicine, so when he took sick 
there were no medicines to heal him, thus the thief helped to kill 
him. One woman was accused of helping another woman to run off. 
The other two were accused of adultery. But the night stopped the 
proceedings and the crowd dispersed. Next day they assembled ,and 
the accused made their defense. When they had finished a number 
of men went aside to “cut the palaver,’”’ much as our jury would do. 
‘They soon came back and gave their verdict. The two who eloped 
were acquitted, and each of the other four were to pay the equivalent 
of a woman. No one was to be killed. But this did not suit the sons 
of Mvondo and the bloodthirsty chiefs of the opposing side. They 
demanded a higher price so that the friends of the condemned would 
not ransom them and they would then be killed. So the most accom- 
Mmodating jury went out again and soon came in, doubling the price 
to be paid by each one accused. This was accepted. Just at this point 
the friends of the accused came up and said they would pay the 
price and ransom them, and gave pledges. Thus the affair was set- 
tled for a few days until the ransom could be paid. Then we asked 
what would be the result if the pledges were all fulfilled. They said 
that at least four of the eight women would be killed. It was plain 
they were determined to kill some one or ones. We talked and 
pleaded with them. The next day the oldest son and one chief came 
to the station and asked our permission to kill at least one. They 
said they wanted to kill five, but if we said no, then four; if not four, 
then three; if not three, then two; if not two, then one. Of course 
our answer was that they must not kill anyone. They finally went 
away much grieved, and said they would kill at least one or two. 
So the matter rested till September 4th, when the ransom was to be 
paid. Eight women were hard to get, and the friends hated to part 
with so much goods. At the last moment, two backed out, and said 
they would not redeem the condemned. This was a sad day. There 
came near being a fight. Harsh words were spoken and guns were 
cocked, but they finally parted, leaving two unfortunates unransomed. 
‘This meant death to them. I went to see them and pleaded for their 
lives. The promise was given, but only to get me away. I stayed till 


218 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


dark, and every one had apparently gone, but soon after I reached 
the mission house we heard screams and surmised the cause. Sick at 
heart we went to bed that night. Early next morning I went down 
there and saw the two corpses. The woman had been put under 
water and drowned. The man had his throat cut. The vile deed 
was done. That day friends buried them side by side. A pathetic 
story, full of romance. Lovers through life, killed the same night 
for the same offense, not parted at death. They were not guilty in 
any way in causing the death of Mvondo. May God forgive these 
heartless murderers. Three innocent people killed in cold blood. 
Surely there will be a reckoning. The other two were ransomed. 
The people say this man killed will gather fire-wood and the two 
women will cook food for Mvondo in the spirit world. It is hardly 
probable he will need any firewood. 

While we are greatly grieved at this Satanic work at our very 
door, yet our efforts were not in vain. The people say had we not been 
here and opposed it so strongly, there would have been at least ten 
killed to accompany the departed, as is the custom when a big chief 
dies. 


WAR TROUBLES CONTINUE. 


Efulen, October 24, 1899. 

My Dear Parents:—I am writing under peculiar circumstances 
tonight. Perhaps you have heard of the Bulu war on the coast tribes 
and the governor. I have no time to explain it now, only that our 
work is much broken up on the north end of the field. Efulen is in 
the very center of the war district, and there was much anxiety about 
our missionaries there. Word reached Lolodorf that all communi- 
cation was shut off. So Dr. Lehman came to Elat and he and I 
started for Efulen to find out, if posible, about our brethren. 

We came through and part of us will leave tomorrow. Dr. Lehman 
will stay with Dr. Johnston, and I will help Dr. Johnson with his wife 
and baby to Lolodorf. Everyone here is excited, and it is very un- 
safe to remain, but the two brethren will try staying for a time, 
and go out later. 

There is but one road out, and that is the one we came in on from 
the northeast. We were held two days by friendly chiefs, for they 
feared if we went on we would be killed. But we wrote a note to 
Mr. Johnston and he, knowing the people, came out after us and took 
us to Efulen. There was no danger at Elat when I left, but we 
cannot tell when there will be a general uprising. So far they have 
spared the missionaries of the interior. But the Bulu burned the 
Catholic Mission and one church at Kribi, near the government station. 


“THE BELOVED.” 219 


Please do not worry. Most of the Bulu are our warm friends 
and would fight for us. We trust all will work out for the best. 
The Bulu are mad at the government and are going to fight. But 
we pity them, for they will get a sound drubbing. 


Lolodorf, October 30, 1899. 

My Dear Parents:—I will write another note from this station. 
After a hard, wet trip of four days we reached Lolodorf. By we I 
mean Dr. S. F. Johnson, wife, baby, and myself. We left Efulen October 
25, and arrived here on Saturday, October 28. We met soldiers on 
the way, who were going to protect the missionaries and property at 
Efulen. They went on to look after Dr. Lehman and Mr. Johnston. 

Now the war is on in earnest. On October 22 a lieutenant and 
70 soldiers started for Ebolewo’e and had a fight the next day after 
their arrival. Two big chiefs (one of Ebolewo’e) were killed and 30 
men in all. The word is that the Elat missionaries, Mr. Fraser, Dr. 
and Mrs. Lippert and baby, are in the camp and the station is guarded 
by soldiers. This word came yesterday, and this morning four white 
officers and 200 soldiers started for Ebolewo’e. A great slaughter of 
the Bulu is threatened. The commander went along. The officials 
think the missionaries had all better get out of Bulu land. I do not 
know what we shall do yet. I did not go back today for I was not 
feeling well enough. When we get word again I may go, for we do not 
like to see the station left alone for a number of months. Our things 
and the grounds may get much damaged by an absence. A week will 
certainly tell whether the Elat missionaries will come out of Bulu 
land or not. For the present I will remain at Lolodorf. Our station 
here is located just across the river from the government station. 
Our work among the Bulu will be greatly hindered for a time. But 
they must have a severe lesson. The Bulu started the war and must 
blame themselves if their homes are burned out and many of them 
killed. 

I am sorry to be away from my home, books, clothes, work— 
everything, for I brought nothing along. We are in the hands of a 
tender, loving Father, and cannot fear. 


THE MISSIONARY ON POLICE DUTY. 


Elat, October, 1899. 

My Dear Parents:—Among those who came to mourn the death 
of Mvondo was a daughter who is married into a tribe living one 
day and a half west of Elat. Her brothers here would not let her 
go back home, but said they would marry her off to some one else 
and get more goods. This, of course, made her husband very mad, 
as well as his tribe. A man does not stand alone in Bulu in a thing 
like this. The whole tribe is in it. These people waited their chance 
to catch some one from here. 


Just at this time our caravan was returning from the coast, and 
disobeying orders, they tried to pass through this town where the 
trouble was. The result was that two men and three loads were 
caught. The other loads and men were sent on to give the word. 
We did not know just what to do, but finally decided to go after our 
goods and try to get the men also. Mr. Fraser and I started October 
3, With eight men. We walked hard through mud and water from 
8 in the morning till dark, and then put up for the night. Next 
morning we left our baggage with two men to watch it, and went on 
with the other six. We were warned all the way that we would be 
killed, for the people would fight. But we Knew we were in the right 
and so went on. In about two hours we came near the place and 
there met a crowd of men who begged us not to go on, for they 
said we would all be killed. The people had prepared for us and had 
men in ambush along the path. All our men backed out but two, so 
we went on with these two, Mr. Fraser in the lead. As we neared the 
town we saw men running back and shouted to them that we were not 
for war, but for peace. We went on into the town, and found a 
erowd of angry men with guns, standing around. We saw the pris- 
oners and two of the loads in the public house. We asked who they 
had caught; white men or Bulu. They answered Bulu. But as we 
lived with the Yenjok they put us all together. They wanted their 
woman back and thought if they had a hold on us, they would be 
more apt to get her. The prisoners begged us not to try to take 
them, for they would be shot on the spot. So we thought best not to 
try to take the men but we told them we were going to take the loads, 
for they were ours. They said no, and would shoot the first man 
who went in to get them. We waited a little, hoping that they would 
give up the loads, but they would not, so we prepared for action. I 
stood guard outside with my rifle, and Mr. Fraser went in for the 


a ee aed ee 5 | 


Crawfordsville Presbyterian Church. 


“THE BELOVED.” 221 


loads. He had a scuffle with one man inside, but after the man got a 
Tap over the head he ran outside and cocked his gun. Four men 
stood outside with their guns cocked ready to shoot. I went up to one 
of them and hit his old gun a whack with my rifle and he drew 
back. When they saw there was no scare in us, they sobered down. 

We put the two loads on the two men who were with us, and 
walked away to the first town. We opened the loads and found a few 
things missing. Having sent these loads on with the other men, we 
went back to get the third load and things which were missing. We 
got all save about 50 cents worth of goods. 

While we were gone on this trip the river rose and we had to 
make a sort of bridge before we could get back. We had a hard 
three days’ tramp of it. It is hard to tell under what head to put 
this kind of work in our report, but we have decided to call it “Po- 
lice Duty.” Surely we get variety in our work here. 


STILL MORE OF MYONDO. 


Another result of the death of Mvondo was a strange heathen 
tite performed in town the other day. It is hard to give it a name, but 
I will try to describe it. The man killed to acompany Mvondo was a 
member of the “So” society. The people feared they might have 
offended the fetich of that society, so they assembled to do sacrifice and 
cleanse themselves of any and all guilt. They first made “medicine” 
and put it in earthen jars filled with water. These jars they placed in 
a row about eight feet apart. Along this row they placed pieces of the 
plantain stock. Then the women and children came and sat down 
on these would-be seats. There were ninety-four of them in this row. 
Then the members of the society went into their den and made more 
Medicine and came back bringing with them a sheep—a male of the 
first year. Every man there tried to get hold of that sheep, and did, 
before it was killed. It seemed they wanted to put the sin onto the 
sheep, as was the case with some of the sin offerings in Moses’ time. 
After they had all had hold of it they took a short knife and divided 
it asunder while it was still alive, letting the blood run into a jar of 
Water. Then they took it and dipped it into all the jars which were 
standing in the row where the women were. This done, they all washed 
in the blood-stained water, and the rite was finished. How like a sac- 
Tifice it was! But to what, or whom? 

- The Bulu people are in more of a turmoil than at last writing. 
We have had no direct word, but great reports have reached us about 
the war the Bulu are making on the government, or quasi govern- 
Ment, at the coast. We started men and mail some three weeks ago, 
but the men returned, saying that the road was blocked. They left 
the mail at our station at Lolodorf, and we trust it is safe. The reports 
are that the Bulu near the coast have made war on the government, 


222 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


and all coast people, including white people. We hear the Catholic 
Mission was attacked. How much of this to believe we cannot tell, 
but there is some truth in it. Some threats have been made here, 
but we are all right and expect to be. The roads Have closed and 
Wwe may get out of some things before they are opened. But we 
have plenty of native food, and could get along, even if all provis- 
ions were cut off. 


RECOUNTING WAR TROUBLES. 


Elat, November 10, 1899. 

My Dear Parents:—I am home again, but under peculiar circum- 
stances. It is a long story and full of interest. For fear you did not 
get my last letter, I will recount the events which led up to the 
present. 

In September the Bulu people near the coast and around Efulen 
went to war against the coast tribes and the government. This 
shut off all communication with the Efulen missionaries. For two 
months no word passed. Naturally the friends at Batanga were 
anxious. They sent word to Lolodorf, and Dr. Lehman, of that 
station, came over to see what could be done. It was decided that 
Dr. Lehman and I go to Efulen and find out how they were getting 
along. We were told not to go. Nloze, our chief, stormed about it. 
He said we would be killed. We had a hard trip in mud, water and 
rain, but were well received by the people. We went all right till 
within six hours of Efulen, when we were stopped by friendly chiefs, 
who said we should not pass, for we would be killed. They would 
not let our carriers pass, for they were of the same tribe, and the 
men said they would not go. We had reached the line between the 
Bulu who were at war and those who were not. We did not know the 
attitude of the Bulu ahead, and knowing they had gone seventy miles 
to fight the white men, we thought best to go slow and feel our way. 
So we wrote a note and sent it over to Efulen. The next day Mr. 
Johnston came for us. He knew the people, and that all was safe 
for the missionaries, for they were not counted in with the gov- 
ernor. But there was some uneasiness on the part of Dr. and Mrs. 
Johnson. After a conference it was decided that Dr. Lehman and 
Mr. Johnston, the one who was at your house, should stay at Efulen, 
and Dr. and Mrs. Johnson and their baby should go to Lolodorf. I 
was to accompany them to Lolodorf and then return to Elat. We 
had hard work getting men to carry, but finally got enough for a few 
of the most necessary things. Mrs. Johnson rode a mule about as 
big as a jack rabbit. We had to carry him over one stream. Hight 
men did it, but we came near losing him, for he fell back down the 


_ “THE BELOVED.” 223 


dank. But after four days we reached Lolodorf all safe. The next 
diay we got word from Ebolewo’e that there had been a fight and that 
the missionaries of Elat were in the camp under the protection of 
the government. Two days later we heard that they were coming to 
Lolodorf with an escort of soldiers. They arrived on November 1, all 
well. This made quite a gathering of white people. There were eight 
grown people and two babies. We had a good, social time, but we did 
mot rest easy, and were not to be long together. 

But here I must go back a little. When the war started there were 
not many soldiers on the coast or at Lolodorf. The general or com- 
mander was on an expedition in the interior and had all the soldiers. 
When he heard of the war he sent a lieutenant and 60 men down 
hastily to protect the missionaries and traders if they needed it. 
‘When he arrived at Lolodorf he found there a trader who represented 
that the white people were in great danger, and that he should go in 
all haste to that place. The lieutenant went, arriving just one 
week after I left. The Bulu saw him and only a few white men and 
thought they could fight him. So they collected in Ebolewo’e in the 
street of our chief, Nloze. The lieutenant, hearing of this, went down 
with 28 soldiers, and asked the chief who brought the men, to come 
and shake hands. This he refused. Then he asked all men to lay 
down their guns. They put them down at their feet. The officer 
told them they must put them out in the middle of the street. . This 
was refused. After the third request, the soldiers were bidden to 
fire. So the fight began. The Esakoe chief was killed, and about 
20 of his men. Then the soldiers were turned loose on Ebolewo’e. 
They killed Nloze, our chief, and five other inocent ones. They sacked 
the town. 


TROUBLE WITH GOVERNMENT BEGINS. 


We recognize the fact that the government can take our ground, 
‘ut if they do take it, we told the officers we would consider it an 
unfriendly act toward our mission. But we must not talk too soon. 
‘We have had only good feelings between us, so far. We hope there 
will be no break, but there may be, and it will be very unpleasant for 
us. We are free-born Americans and do not like to be tramped on. 
‘They are German noblemen and want to lord it over everyone. 

But the commandant himself is a gentleman, and a kind-hearted 
man. He is very fair. But as he says, “The state is a dog.” There 
are many heads and we can never tell what will happen. He warned 
us to make our claim as secure as possible, so today we send papers 
to the government at Kribi to try to get our land recorded. We have 
mo deed for it yet. Only lately have we had witnesses before whom 
We could make out the papers. 

There was much fighting yesterday and we saw the smoke of 


224 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


several towns which were burned. We took our goods from the camp 


yesterday, so we are at home again. The guard was taken away from 
Elat. 


November 13, 1899. 

My Dear Parents:—You will be anxious to hear from Elat and E 
will take every chance of sending mail out. We are in the midst of war, 
yet at present we are safe. Our house is under guard day and night, 
but even without the soldiers we do not feel any danger, for some 
days at least. Herr Hauptmann Von Dannenberg, who is the com- 
mander, wants us to get out. He has made several requests, but we 
will not go on requests. Not until he gives us a direct command, and 
that in writing, will we leave. There is a lull in the storm just now 
around Ebolewo’e, but there is much fighting off to the east. Scores 
of Bulu are being killed, according to the reports. On Sabbath 
morning a squad of soldiers (black) passed the Mission, carrying. 
the head of a Bulu man they had killed. They are going to do bloody 
work and things will get warm around here. But we have been 
feeling the Bulu pulse a little, and we are persuaded that they do not 
blame us any in this affair. These people in and near Ebolowe’e 
are as meek as kittens. On Sabbath morning they requested a ser- 
vice in the town. I went down, and nearly all the men of Ebolewo’e 
were there, as well as lots of women and children. There were 
seventy-five men. Ebolewo’e never turned out like that before—and so 
penitent! There is but one “jal” of the nineteen which made up 
Ebolewo’e. Seventeen are burned and all the people are crowded into 
the one village of the old chief who died. So most of them have no 
homes. No wonder they look sad. Thousands of poor Bulu are now 
homeless. They are living in the bush and eating whatever they can 
get. 

It is hard to keep from offending the commander. He has a 
high position, and received high honors in Germany. We often trans- 
gress and he feels it. But still, we get along nicely, so far. He has 
Many questions to ask about the Bulu. 

Come over and dine with us when you have nothing else to do. 


December 4, 1899. 
My Dear Parents:—There has been no fighting this week. About 
a week ago the report came and was verified that the tribes out south- 
west had gathered for an attack at a place two and one-half hours 
from here. Then word came that the troops off to the east were re- 
called and an attack planned on the crowd southwest. But the 
evening before the attack was to be made word came that a big chief, 


“THE BELOVED.” 225 


Evina, had told all these tribes they must not fight, and he sent them 
home again, and sent word that he wanted to make peace. He was 
told to come in two days with all the Esakoe chiefs and he would 
be told on what conditions he could make peace. 

The commander wrote the conditions on paper and asked me to 
translate them into Bulu. I did so, and then he asked me to read 
and explain them and interpret for him. The most important condition 
was that Evina must give the government 100 workmen to go to 
Kamerun. Yesterday Evina came with 83 men and the commander 
accepted his good will and let him off. Now today these 83 young mem 
are taken to the coast to be used almost as slaves. Most of them: 
go willingly, but they do not know what they are going into. You 
will remember about those loads which were stolen. Well, the com- 
mander has made those people who stole them pay us three sheep 
and a chicken for our trouble, and as punishment to them. 

We have had service every Sabbath since we came, and they 
have been well attended. Yesterday the church was crowded, but na 
strangers. 

What do you think of this? When we came I brought a two-pound 
tin of butter, and I opened it November 10. It has lasted me ever 
since, and is as good today as when I opened it. They have some 
good way of preserving it, and so have I when there is but one tin 
in the pantry. Never since we came were we so near out of every— 
thing. We are on the last tins of sugar, lard and rice; no coffee or 
cocoa; about three tins of meat. But we have plenty of native food 
and we like it, so we are all right. There will be an escort of sol-— 
diers for our men coming back, so we will have provisions in twa: 
weeks or three. 


MORE GOVERNMENT TROUBLE. 


Elat, December 7, 1899. 
Another chance of sending mail has come. 

The worst news we have had since we came to Bulu land came the 
other day. The commander of the troops said the government might 
take our location. He did not say they would but that they might. 
For the present they will not. They will build a temporary statiom 
now and perhaps will build a permanent one a year hence. They 
wanted to build the temporary one on our grounds. We protested. 
Then the commander himself said, “You must either consent to our 
building on your ground or sign a paper that you do not want any 
protection from us.” This we thought pretty hard, but after prayer 
and meditation we though best to be driven out by the Bulu rather tham 
by the white men. So on December 4 we signed away all right to 


226 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


‘protection during the period the temporary station will be at Ebol- 
‘ewo’e. We thought this way: We have been here four years fight- 
ing with heathenism, and God has kept us. So He will keep us. 

When the war began no one knew what the result would be, so the 
“officer told the missionaries to go to his quarters for protection. The 
Bulu attacked the soldiers the next day, so the lieutenant ordered all 
‘movable property to be stored in his quarters, and then told the 
people they had better go, and gave them an escort. So Mr. Fraser, 
-Dr. Lippert and wife and baby went to Lolodorf, as I told above. But 
the next day we began talking about someone returning. It was 
decided that Mr. Fraser and I go back to Blat and stay there, if 
possible. We were not sure we could get there, but we wanted to 
‘try. So we left Lolodorf with eleven of the school boys, who had 
fled with the missionaries, and two men with a few needful things. 
We passed by the Bene road and had a fine trip. When we reached 
‘the Bulu towns we found the people as friendly as ever, but the 
“tribes on the northeast of Elat are not in the fight. This gives us a 
road out and in when we need things. 

We arrived here on Thursday, November 9. We found the com- 
mander (he came a week later than the lieutenant who opened the 
-fight) and his seven white officers and doctor in the factory with 
150 soldiers and about 200 workmen and carriers. They had made a 
good fence all around for protection and cut all the trees and brush 
nearby, so it looks quite like a fort. The commander was not pleased 
“to see us, and said at once he would not be responsible if anything 
happened to us. We told him we took all responsibility. So we 
“took the keys and started for Elat, which is near by the fort, or camp. 


DESOLATION. 


How things were changed! Our fence was down. Some two or 
“three hundred plantains were cut. There was a guard of soldiers 
-around the house. We looked down the hill for the town below, but 
“there was none there. .Then we learned what had happened. There 
had been fighting nearly every day. At least two-thirds of Ebolewo’e 
was burned. Our station was attacked on November 2, but the Bulu 
were repulsed and lost seven men. One soldier was wounded. They 
“Came very near the house. We see marks of the shooting on the walls 
of the house. One pane of glass was broken. There are several 
bullet holes through the church. But nothing was damaged. This is 
when the plantains were cut, so there would be a better chance to 
“protect the property. 

There was no fighting yesterday, but there was some today. An- 
other big chief was killed today. We do not know how long we can 
«stay, but will stay until we are driven out. One thing, if our guard 
-is overpowered, there is help within calling distance and a refuge. 


“THE BELOVED.” 227 


The people of Ebolewo’e are very glad to see us. Our only danger 
is from distant tribes sneaking in from behind the house. But we 
feel safe. Many of the Bulu are tired of this one-sided war. Some 
say there are seventy Bulu killed. Three soldiers have been killed 
and fourteen wounded. We find only twenty-one of the hundred 
fine chickens we had here a month ago. 

As yet we are not settled and are eating mostly native food, 
but we are all O. K., and when things settle down we will bring our 
things back and go to work. 


NEW MISSIONARIES. 


January 5, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—At present all is quiet around Ebolewo’e, and 
we are sending men to bring back the Drs., and the new missionaries 
for Elat, namely, Rev. and Mrs. Dager. We are glad to have these 
reinforcements. We are working harder than ever. We were delayed 
so long that we must work hard to catch up with our work Mr. 
Fraser and I are now translating Matthew, but will get through in 
three days. Then we will take up the translation of John. 

I told you we were out of provisions, but we were not out long 
and now we are safe. We have 68 carriers booked to go to the 
coast tomorrow. Let me tell you what I paid for butter—just $1.17 
for two pounds, and poor at that. Those two pounds lasted me one 
month. ¥ 

We had a happy Christmas. All the boys and men working at 
the station, twenty or more, were invited to dinner. We killed a 
sheep and had a good time. After we had dismissed the crowd, we 
Were surprised when thirteen boys came to us and said they wanted 
to be Christians. We had a meeting. Others have since joined the 
number, and there seems to be a general interest manifested. After 
our regular service last Sabbath I went out south about seven miles 
and held two meetings,, at one of which there were 300 people, and 
at the other, 144. About 700 people had the gospel preached to them 
that day. There are thousands of these poor lost sheep and only a 
few poor shepherds to look after them. 

In the mail which came at 8:30 tonight I did not get any word 
from home. I trust you are all well. 


MANY TRIBULATIONS. 


January 16, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—About ten days ago I wrote you things were 
brightening up and that we sent for the rest of the missionaries, Dr. 
and Mrs. Lippert and Rev. and Mrs. Dager, to come to Elat. Two 
days after the men had started, the lieutenant called us, and said 
he thought we had better leave, as there was likely to be more trouble 
soon. One big chief was acting in a strange way. But we thought 
we knew more about how the Bulu felt than he did; so both Mr. Fraser 
and I said we would not leave. He then said we might stay, but he 
could not permit ladies to come to Ebolewo’e at present. So we 
Sent a man, telling the missionaries not to come. We are very sorry 
that we will be delayed with our regular work. This thing may 
continue two or three months. We feel that there is comparatively 
no danger, but the officers fear there will be much trouble yet. Three 
days ago thirty soldiers went out and burned a town where the chief 
had been doing mischief. Yesterday this same man tried to rob a 
caravan, but failed. The soldiers went off again today after him. But 
this is only a small affair, for even the father of this man is against 
him. It is possible there will be an uprising, but we do not look for it. 

Sabbath P. M. I went out north and had a gathering of 180. A 
crowd of boys went along, and we sang and talked for two hours. 
At the morning service twenty-five or thirty had to stay outside for 
lack of even standing room. We will be so glad when we get our 
new church. The people seem hungry for the gospel. May God 
give us the strength to preach and live it to them. : 


JOYS IN HIS WORK. 


Mr. Fraser has postponed his home-going for a month or twa 
longer, that we may finish the revision of the gospels. Mr. Hickman 
expects to go home in July. You may be expecting me back in the 
five years talked of when I left home, but if my health continues I 
cannot leave this glorious work. I am just getting well started, and I 
do not want to be interrupted. I want to do all the evangelistic 
work this year I can. There is a great field here which has not been 
touched. Station work has kept us here, but now we get more help, 
and I want to improve the opportunity. Your letter of October came 
by the German steamer and reached me yesterday. I was glad to 
get it. 

Father, your check in behalf of the new church was received. 


“THE BELOVED.” 229 


¥ wish to thank you for your interest in the work out here, and 
especially for the remembrance of it in hard cash. I have not heard 
from the Board yet, but will inform you about the details later. We 
are now buying mats for the roof. A new dwelling house has been 
asked for, to cost $500. As you know, we have but one dwelling 
house, and we are to have two married families and an old bache- 
tor. We are growing, you see. 

A big chief was shot this morning by the officers. Yesterday 
they flogged another. This is something new to the Bulu. 


AN ANSWER TO PRAYER. 


‘We have had today direct answer to prayer, and an example of 
how faith and works go together. 

Yesterday evening we heard men cutting near our ground on the 
east. I went down to see what it was and discovered that the work- 
men of the government were cutting a path direct for our ground. 
Just then the lieutenant came up and I asked him what he was doing. 
He said he was cutting a path to the hill back of the Mission, where 
Mvondo used to live. I told him he was cutting through the Mission 
ground. He said he did not know it was Mission ground. I objected 
because the path would cut our spring off from the house and would 
endanger it, for a public road near the spring and just above it at 
that point would surely be a detriment. But he said he must pass some- 
where, and below the spring the hills were too steep. He asked for 
a passage through Mission ground. I told him I could not give it, 
but would see what Mr. Fraser would say. After consultation we 
wrote a note to the lieutenant stating that we could not give our con- 
sent. This morning we heard the cutting and went down and found 
them at work. We went direct to the station and protested. Mr. 
Fraser talked very sharply to the officer and there was a little feeling 
on both sides. We all went and looked over the ground, but he was 
determined to cut through. We have not a deed for our land and the 
officers know it, and therefore we are at their mercy. We suggested 
other routes, but to the lieutenant’s eye they were all bad, so we 
asked him until evening to decide and he consented. We returned to 
the station and ate our breakfast, for we were called out early by the 
cutting. Then we worked the remainder of the forenoon at the re- 
vising work. After dinner I went out and took a survey of the ground 
and thought we could find a route good enough for the purpose. I 
came back and got down on my knees and prayed that God would 
help us as He has done so many times before. At 2 P. M. Mr. Fraser 
and I took six men with cutlasses and went out to try to find a good 
route for the path outside our premises. We worked three solid hours 


230 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


with the sweat running down our backs; we cut down one side, 
crossed the ravine and up the other side, taking nearly a direet route 
from the hill behind our station to the government station. Then we 
called the lieutenant and took him through. He was not well pleased 
for we had to admit the new route was not quite so good as the one: 
he picked on, but when we got through he said: “Gentlemen, while: 
I do not think the new path will be as good as the one first selected, 
yet I will take it because you ask it.” My heart went up in praise to 
God. It means much to us. The object of the path was to reach the 
hill behind us, where the government will have a rifle range and gar- 
dens. Soldiers and workmen will be constantly passing. We are so 
thankful to God that He so influenced the officer that he gave up the 
project of cutting through our ground. God has ever protected us. 
This is the second attempt the officers have made to get onto our 
premises, and in both they have failed, not because they were not 
able to take the ground, either, for we have no deed, but because of 
some higher protecting power. Elat premises have been well cared 
for, indeed. God loveth and careth for His own. Praise His name 
forevermore. 


February 8, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—I feel like a thief, for it is late at night and 
the mail will go tomorrow morning and I have not written you. 
There is much to write about, but I am very tired and I will probably 
make a mess of it. 

First, our monotonous life was broken a week ago by the arrival 
from Lolodorf of Dr. Lehman, who will stay with us until the war 
troubles are settled, and the ladies can come back. We are glad to 
have him with us, for he is a great help. 


WAR STILL CONTINUES. 


Last Sunday morning another Bulu chief was executed, and @ 
party of soldiers was sent out on a raid to some towns where there 
has been a little trouble. They have returned with a few prisoners 
and a lot of goods, goats, etc. They burned two towns, and chased 
the people around, but met no resistance. The Bulu around here 
have had enough of this one-sided war, 

On the emperor’s birthday, January 27th, we were invited to 
the government station to help celebrate, and we went and did our 
best at a nicely spread table. Everything was very fine for this 
country. The lieutenant is very sociable, but we are sorry we cannot 
meet him half way on account of the immoral life he is living. He 
likes to have the natives come to his station and dance, and he gives 


“THE BELOVED.” 235 


them rum to drink, and this is not the worst of his evils, either. 
But there is an end to such a Godless course, and we have faith to 
believe that God will make even this man’s wickedness to bring 
praises to Himself. The natives are disgusted with him, but obey 
him from fear. He is having a fine road made just back of our 
grounds, and is fixing up a rifle range quite close to our house. I 
suppose we will get to hear all the banging we want soon. 

The attendance at Sabbath services still continues to increase. 
I went out to a town seven miles south last Sabbath and found about 
300 natives gathered there, and on the way back, at another town, 
there were something over a hundred. This is the most pleasant work. 
The people seem more interested now than ever. Last Sabbath 
after service, six persons came to us for private talks. One of them 
is a chief in Ebolewo’e who has ten wives. The Spirit is working, 
and when He works even the lawless, soulless officials of the German. 
government, who blaspheme His good name, cannot stop Him. 


February 14, 1900. 

Dear Brother Reed:—Feeling that you will be a little anxious. 
these days, I will write the more often. We are safe and all right. 
Dr. Lehman has left his wife at Lolodorf and has joined Mr. 
Fraser and me at Elat. I think I wrote you that we had sent for the 
new missionaries and Dr. and Mrs. Lippert to come on. But the 
officer felt there would be more trouble and told us he could not per-= 
mit ladies to come now, and not for from two to four months. 

So Rey. and Mrs. Dager are at Batanga, and the Dr. and Mrs. 
Lippert are at Lolodorf. Things are very unsettled, but we feel that 
we are in no danger. Mr. Fraser is still here and we are working 
hard on the gospels, expecting to get through next month. 

Our services are well attended—from 200 to 300—and when we 
go out to the towns the people come to us. Four Sabbath after- 
noons I have been out, and have had from 250 to 325 people in 
attendance. This is encouraging. 


February 14, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—Another chance to send mail has come,. 
and I take the opportunity to let you know that we are all safe at: 
Elat. There has been no more fighting, but two big chiefs have 
been caught, which may lead to trouble, but we have no fear for 
ourselves. We were rejoiced today to get word from Efulen that all 
was well at that station. I admire those two men for sticking at 
their post of duty. The troops are fighting near there and they are 
unprotected by any earthly power, but still they stay on, and their 


232 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


wives and babies are in other climes, Mrs. Johnston in America, and 
Mrs. Dr. Johnson in Benito. 

From the enclosed letter, Two Days Among the People, you 
will see how the people are hungering for the gospel. Would that 
i were free to be out more like that. 

The government has made a rifle range near our premises and 
the shooting began today. It will be very annoying. Dr. Lehman 
has been reroofing our old meeting house. He has made it larger, 
also, and it may have to serve for school and meetings of all kinds 
for a time, until we become more settled. 

The government is making the Bulu fix up the roads in good 
shape. This will be a blesing to us. 


TWO DAYS AMONG THE PEOPLE. 


For a long time we have not been able to get out among the 
people except on Sabbath afternoons, on account of the confining work 
at the station. Since our only way of traveling is on foot, an after- 
noon will not let us go far away from Elat. So the people at a dis- 
tance have been going without that food from on high, which if a man 
eat he will never hunger. Apparently they are hungry, and we re- 
ceive many calls to go out among them. It was my privilege to get 
away last Saturday and Sabbath and have two good days with the 
people, and I want to tell you about the trip. 

I put two light blankets, a change of clothing and my camera into 
a rubber bag and gave it to a man to carry. A schoolboy carried 
my guitar (I cannot play the instrument, but the people do not know 
the difference) and two other boys went along to help sing. We 
started off to the southwest among the Esakoe people. This is the 
principal tribe which fought the troops in and around Ebolewo’e and 
had sixty-eight men killed and nearly one hundred taken prisoners. ~ 
Yet they are very friendly to us and I had a good day among them. 
Old Sol hid his face behind a cloud and the day was cool and pleasant. 
We stopped first at a small town on the top of a hill and about thirty 
people soon gathered around us. We sang and talked with them 
awhile and then went on to one of the largest towns in the country. 
Azem, the chief of this town, had from ninety to one hundred wives 
before the war. We did not find him at home and very few of his 
people were there. We had a nice meeting with about eighty natives 
present. I took a picture of the gathering and also of the whole 
town, which was burned by the troops. From this place we turned off 
to the northwest and passed through three small villages which had 
never beén visited by a white man. In the first of these there were 
about forty people gathered around us to hear the singing and gospel 


“THE BELOVED.” 233 


message. They seemed very much interested and anxious to learn. 
In the second of these villages there were about fifty gathered in the 
palaver house. We found a little boy here who had been at the 
school at Elat. The people said that this boy often told them about 
the things he had heard at the Mission. Between this and the third 
village there was a long stretch of uncut path which passed through 
mud and water. This was the only unpleasant part of the road on 
the whole trip, and when we got through we found a small place in 
the bush with only about twenty-five people. But we had a nice 
little meeting and very attentive listeners. It does one good to get to 
these people who never hear the word of God and tell them of God’s 
love. By this time it was getting late and so we hastened on north 
to the Yevo people, to a town by the name of Akom, which is nearly 
due west from Hlat. In this town I had promised to spend the night, 
and I was glad when we reached it. The people were looking for 
us and had a great quantity of food prepared. The chief of the town 
is very friendly and is a decent man for a Bulu. He showed me a 
good native hut and gave me two fowls, sweet potatoes, ground nuts, 
plantains and “ngon” (a very fine dish). While the food was being 
prepared I had a meeting in the twilight with about fifty natives. 
When this last meeting was over I was very tired, having walked 
fifteen miles and held six little meetings. After a supper on native 
food, I took to a native bed, which had a large piece of bark for a 
mattress and a block of wood for a pillow, and slept soundly. 


A happy surprise awaited me the next day, which was Sabbath. 
The chief, knowing that I was coming, had sent to all the near towns 
and told all the people to come. They began coming early, some 
getting there about 7 o’clock. They did not come by threes and fours, 
but by twenties and thirties. Whole towns would come up at once. 
There was no building to hold them, so they sat in the street and 
I took my place under the eaves of a hut. There were about thirty 
boys there who had been in school at Elat, and so we had good singing, 
which lasted for nearly an hour while the people were gathering, 
and then I talked for an hour and a half to the largest crowd of 
natives I have seen, save one, and that was at Ebolewo’e at the 
palaver over the death of Mvondo. I counted a section and estimated 
the crowd at from 900 to 1000. And though so many they kept very 
quiet and orderly. Even this long meeting did not satisfy some of 
them, for after I had dismissed them many of them came and wanted 
to hear more, and I had another short meeting with a hundred or 
more. Can anyone dispute the power of the good old gospel to draw? 
What brought that crowd together? There were old men and young, 
women and children, big chiefs and little. Some of them came as 
far as ten miles, and they all seemed eager to hear what was said. 
I never felt my weakness so much as when I saw that crowd sitting 


234. CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


“in darkness and the shadow of death” with their faces turned up 
to me and seeming to say, “Show us the Light,” and the feeling of 
responsibility deepened when a chief got up just as I arose to speak 
and said, “We have come to hear God’s work. We are tired of doing 
wickedness. Now tell us plainly just what we must do.” I tried in 
my weak and stammering way to point them to Jesus, the Lamb slain 
to take away the sin of the world. 

After dinner we turned our steps toward home and held two 
meetings on the way, arriving at Elat about sundown. The boys were 
tired and so was I, but I think we were all happy. I am sure I was. 
This is the most interesting part of the work to me, and I enjoy it. 
In this way we reach people who cannot and will not come to the 
station. On this trip I reached about 1300 people who do not come to 
the services at Elat. I hope to do much of this kind of work this year. 

I am telling you of this to enlist your prayers and sympathy, and 
to show how the people respond to visits of this kind. Please 
remember this department of the work fervently in your supplications. 


MORE OF BULU WAR. 


March 6, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—My usual letter from home did not come today 
and I was quite disappointed, but I know how hard it is for you to 
write, and I also know that there is a possibility of letters getting 
lost. I missed two papers in this mail also. But it all goes in with 
the ups and downs in this far-away place, and I want to say that the 
ups are by far the more numerous. 

Everything is quiet at Eboewo’e now, but they are having a hot 
time between here and Efulen. About two weeks ago a lieutenant 
and 100 black soldiers came through from Efulen, making the trip 
in four days, fighting constantly the first three days. They had to 
break through eight or ten barricades which the natives had built 
to keep them back, but it was not hard, for the natives soon fled when 
the firing began. On this trip no soldier was killed and only fifteen 
wounded. One big king was killed, and they say many Bulu fell. 
Now the officer who was stationed at Eboewo’e is down there fighting- 
He had been gone a week and we have heard nothing from him. He 
will fight as long as the Bulu want to, but as soon as they want to make 
peace the government is ready if the Bulu will pay in goods and 
workmen. It is said that the government is selling Bulu women at 
the coast to the highest bidder. I do not know as to the truth of the 
Teport. It may be the soldiers who are doing it. Just before the 
officer left, we went and asked him to give his consent to ladies 
returning to Elat, but he was as firm as ever in saying no. So here 


“THE BELOVED.” 235 


we are, Mr. Fraser, Dr. Lehman and myself, keeping bach. How long 
this will continue we do not know, but we hope it will not be long. 


OPENING SCHOOL AGAIN. 


We felt that we could not wait any longer, and started school 
last Monday (yesterday), and as a proof of the confidence the people 
have in us about 80 boys came to board, and counting those who came 
from Ebolewo’e there were 123 enrolled the first day. Today there 
were 89 boarders and 133 in all. This is the largest number we have 
ever had, and as far as I know, the largest in the Mission. What the 
attendance will be we cannot tell, for the news was not well circulated. 
Many more will want to come. Dr. Lehman has taken the school now 
and he has his hands full. : 

We finished revising the Gospels today. We will now go over it 
all again and see if there is any correcting to do, and then we will 
copy it on the machine and we will be done, and Mr. Fraser can take 
his long expected vacation. It will probably take a month or a little 
more yet. The interest in the Sabbath services still continues. Last 
Sabbath three boys came and confessed Christ, and two weeks before 
three women and one man came and said they wanted to try to live 
the Christian life, and asked for our prayers. There are now twenty- 
three in the class of those who have confessed Christ as their Saviour. 
These things are very encouraging. Pray for us all. 


March 19, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—I have time for only a note to go with this 
mail. The belated mail with your letter of December 16 was received 
March 17, and I was glad to get it. We are all right at Elat. There 
is no fighting nearer than three days’ walk from here. There is much 
unrest however. We are now planting corn and potatoes, pineapples, 
plantains, etc. The rainy season is on. The school is still flourishing 
with about 140 on the roll. 


HAS MANY CARES. 


April 5, 1900. 
My Dear Parents:—Can you wait another month for good long 
letters? I have not been so hard pressed for time since I was at 
college. And I never had so many things to try my patience and 
nerves as now. We are working under high pressure, for Mr. Fraser 
wants to get home. But there is an end, and I am thankful that 
We can now see our way out. Then besides the work there is the 


236 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


anxiety and annoyance which arises from the strained relations 
between the Bulu and the government. To us the outlook is worse 
now than for some time. The officers are godless sort of fellows, 
who treat the natives like slaves, and they are resenting such treat- 
ment. Only today the big chief, Evina, sent word to the government 
that he would not come again or send any of the things which the 
officers ask for. This will mean trouble as soon as the lieutenant 
gets back from his expedition to the west. Even the people of Ebol- 
ewo’e say they cannot stand it and will run off somewhere. The 
officers do not take the right plan, it seems to us. They ask the 
people to go to the coast and carry for them and then pay them 
about one-sixth of what is fair. They compel the women to come 
and work at the station and give them no pay at all, and sometimes 
catch some of them. More officers and soldiers are expected in a 
few days, and then there is likely to be trouble and our work will be 
affected. Word comes from Lolodorf today that Mrs. Lange presented 
to the Mission a six-pound baby girl March 30. Dr. Lippert will get 
back to Elat in a few days with his family and our bachelor life will 
vanish again. They have been away since the last of October. Mr. 
and Mrs. Dager are still at the coast. Mrs. D. has been sick. We 
hear that Rev. Knauer has had a hard fever at Batanga, and that 
Dr. and Mrs. Axtell have been compelled to leave the field for a 
while at least, and they came only last November. 


April 17, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—We are glad to have with us again Dr. and 
Mrs. Lippert and the baby. They have been away from the station 
since last October, and just got back April 18. Oh, what a change 
in the house! That bachelor air is gone, and then the food is better 
and the whole outfit more homelike. Then the baby, though noisy, 
is a bright spot in the house. She will soon be a year old. 

We are glad, also, to have a new officer in charge at the govern- 
ment station here. His name is Gustave Radtcke, a common mortal 
like the rest of us, not burdened with a little “von,” and it seems 
to make a man out of him. He is very kind and obliging, and seems 
to be more than a Christian in name. He has called on us, and came to 
church last Sabbath. He goes out among the people and shakes 
hands with the children. He has said four times that he wants to 
work hand in hand with the Mission. This is very encouraging, for 
it is the first friendly expression from any officer. There has always 
been friction between the Mission and the government. We hope 
this man can be retained here. The Bulu were about ready to flee 
away off to the interior on account of cruel treatment, but now they 
are taking heart a little. 


“THE BELOVED.” 237 


We expect to get through with our translating work in three 
weeks, and then I will probably take a trip to Efulen and possibly 
to the coast, and bring up Rev. and Mrs. Dager, who have been 
anxiously waiting for over three months to come to Elat. 

I am feeling much better than at last writing. My Xmas box 
is not here yet, but I am living in hopes. 


May 7, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—We are sending men to the coast today for 
mail and provisions and I will write you a note. I am well and hard 
at it. Mr. Fraser and I will finish our work of translating, which has 
taken about eighteen months, in two days. Then the next day, May 
9, he will leave for America, and I will leave for Efulen, where there 
is to be a church organized on May 13. Then Rey. and Mrs. Dager 
are at Efulen and we expect to start back May 14th for Elat. The war 
is still on with the Bulu, but nevertheless, we are going right through 
to Efulen, and expect no trouble. I was out yesterday among the 
Yemesem people, who are still on fighting terms with the govern- 
ment, and they were so glad to see me that they followed along after 
me from town to town, and two boys came back with me to go to 
school. About May 21 I expect to take a long breath and take it easy 
afew days. It is wonderful the way we are kept in the power of God. 


RIP’ TrO THE COAST. 


May 23, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—As I wrote you about the 8th of May that I 
was going to take a tramp to Efulen, now that it is over I must tell 
you something about it. It was a very interesting trip in many ways. 
I left Elat on May 9th and went the Esakoe road, which is much 
longer than the other, but the people are very friendly and I wanted 
to see them. I had three men and two boys with me. We were three 
nights out, arriving at Efulen Saturday about 11 o’clock, on the fourth 
day. We had a good road part of the way, and another part was very 
bad. But we did not have much water to wade and had but one rain, 
so it was not as hard as I had expected. I would judge that it is 85 
or 90 miles by that road. Somehow the word went on ahead of me 
that the governor was coming, and the people were much afraid until 
they found out who it was. It was laughable to see the people run 
to the bush when they would see us coming, but more so when they 
would come back after seeing who it was. They would laugh at their 
fear of a harmless missionary, and come dancing around me like a 
crowd of school children after an “Uncle Tom’s Cabin” procession. 


238 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


I had a good meeting with the people at the town where we stopped 
for the night. On the whole it was a pleasant trip. I found the peo- 
ple all well at Efulen and Rev. and Mrs. Dager ready and anxious to 
get started for Elat. 


EFULEN CHURCH ORGANIZED. 


Sabbath, May 13, was a glad day for Efulen station. The mission- 
aries have been working faithfully for many years, preaching and 
teaching, working and praying for the conversion of these people. 
Now they are beginning to gather in the fruit of their labors. It was 
our blessed privilege to organize a church with six members and to 
ordain an elder. These six stood a very good examination, showing 
what faithful work the missionaries have done. And besides these 
there are about thirty others in the inquiry class, or classes, for they 
have several grades, all under special instruction. It was a grand 
sight to see Mr. Johnston baptizing those six natives, the first fruits 
among the Bulu. There was no house large enough to hold the crowd, 
so they held the meetings under the plantains, and when those six, 
four women and two men, arose out of the crowd to be set apart as 
believers in God, it was an impressive scene. Then after the organi- 
zation of. the church and the ordination of the elder we celebrated the 
Lord’s supper, and those six took part for the first time and the people 
saw this most sacred rite performed for the first time. You may be 
surprised when I tell you that this was the first time for over four 
years that I have had the opportunity to partake in the celebration of 
the Lord’s supper. 


On Monday morning we were up early and ready for another 
start, but the rain kept us till 11 o’clock, at which time we started, 
although it was still raining some. There were fifty altogether in the 
caravan. Mrs. Dager had a hammock, but the rest walked. We had 
good roads and made good time that day, not stopping till near 5 in 
the evening, and then we put up in a little town in the bush which had 
been hastily built. The houses were mostly made of leaves and very 
small. So were all the houses we saw for three days. All along that 
road there had been fighting about a month before we passed, and all 
the houses were burned. (We returned the south road). The people 
were just beginning to rebuild, and they were in great terror when 
they saw a white man coming. We saw very few people on the return 
trip, for they were still in the bush. But the road was good much of 
the way, for the first thing the people did when they returned after 
the war was to fix up the roads. We had one-half day of very bad 
road, but on the whole the trip was a pleasant one and we made good 
time, arriving at Elat on the fourth day at 10:30 in the morning. 


“THE BELOVED.” 239 


GOVERNMENT REQUESTS MISSIONARIES TO LEAVE ELAT, 


Mr. and Mrs. Dager are fine people and we are rejoiced to have 
them with us. We have been building up great hopes for the work this 
year and we came back with light hearts. But the first thing we 
heard on our return was that the German government had made an 
official request for us to leave Elat and they would build the govern- 
ment station there. This, you will remember, came up in December, 
but was not pressed. Now they came to us with a letter from the 
governor at Kamerun, which orders the officials here to take the hill 
and build on it. They say they will pay for the houses we have built, 
but will give nothing for the ground or the trees and food which we 
have had so much trouble taking care of. There is no justice in it, 
and we consider it very unfriendly to the Mission. They have all 
Bulu land to pick from, yet they want to drive us away from here, 
this little spot which we have fixed up and cared for all these years. 
So when they asked us to make out estimates of the houses we 
answered that we would not do it until we had word from the Mission 
or the Board. Then they said they would make out estimates, pay us 
and take possession. We told them that they had the power to do so, - 
but we would not leave till we heard from our Mission unless they car- 
ried us out by main strength. Then they backed down and said they 
would write to Kamerun for further instructions as to what to do. 
We told them we would take the matter to the home governments. 
So it stands. We are very unsettled and do not know what the end 
will be. It will hinder our work and stop our building for a while 
and possibly we will have to leave altogether. Then there will be a 
big row, for the Bulu all say they will go with us and leave the gov- 
ernment alone. This will cause trouble. The truth is, we feel that 
the German government does not want us here. They are jealous of 
our hold on the people, and they cannot do just as they would like. 
i feel this matter very keenly. I love this place and these people and 
it will be very hard to leave all. But the Lord rules even the German 
officials, and we know that all things will work out for good. The 
Hieutenant who was doing so well has been ordered to another place 
and the rule of terror has begun again. 


June 27, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—Another chance to send mail thas arrived. 
What a blessing it is to have the roads open and good. Now we can 
Send men any road we wish between here and the coast. The shortest 
route is via Efulen but that road has been closed for caravan travel 
since last August. Last week we sent a man that way for the first 
time since. last August. We have just received word that there are 


240 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


seventy-five boxes waiting for us at Batanga, so we will send men 
down tomorrow and get at least part of what is there. Just think, my 
Christmas box is not here yet. It will be well on in July before it 
can get here, and possibly not then, for I do not know that it is at 
Batanga. 


A NEW HOUSE. 


We were greatly rejoiced by the last mail from our Board. Our 
appropriations for the year came, and Elat is to have a new house. 
We have but one dwelling house here and we are all living in it—two 
families and one “old bach.” We are glad to get the house but it means 
lots of work. Most of this will fall to me but I enjoy it. The only 
thing that I regret is that it will keep me from getting out among the 
people. We have begun work getting boards ready. We have te 
go to the forest, cut the trees, hew them down, cut the log in conven- 
ient lengths, carry them to the saw pit, and there saw them into 
boards. It is a long, hard process, but so we must do if we wish boards 
for our floor. The sides of the house are of bark, of course. The 
men began sawing boards today. We cut a fine tree which we think 
will make about a hundred boards. As the log lies it measures eighty- 
eight feet to the first limb, and as straight as a needle. We will cut it 
into ten sections and then it will take about twenty men to carry 
one section. As the tree stood, it was about a hundred feet to the first 
limb, but the men cut it about ten or twelve feet from the ground. 
Like many other trees in this country it has spreading roots which are 
very hard to cut through, so the usual way is to cut the tree above 
the place where it begins to spread out. They first tie a big vine 
around the tree where they want to stand, wrapping it around until 
they get a good foot rest, then they take a vine and tie it in a loop 
around the tree, large enough to let a man get inside the loop. Then 
they take their axe and crawl inside the loop and go to work. 


We have not built our new church yet, and we will not build 
much of anything till our affairs are settled with the government, 
and we are sure that we are to stay here. Nothing more has beer 
said but we think something will be done soon one way or the other. 

The Spirit is still working in our midst. Since I came back from 
Efulen, May 17th, seventeen have come to me, saying they wanted to 
be Christians. 


The medical work is progressing nicely. The small hospital is 
overcrowded, and we are to have a new one. Mr. Dager has charge 
of the school. He has a native assistant. There are five white traders 
in Ebolewo’e now, and two horses. We had some wild hog to eat today 
which was fine. 


“THE BELOVED.” 242 


July 16, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—Mrs. Lange is so sick that it is necessary for 
her to go home. Mr. Lange will go along. So our ranks are being: 
thinned out. We hear also that Mr. and Mrs. Knauer may have to 
go for a health change. This is a hard climate. Mrs. Lippert is: 
not well either. 

We are still at Elat unmolested by the government. The affair 
is now in the hands of the Board. School closed last Friday. There: 
are six white traders in-Ebolewo’e, and more coming. This makes 
fifteen white people in this neighborhood. All work on the grounds 
is stopped but the sawing of plank for a new house. The inquirers 
now number seventy-three. Five came last Sabbath, five the Sabbath 
before and five during the week. 


TWENTY NIGHTS ON BULU BEDS. 


August, 1900. 

While we were waiting for word in regard to Elat property, as to 
whether the Government would take possession or not, I took 
advantage of the delay and made a twenty-one day’s trip interiorward 
among the Bulu. Our party consisted of two Bulu men, seven boys, 
and myself, ten in all. We had with us the baby organ and fifty 
large Bible pictures. We started out July 19th, and returned August 
8th. The organ and the pictures were great drawing cards and 
were of great help in the work, thanks to the good people of Mont-— 
clair. The boys were Helpful in the singing. The Lord prospered’ 
our journey by not sending rain in all that trip, save one little 
sprinkle which did no harm. The roads were dry for the most part.. 
I walked in water only four days, which is very unusual. The 
Government has been and is still fighting with the Bulu, but I saw no. 
evidence of violence or of ill will among the thousands of natives 
I saw, and in whose power I was from the day I left Elat. They 
came from all sides to see the white man and the pictures, and hear 
the organ, some coming as far as eight and ten miles. I held the 
principal meetings in the morning. My usual plan was to try te 
reach some large central town in the evening and get the chief to 
send messengers to all the near towns and tell the people to come 
early in the morning and hear God’s words. The Bulu drum was 
made to do God service in calling the people up to hear His words. 
So the largest gatherings were in the early morning about 7 o’clock.. 
We held one meeting at 6:15 A. M., at which 265 people gatheredi 
The largest meeting was held at 7 A. M., at which there were about 
427 natives. All classes of people came to these meetings. They 


242 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


-were. all held out of doors, for the Bulu have no houses large enough 
‘for such gatherings. I placed the organ in the center of the street 
cand hung the bictures illustrating bible scenes on small forks cut 
for the purpose, about as high as my head, then I made. the people 
sit down on the ground in a semi-circle. We sang songs, showed 
“pictures, and talked sometimes for two and sometimes for three hours 
:and no one seemed to get tired or go away; on the contrary they 
always complained when we stopped—they wanted more. Oh, how 
-hungry and destitute the people seem to be. The boys helped me 
“very much. Some of them can preach like saints. If they would 
«only put into practice all they tell others to do, how happy we all 
would be. 


We were out twenty-one days, walked about 280 miles, passed 
‘through 93 towns, held 50 meetings, at which there was an aggregate 
rattendance of about 6600, the greater part of whom had never seen 
za white man or heard anything about God. 


Our general direction was southeast. We crossed the Nlobo 
criver, which marks the eastern limit of Mr. Good’s travels (See May 
-in a “Life for Africa”). We came to a small river called Fom, crossed 
it and went on to the Mbua river, which is three days east of the 
“Nlobo, or six hard days with loads, east of Elat. It took us eight days 
“to get back, not counting our rest on the Sabbath. We were about as 
‘far east of Elat as Elat is east from Batanga. The country is fine 
:and some of the towns large but I do not think it is as thickly set- 
-tled as around Elat. I saw many elephant tracks, was close to a 
‘drove of gorilla, and saw many evidences of the presence of buffalo. 
‘Small game is abundant. 


I would like to make the following notes, some of which are 
«correct, others may not be. 


The Mbua river at the point where I saw it is 1975 feet above the 
ssea, and is about 275 feet lower than Hlat. 


The “Ja” river (see May) is much farther east than is indicated 
‘on the map. The Mbua is near the place where the Ja is indicated. 
‘I found only one Bulu who had seen the Ja, and he said it was 
:about eight days from Eyem or thirteen days from Elat. This may or 
May not be true. They say the Ja is the eastern limit of the Bulu, 
cand that it does not flow to the sea, which means that it flows to the 
Congo, no doubt. F 

The people east of the Ja are the Njem, not the Ntem as marked 
von the map, and their language differs very much from the Bulu. 
“I saw a Njem woman and IJ could not understand her at all. 

The Bulu country extends much farther south than is indicated 
<on the map at the Nlobo river. I must have been as far south as 


“THE BELOVED.” 243° 


2 degrees North Latitude, and I was not near the southern limit 
of the Bulu. 


The Nlobo river flows south to the Kom and the Kom to the Campo. 


TO THE JUNIOR ENDEAVORERS. 


August 22, 1900. 

Dear Young Helpers in God’s Work:—You are better to me than 
I am to you. I want to tell you how much you are helping me in 
my work, or rather our work. When I wrote suggesting that a few 
Testament and large Bible pictures would be of service to me here, 
you responded at once. The pictures and Bibles came in excellent 
condition. The Testaments and dictionaries got wet in the rough 
Sea and were spoiled some, but can be used. Just a few days after 
receiving the Testaments, a black trader from Sierra Leone, an 
English colony, came to us. He says he is a Christian and when he 
left home he packed his Bible and hymn book with his other things, 
but when he reached Batanga they were stolen. So he came to the 
bush without any Bible. I gave him a Testament to use till he goes 
away. Just think of that man away off in the bush without anyone to 
tell him about God, or remind him of the things he has learned, and 
without any Bible. There has been one call for a dictionary, also. 
Now, for these books I want to thank you. 


My dear young friends, if you could have been with me and seen 
the natives, as I showed them those large pictures you would need 
no thanks from me. Old men and women, young men and children, 
all huddled together, laughing, shouting and clapping their hands for 
joy—I could not help but laugh at them in their glee. Let me tell 
you how I fixed the pictures. I had the boys sew strips of cloth 
to the upper corners and nail these strips to a stick. When I want 
to show the pictures, I get a man to cut a forked stick about as high 
as my head, and stick it in the ground out in the street where there 
is good light. I hang the pictures on the fork, and turn them over 
one by one and explain. There are six pictures which attract especial 
attention. They are: Jesus standing in the midst of a few old 
men, Jesus feeding the five thousand, Jesus bearing his cross, Daniel 
in the lion’s den, The animals and the child with his hand on the 
lion, and Isaiah called to service. 

I have shown the pictures about sixty times, and about 8000 
natives have seen them and heard them explained. Some of the 
Bulu boys who are trying to be followers of Christ have the pictures 
now and are on an evangelistic trip in the Bene country to the north- 
east of us. Now you see you are helping preach the gospel. Words 


244 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


are often soon forgotten, but that which one sees with the eye is 
not so easily forgotten. These people cannot forget the impressions. 
received from these pictures. People will come to see the pictures 
who will not come to hear us preach, and in this way we reach 
more people than we would otherwise. 

I will not ask for more pictures now, but when these wear out 
I will want more, so please save up the best ones for future use. 
Please accept my thanks for all the things sent. It is very encour- 
aging to me to know that you are so interested in this work. 


AMONG THE MVAE PEOPLE. 


Itinerating is to me very fascinating. The members of Elat 
station, for very good reasons, have been confined largely to work 
at the station ever since the station was founded. Itinerating has 
been neglected. Since June I have been able to get out among the 
towns some, and I have enjoyed it exceedingly. New faces, new 
scenes, new country, the curious people, the privilege and pleasure of 
telling the old, old story to those who have never heard it, all go 
together to make this work attractive. It has been like a health 
change to me. 

I wrote you in a former letter about my trip interiorward on 
which I spent twenty-one days among the Bulu. Now I want to 
tell you about a thirteen days’ trip among the people to the south of 
the Bulu, who call themselves the “Mvae.” I think they are part of 
the Ntem people. 


IN NEW TERRITORY AMONG NEW PEOPLE. 


Mr. Dager accompanied me two days on this trip and then 
returned. We went almost due south and on the evening of the second 
day reached the south limit of the Bulu and spent the night in the 
first Mvae town. We were not well received at first, but they did not - 
know us. Never having been visited by a white man, they did not 
know the difference between a missionary and the governor. At first 
they ran, one man even leaving his gun in his haste to get away. 
Later some came back, and a few wanted to appear to be brave. Two 
young men especially wanted to show their bravery, and came with . 
their guns and made as though they would shoot the white skin. I. 
did perhaps a hazardous thing in leaving my gun with Mr. Dager and 
the men in one end of the town, and walking down the street among 
the excited people. After I had gone about sixty yards, I heard a man 
shout to a boy who was near me, to get out of that, and looking 
around, saw a man with a gun making as though he would shoot. 


“THE BELOVED.” 245 


A man with more sense, told him to put up his gun, and went 
toward him, trying to put him in his right mind. I returned up the 
street, passing near where the brave man was, but he could not 
stand so close a view and backed off behind the houses. Many of the 
people slept in the bush that night and only sixty-six came to the 
meeting in the morning, but one of the principal listeners was the 
young man who wanted to shoot the night before. After the meeting 
was over, we separated, Mr. Dager going to Elat, and I going on. 
I wanted to feel my way softly into this new country, so I went west 
along the border to a town by the name of Mefup. Here the people 
received me well and there were over two hundred at the meeting. 
From this place I turned south and east to a town by the name of 
Mendimoven (Rainwater) where I spent the Sabbath. I was surprised 
to see the change in customs and dress of the Mvae. They seemed to 
be lazier and poorer than the Bulu, and more given up to fetich 
worship. Their head-dress is peculiar. The first thing that struck 
me was that they all have holes punched through their noses. Some 
have a brass ring on which hangs a fetich, through this hole. Some 
stick a feather through, others a stick, while still others have a 
string or two of small beads running through the nose and to each 
ear. Most of the young men and women have long strings of beads 
tied to their hair, and dangling from each side of the head. In 
some cases these danglers are as much as two feet long. Some have 
false hair. One man surprised us. We were looking at his fancy head- 
dress and commenting on his well-arranged plaits of hair and beads 
and buttons, etc., when he suddenly-difted the whole apparition from 
his head and hung it on the wall. 


FARTHER INLAND. 


From Mendimoven I went southeast four days’ journey. I had 
not intended to go so far east, but I heard of four white men being 
in that direction and I wanted to know who they were and what they 
were doing. I thought from what the natives said that they might be 
Catholic Missionaries. Moreover, I wanted to see the Ntem (native 
name of the Campo) river, and was told that I could see it in that 
direction. So I went on from town to town, calling the people 
together and talking to them whenever I could. I crossed the Mboto 
and Nsam rivers near where they flow together. On the fourth day 
I reached the Kom (or Komm) river, on the west bank of which I 
found a new temporary house and a French flag floating. The white 
Men were not there, but there were five natives from the coast in 
charge, from whom I learned that the white men were Frenchmen— 
two traders and two Catholic missionaries. They were out exploring 
and looking up locations for trading posts and mission stations. 
They had gone on inland. If their plans mature there will be a 


246 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


station at this point. Nkin is the name of the native town in which 
they have located. It is situated on the banks of the Kom river near 
where it empties into the Ntem. The Ntem here is either the Campo 
or the Benito. The natives call the Campo the Ntem and so they call 
the river that name, but on the German map the Kom flows into 
the Benito river. I am not prepared to say which is correct. To 
be safe I will call it the Ntem, as the natives do. It is quite a large 
Tiver and so is the Kom. Then the Nlobo river empties into the Kom 
not far above Nkin. The location seems to be well ehosen. 

The men in charge kindly took me down the Kom in their large 
canoe, made by hollowing out a large log, to the Ntem and back, a 
very pleasant ride. I crossed the Kom that same evening and spent 
the night in the first village east of the Kom, which is known as 
Eson. There was not a decent house in the village, but the people 
were kind and asked me to stay. We held a meeting by torch-light 
in the street at which there were about seventy natives. 

Next morning we turned to the north, recrossed the Kom and 
Nlobo rivers, and by night reached the first Bulu town. The nexé, 
day we started at six and marched through forests and over moun- 
tains till 2:15 P. M. without seeing a village. We crossed the Ongongo 
mountain, reaching an elevation of 2750 feet. We saw fourteen droves 
of monkeys, out of which I managed to get four. The boys had 
monkey soup the next day to the full. We walked hard and late 
that day, for we wanted to spend the Sabbath in Mevus. We reached 
Mevus at 7 P. M. You may know that we were ali tired, for we 
started at 6 in the morning and walked till 7 P. M., with only about 
one hour of rest during the march. I think I am safe in saying that 
we marched thirty miles that day. : 

Mevus is a beautiful location. The town is built on the top of a 
high ‘hill, 2250 feet above sea level, and the view is sublime on alk 
sides. We spent a beautiful Sabbath there. At the morning meeting 
there were about 215 natives present. After the meeting a man came 
to me and said he was glad to hear the words of God again. He 
said he once acted as guide for Mr. Good, and that he remembered 
what Mr. Good had told him, and was trying to follow out that 
teaching. 


A HUGE ROCK. 


Monday morning we were off at 5:30. We passed through several 
large towns and reached Akokas about 2 P. M. This is a huge rock, 
standing out almost perpendicular on all sides and reaching a height 
of probably 500 feet from the base. The base is about 300 feet above 
the stream at the bottom. We went up to the very side of that mass 
of rock. The base is covered with cacti and short grass. I ate 
lunch up there and spent nearly an hour enjoying this grand sight. 


“THE BELOVED.” 24T 


If one were to go around this rock I suspect he would find it fully 
a mile and perhaps more. In looking on such a sight one cannot 
but think of Him who “clave the rocks in the wilderness,” and, 
having seen it, read with a better understanding the symbol, “The 
Lord is my rock and my fortress.” What a symbol of strength, 
durability and firmness. What can shake our sure repose? 

At 4:30 P. M. we reached Feyop and put up for the night. We had 
a meeting by torch-light, at which were about 100 people. We were 
off again at 5:30 the next morning and at 2 P. M. reached Elat. We 
had been out thirteen days, walked about 220 miles, and held 24 
meetings, with an aggregate attendance of about 2000 people. 

Besides the fact that some 2000 people heard the “message of 
love,” the trip was fruitful in that it adds some to our knowledge 
of the country and its needs. As I suggested in a former letter, the 
Ntum people are parallel with the Bulu and extend as far inland 
perhaps as the Bulu do. Between the Bulu and the Ntum proper 
there is a strip of country occupied by a people who call themselves 
the Mvae. They are more like the Ntum than the Bulu, but differ 
very little from the Bulu. They differ some in customs, but their 
language is very nearly the same. A Bulu and a Mvae have no 
trouble in conversing with each other. 

But perhaps the most important point is the fact that the 
Roman Catholic mission is going to locate at Nkin, which is only 
one day from our beloved Bulu, and is about two days’ journey 
farther east than our frontier station. Shall we let the Catholic get 
in ahead of us and cut off our forward march? The African tribes are 
moving coastward and should the Catholics get a hold on the people 
before they reach us, our prospects are much darker. Virgin soil is 
easier worked than that which has been cultivated and planted with 
thistles, thorns and poison weeds. Now is the time for a new 
station east of Elat. Let us keep the Catholics out of Bululand. We 
can do so by striking now. Let us move forward. We need men, 
we need money. Who will go? Who will provide the means? 


PALE HORSE AND RIDER. 


October, 1900. 

The pale horse and his rider have visited Ebolewo’e this month. 
The oldest man in this region died in his sins. He used to boast that 
he had killed twenty-two persons in cold blood. He never seemed to 
care anything about the gospel, and about a year ago he lost his 
mind. From that time it was useless to talk to him, for he could not 
understand anything. No one seemed to be sorry he died. On the 
other hand his people seemed to be glad to get him out of the way. 


248 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


What a miserable end! No one to love him, no one to receive or 
love him yonder. : 

A few days later the call came nearer home. Our cook, a 
Bulu boy of seventeen years, took sick and died suddenly. He 
belonged to the class of inquirers and spent most of the last night 
in prayer. His death was peaceful and we have every reason to 
believe that he will receive the welcome, “Well done, thou good and 
‘faithful servant. Enter thou into the joy of thy Lord.” On his 
‘deathbed he was heard to say, “Oh, Holy Spirit, let us go home.” 
“When called by name he said his name was not Nso. “My name is 
.Jesus,” he said, “and my mother’s name is Mary.” 

Four days later a white trader died and was buried on the Mission 
grounds. We had to make the coffin. At his grave was the largest 
gathering of white people ever held in Ebolewo’e. There were thir- 
teen, and they were not all there that day. (There are now over 
twenty white people in Ebolewo’e). Mr. Dager had charge of the 
services. After he was through Lieutenant von Bulow made a few 
Temarks. 

Three days after the above a Bulu chief, a young-man, was shot 
by hostile natives and died at the Mission the next day. 

More touching still was our experience with a little boy about 
five years old. He was very sick, and one day was reported dead. 
The next day we heard that he was still alive, though hopeless. Mrs. 
Lippert went to see him and found them putting his grave clothes 
on him, with the intention of burying him, though he was not alto- 
gether dead. Their argument was, “He cannot get well, so why not 
bury him and be rid of the trouble of caring for him.” Mrs. Lippert 
thought there was a possible chance of his being restored, and had 
him brought to the Mission. Dr. Lippert gave him stimulants and 
Testored him a little and then began treating him. The boy was 
literally being eaten by worms. The Doctor removed fifty-three large 
ones, almost an incredible story. In one week the boy was walking 
around. We told his people that he was no longer their boy, and that 
he must stay at the Mission. They consented and the little fellow is 
now in my charge. (Later: I gave the child back to them.) 


PERSONAL REPORT OF C. W. McCLEARY. 


November 15, 1899, to November 15, 1900. 
To the West Africa Mission and the Board of Foreign Missions: 


Dear Brethren:—With a heart full of gratitude to our God for 
His goodness I report the labors of the year just closed as follows: 


I have preached at the station twenty-seven times. Have superin- 
tended the Sunday school and taught the men’s class when present 
at the station since May. Have had charge of the “inquirers” since 
May 9th, meeting with them once a week. Have had charge of the 
boarding boys outside of school, and of the workmen since May. The 
principal part of this work has been looking after the men who sawed 
the boards, selecting trees, marking logs for the saw, etc. This work 
was begun on June 19th and finished the last of October, with one 
month’s rest in August and September. A little time has been spent 
in trying to teach four or five school boys a little carpentering. They 
have planed one side of most of the 400 boards which have been 
sawed. Keeping track of station accounts has also taken up some 
time and energy. 


Up to May 8th most of my time was spent at the work of translat- 
ing the Acts, and revising the Gospels with Mr. Fraser, as assigned 
by the Mission. 


On August 23d I started out for another itinerating trip, being 
accompanied two days by Mr. Dager. We went south two days, then 
I took south and southeast among the Mvae people five days and 
crossed the Kom river at the point where it empties into the Ntem 
(which is, perhaps, the Benito). From there I turned north, recrossed 
the Kom and Nlobo rivers, and went back to Elat. Was out thirteen 
days, traveled about 220 miles, visited 54 towns, held 24 meetings with 
an aggregate of about 2,000 in attendance. 

Three other short itinerating trips were made, one of five, one of 
three, and one of two days. Besides these twelve trips of a day, or 
parts of days, were made to the near towns. 

I took one tramp to Efulen to meet with the committee on church 
organization and to escort Mr. and Mrs. Dager to Elat, being gone nine 
days. Four other small trips were made in the interest of peace 
between the Government and the Bulu. 

Summary of itinerating and other travel during the year: 

I have been away from the station among the Bulu 62 days, have 
traveled about 1,000 miles, held 131 meetings at which were gathered 


250 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


about 14,976 natives, and have visited, or passed through, 230 towns 
and villages. 

Full of hope for the coming year that I may be given strength and 
opportunities to serve Him, whose we are, and whose glory we seek, 
I close this, my fifth annual report. 


Efulen, November 27, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—I am now on my way to Batanga to attend 
Mission meeting. Rev. and Mrs. Dager are along, and from here Dr. 
and Mrs. Johnson and baby will join us. We left Elat November 21st 
and had a very good trip. The first night we built sheds of sticks 
and plantain leaves, and put our blankets on the ground. We had a 
jolly time. There are twenty in our caravan. We arrived here Sat- 
urday morning. Mr. Johnson has gone on to meet his brother, who 
is coming out. 

We expect to leave here in the morning, six white people and lots 
of natives. We want to spend only three days on the way down. Jack, 
the mule, will go along. He is a clipper—a little larger than a billy 
goat. We left Mrs. Lippert sick and I suspect they will go home soon. 
This will leave Elat with three again if no new missionaries are sent 
up. How hard it is to keep this field supplied with workers. Some 
want to get away, others have to. I am glad I can stay as long as I 
have, and there is good hope for at least another year at present 
writing. 


Batanga, December 4, 1900. 

The first part of this letter was written at Efulen on our way 
down. We arrived at Batanga November 30. I was very well till 
just the day before we got in when I was almost laid up with a touch 
of fever or rather feverishness, but I managed to keep up till night 
where we put up. Then the day after our arrival I took to the bed 
with the same trouble and I am just getting around again. I had no 
high temperature and can hardly say I had a fever. However, the 
malaria is in my system. 

Some of the missionaries here are well, and some are sick.” Others 
have not arrived and we have to wait. It is two years and a half since — 
I have been to the coast. I have a fine view of the sea from my room, 
and my ears are constantly filled with the never ceasing roar of the 
breakers on the beach. This house is only a few yards from the 
water’s edge. A German steamship is in sight up the coast and will 
be here this evening or tomorrow. I want to go out to her if I can. 
Do not know when Mission meeting will begin. There will be some 


“THE BELOVED.” 251 


weighty questions before us this year, among which Elat will take a 
prominent place on account of the action of the Government. 


Batanga, December 15, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—It is Saturday night and mail may leave to- 
morrow if the steamer arrives, se I will add a note. This coast cli- 
mate is too much for me. I have been laid up twice now with a little 
fever, but am out again and hope it will not get me again. I want 
to get back to my mountain home. Will probably be here two weeks 
yet. The dear brethren have inflicted misery upon themselves by 
electing me chairman of the Mission meetings and moderator of the 
Corisco Presbytery, but people will make mistakes, and they must 
pay the penalty. This is the first time I have been at their meeting 
since I came out five years ago. Mr. Johnston has been sick twice 
since coming down this time. Mrs. Knauer is sick and may have to go 
home. How hard it is to keep the fleld supplied with workers. 


Batanga, December 31, 1900. 

My Dear Parents:—The old year dies tonight. We expect to start 
for the interior tomorrow, and by we I mean eleven missionaries and 
one baby. Four will stay at Efulen a week and then come back to the 
coast, three will remain at Efulen and four will go on to Elat. We 
will have a fine trip, won’t we? 


MISSIONARY HEROISM. 


I cannot write you much tonight, but must tell you something of 
my condition. I have been at the coast one month and have had four 
slight attacks of the fever in that time—never very much, but a warn- 
ing as to my condition. I am free to say that were Hlat better manned 
I would go home this year, and possibly you will see me anyway be- 
fore another Christmas passes. I know I ought not to go against all 
advice, professional and otherwise, and stay till I break completely, 
but how can I go and leave Mr. and Mrs. Dager alone at Hlat with all 
‘the work of that station, and at this time of strained relations with 
the Government? I cannot and if some help is not provided I will not 
till God puts His hand upon me. There are now eight members of this 
Mission who ought to go home for a rest, but who will take their 
places? Let more men be sent out. Let the church arouse and send 
recruits. 

I should have told you that Mission meetings are over and also 
Presbytery. Quite a stir was made in our company this morning by 
the announcement of an engagement between Mr. Ford and Miss 
Siemar, two of our Gaboon missionaries—a surprise to everyone. 


252 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


Hope you are all well and enjoying the winter. We worked 
hard all day Christmas and will start on our journey tomorrow—New 
Year. No holidays for the “crazy” missionaries here below, but wait— 


Efulen, January 4, 1901. 

My Dear Parents:—We reached Efulen last night at 6:20, having 
traveled the last day thirty miles, and I just got out of bed the day 
before we left the coast. But Dr. Johnson was very good to me and 
just made me ride the mule part of the way. We came up in three 
days. All the party, twelve in number, are well and happy. You 
will notice from the writing that I am quite nervous. I was not 
tired last night, but I was exhausted, my strength was just about 
gone. Dr. Johnson wants me to stay here and rest a week, but I 
think I will go on with our Elat party on Monday. We had a splen- 
did trip up. The people from the south part of the field, who had 
never been in the bush, enjoyed it very much. I began to feel better 
as soon as I got on the road, and I feel sure that by the time I reach 
Elat I will be all right. Oh, it is so good to be among the Bulu 
again, and to breathe the pure mountain air. I would like to write 
you about the important questions which were before the Mission 
at its meeting this year, but it would take more writing than I feel 
like doing, now. We asked for eight more missionaries for the 
whole mission: two for Elat, one for Lolodorf, two for Batanga, one 
for Benito, and two for Gaboon. We need them all, and more, too. 
Pray that the laborers may be sent. 


Efulen station will perhaps be made an out-station in two or 
three years, and then the missionaries who are here now can go 
farther inland, and either strengthen Elat or build a new station. 
It is the object of the Board and Mission to make Elat a strong 
station among the Bulu. It is central, and will be made a place 
where the Bulu can go for their higher education. We want to get 
about forty acres of land and raise all kinds of food, and make the 
school as nearly self-supporting as possible. We do not know yet 
what the government will do, but if they drive us away from that 
hill we can find another place which will serve our purpose just as 
well. One thing we fear, and that is, that they may delay about 
telling us what they will do, and so hinder our work. 


“THE BELOVED.” 253 


BACK AT ELAT. 


January 14, 1901. 

My Dear Parents:—Oh, how good it is to be at home once more! 
I was away from Elat fifty days and they were nearly all long ones, for 
I wanted to get back home. I did not feel well at the coast, but as 
soon as I got back to the hill country I began to feel better, and al- 
though we walked hard coming up, I stood the trip all right. I wrote 
you from Efulen concerning the progress of our party that far. Now 
I will tell you about the rest of the journey. Mr. and Mrs. Dager, 
Mr. Salveter, and I had intended to leave Efulen for Elat on Tuesday 
morning, January 8th, and had our things all packed ready Monday 
night. But that night Mrs. Dager took sick and the Doctor said she 
could not go for some time. It seemed best that some one should 
hurry to Elat and see how the Lipperts were getting along alone, 
so Mr. Johnston said he would join Mr. Salveter and me. So we 
three started from Efulen at 9:30 on Tuesday morning and reached 
Elat on Thursday at 3 P. M. How is that for walking? Seventy miles 
in less than three days, and the men with their loads, right at our 
heels. 

We found Dr. and Mrs. Lippert getting along all right. Mrs. L. 
was up and doing her work and seems much better. She wants to 
start home in April if possible, and get to America some time in 
June. If she is well enough at the time for starting, the Doctor may 
stay here, for he is badly needed, and I will accompany her and help 
take care of baby Nellie. This is only a possibility, so do not count on 
it. Should Mrs. L. get worse and the Doctor have to take her home, 
my going will be doubtful for some time yet. 

Mr. Johnston preached last Sabbath and the crowd was so great 
that only about one-half could get in the house. Doctor tells us 
that on Christmas day there were about 1000 natives at the Mission. 
How hungry these people are! How can I go and leave them? I 
love them and want to stay and help feed them. Would that we had 
500 missionaries here to help us. They could be used. 


FIRST CHRISTIAN MARRIAGE. 


February 10, 1901. 

My Dear Parents:—Today the first Christian marriage in Ebol- 
ewo’e was celebrated in the church before some three hundred wit- 
nesses. The Bulu have neither a civil nor a religious ceremony in 
their marriages. It is very much the same as buying or stealing a 
cow. When the woman is paid for she is taken home, or very often a 
man will run off with a woman he likes, without paying. Today a 


254 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


boy who has been at the Mission for over four years took to himself 
a wife. After having completed all arrangements as to dowry, he 
came and wanted to know how to proceed. I told him to come-and 
have a Christian marriage. He came. The bride is a stranger here, 
but is quite modest and good looking. The ladies made her a dress— 
the first bit of cloth she ever had on—and she looked well. It was a 
good object lesson. It is the talk of the town now. All those who 
want to do right are very enthusiastic over it, and say that it is the 
only real marriage. It will have more effect than ten sermons on 
the subject. Others will soon follow. 


The German government has come on us again and we are likely 
to lose our home. More work, more trouble. I will stay till after 
June, I think. 


February 19, 1901. 

My Dear Parents:—I suppose the people in America would be 
surprised if they knew the kinds of work we have to do at times. 
I have just finished a bedstead for Mr. and Mrs. Dager. They have 
been here since May of last year and have had their mattresses partly 
on an old single bedstead and partly on boxes to fill out in width. 
They have been living in one room all this time, also. Mrs. Dager 
was a happy woman today when the new bedstead was taken to their 
room. It is cheaper to make a bedstead here than to have one car- 
ried up, for transportation is so expensive, hence the missionary 
turns carpenter. Nor can he order the lumber from the yard already 
Sawed and planed and any size he wishes. He must take the log, 
mark it and have men saw it with a pit-saw, very crooked of course, 
and then he must work to smooth it down to workable size. Neither 
has he sufficient tools to work with and what he has are very rusty 
from insufficient care and use. It is almost like making something 
out of nothing. I enjoy this kind of work for a change, but it seems 
that here, there is more of this kind of work to do than there ought 
to be. In fact the secular, material work takes most of the time, and 
the actual preaching of the Gospel is the change. 


GOVERNMENT GETS MISSION SITE. 


February 21, 1901. 


My Dear Parents:—It is twenty days since the storm burst upon 
Elat station. We were getting along nicely and had great hopes for 
the season. School had opened with some sixty or more boys as 
boarders, besides many day scholars. A girl’s school was started, 
@ new thing for Elat. We were pitched up to working trim and 
were happy in the work. But it lasted only one week and all was 
shattered. It was not a storm from above; would that it had been. 
It was of the earth earthy, born of greed and vandalism. But I have 
not time to write in pictorial language. You will remember that we 
have had trouble with the German officials here in Ebolewo’e. They 
want our location. Last May they came with very harsh demands 
which we considered unjust in the extreme. They demanded our 
site on short notice, and said they would not pay for anything but 
the houses, and that only in part. We absolutely refused to con- 
sider the matter and referred it to the Board, and the Board took it 
to the Berlin authorities. We supposed that the affair would be 
settled by them, but we were mistaken, for on the first day of Feb- 
Tuary an officer came to make arrangements for the transfer of our 
property to the German government. He came in a friendly spirit, 
so he said, and he acted gentlemanly. He said his Government con- 
sidered it absolutely necessary that their station be located where 
our station now is, and that they were willing to pay for the property. 
He then asked us if we were willing to go under those conditions. 
We did not want to answer his question for it involves a great deal. 
Zn the first place the property is not ours; it belongs to the Board, 
and we did not feel like giving up what does not belong to us. Sec- 
ondly, we did not want to give up our home and be turned out in the 
bush to hunt a new location and build a new station. But Dr. Brown 
told us that in dealing with the officers it must be our first object to 
keep on friendly terms with them. Otherwise they could easily injure 
our work. The German Government has absolute control of this 
territory, and we recognize that when a Government wants a certain 
piece of land it can take it, no matter who objects. So, taking all 
things into consideration, we finally decided, after nearly two hours. 
evasive answering to his persistent question, that we better give in 
than have a break with the Government. Our action was not final, 
however. It must have the approval of the Board and the Gov- 
ernment at Kamerun. According to the arrangement, we are to give 


256 CHARLES W. McCLEARY., 


possession on the first of June, and the price stipulated by us is 
$5095.00. We cannot expect that the Government will give that sum, 
but we had to put it high enough to be free from criticism by the 
Board. The final terms will be arranged between the Government and 
the Board. By “we” I mean Dr. Lippert, Mr. Dager- and myself, 
the male members of Elat station present. 


NEW MISSION SITE. 


We. dismissed school at once and began hunting for a location. 


We were partly prepared for this action from the Government, for 
it was talked over at Mission meeting and we were given power, 
in case the Government came on us again, to select and purchase 
a new site. This action has not been approved by the Board yet, but 
on the strength of it if we acted on the emergency. We took about 
twenty-five men with cutlasses (cutlass is the English of the Amer- 
ican corn-cutter or knife) and cut paths through the bush so that 
we could see the general lay of the land, starting as our central 
point at a town some thirty minutes walk east of Elat. We liked the 
location of this town and wanted to see what was off to the sides. 
We cut in all directions but did not find it as we thought. Moreover, 
if we built there, we would have to buy out the whole town and make 
them all move. The people were willing to do so, but we did not 
want to do that if we could find another location. We hunted on and 
found a place we liked better than the first one. I will describe it 
somewhat now, and will send a map showing the location later. It 
will be about two miles from the Government station when they build 
on our old location, and that is close enough to what the Bulu have 
well named “the house of Satan.” We do not want to get out of the 
reach of the people of Ebolewo’e, and this location will-put us only 
about one mile from the most of the old town. It is near another 
town by the name of Mekalat, and is a central point for all the tribes 
around. There are seven springs and one of them is fine. It is 150 
feet lower that Elat, yet it is not low. There is a fine stretch of land 
sloping gently on all sides from the point on which we expect toe 
build. Another important item is that the ground is exceedingly 
rich for this country. We have some trouble getting food for the 
boys, but when we get over there and get a start, we will have food 
“to throw away” as the people say. It is the object of the Board to 
make Elat a central point for all Bulu-land. In that case we need 
more land than we could well get in Ebolewo’e, and the land here 
is not very rich. Over there we can get all the good land we want, 
even up to 100 acres. So in the end the Mission may be benefited 
by these seemingly unjust demands of the Government. The only 
thing in which the new location does not excell the old, is in the 
view. Yet we feel very loath to leave our old home. It means another 


Rev. C. W. McCleary’s home at Elat. 


“THE BELOVED.” 257. 


long siege of hard work. We have now about sixty men at work 
clearing, and when we get to building, we will want more. At present 
we have it hard, for we have to walk the two miles every morning 
and evening. It will cost a great deal of money and physical strength 
but if it is the Lord’s will, we are ready for our share. 

Mr. Dager has been very sick with the fever. I had another- 
touch of it. 


February 28, 1901. 

Dear Parents:—Your letter of December 28 reached me February 
23. That is quick travelling. Would that my Christmas box would 
come as fast, but freight is sometimes very slow. 

We are glad to say that Lieutenant von Bulow has gone home.. 
We feel quite sure he has been censured for his conduct, by his 
Government. He needed it. We are still not very hopeful, however, 
for the man in charge now, though he is not so ambitious, is a 
meaner man than the other. His name is Larsh, and he is not a “von.” 

I think you have a misunderstanding about the “German soldiers’” 
you speak of out here. There are no white soldiers here. There 
are white officers and under-officers, but the private soldiers are all 
black men from up the coast, who are still savages, at least in acts. 

I am feeling quite well and will not think of leaving here before 
June, unless hastened by serious sickness. Mrs. Lippert is better and 
May not go home this year. After my last fever I was down to 127% 
pounds, but am back to 134 now. Mrs. Knauer has been very sick: 
and she has gone home. Mr. Knauer accompanied her. 


Pl April 1, 1901. 

My Dear Parents:—Dr. and Mrs. Lippert expect to leave for home: 
in two days. Doctor will go as far as the Canary Islands, at least, 
and perhaps all the way, so it is settled that I will not leave here- 
before July, and it will take about two months to get home. You: 
May expect me some time in September, if nothing happens. 


PAY DAY AT MISSION. 


We have been busy clearing for the new station, and we have 
made very good progress. We have had a force of about 100 mem 
working for us. Some have been getting bark, some thatch, some: 
sills, some bamboo and others have been cutting trees and grubbing 
stumps. Saturday was pay-day and I paid eighty men, not cash, but 
trade goods. Perhaps it would be of interest to you if I should tell 
just what the Bulu take on such occasions. I paid out as follows imi 


258 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


one afternoon: Four hundred thirty-six yards of cloth, one shirt, 
‘three coats, seven pairs of trousers, twenty-two butcher knives, nine- 
‘teen pocket knives, twenty-five leather belts, three cricket belts, two 
pairs suspenders, seven mouth organs, twenty-five long bars of soap, 
one hoe, twenty fish-hooks, twenty-five needles, six iron pots, eight 
‘blankets, eight candles, six tin boxes pomade, two axes, nine under- 
‘shirts, seventeen hats, seventy-four spoons, eleven spools thread, two 
strings of gilt beads, twenty strings blue beads, three boxes matches, 
“two plates, one keg powder, one cap, one comb, one saw, five neptunes 
-—equal to about $165 retail. 

Mr. Salveter, from Lolodorf, is with us. He is an architect and 
has made beautiful plans for our new station. The grounds will be 
‘beautiful and the buildings well located. We are waiting on official 
“word to proceed with the building. 


April 25, 1901. 

My Dear Parents:—I was made happy today by the arrival of my 
‘Christmas box. The jar of fruit was spoiled and in spoiling itself, 
it spoiled the pop-corn, but every thing else was fine. The jelly is 
excellent and it came just at the right time, for Mrs. Dager has been 
-sick and not able to eat much, and she enjoyed the jelly. And the 
-candy was toothsome. For all these things—towels, socks, handker- 
-chiefs, soap, fruit, etc—I wish to thank you with all my heart. And 
for the love which prompted the sending of these little tokens I 
“thank our Father which is in Heaven. This last thought is worth 
“more to me than the things—a thousand times. I know they were 
sent with prayers and blessings, which are sweeter than candy and 
“more refreshing than home-made jelly. Those dried apples took me 
“back in memory to the old orchard, and boyhood days, when I used to 
help mother pare apples for drying. They made me think, too, of the 
“boy who ate, it is said, a small sack of dried apples and then drank 
a quart of water. In the night season he had visions of a long, thin 
-clerk in the clothing store, vainly trying to find trousers of sufficient 
dimensions to enelose those (once) dried apples. It is said he now 
“votes against “expansion.” 


DEPLETED FORCE. 


Dr. and Mrs. Lippert and baby left here on the 3d of April. 
We were saddened by the news that Mrs. Dr. Johnson, of Efulen, has 
“been sick and is in such bad condition that the Doctor started home 
with her on the same steamer with Dr. and Mrs. Lippert. As yet we 
“have no definite word, but matters appear rather serious out here, 
looking at it from the human standpoint. Mr. Johnston is alone at 
“Efulen. Dr. and Mrs. Johnston have been sick at Batanga, and they 


“THE BELOVED.” 259 


have only been here one-half year. But to come nearer home: Mrs. 
Dager has been sick for a week, and she is not improving. It will be 
necessary for her to go to Lolodorf, that she may have the attention of 
a physician. Our plan is this: Mr. Salveter, of Lolodorf, will come 
to Elat and stay with me, while Mr. and Mrs. Dager go to Lolodorf. 
Mr. Salveter was here, but returned to Lolodorf last week to settle up 
accounts. This will give Mr. S. and me another taste of baching, 
which, I confess, is not very inspiring in my present condition. 

We are still at sea, not knowing which way to turn next, in regard 
to building a new station. The Government is so slow. Affairs of 
State move slowly. But it is not all clouds. There are bright mo- 
ments. The natives are still coming, confessing their sins and asking 
to be enrolled with those who are seeking the Light. In our new 
clearing we have planted corn, peanuts, plantains, etc. We are eating 
roasting ears, onions, beans and radishes. These things help out 
wonderfully... 

If our depleted force keeps on getting smaller and sicker, I may 
not be able to get away when I had planned, i. e. July. I simply can 
not tell. May God bless you all. 


PLANS FOR HOME-GOING. 


May 23, 1901. 

My Dear Parents:—Mail arrived yesterday—a good mail, except 
that there was no word from home. I am writing this note tonight to 
ask you to tell the editors of the Imprint and the Gazette that they 
need not send their papers to Africa any more for the present. I 
am not sure, but I think I will leave Batanga on the Royal Mail 
steamer Sobo, which will leave about the 5th of August. This will put 
me in Liverpool, England, about the 5th of September. 


Possibly I may reach New York by the middle of September. 
Further than that I have no plans, but I will doubtless be delayed in 
New York and Montclair several days at least. Then, I have received 
a letter from one of the “host of cousins” in the Cumberland Valley, 
urging a visit, and I would like to visit them. Just when, I do not 
know. I would like to get to see you about as soon as the steamer 
arrives in New York. If you have any suggestions send them to 
Liverpool. I will very likely make a visit east during my year at 
home, for Montclair has a strong claim on me. Possibly I can visit 
the cousins then. Then the route from New York to Iowa is lined 
with friends whom I would like to see. I will inform you later of my 
plans. This was to be a note, but it is growing into a letter. No 
definite word about the transfer of Elat to the Government yet. We 
are still waiting. I have had a touch of bronchitis but am better. 


260 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


June 1, 1901. 

Dear Brother Reed, and Members of Trinity Church:—When f 
last wrote you I think it was my plan to be with you by this time, 
but we cannot always do as we plan. I am still here and it is just 
possible that the way will not be open for me to reach the home-land 
this year, and if the Lord thus shuts the way I am quite content 
to remain, for He knows what is best. Dr. and Mrs. Lippert left here. 
on April 3rd, and it was not at all certain that the doctor would re- 
turn. At this writing I do not know whether he will or not. In the 
mean time Mrs. Dager thas been very sick and she was taken to Lolo- 
dorf for medical treatment, and reports so far are not at all encour- 
aging. It is more than possible that she will need a change worse 
than I will. At present Mr. Salveter, of Lolodorf station, and I are 
keeping bachelor hall at Elat. Should Dr. Lippert not return it would 
not be best for me to go, even if Mrs. Dager should get well. And 
even if the Doctor returns to us, it is not yet clear to me that I should 
leave, at least till Mr. Fraser gets here, which will probably not be 
till sometime in September, and that would be so late that it would 
make my going home dangerous on account of the sudden change to 
cold weather. I cannot say anything definite at present. Before Mrs. 
Dager took sick I planned to leave here on the August steamer, and I 
sincerely hope that it will be possible for me to leave then, for I real- 
ize that I need a change. I have been warned by five physicians and 
nearly all my fellow workers that I ought to get out of here this year, 
and I have not unheeded the warning. I have wanted to go, but, 
it would be fleeing from duty because of apparent danger to my health, 
or life, which I cannot do. The fact that the force on this field is in- 
adequate to the need is surely apparent. Miss Christenson has been 
nearly a year alone at Benito. Mr. Johnston is alone at Efulen. Mrs. 
Lehman and Mrs. Dager are both sick at Lolodorf. The missionaries 
are at their wits end to know how to distribute the remnants in order 
to keep the stations all open. Come over into Africa and help us fight 
the Lord’s battles. Don’t let the banners fall. Fill up the broken 
ranks and let us go forward and possess the land for our King. 


I am greatly indebted to the members of Trinity for the many 
kind letters which they have written to me. Please accept my thanks 
and kindest greetings, one and all. I am always greatly encouraged 
by these letters, and am sorry that I cannot answer each one person- 
ally. I have not written much lately, thinking all the time that I 
would soon see you face to face. 

We are still waiting for a reply from the German Government re- 
garding our property here but expect it every day, so it has been a 
continual disappointment, day after day, for three months. We know 
by bitter experience that hope deferred maketh the heart sick. On 
the material side of the station work, our hands are tied at present, 


“THE BELOVED.” 261 


but the German Government cannot stop the Spirit from working on 
the hearts of these people, and here is where we get great encour- 
agement. 


June 3, 1901. 

My Dear Parents:—Fast mail will leave in the morning. A man 
has promised to get our mail to the coast in four days. If he does he 
will have to go about thirty-seven miles per day. This was done 
once and another young man wants to break the record. We now have 
a new mail bag. It is a regular canvas mail bag like some used at 
home, with a Yale lock on with six keys. This bag is put inside a 
rubber bag, and we now hope our mail will come in better condition. 

Mr. Devor, our Mission treasurer, has been with us a week. Elat 
accounts are all right. Mrs. Dager still sick. Mr. Salveter and I still 
baching. 

Although I may leave in August, I simply cannot tell yet. Don’t 
expect me until you hear from me at Liverpool or New York. 

For some reason, since I have gone to baching again I have gained 
six or seven pounds. This is encouraging should I have to stay until 
next spring. 


HOME-GOING CERTAIN. 


July 1, 1901 

My Dear Parents:—Our “fast mail” is a success. A boy carried our 
new mail bag, weighing in all twenty pounds, from Batanga to Elat 
in four days, averaging thirty-seven miles a day. The same boy will 
leave this morning with mail. 

You will be disappointed when I tell you that the chances of my 
getting home this year are slim. No re-inforcements have arrived 
and I simply cannot leave when there are so few workers on the field, 
especially if I do not feel worse than I do now. Should I get sick 
again before my twenty days are up, (for I have twenty days yet in 
which to decide), I might go on the August steamer. Otherwise I 
will perhaps stay over until next year. You will be rejoiced to know 
that I am gaining in flesh. I now weigh 145 pounds. This encourages 
me very much. Mrs. Dager is some better and Mr. Dager has left her 
at Lolodorf and has come over to help us out at Hlat. The missionary 
spirit of these two workers is worthy of praise. They are here to stay 
unless something very serious happens, and are willing to endure a 
great deal for the sake of the work. Mr. Dager came away from his 
wife when she was still needing his care, in order to let me get away 


262 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


as I had been planning. We have not yet received word as to what toe 
do in regard to rebuilding our station. We are still waiting but we are 
getting ready for a rapid move in the meantime. I think you wil 
understand my position. We are expecting word any day that we must 
move our station, and there are but three of us here. Should I leave, 
Mr. Salveter and Mr. Dager would be left with all that work, and Mr. 
Dager ought to be with his sick wife. So while you will be disap- 
pointed if I do not get home, yet you would not have me flee from 
my duty. 7 

I went out to a town some ten miles away the other day and held 
three meetings and there were twenty who came to confess their sins, 
and say they wanted to be followers of Christ. I took their names 
as “inquirers” and they will be instructed with the class. The roll of 
“jnquirers” has reached the number of 290, and their instruction and 
care adds no little burden to the work. Don’t look for me till you hear 
of me in New York. 


FOR JESUS’ SAKE. 


Osom is a young man of the Ndong tribe who live about thirty 
minutes’ walk east of Elat station. He used to be a faithful attendant 
at services at the station. That faithfulness has been the means of 
his imbibing the truths which have been preached, and on Christmas 
Day, 1899, he came out with about a dozen others and confessed faith 
in Jesus Christ. But long before this confession he had been trying 
to live the Christ life, and his people made great sport of him. He 
used to pray and they would throw things at him. When he would shut 
his eyes to ask the blessing before eating they would steal his food. 
When he tries to tell the people of his town about God they curse and 
swear at him. His brothers admit that he does not swear back at them 
or fight as he used to do. So, knowing that he will not get mad and 
abuse them, they take advantage of him. The chiefs of his town say 
that if anyone dies he must pay for that death because he brings this 
new kind of medicine into town to kill people. During the war the 
people were running to the bush to escape the soldiers. They stopped 
in their fight to consult as to the best place to go. One young man 
suggested a town near by, by the name of Ntyili. Osom said no, for 
he heard that the soldiers were to go to that place to fight. The first 
speaker cursed Osom for opposing his view, and when Osom did not 
curse back he picked up a stick and hit Osom over the head. The blow 
was very painful and the blood ran down on his coat from the wound, 
but he did not say or do anything. Those blood stains can still be 
seen on his little coat as a witness to his faithfulness. 

But worse things were in store for him. The Bulu idea of a man, 


“THE BELOVED.” 263: 


a real man, is that he must marry many wives. Osom, of course, said 
he would marry but one. Some of his people said that by becoming a. 
Christian he lost his manhood. He was no longer a real man and was 
not deserving of a wife at all, so they planned to take away the one 
wife he had, as well as his little baby boy. They called a meeting- 
and talked it over and a big chief “cut” the palaver, saying Osom 
must give her back to the man who had her when Osom married her, 
for, they said, he had not paid enough goods on her. This palaver 
was talked about thirty minutes’ walk east of where Osom lives. When. 
he heard that they were going to take his wife away he broke away 
from the crowd and ran for his town with all his might to warn her. 
about it. When within calling distance he called to her and told her- 
to flee to the Mission. She picked up her baby and ran as fast as she 
could to the station and hid in one of our outhouses. After a while- 
Osom came puffing up with tears-in his eyes, and, as he tried to catch 
his breath, told his story. We showed them a house where they might 
stay unmolested, and then went and informed the officer in charge of 
the Government station. He told us to tell the young man to appear 
the next day, but in the meantime the chief who judged the matter,, 
and another man came to the officer with the same trouble, wanting, 
of course, the officer to make Osom give the woman up. The trial was 
set for next day. Osom prayed much that night, and so did we for him. 
We also wrote a letter to the officer stating what we knew of the 
ease. After hearing both sides the officer was quite indignant at the- 
unjust way in which the affair was judged. He flogged the man who 
wanted the woman back, and the chief who judged the palaver against 
Osom. He told Osom to pay three more goats and the woman would 
be his under the protection of the government. Osom had already 
paid eight goats, one gun, eight neptunes, worth 50 cents each, and 
thirty-two yards of cloth fer his wife. This is not as much as most 
men pay for their wives. The price varies according to the beauty of 
the woman. Sometimes four or five times the above amount is paid. 
Osom was the happiest man in Bululand when he returned to the 
Mission after the trial. He was given fourteen days in which to hunt. 
the three goats, and he started out the next day. He found one and 
took it to the officer and went to hunt for more. He hunted and 
hunted. He tried to buy but no one would sell. Goats were scarce. 
Five days were left and no prospect of finding the two goats. The days: 
were wearing and so was the smile on Osom’s face. It was getting 
serious. One day was left and Osom came home with an anxious: 
face and said he could not find the goats and he feared his wife- 
would be taken away yet. We had a few goats at the station and 
we told him to put up enough goods to pay for two goats and leave 
them as a pledge and we would help him out. So he took the goats and 
paid the amount specified and the woman is his. Nearly two months 


264 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


have passed and he is still hunting goats, but he is now in milder 
hands than before. 

The days of persecution are not over. Neither are the days past 
In which God takes care of His own. 


HOME-GOING DELAYED. 


July 22, 1901 


My Dear Parents:—Mail. leaves today which will catch the 
steamer I had planned to go home on. I am sorry to disappoint you 
by not going myself, but I feel that it is my duty to stay a while longer. 
After a long wait of fourteen months can at last see the end near. 
‘We can now begin to work with something definite in view. Yesterday 
as I was going out to the town, I met Lieutenant Larsh coming to the 
Mission with papers from the-Government in regard to the purchase 
of our property. If I understood his broken English he was coming 
to make the final agreement in regard to the transfer. I told him we 
do not do such work on the Sabbath day but would meet him any time 
after 6 o’clock Monday morning. He set the time at 8 o’clock and at 
that time we will know what we are to do. It is now 6 A. M. and I 
want to have this letter ready before going to the Government station. 
I will add a few words after we get back to tell you what was done. 


I am glad now that I did not attempt to go on the August steamer 
for now will be the busiest time we have had. I am feeling quite well 
and think I can stand it until next March, perhaps. Mr. and Mrs. 
Dager returned last Thursday and Mrs. Dager is ‘much improved. 
Dr. Lippert is expected to reach us within a week. Mr. Salveter is 
still ‘here but will likely go back to Lolodorf to help there with the 
work soon. We are greatly rejoiced to know that we will not have to 
wait much longer. This wait has been galling, and yet it may be just 
the thing we needed. The new location has been worked one season 
and we do not know how much malaria has been burned out of the 
soil in that time. Had we gone over there last May as we thought at 
first, possibly the malaria would have given us much trouble. We do 
not know. But this we do know, “All things work together for good 
to them that love God.” 

We have nearly all the material ready for the new house and it 
will not take very long to build it and move over. We have been 
having our peanuts dug. So far they have turned out about forty 
bushels. 

9:30 A. M. We have just returned from the Government station 
and have signed the agreement to sell Elat to the Government for the 
sum of $5,095.00. We are to be off by the 15th of October. 


“THE BELOVED.” ait oe 265 


STRENUOUS DAYS. 


August 14, 1901. 

Dear Bro. Reed:—Elat workers have never been more rushed with 
hard work than at the present time. At the founding of the station 
we had all the time we needed for building the necessary buildings, 
but now we must be through and move in a certain time. I think I 
wrote to one of your members that the long delay has been broken. 
The German Government has finally promised to pay the sum we 
asked for the old location and we are to be off by the 15th of October. 
At present our working force is as follows: Rev. and Mrs. Dager, Mr. 
Salveter, and myself. Dr. Lippert came back, but he was asked to go 
to Lolodorf for a time. Mr. Fraser is expected in a few weeks. Mr. 
and Mrs. Dager are both sick and I am very glad I did not go in 
August as I had planned. I am feeling as well as can be expected 
under the circumstances. I am frank to admit that it is not the best. 
But we are so taken up with the work that we do not have time to 
think about how we feel, or time to write, so please do not expect 
much for a time. We want to get settled in our new home. We are 
working under high pressure. There are on an average 100 men work- 
ing every day and it takes some care and patience to direct them 
and look after and feed them. We have finished a kitchen, (which is 
built separate from the main house), and one of us will sleep in it till 
the house is built. The other two have to walk thirty minutes every 
morning and evening. The new place is rapidly taking on shape and 
yeauty, and will make a fine station, we think. 


August 19, 1901. 

My Dear Father and Mother:—I am now writing at the new sta- 
tion. We have completed the kitchen, which is separate from the 
house, and Mr. Salveter and I are living in it so as to be handy to the 
work. We are getting along first rate. There are over a hundred men 
working at the station. One day there were 120, and others out getting 
material. We have the frame of the new home all up and expect to 
thave the roof on in three days. We can finish a part of it and move 
over, we think, inside of three weeks from now. Mr. Dager has been 
sick and Dr. Lippert is over from Lolodorf. We expect Mr. Fraser in 
a few weeks, and we will be glad to see him. It is work ,work, work, 
from daylight to dark six days in the week, and Sabbath services on 
Sunday. 


HOMEWARD BOUND. 


Batanga, September 25, 1901. 
Dear Bro. Reed:—I am at last about to start home. I left Elat 
September 12, and arrived at Batanga the 19th. Expect the steamer 


266 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


any day now, but do not know on what date she is due in Liverpool. 
Will reach New York somewhere between the middle and last of 
November. I am feeling better than when I left Elat. The first day 
out from Elat I feared I would not reach the coast, but kept improving 
all the way, and now almost feel like returning and going to work 
again. Hoping to see you soon after you get this note will close. 


S. S. Olenda, Near Plymouth, England, November 2, 1901. 

My Dear Parents:—It will be five weeks tomorrow since I got on 
this vessel. We have had a long, tiresome voyage and a good deal of 
rough sea. Between Sierra Leone and the Canary Islands I had a 
fever, but am feeling quite well now. We expect to get to Liverpool 
Monday morning and I will take the Wednesday’s boat for New York 
November 6th, arriving at New York about the 13th, I presume. Hop- 
ing this note will get across before I do, I say good-bye for a few 
days. Watch arrival of boats in the daily paper. ‘White Star” Line, 
either the Teutonic, Majestic, Oceanic, or Celtic. I do not know 
which boat leaves next Wednesday. I feel the cold very much. 


AT HOME. 


Crawfordsville, Iowa, November 25; 190T. 

Dear Mr. Reed:—I am with my Father and Mother and have seen 
all my brothers and most of my relatives, and you may know that it 
has been a joyful meeting. I arrived here at 10 A. M. Saturday, feeling 
first rate but the excitement was too much for me. At 12, while we 
were meeting around our first table together, I took a chill and at 
1:30 had a temperature of 103. The fever soon passed off, however, 
and I had a good night. Sabbath morning I was very sick again. I 
am feeling much better today and am very hopeful for a gradual 
recovery of my old time strength. I was very sick on the train Friday 
morning, also, and did not sleep that night, so I was just worn out 
when I reached home. I am under the care of a good physician and 
am in good hands in my own home—and there is no place like it. 
Have three or four calls to speak already, but I am going to refuse 
all for a while, and rest and get strong. I do not believe anyone 
knows how weak I am but myself, for my looks are deceiving. 

I found my parents and friends all well, and the weather is de- 
lightful. I am going to have a good time resting and try to lead 
some young people into a deeper interest in missions while I am at it. 

I hope you are free from the sickness which was wearing you alf 
out while I was there. My regards to Mrs. Reed, and to each and all 
of your children, and to all the Trinity people. TF would still like te 


“THE BELOVED.” 267 


hear from you. Will not Elizabeth write to me, and tell me how her 
dolly behaves in her African chair. 


Crawfordsville, Iowa, December 11, 1901. 

Dear Mr. Reed:—I have been looking for my boxes every day, but 
they have not put in their appearance yet so I thought I better write 
you and see if they have been started or if they are lost. I am getting 
a little anxious lest something has happened to them. I want to 
know, also, how you are all getting along. Is the diphtheria still in 
your midst, or are you free from it and all out again? 

We have been having beautiful weather out here in Iowa. There 
is snow on the ground now, but it has not been here long and we think 
it will not stay long for itis too warm. I am getting along well. Have 
had no trouble to speak of since the first few days at home. They 
say I am getting fat and am looking much better. I was tickled the 
other day when a lady told me a remark she heard the day I got off 
the train. It was this, “Well, it is easy seeing why that missionary 
came home. He is too poor for the Africans to eat.” I have not done 
any speaking yet and do not intend to for some time, if I can help it. 
There is some hard pressure brought to bear upon me but I have not 
yielded yet. I am enjoying my home and friends, but I long to get 
back among the Africans and get to work. I am doing nothing here, 
it seems, although I am busy all the time. 

Please remember me to all, and accept my best wishes for your- 
self and family. 


Germantown, Pa., June 6, 1902. 
Dear Mr. Reed:—Miss Kirby cannot come to the Conference, so 
I am going west soon unless you (or Dr. A. W. Halsey) have some 
good reason for my staying. If you wish me for any reason please 
write me not later than Monday (or send telegram) to Mr. Kerr’s, 
50 Southhampton Avenue, Chestnut Hill, Philadelphia, Pa. Will ex- 
plain later. Please keep my secret yet awhile. 


Crawfordsville, Iowa, July 7. 1902. 

Dear Bro. Reed:—I am a guilty man for not writing you sooner. 
I am at home at last. Had a very fine visit but it was hard on me. 
Up early and up late, changing beds, food and water, and then being 
on “company manners” all the time were all hard on me, besides the 
constant speaking. ‘Well, now, Mr. McCleary, I think it quite provi- 
dential that you happened along just at this time. I am not feeling 
very well. Won’t you take the services tomorrow?’ So it went. I 


268 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


spoke twice every Sabbath save one. But it is all right. I am at home 
and feeling as good, if not better, than at any time since I came. 

Miss Kirby is not very well just now. You know she was to at- 
tend the Conference, but had to give it up. She thinks she will be all 
right soon. Her parents are bitterly opposed to her going, which 
makes it so much harder for her. 

Just received $70.20 for a donkey. I have written the “Donkey 
Circle” thanking them. This was a surprise. They raised it so quick- 
iy. They beat the “Shot gun boys” badly. I hope it will do good in 
the school as well as in Africa. 

I hope you are all having a good, restful time out on the farm. 
I send a few stamps for the boys and my love to all. 


Winona Lake, Indiana, August 2, 1902. 

Dear Bro. Reed:—I do not remember whether I owe you a letter 
or not. Anyway, I will write. Miss Kirby and I are attending a Bible 
Conference here and are having a royal feast of Spiritual things. You 
may announce the plan I have of taking some one back to Africa with 
me. It is in all the local papers around our home. If God will, we 
will sail November 15th, although we are not absolutely sure. We 
expect to be “tied up” about October ist and start east about Novem- 
ber ist, so we can have time for a little visit, and some necessary 
shopping. We are neither of us as well as we would like to be, but 
hope that the remaining months and the journey out will suffice to 
make us well and ready for the work. 

I have not been speaking much lately. Have attended a Chautau- 
qua at Columbus Junction, Iowa, which I enjoyed very much. This 
Conference is a treat, indeed. Winona is a delightful place. There 
are something like 3,500 people here now. Someone says there are 
1,500 ministers here. May God help us all to improve the advantages 
here given on this mount of privilege. I trust you are all well. Re- 
gards to all. 


Mrs. C. W. McCleary. 


BACK TO AFRICA WITH MRS. McCLEARY. 


Liverpool, January 15, 1903. 

Dear Mr. Amerman:—We are settled on terra firma once more 
and I am very glad. The first part of the voyage was quite pleasant. 
By Sabbath day we had our sea legs on and Monday morning we felt 
first class, but in the afternoon the sea began to get rough and Tues- 
day we were in a storm all day. Oh, my! We were both very sick, 
and were not up much that day. We thought of that song, “Oh, Mr. 
Captain, stop the ship; I want to get out and walk; I feel so fliperty 
floperty flip, I can never reach New York.” How glad we were to see 
land on Wednesday. The Emerald Isle looked so green and fresh, 
(I like an Irishman) it made us think of “Irish stew.” We arrived at 
Queenstown at about 5:00 P. M. Wednesday, and we reached Liverpool 
at 9:30 today. A man sent by our agent here, met us and took charge 
of our baggage, so not one trunk or package had to be opened for 
examination. We are stopping at a peculiar hotel. The prices are the 
only big things about it except the butler’s feet. Tallow candles and 
open grates are still used, and oh, it is cold. But we are enjoying 
it and our stomachs are at peace. We did more shopping today than 
we did in two days in New York. We found a real live Englishman, 
who hustled like a Yank, and he had nearly everything we wanted. 


When you get our cable message will you please “drop” a line to 
our parents, i. e., J. H. McCleary, Crawfordsville, Iowa, and Mrs. J. 
M. Kirby, Fairfield, Iowa. I hope you are all as happy as we are. With 
kindest regards to all from both of us. 


S. S. Oron, Off Morocco Coast, January 23, 1903. 
Dear Mr. Reed:—I wrote Mr. Amerman at Liverpool as to our 

journey that far. I will write you a note and mail it at Teneriffe. 
We were landed at Liverpool at 9:30, January 15th, nearly a day 
late. It was very chilly—a penetrating cold, and we did not get warm 
while in Liverpool. There were no fires in any of the shops or stores, 
and nothing but small grates in our hotel. But we got through our 
shopping and onto the steamer all right on Saturday, at 10:30. The 
voyage has been very pleasant so far. We had a little rough sea for 
two days, but now it is smooth and we are enjoying it exceedingly. 
There are five other missionaries of other denominations on board. 
There are about sixty passengers and a good class, too, for the west 
coast. There are German and English officers going out to settle a 


270 CHARLES W. McCLHARY. 


boundary dispute. We have all kinds of games, music and books, and 
good company. Everything is lovely. 


. January 24, 10:00 A. M. 1903. 

Land in sight. We expect to reach Teneriffe this afternoon. We 
are in a little doubt just now as to whether the captain will stop at 
Batanga going out. Through an oversight our names were put on the 
list for Rio Del Ray, and so the order was given to the captain to 
sail from Kamerun direct to the southernmost port on their journey 
and to stop at Batanga returning. Our tickets call for Batanga, how- 
ever. Just what will be done I cannot say now. We are planning to 
buy the donkey, and risk getting to Batanga somehow. The captain 
says, “Yes, get the donkey and we will see what we can do.” Now, they 
may put us off at Kamerun and send us on by a German steamer, or 
they may put us off at night. This latter I do not like. But we do not 
want to go all the way south with the boat, for it will take three 
weeks extra. But we have faith that all will be well in the end and we 
are not worrying. 

Regards to all and Christian love from both. 


TEDDY. 


S. S. Oron, January 28, 1903. - 

Dear Mr. Amerman:—Friday we expect to reach Sierra Leone 
and we will have another chance to send letters back. We are now 
in a warm country. It will soon be hot. We are having a very smooth 
sea and the vessel is moving on about as smoothly as a Hoboken 
ferry boat. We are feeling fairly well. I never am well on the ocean. 
But there is nothing to complain of. We went ashore on Teneriffe, 
and Mrs. McCleary went to see the sights while I created one. I 
spotted the first man I saw with a donkey and asked him if he wanted 
to sell it. He was a Spaniard and could not understand me. We 
made some great gestures at each other but gained nothing. Soon a 
crowd began to collect and I shifted to another place. They all fol- 
lowed. Other donkeys came up and more people. After some time a 
man came who could talk English, and so I had an interpreter. Don- 
keys and human beings sprang from the ground and in fifteen minutes 
there were at least seventy people around me. Men, women and chil- 
dren, soldiers, policemen and dogs, all wanting to see the fun. 

It was hard to select a suitable one, and the owners were such 
liars that I was afraid to even trust myself. The purser of the ship 
and the agent of the company came to my assistance at last, and I 
succeeded in buying the much talked of donkey. They put the price 


“THE BELOVED.” 271 


up, for they knew my time was limited. I paid about $30.00. The 
freight is $20.00, and counting feed and loading, etc., he has now cost 
me about $60.00. It is outrageous the way they charge for such things. 
Human beings are the same everywhere. When a man is down they 
tramp him. When a man is in a corner advantage is taken of his 
necessity. The donkey stands the voyage splendidly. I hope he will 
go through all right, and that he will be useful. Mrs. McCleary thinks 
“Teddy” would be a good name for him because, she says, he looks 
like a “rough rider.” He has the customary long ears and I suspect 
that he can bray, although I have not heard him yet. We are going 
to have a concert tonight. I tried to get him on the program, but 
they objected. Mrs. McCleary suggested that I sing instead. 

The value of a donkey in our inland work among the Bulu has 
been demonstrated by the trial of two. They are especially adapted 
to the ladies. They save the expense of hammock men, for without 
the donkey, from four to six men are required to carry one lady. 

The value of one of these faithful little animals to our work was 
suggested at Trinity church last summer, and the girls of the Sabbath 
school decided that they would like to furnish their foreign pastor 
with the necessary funds for securing one. 

It was interesting to see Teddy come on board. He did not come 
up the ladder like other passengers, but must have an elevator suitable 
for gentlemen of his class. A canvass sling was put under him and 
the great iron crane was used in hoisting him up. How he did kick 
as he dangled in mid air, but to no advantage. He looked quite as- 
tonished as his feet struck the deck. A favored lad! How few of his 
brethren have the honor of a sea voyage. Mrs. McCleary named him 
“Teddy” because, she says, he looks like a “rough rider.” Long live 
Teddy, and may he do credit to his tribe. 


IN AFRICA AGAIN. 


Lolodorf, February 27, 1903. 

My Dear Parents:—We left Batanga on Monday morning, each rid- 
ing a donkey. We had no rain on the journey. Part of the way it 
was very hot, but most of it was through the forest and very pleasant. 
We had a tent along and used it two nights. We traveled 3114 miles 
in four days. We were very tired when we reached Lolodorf, but were 
s0 warmly received by Rev. Dager, and Dr. and Mrs. Lehman, and 
baby Elizabeth, that we felt better soon. We expect to rest here till 
Monday and then go on to our station, fifty-five miles further. You 
will note that we have taken the northern route. You will notice, 
also, that the distance is shorter than it used to be. The road has 
been straightened and this much has been cut off. Dr. and Mrs. Leh- 
man, Rey. Dager, and Dr. Lippert all go home in April. That will 
leave no one at Lolodorf, three at Elat, (after June, when Mr. Salveter 
leaves), and four at Efulen. You see how our interior force is 
dwindling down. 

We have just heard from Elat that there are 371 boys at school. 
I do not see how we can care for them. Oh, but we need help. On 
the way up we met a caravan of 150 natives. Some of them knew me. 
When they knew that I was a missionary, and not a trader, or Gov- 
ernment official, a crowd gathered around me and begged me to get 
off and talk to them about God. They followed at least a quarter of 
a mile, asking us to sing to them, which we did as we rode away. 
Myrtie sends her love with mine. Good wishes for all, and may God’s 
blessing be upon you. 


Elat, March 11, 1903. 

My Dear Parents:—Our last letter home was from Lolodorf. At 
Lolodorf we left Dr. Lehman’s donkey and came on with Teddy. We 
left there March 2d, slept two nights on the way and reached Elat 
March 4th at noon. Dr. Lippert met us some five miles away with 
two ponies, so I rode from there in. We had a splendid journey and 
got here all right. There was no rain on the trip. Roads are good 
for Africa. 


RECEPTION AT ELAT. 


I wish you could have seen the reception at Elat. Dr. Lippert 
took the lead on his pony, I came next on another pony bor- 
rowed for the occasion, and Myrtie came last on Teddy. About a quar- 
ter of a mile from the station the school boys met us. There were near 


“THE BELOVED.” 273 


400 in the crowd, counting outsiders. They gathered around us like 
a2 swarm of bees, shouting and laughing. Mr. Salveter and Mr. Fraser 
came also, after having fired a salute, and we were all marched up 
together to the house. The three bachelors were getting along all 
right and the work was booming. Part of the house I helped to start 
just before I went home was vacated for us. Mr. Fraser and Dr. Lip- 
pert are in other parts of it yet, but Doctor will be starting home 
next week and when “bachelor’s hall’ is completed we will have the 
whole house of four rooms, three closets and a pantry all to ourselves. 
Just when that will be I cannot tell. But we are well situated as it 
is. The new site of Elat is beautiful. I wish you might have a walk 
over the place and see it. We are not bothered with little hills and 
rocks as at the other place. We have good soil and plenty of it. IE 
will have charge of the work outside and after I get the run of it 
again I will write about it. 

On the 10th I had a touch of fever, but was out in twenty hours. 
It was due to drinking water from streams on the journey, perhaps. 
Doctor gave me forty grains of quinine and I hope the fever will not 
appear soon. Dr. Lippert leaves for America on March 18th. That 
will leave us without a physician, but we trust that we will not need 
one after he leaves. Do you know that Myrtie is the only white woman 
within three days journey (about sixty miles)? She does not seem 
to notice it much yet. 

We have taken charge of the culinary department. Messrs. Fraser 
and Salveter will eat with us. We took over all the live stock, and 
you will be surprised to know of the stock we own, viz: Sixty chick- 
ens, twelve goats, six sheep, two eats, a donkey, and I have bought Dr. 
Lippert’s pony. She is a horse from the interior, raised by the Mo— 
hammedans. The stock was probably brought from the Soudan, and 
possibly in former years from Egypt or Arabia. The pony is a “goer,” 
full of life, yet she is very gentle. The Doctor claims to have ridden 
her six miles in thirty-five minutes. I intend to use her in riding 
over the place directing the boys at work and in itinerating from 
town to town. We are talking of getting some cows from up near 
Lake Chad. The Germans are sending for some and we can get them 
quite cheap. If they will give milk what a boon it will be for us. E 
am willing to risk a little money on a test, at least. 


274 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


McCLEARY AS A DOCTOR. 


March 27, 1903. 

Our mail has been delayed but will probably reach you as soon 
as it would had it left here earlier. Dr. Lippert is gone and I have the 
position of “doctor.” I will write it “Q. D.” instead of M. D. “Q. D.” 
Means “quack doctor.” But the Bulu have about as much confidence 
in one man as another, even though one may know a great deal more 
than the other. They come to me with all sorts of diseases. I have 
had about forty patients in the ten days I have had charge of the work. 
The school is the largest we have ever had; something like 400 alto- 
gether, men, women, boys and girls all attending. The usual Sabbath 
congregation is about 500. The church or chapel is not completed. 
The roof is on and there are logs for seats, but it is as good as the 
Bulu are used to as it is. We expect to get it seated soon. Our pony 
stepped in a hole when Dr. Lippert rode her last, and fell, hurting her 
leg so I am not able to use her now. She will soon be well. Dr. Lip- 
pert took Teddy with him to the coast. 


I have asked the officials to bring down ten cows from the interior 
when they bring their’s down. They will not be here for five or six 
months. About 100 of the boys went on a strike day before yesterday, 
refusing to work. Result: Five of the leaders in the affair were 
whipped, and all who struck were given no food for a whole day. It 
was just a family jar. We have not yet heard from you since leaving 
Liverpool. Rey. Cotton’s letter received, however, and in it he men- 
tioned the fact that Mary’s arm was broken. We were very sorry to 
hear this sad news. We know none of the particulars. I hope she is 
well ere this. We are well and very happy, as well as very busy. Love 
to all. Myrtie is writing also. 


March 12, 1903. 

Dear Mr. Amerman:—Teddy is all right. He carried Mrs. Mc- 
Cleary up to Elat in seven days, having a few days rest at Lolodorf. 
Then I gave him a good test the other day. I rode him twelve miles 
after 3:30 P. M. That is not very fast, but for a short legged donkey 
it will do. 

Now for a little favor. The baby organ is here, but looks some 
the worse for not having anyone to play on it or look after it. We 
found one reed broken, and I send it to you asking you to get a new 
one if you can. The things provided by the good people of Trinity 
have come into good use. We are just beginning to get straightened 
out. Have not played ping pong yet, but we are planning to soon, a 
suitable table being the only thing wanted. Mrs. McCleary joins in 
sending kindest regards to all. 


at 


“THE BELOVED.” 275 


March 27, 1903. 

Dear Mr. Reed:—Mail will be sent to the coast tomorrow and I - 
will send you a note. Dr. Lippert, Dr. and Mrs. Lehman and Rev. 
W. M. Dager all sail for America April 5th. We thus have to close 
Lolodorf. Elat is without a physician. Mr. Salveter will be removed 
to the south part of the field about June. That will leave Elat with 
Mr. Fraser and Mrs. McCleary and me. I do not see how we will get 
along. We have a school of about 400. About 200 work in the after- 
noon and must be shown where and how. The buildings are not 
completed. The medical work has fallen on my shoulders. The Sab- 
bath services are well attended, averaging about 500. We need help. 


May 19, 1903. 

Dear Mr. Amerman:—Your letter to me, and Mrs. Amerman’s 
letter to Mrs. McCleary were received last mail. We were exceedingly 
rejoiced to get them. They were like water to a thirsty man in the 
desert. Do you know that Mrs. McCleary is the only white woman 
within sixty miles, or a three days’ journey? A letter from a sympa- 
thetic friend is much appreciated. I have become hardened and do not 
emiss society and civilization so much. Then, too, I know the lan- 
guage and can enter into conversation with the natives around me. 
You can hardly imagine Mrs. McCleary’s position. She goes to church, 
but does not understand a word. She sees plenty of people, but cannot 
talk with them. You may know that her thoughts must turn inward 
and homeward. But she has been very brave hearted and she is en- 
tering into the work. I tell you these things to solicit letters on the 
part of the ladies, and also to let you know that she is getting along 
all right. 


THE COLLECTION. 


I must tell you about our last communion service. It was unique. 
The church was organized last October with six members. Two more 
were added the first Sabbath in May. You may wonder where all 
those inquirers I told you about are. Well, they are still in train- 
ing. On communion day the eight members took a front seat and 
the chapel filled up to overflowing. The building is open on three 
sides, and when the seats are all taken, they can collect on the out- 
side, and stand or sit on the clean ground as they like. On this partic- 
ular day there were between 700 and 800 people out. After the sermon 
and distribution of the elements the collection was announced. It 
was then time to grab your hat and make sure of your footing for the 
stampede was on. These people do not as yet make much use of cash, 
so in the church collection we had to take such things as they kad to 
give. The basket was not passed around, for it was too large. It 


276 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


was placed on the platform and the donations were brought forward 
.-by the givers. Now, here they come. One old woman, covered with 
oil and redwood powder, has a chicken blind in one eye. In it goes. 
Next come two rolls of cassava, a boy with two white buttons, a 
little girl throws in a string of beads, more cassava, another chicken, 
two fish hooks, four yards of calico, a cutlass, a piece of brass wire, 
a china plate, a spool of thread, another button, a knife, a finger ring, 
etc., etc. We had to estimate the value of all these things and pay 
into the church treasury the cash equal to the goods brought. The 
collection amounted in cash to $7.00. Now, this means more than 
$7.00 in America. More than one person gave the wages of a whole 
week. This collection does not compare with the first one, in which 
there were forty chickens and other things in proportion. These col- 
lections are encouraging, in that they show the desire to give some- 
thing, however small, to the Lord. The attendance has been near 
500, sometimes more, hardly ever less, and I have had a class in Sun- 
day school which has reached 235. This is too large a class to handle, 
but there is no one to divide with. School closed on May 8th. This 
was the largest school we have ever had—about 400. Mr. Fraser had 
charge of it. I have had the boys to look after during work hours, 
and it was no small task. Last week I had an attack of dysentery 
but I am about well again. I will write the boys and girls about 
Teddy and the shot gun. Both have done good service. 


LETTERS CONCERNING DEATH OF 
McCLEARY. 


Elat, June 26, 1903. 
My Dear Mr. Reed: 

“There are times when writing is a difficult task and this is one 
of them. But I know that the people of Trinity church will wish to 
hear of the facts concerning Mr. McCleary’s death, so I will try to tell 
you of his last hours. First: he was never well after reaching Elat. 
Ten days after arriving he had the fever,, a few weeks after, an attack 
of dysentery, and lastly, inflammation of the stomach and bowels. The 
Doctor at this station left for America two weeks after we arrived, 
and Mr. McCleary assumed the medical work, which kept him busy 
night and day. In the month of May he treated more than one hun- 
dred cases, which would keep an amateur M. D. busy, as you know. 
He complained of being tired, but hardly ever stopped to rest. June 
the 7th, he had charge of the church services—singing, praying, teach- 
ing and preaching as usual, but the next morning he went to bed with 
fever. His temperature rose to 104 degrees and staid there till Wed- 


S first grave. 


7 


Elat 


“THE BELOVED.” 277 


nesday morning. The usual remedies were applied, but all efforts to 
allay it were fruitless. Hematuria set in and we dispatched a mes- 
senger for the doctor at Efulen—he was at the beach and did not arrive 
until a week later. In the meantime the fever went down, the hema- 
turia ceased and we hoped the worst was over, when he began to 
vomit his food. The medicine we gave him, even water, was rejected 
and he suffered from thirst and the inward fever until he was almost 
delirious with pain. Three times we changed the medicine and suc- 
ceeded in allaying the pain for a short time, but as it came on again 
at each time it grew worse, and his suffering was so intense that his 
face assumed an unnatural appearance. He could not suppress his 
moans, but he uttered no word of complaint or anxiety. When the 
Doctor arrived we hoped he might restore him to us, but all he could 
do was to give him morphine to ease him, and on Saturday evening, 
June 20, at 8 o’clock, he breathed his last. When he realized that the 
end was near, he said he was very sorry, for he wished to do more for 
these people, but he was not afraid to go. Between the intervals of 
pain he bade us all good-bye and left messages for each one. As the 
last dose of morphine was administered, he said, ‘Dear Father, I am 
ready, come and take me,” and the Father answered his prayer. His 
suffering was so intense that he prayed constantly for release, and the 
last of many verses of scripture which he quoted was the last half of 
TI Timothy 1:12. 


He passed away quietly into the land where there is no pain— 
neither sorrow nor crying. We folded his hands, placed flowers in 
them and ferns on his pillow, and he looked so sweet and peaceful 
as he slept among the flowers in his white lined coffin, that we could 
but rejoice that his suffering was over. The funeral was very pretty and 
impressive—six boys whom he loved, dressed in white suits and 
black sashes, lifted the coffin so lovingly on their shoulders, and bore 
it down the path where two Sundays before he and I had gone to 
the church. During his twelve days’ illness, the natives stood in 
groups around the house, striving to suppress their sobs and begging 
to come in and see him. Now, they assembled in great numbers, to 
pay their respects to his memory. The Governor also called twice 
to see him, extended his sympathy to me, brought a large wreath of 
flowers and headed the procession on the way to the church. His 
under officers and the white traders came in a body and sat with us 
on the rostrum during the service. They sang the hymns he had 
written, talked in Bulu and English, and prayed. Then the great 
crowd passed silently around and looked for the last time at the face 
of him who had laid down his life for them. In a secluded but beauti- 
ful spot, the first grave in the new burying ground was made, lined 
with white cloth and ferns, and there we laid him to rest. 


After the usual services at the grave, the Governor and his fol- 


278 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


lowers came forward and after a few words in German, they dis- 
tributed their three handfuls of earth upon the coffin according to the 
German custom. Slowly we retired and wended our way back to the 
lonely house—alone, and oh, so sad, but we felt that the beautiful 
palms which covered his coffin and grave were ‘palms of victory’ for 
Christ. My memory is still fresh with the last bright days spent in 
America at your home, and I hope you will not get discouraged nor 
shrink at this act of Providence. I know you will not. Pray more 
than ever and work harder if possible. I hope to go on in the work 
which he had begun. I am learning the language, and hope to be able: 
ere long to teach these people. I have not been ill and our three and 
one-half months here have been very busy, but exceedingly happy 
ones. Hand in hand we worked, prayed, and trusted, and while my 
heart is very sad and lonely, I recognize the Lord’s hand in it all, ané 
can say, ‘Not my will, O Father, but Thine be done.’ Everyone here 
has been so kind to me. 


Mr. Salveter and Mr. Fraser both, were very helpful and insisted 
on watching by him nights. The latter was not well and the strain 
brought on fever, so, when the doctor arrived to see Mr. McCleary 
he found him in bed also. He had hematuria, also, and a hard strug- 
gle for life. He was in bed the day of the funeral and the doctor 
has ordered him home. He is preparing to start for America by next 
steamer. Mrs. Johnston of Efulen came up to see me and they have 
decided I had better go down there until a doctor comes, or a man and 
wife. Mr. Salveter will be left alone to ‘hold the fort,’ so I have 
packed our goods again and will leave next Tuesday for Efulen. You 
cannot know how sad a task it was to break up the household, nor 
how desolate it now seems—everything is full of silent language 
which speaks of his departure. At first I felt I could not do it, but 
grace and strength came and I hope it will not be long before I can 
return and work here, as I feel he would wish me to. O, pray for 
Africa and the people here—pray continually, and remember me, for 
I feel very weak and helpless. One who stood by his death bed said, 
‘Sir, you have preached many sermons, but this is the greatest one 
you have ever preached to these people.’ And so, perhaps, his death 
may do more for the cause than his life would have, and we who 
knew him best will be better for the influence which his life has cast 
around us. 

Some time I will write you more concerning the work here, and 
I hope I may still retain an interest in your prayers and your work. 
Will you please tell me how many members and how many families 
are represented in Trinity church? Please remember me to the many 
friends who made my stay there so pleasant. May God bless and 
keep you as He has me since I last saw you, is the prayer of your 
Sorrowing charge.” MRS. C. W. McCLEARY. 


“THE BELOVED.” 279 


Elat, June 24, 1903. 
Mr. Jas. H. McCleary, Crawfordsville, Iowa. 


My Dear Mr. McCleary:—You doubtless have heard before this 
of your son’s death at 8 P. M. June 20th. I realize that at such & 
time words fail to give comfort, yet we wish to express our deep and 
heartfelt sympathy to yourself and family. Especially do our hearts: 
go out to his mother, whom Charles remembered to the last and to 
whom, although dying, he sent his last loving message. Never have 
I been so impressed by any death. Such implicit faith and trust 
in his Saviour, and willingness to go were expressed in his last 
words, “Come, dear Father, and take me home.” His sickness was. 
short and his pain not severe, although at times he was very un- 
comfortable and tired. 


His sickness began with fever and hematuria, but when it left 
his stomach and intestines in such a condition that nothing, either 
medicine or food, could be retained. I left Efulen at noon on Monday, 
and reached Elat at noon Wednesday, and found Mr. McCleary then 
very weak, and vomiting frequently. I succeeded in allaying the 
vomiting for a time and got him to resting much easier, but soon 
realized that God was calling him to his reward. His only regret 
was that he was to go home so soon. He said, “I wanted to do so 
much.” [I think I never met anyone more thoughtful and considerate 
of others. Even to the last he would ask frequently for Mr. Fraser, 
who was sick in the next room. All the afternoon before he died he 
slept, his breath becoming shorter and shorter, until he passed 
away. Mr. Salveter made a very nice casket, trimmed with black 
outside and white inside. 


For sevreral days the natives sat on the porch and in the yard, 
quietly awaiting the end. The many tears and hushed sobs showed 
their love and respect for Mr. McCleary. They realized that a true 
and sincere friend was being called from them. No one who was 
present at that funeral could doubt the value of the work done for 
these people at Elat. The church was full and many were sitting 
outside, yet a more quiet and orderly congregation could not have 
been found in America. The seed has been sown and even now the 
harvest is ripening. ‘ 

Mrs. McCleary has borne her grief bravely and nobly, always 
realizing that God doeth all things well. She will come to Efulen 
for a time, until a doctor and another woman can be sent here. 

You have given a noble and brave son to the Lord’s work, and may 
God’s richest blessing rest upon you at this time of grief. 

Sincerely, your friend, 
R. M. JOHNSTON, M. D. 


280 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


: Elat, June 23, 1903. 
Mr. and Mrs. J. H. McCleary and family, 

Dear Friends:—It is with a heavy heart that I try to write these 
few lines at this time. We all feel the calling home of our brother 
more than tongue or pen can tell. He loved all, and was loved by all 
who knew him, not only by his fellow missionaries, but also by all the 
natives. I have loved him from the time I first met him at our annual 
Meeting in December, 1900. Ever since then we have been dear 
friends. At that time we returned from our annual meeting together, 
when I paid my first visit to Elat. The following Spring I was called 
over to help prepare for the new station, when we worked hard 
together from March to September. Part of the time we were alone, 
and I think he worked harder than he should have done for one who 
had already been over five years in the field. Even when the doctors 
said he must return he had a hard time to overcome his desire to 
remain, saying there was so much to be done and so few to do it. 


While he was at home on furlough his letters always expressed 
that longing desire to be back. And even upon his deathbed he 
said, “Harry, I am so sorry; I wanted to stay for many years and 
work for my Master.” But the Master said: “Your work is finished; 
come over with me and rest.” Since his return from furlough his 
stay has indeed seemed very short, but certainly fruitful. I shall 
never forget the day that he and Mrs. McCleary rode into Elat, the 
day that they returned from his furlough. I never saw such rejoic- 
‘ing in all my stay in Africa; the people shouted and danced for joy. 


And then during his sickness they tried to show their love and 
sympathy as best they knew how, there always being a number sitting 
quietly on the porch, ready to help in any way that they could. And 
at the funeral service, which was held at the hour of the Sabbath 
service, there were many broken hearts and wet eyes. It was my 
privilege to help wait on him, together with Mrs. McCleary, Mr. 
Fraser and Dr. Johnston, during his last sickness. I never in my 
life saw such thoughtfulness, kindness and patience in any patient. 
He was always trying to make things as easy as possible for those 
who were waiting on him, and never forgot to thank them. When 
Mr. Fraser was compelled to take to his bed because of fever, 
although he was very sick himself, he continually inquired as to 
Mr. Fraser’s welfare, as he also did of some of the patients in the 
hospital. 

Toward the last, as he realized that the end was drawing near, 
he called for a number of the natives and left them burning messages 
so well adapted to the needs of each individual, as I knew them. 
His love, his life and his death shall never be forgotten. He also 
thought of you all and left messages of love for all. His last words 


“THE BELOVED.” 281 


to us who were at his bedside, will have an influence on our lives 
which shall not die. 

It became my sad duty to prepare the casket, preach the funeral 
service and see to the burial. I think it might be said that he has 
preached to more in his death than in his life, and a sermon which 
shall not soon be forgotten. 

Mrs. McCleary has our love and sympathy, and we shall try to 
help her in every way possible; she has proved herself such a loving 
woman and such a great help during her short stay here. You all 
have our prayers and sympathy in this, your great loss and ours. 
May the God of all Comfort comfort you with His Holy Spirit, that 
Great Comforter, and may He draw us all nearer to Himself and 
cause the work to be more dear to us than ever before. 

If there is anything which I can do for you, I shall count it a 
privilege and a pleasure to render such service. 

Yours in His service, 
HARRY D. SALVETER. 


FROM LETTER OF REY. W. C. JOHNSTON. 


Efulen, June 26, 1903. 

Again the Lord has visited us and called away another of our 
workers. Mr. McCleary passed away June 20th. No doubt you will 
have the particulars from others. There certainly was not a more 
valuable man in the Mission. He was an all round man, had the best 
command of the Bulu of any man on the field, could build a house or 
manage the farming to advantage, was known and loved by the Bulu 
far and near, was slow to speak, unassuming and of good judgment, 
was the kind of a man that we all valued and loved. Certainly not 
since Dr. Good was called away have we sustained a loss like this. 
But God, who called away Dr. Good at the very beginning of this 
interior work, has called another from the front. It is not for us to 
say that he cannot be spared. God is managing this work, and He 
can, and I have no doubt but He will cause this, our seeming loss, 
to redound to the furtherance of the work here. 

Mr. McCleary was to me a very dear friend. We came out 
together in the Fall of ’95. When my wife was so very low at Efulen 
in 798 he came to us, and a brother could not have done more during 
those days. He was not well himself. but more thoughtful self- 
forgetfulness could scarcely have been found. * * * It seems 
to me that this ought not to discourage the church in sending men. 
Surely it is a loud call for more workers. We would be miserable 
cowards were we to take this as anything other than a call to push 
forward. Our soldiers at home would be censured were they to 


282 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


retreat when a man falls at the front. Never was there a battle 
where victory was more certain. The Lord of Hosts is our leader 
and the victory will be ours. To me this comes as a note of warning. 
Perhaps we have been pushing forward too fast. Our force has not 
been strong and perhaps we have been undertaking too much. The 
work is of such a nature that it has been hard not to try to do it. 
People from towns ,one and two days from here have come to me 
and begged me to go to their towns and hold services. * * * 
We will pray that the Lord will use this, our bereavement, as a call 
to the church to strengthen our ranks. 


FROM LETTER OF REY. F. D. P. HICKMAN. 


Benito, W. Africa. 

I feel the loss of Mr. McCleary very keenly. We were at Prince- 
ton Seminary together and we came to Africa at the same time. In 
fact, we expected that we would both be assigned to the same station. 
We bought our outfit with that expectation in mind. 

Mr. McCleary has made a strong impression on the people where 
he was laboring. And he was held in high esteem by all his Mis- 
sionary associates. He seemed to be the very man for the work 
that he had to do. He was cheerful, earnest, wise and skillful in 
whatever he undertook. Whatever he turned his hand to, and he 
turned his hand to many important things, he did well. To my mind, 
he represented an ideal Missionary for this Mission. I would not 
ask for a better type of Missionary to be sent to this Mission than 
that which Mr. McCleary exemplified. I am sure that his loss will 
be sorely felt at this station and also throughout the Mission, as he 
was a pillar of strength to these people and to his associates. 


FROM “WOMAN’S WORK FOR WOMEN.” 


For the second time within the month the cable brings a mes- 
sage of grief. McCleary of Africa, dead! How can McCleary, “the 
best loved man in the Mission,” be spared? He “laid down his life,” 
for it was for the sake of justice and peace and prudent settling of 
the German difficulties in 1900, that he postponed his overdue fur- 
lough. The church does not know all her sons, but when she counts 
out those true as steel, sacrificing and sane, manly and gentle, 
efficient and pious, there is where McCleary belongs. When he came 
home he was not strong enough to travel among the churches. They 
did not hear his voice, but the jungle knows it well; when he entered 
Heaven, Bulu boys were there to meet him with a shout. In October, 


“THE BELOVED.” 283 


1902, a long attachment was consumated by marriage at Fairfield, 
Iowa, and January 7, Rev. and Mrs. Chas. W. McCleary sailed for 
Africa. This young wife, the parents at Crawfordsville, Iowa, and 
the mission are all the deepest mourners. Let the Church remember 
them. 

It is a crumb of comfort to know that the manly and positive, 
yet conciliatory behaviour of “the beloved McCleary” towards his 
German neighbors at Elat, Africa, all through provocations and 
differences, wrought thereby peaceable fruits of righteousness. The 
German Governor went twice to see McCleary on his deathbed, and 
laid a beautiful wreath upon his coffin. 


We are thankful to report from Africa that Rev. Melvin Fraser, 
who was dangerously ill with fever when his associate, Mr. McCleary, 
died, and Mr. Albert Adams of Batanga, who has also been down 
with fever, are both recovered and taking a rest. 


RESOLUTION UPON DEATH OF REY. C. M. McCLEARY, 


We of the West Africa Mission desire to pay our tribute of love 
to the late Rey. C. W. McCleary, in view of his eminent services and 
choice personal character, and to record our keen sense of loss and 
grief, yet recognition of God’s own hand, in the death of our beloved 
co-laborer at Elat, June 20th, 1903. 

We recognize in Mr. McCleary a man of sterling Christian char- 
acter, genial, considerate, wise and efficient—much in favor with 
God and man. He was greatly loved and valued by both fellow 
missionaries and natives. He was a beloved disciple, and leaned 
much on Jesus’ breast. He walked with God, like Enoch, and was an 
epistle read with ease, edification, and delight. 

Mr. McCleary was deeply imbued with the missionary spirit. 
His consecration to the world-wide cause was shown by his expressing 
no choice of field when about to be appointed, and his intense devotion 
to the work on this field was illustrated, not only by a chosen pro- 
longed stay during the first term of service, and marked fidelity while 
thus engaged, but by his earnestness and decision to return from 
furlough change, though further stay on the field, through illness, 
might be short. “Better one year in Africa than ten in America” 
were his words. If his years on the field were not many, yet, as it 
is said, “That life is long that answers life’s great end.” And they 
were full to overflowing of labors of love which will follow him as 
the years roll on. 

His purity of life and character, his patience, his tender, winning 
preaching, his translations of hymns and portions of Scripture, his 
wise counsels will not cease to live and be cherished. While his 


284 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


place is painfully vacant and we mourn our loss in the great work 
to which he was faithful unto death, yet we bow humbly to the 
providence of God which took him, and can rejoice in the tribulation 
and thank God for the record of toil and triumph that, by His grace, 
stands over against the name of our departed brother, and we rejoice 
in the ‘well done” which he has heard from the Master’s lips, and 
for the joy of the Lord, into which he has entered. 

Your committee recommends that copies of this minute be spread 
on the minutes of the Mission and placed in the hands of the stricken 
widow, and of the sorrowing parents in the home-land. 

Respectfully, 
MELVIN FRASER 
FRANK D. P. HICKMAN, 
Committee. 


IN MEMORY OF REY. CHAS. W. MeCLEARY. 


“They rest from their labors and their works do follow them.”— 
Rey. xiv : 13. 


Death comes not to God’s own children, 
But quietly, one by one, 
We fold our hands in blessed rest, 
When the last day’s work is done. 
And as tenderest, earthly father 
Holds the little one in his arms, 
Close pressed to his loving bosom 
And no care or fear alarms, 
So our loving, Heavenly Father 
Folds us gently to His breast; 
And we pass from earth’s life of struggle 
To Heaven’s life of blessed rest. 
Fairfield, Iowa. . ’ V. H. F. 


GENERAL ARTICLES. 


EVOLUTION IN BULU LAND. 


The Bulu people, in common with all African tribes, are very 
weak in character. They are easily influenced. They are really 
overgrown children. They have well formed bodies but their minds 
are sadly neglected. They gladly let others do their thinking for 
them, and take the result as a matter of fact. They are much like 
their hairy neighbors, the monkeys, in imitating. Unlike many Orien- 
tal peoples they quickly forsake their own manners and customs, and 
vie with each other in acquiring the new. They are also very avari- 
cious. They love goods, and they are not at all particular in what 
way they acquire them. They love show. They love to dress in gaudy 
colors. But their weakness soon appears. They are easily overbal- 
anced. A little goods, or learning, or a position in the white man’s 
Service, soon turns their heads. In many cases their conceit becomes 
almost unbearable. Self is ever uppermost. 

This is all outward, of course. The effect on the heart and soul 
Wwe cannot judge. We have not been here long enough to see any 
great changes on the inner man. It is of the outward evolution I wish 
to speak. And this change is not due to the efforts of the missionary. 
We may have had some little influence on those who live near here 
and have made it easier for them to take on the new ways so rapidly. 
But the real cause is the German Government. We have been here 
for over two years laboring patiently. Our message was peace. We 
warned against evil doing and pleaded with them to do the right. But 
all our teaching is so foreign to their way of thinking and so opposed 
to their way of doing that our progress, while plainly apparent, is not 
so marked. On the other hand, the Government officials have been 
working a little over two months and the revolution effected is so 
marked that we scarce can believe it. We could not have hoped for 
so much in a year. 

The first rumors we heard of any disturbance among the Bulu 
came to Elat about the middle of January. The tribes had been going 
on in the evil tenor of their ways, fighting, killing and devouring one 
another until their cup was full, and vengeance was being meted out 
by the German Government. Suddenly the sky darkened, the clouds 
gathered, and the voice of thunder was heard. The white man was 
coming to kill all the Bulu was the first report. Other reports fol- 


286 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


lowed confirming the first, and in a short time the wkole country was 
excited. The head men came to know what these reports meant. But 
we were ignorant, hearing them only as they came through the Bulu. 
Again and again the chiefs came and when we kept telling them that 
we knew nothing about it and that we were not in it, they got mad at 
us and said we were a party to it and that we had called the white 
man to come and kill them all. We were in a delicate position for a 
while. How easy it would have been for them to take revenge on us, 
when they heard that some of their people had been killed by the white 
man near the beach. All white men are the same to them, and it is 
white against black. But for the most part they have trusted us, and 
have come for advice. Some wanted to flee into the interior. Old 
Mvondo took a very philosophical view of it. He laid down three 
sticks, one representing his father, one his children, and the center 
one himself. He picked up the first one. His father had died. He 
took up the one representing his children, and opening his prophetic 
mouth said, “My children will all die.” Then he took up the third, 
saying, “And will I, contrary to the common lot of mankind, live al- 
ways? It cannot be. I, too, must die.” As much as to say, “I must 
‘ die sometime. Bring on your white brother and let him kill me.” 
The innocent lamb! For about a month this state of excitement lasted. 
We knew nothing definite at the time but have learned somewhat as 
the time has passed. The commander of the “Imperial troops” offered 
the Bulu war or peace, just as they preferred. If they were willing to 
Iay down their guns and do as he said they would not fight, but if they 
would not obey he would fight. Very little fighting was done. They 
were not long in convincing the Bulu that the white man knew how 
to fight. Those who preferred peace were given hats—crowned. The 
head men were put up as petty “governors.” It was an attempt at 
self government. These head men were held responsible for the dis- 
trict where they lived. The Governor gave each a little certificate 
showing that he had authority from headquarters. They were told to 
go and fix up all the old palavers, lay down their guns and spears, 
eut roads, correct the people, etc. If anyone disobeyed them they 
were to tie and whip such an one. 


It is now the last of March, about two and one-half months since 
the first rumors reached us. Let me sum up the result as we see it, 
and compare it with previous days to show what rapid changes have 
been made. Every man used to carry either a gun, spear, or large 
knife. Now none of these men can be seen. One man was flogged be- 
cause a small knife was found in his cloth. Everybody carries a stick 
or cane instead of a gun. Cords and horse whips are carried by the 
petty governors with which to punish offenders. Formerly the men 
as well as the women plaited their hair, putting on beads and buttons, 
and grease which ran down on the body like the ointment on Aaron’s 


“THE BELOVED.” 287 


beard. Now we cannot see a man with plaited hair. The change in 
looks is wonderful and pleasing to the eye. Combs are sold now in- 
stead of beads and buttons. Roads are being cut in all directions, 
and streams and swamps are being bridged. We will soon have a good 
road to the beach, praise God. Everyone wants to wear clothes like 
the white men. We have many calls for shirts, trousers, shoes, etc., 
things formerly not worn by the Bulu. One of these new governors 
came with a goat to buy a shirt, a pair of shoes, candles, soap, etc. 
We were glad to see the change and tried to fit him out. He said he 
had a new heart, he was no longer a Bulu but one of the white men. 
He had a certificate from the Governor showing that he had been 
given the authority which he claimed. He was a new man in outward 
appearance but we were inclined to doubt the new heart part. He 
had been at the Government station and there had seen some of the 
ways of the white man. His imitations were quite like the original. 
He was very profuse in his gestures and little courtesies, all of which 
‘were amusing to us. He had with him a retinue of what they termed 
“soldiers.” These were his brothers, cousins, uncles, and even some 
of his aunts—in fact all the people of his town. They were going 
about fixing up old troubles. Their only weapons were cords, and 
the horse whip. Each one wore a bright red cap and a red sash with 
bells tied in the tassels. These bright colors made a striking contrast 
with their shaggy black bodies. They were a gay looking crowd. So 
each head man who has been set up as “governor” has his retinue. 
Every day we can see some of them pass—sometimes as many as a 
hundred in a string. It is so entirely different from anything we have 
seen here, that we can scarce believe our own eyes, the transformation 
is so sudden. 


But, as might be expected, they are overdoing it. They are quite 
delighted with their new work. Nothing could suit them better. 
Every one wants to be a soldier and with the soldiers stand. We are 
deginning to wonder where the private citizen will come from. But 
they are abusing their authority and making capital out of their posi- 
tion. They take on conceit as rapidly as they do clothes. They are 
proud as peacocks, and are very easily insulted. They demand atten- 
tion and punish those who refuse it. When they salute a person, if 
the salutation is not returned, that person is caught and whipped, or 
fined. When they pass every one must remove his hat. Two or three 
examples will suffice to show the lengths to which they have gone. 
@ne young man, anxious to see the new dress of the would-be soldiers, 
poked his head in at the door of a public house where they were eat- 
ing other peoples’ fowls and quietly gazed at them. He was caught 
and fined five strings of beads. Once a soldier, having finished eating 
a piece of meat, threw the bone on the ground. A dog came along 
and picked up the bone. This was disrespect on the part of the dog. 


288 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


so he caught the dog and carried him off for his evening stew. A 
worthy and his retinue were standing in the street as a man passed 
by on his way to his garden. This man did not salute them, so they 
caught him, and made him pay two goats for his disrespect. And this: 
is all the more strange when we remember that the Bulu had no word 
of salutation before we came. 

These acts of oppression are not having good effect on the peo- 
ple, and many of them are resenting it. One chief has forbidden any 
soldier to enter his town, on penalty of death, and everyone knows 
him well enough to stay away. There has been some trouble among: 
some-of the tribes and more may be expected, but for the present 
the change is very marked and a, great improvement. Traders are 
beginning to pass going into the interior. The tribes are beginning 
to mingle as they never did before. There is a certain awe of the 
white man in the air that seems to be catching. If the conceit of the 
new governors does not get the upper hand and cause a reaction 
against the new form of government it will be a pleasing change, 
indeed. They have sunk very low. The struggle upward will be 
hard and fraught with many difficulties. They need the prayers of 
God’s people especially at this time, and so do we, as we try to teach 
them. This is a formation period. May God bless the Bulu people. 


MARKET DAY AT ELAT. 


Before the advent of the white man to Bulu land the buying and 
selling of food was an unknown thing. The Bulu have no stores or 
markets among themselves. They trade and barter, but not at any 
set places. They have a peculiar system. They never buy and sell 
outright as we do. One man gives to another today, and then expects 
that man to give him in return tomorrow, or when it suits his con- 
venience in days to come. For example: A man from the interior has 
an ivory which he brings down towards the coast. One or two days’ 
journey is as far as he can come usually, the ivory thus passing 
through many hands before it reaches the coast. He gives it to some: 
head man, nothing being said about the price. He sits down in town 
and waits for the other man to give him goods in return. Sometimes: 
he has to wait a month, or two, or three. Thus the trading is done. 
Of course he is given his food while he waits on his goods, and on the 
road he gets food wherever he happens to stop. Hence there are no 
general trading posts and no market places for produce of the gardens. 
Each man has his own garden and does not need to buy or sell food. 

But when the Mission was established at Ebolewo’e, and we had: 
gathered around us a number of workmen and school boys, food was: 
needed, having no gardens we were compelled to buy food of the 


“THE BELOVED.” 283 


natives. Thus the market was established as soon as we came, and 
it has been kept up ever since. I well remember the first day food. 
was bought. We gave out that we would buy food. The crowd which 
came was something astounding. Men, women, and children, chiefs, 
common people, and dogs—all in a mass, each one talking, laughing, 
or howling, as the case suited. When the buying began, they crowded 
and pressed the buyer so that it was almost impossible to turn around. 
Great exclamations were made at the small amount given but when 
by themselves they chuckled at the fine bargain they had made. Of 
course all the food that was brought could not be bought, and this fact 
made the press worse in the following days, each one trying to get in 
first. This crowding on the buyer necessitated the building of a nar-— 
row shoot through which the people might pass one by one and sell 
what they had. Even then it was necessary for cone to stand at the 
entrance with a stick to keep them from crowding in and breaking 
down the shelves. Later on a shed was put up with a high fence all 
around and a pen in which the buyer stands with his box of goods 
and a tin of salt. It looks not unlike a cattle pen. Certain days, 
Wednesdays and Saturdays, were set for buying and have been fol- 
lowed in the main. The first one up to the stand gets first sale, so 
sometimes they come very early. I have seen women come at day 
break, perhaps a woman with a child on her back and a big basket om 
her arm, and wait three hours and not get to sell more than the value 
of a small spoon of salt. But they have had a taste of the white 
man’s salt and have such a craving for it that they almost fight for a 
place at the stand. This is the only market within seventy miles and 
if they miss here they must eat their food without salt. There is al- 
ways a great noise on market day. Sometimes as many as a hundred 
people will come, each with something in the hand. All are loud 
talkers and they are not afraid to express their feelings if they think 
they do not get the lion’s share. During these vacation days wher 
the boys are nearly all home and the workmen have been dismissed 
very little food is needed, but still the crowd comes. It is hard to 
see them stand and beg to sell. “Only one little pinch of salt,” they 
say, as they hold up a “kank” with one hand while the other is: 
stretched out in an imploring way. But we cannot buy food to throw 
away, so we get the names of hard, stingy, mean, etc. Almost every 
buying day some orator makes it his, or her (for the women can talk 
here, too), duty to liquidate some of his pent up, or manufactured, 
feelings, the white man being the object at which his phillippics are 
hurled. We have many of the Bryan type. And I have often thought 
of commencement orations as some of these dusky fellows were gestic— 
ulating. It is sad, yet so ridiculous, that one cannot help but laugh. 
We soon get used to it, and take it as we do our daily food. 

Besides the mere fact of getting the necessary food on market day, 


290 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


there are advantages in it that will be far reaching. First, the buyer 
is brought in close contact with the people. He learns much of their 
ways, for in no place does the real man come out so much as in a 
trade. He learns how to take them. He also learns many things 
about the language. He must talk and he must understand, so he 
learns many of their idioms which he might never get in other ways. 
Then there is the constant example to the people. They are so used 
to cheating and being cheated, that they cannot understand how a 
‘man can be honest in all his dealings. One has a good opportunity of 
giving an object lesson in a crowd of people twice a week. Neither 
‘can they understand why old and young, men and women, rich and 
poor, are all treated alike. The example in this cannot help but im- 
press itself upon them. Actions speak louder than words. Many a 
good sermon is thus preached yet not a word spoken. May God help 
us to make good use of these opportunities. 


OUR EXPERIENCE WITH A LEOPARD. 


We have often seen leopard tracks in the bush and even in our. 
garden, and have heard their cries at night. We often hear of them 
killing sheep and goats for the natives. We see the Bulu with parts 
of leopard skins, and leopard teeth as ornaments, but a real live 
lJeopard is hard to see and I never saw one here till the other day, 
when we missionaries had a lively time with one. Let me tell you 
about it. It was a little out of the ordinary for missionaries, but all 
the more interesting for that. 


When I returned from my inland trip my associates told me that 
a leopard had made a call at the Mission and helped himself to a fine 
goat and a sheep. A few days after I returned he came again and 
killed a kid. We laid a trap for him and he got his foot in it. There 
is at the station a large bear trap. We made an enclosure just in 
front of the sheep house and left a hole in one side. At this hole we 
set the trap and covered it with grass. Dr. Lippert set up to watch 
in the small house near by for we feared the animal might get at the 
sheep and not the trap. We were to take turns. The Doctor was to 
call me at 12:00 and I was to keep guard until morning. About 11:30 
I was awakened by the Doctor calling and the report of a rifle. It 
did not take me long to get out with my rifle. As I dressed I could 
hear the animal growl and roar. It was a different noise from what 
I had expected. It was more like a big hog than anything I can think 
of—such a deep gutteral rolling noise. It was frightful and the night 
was so dark that we could not see to shoot. There was a big rock 
between us and the animal and we did not have a fair chance. To 
#o around the rock or to get up on it was getting into too close quar- 


McCleary Memorial Chapel. 


“THE BELOVED.” 291 


ters for comfort. A mad leopard would be a hard enemy on a dark 
night and we were a little cautious about getting too near. We were 
aware that he might break the rope that held the trap or that he might 
get loose in some way and make for us. We thought we saw his form 
once and shot four times but to no effect. He roared and plunged and 
tore the fence and house till finally he broke the rope holding the 
trap and away he went, trap and all, growling and plunging through 
the plantains. We went to bed feeling sure of a good hunt in the 
morning for we felt that he could not get far with the trap in the 
bush and we could easily track him. You should have seen our party 
next morning at daylight starting out on the trail. Doctor and I each 
had a 44-40 Winchester rifle, 15 shot. Mr. Dager had a new Win- 
chester U. S. army rifle, five shot. A Bulu man had an old gun left 
by Dr. Good—a 45-90 Winchester—and two other Bulu men had shot 
guns loaded with buckshot. Poor Mr. Leopard—had he only known. 


The trail was easy to follow. We tracked him through the plan- 
tains and into the bush. Now, let me tell you it was scary work. 
Sometimes we had to crawl on our hands and knees. It was my lot 
to take the lead most of the way, and I must confess that at times I 
felt like turning back, for we did not know at what point he might 
leap out upon us. We followed him down to a small stream and then 
down the stream. Our progress was slow for we felt our way softly. 
We had been gone about forty minutes when we suddenly heard the 
clinking of a chain just about thirty feet ahead of us. We knew that 
we were close to the animal and we all prepared to meet him should 
he come our way. He did not come, but seemed to be trying to get 
away. We could see nothing for the thick brush and undergrowth 
and were not in a good position. We were just above the bridge on 
the road leading from the Government station to the rifle range, and 
I ran around with one native to the left and onto the bridge, while the 
rest of the party stayed behind. I was just ahead and a little above 
the place where the animal was making the noise, and should he at- 
tempt to run would have a good chance at him. Doctor and Mr. Dager 
fired into the bush with the effect that the animal came direct toward 
me, but not very fast on account of the trap catching in the brush. 
When he emerged from the bush about twelve feet from me, I fired. 
The ball entered his neck near the head and passed through to the left 
shoulder. He fell, but kicked along on the ground, passed under the 
bridge, and fell down among the rocks on the opposite side, still kick- 
ing. Not knowing at the time the effect of my first shot, we shot 
several times. The rest of the party came up and the Doctor shot 
him in the ribs. The Bulu men each gave him the contents of their 
guns and the animal quit kicking. We went down and brought him 
up. The trap had done excellent work, catching him by the paw in 
such a way that it was impossible to get it out until the trap was 


292 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


opened. The men carried him back to the station and he was put on 
exhibition for several hours. Hundreds of natives came to see him. 
He was a beautiful animal with his unchangeable spots and well pro- 
portioned body and bushy tail. His body measured four feet and his 
tail two feet and seven inches, and he weighs 112 pounds. Dr. Lip- 
pert took care of the skin and I have the skull with its monstrous 
teeth. We made a big supper for the natives and dished out leopard 
soup to more than a hundred people. It was a day of great rejoicing 
among the natives for their old enemy lay dead. They said this 
leopard had been killing their goats for years and they could not kill 
him. They seemed to take great satisfaction in eating his liver. Re- 
venge is sweet to a Bulu. 


A STATEMENT OF RELATIONS WITH GOVERNMENT. 


Elat hill was occupied by the Mission on January 31, 1896. The 
first white trader appeared in Ebolewo’e in May, 1898. The first Gov- 
ernment official came on October 24, 1899, and the next day the fight 
with the Bulu commenced. The missionaries were taken into the 
camp for protection and on October 28 were sent to Lolodorf, escorted 
by soldiers. Messrs. Fraser and McCleary returned to Elat on No- 
vember 9 and here is what they found: 

About eighty yards of fence torn down and appropriated by the 
Government. 

About twenty-five fowls stolen. 

The store room had been opened ( a key was left with the offi- 
cer) and the large door in the back part left unfastened. Two tin 
trunks had been broken into and many things were missing. Tools 
were taken and used, and no account made. The dwelling house, 
under a guard of black soldiers, had been broken open in two places 
(a key was left with the officer). One place was at the east end of 
the dispensary and one at the northeast corner of the house where in 
each case a bark door had been opened from the inside and left open. 

The house had been ransacked and many things destroyed and 
taken. 

Many medicines were taken and perhaps more destroyed. The 
officers said the little monkey destroyed the medicines. This may be 
true but the monkey could get in only where a door had been left open. 

Some of the things were paid for, and the officer told me to make 
out our bill but we could not make out a complete list in the time 
given, for it took a long time to find out just what was missing. 

On December 2d Mr. von Dannenberg and Mr. von Bulow came, 
with Mr. Hornemann as interpreter, to talk about a location for the 
Government station. They wanted to put it on the Mission grounds 


“THE BELOVED.” 293 


just east of the dwelling house. We objected and gave as our reason 
that it would be impossible to do our work so close to the Government 
station. 

The Government refused to register Elat grounds. 

On January 18, 1900, the Government started cutting a road 
through Mission grounds without saying a word to the missionaries 
about it. This road would have passed near the house and between 
the house and the spring. This would have made the now private 
spring a public one, and would have endangered the water supply. 
We objected on health grounds. 

The officers in charge refused to let the ladies come to Blat for 
four months after the time when they wanted to come, putting the 
missionaries to much inconvenience and some extra expense. 

About March ist a rifle range was completed just back of our 
grounds, and they built their house on top of our line instead of just 
beyond it. Very often they shoot on Sabbath. We requested that this 
‘be prohibited but were refused. 

Our old trouble with the Biyen tribe was never settled, though it 
thas been brought before the officials many times. 

On May 15, 1900, a demand was made that the missionaries turn 
Elat hill over to the Government and it was stated that nothing would 
‘be allowed for any improvements except the houses, and that not in 
full, and that nothing would be paid for the land which was bought 
from the natives. The officer said all arrangements must be made 
‘by the last day of May. 

Our answer was that we could make no arrangements, and would 
not go till we had our instructions from our Board or from the Mission. 

On September 138th, soldiers were sent to take a workman away 
from his work without any note or word to us. We objected and took 
the workman away from the one soldier who had him at the time we 
saw him. Two other soldiers had been there but had gone away and 
we did not see them. In taking the man from the soldier I had to 
use force for he did not want to let the man go. He said he would 
go and get his gun, and called for help. I gave him a shove and in 
doing so put my hand on his shoulder and made use of the inside of 
my foot on which was a rubber shoe. In this latter I made a mistake 
for it gave them ground for talk of mistreatment of a soldier. The 
soldier went and said that I had flogged and kicked him. This made 
the lieutenant very angry and he wrote a note demanding the man at 
once. Dr. Lippert and Mr. Dager went down and received a loud 
welcome. The officer talked in a “roaring” voice and said many hard 
things about the Mission and brought many charges against the mis- 
sionaries. He would not hear to an explanation that day. The next 
day a note was sent to him requesting a conference and stating that 
we wished to explain what we were sure were misunderstandings 


294 CHARLES W. McCLEARY. 


and that we did not want these strained relations between the Mission 
and the Government. The request was not refused so on the 18th of 
September Messrs. Lippert, Dager and McCleary went to the station 
and had a conference with the officer. In regard to the affair with 
the soldier we said: We saw but one soldier taking our man, and 
since we see and hear of soldiers taking Bulu men and women in this 
way on their private accounts every few days, we did not know and 
had no reason to believe that this one was sent by the officers. Other 
things were brought up and explained away without exception. After 
a long talk the officer said he was willing to bury the past if we were. 
We expressed our willingness and left. Hot coals buried in ashes 
sometimes keep a long time. We do not feel that affairs are as smooth 
as they appear even now. 


EDITOR'S CLOSING WORD. 


At last, after much labor and some unforseen delays, “The Beloved” 
is ready for the binder. It will not be surprising if the reader finds 
some mistakes. There are several typographical errors. The wonder 
is that there are not more. Had the editor had the whole of the book 
before him at one time he might have been more felicitious in making 
captions. But these small matters will not, he trusts, in any way 
detract from the merits of the subject matter. 

The editor wishes to acknowledge much help from the Messrs. 
Junkin, who have done the work of printing. He is under especial 
obligation to Miss Emily Edwards, who has borne the brunt of getting 
the manuscript ready for the press and who has done most of the 
proof reading. 

April 10th, 1909. 


Armerman, Mr ies sicle eieis oes ova aeie:eisia/sieiece, 6:8 obe/e) «ae! a i winilelal eee 81 
ASOD: ios ove'sie oie abe.4 wus yoyete nine esa/0s «/alnyeltnra/s eps) 6)eyelalopenaet eee 110, 156 
BAM TBAGETS |... eseie:ieceleneyereieie< ie) aiane  olens\ ete folie) siealie)eicl cone ieee ae 59, 61, 65 
sAxtell, Dr. and Mrs iaiccieice oivie sie seis )0's 01s + a is 5 010 0 236 
BaD; MUISS 5g ss iaiapeveisvet ote etic! eseterale eueve: oxo avetare elope EN Sree eee 40, 41, 78, 162 
BaMaDas aiene oid cata ed Wind des apahersle se cimsd vis chele ie = enue leis fe aha et 51, 75 
SES BEATA AY tet ci acatranec eer ial ateviocwsteton cicus weaseeas ails pees Eome tele 38, 76, 78, 189, 159, 160, 161 
Bates, Mri ccc uc ce dec vie ce elnieseis aqeiaiesnelnus e-6 0/00 0s/a ieee 162 
Bean Box; TH a c..jc0ics 5 cleiis sini cies cists 0 0's ate 0ic wale eh eee 163 
Benton. Sas. MG RRS, eS Ne a eee 42, 159, 160, 170 
IBenn ett Dre: Hk SORES, tthe cee ees 132, 141, 1438, 145, 152, 156, 159 
Bethel oss. si ccR OT wees eal Star cen ale lalla alee alle eta ee fale ee 40, 160 
Bipindi(® {YoR RON. BA). Cee RR RRS EER), co Se 78, 164, 167 
Bitombi ii. set AL Se Ra, La eee 64, 68, 89, 90, 153 
WBoococks Reve th we iel. allele < sieve ole 8 Suste eiele cvstelelelle ofetelete ie ete Eaten ateta aaa 2239 
Bulow, Lieutenant von. ..cchest some 0S. Sivas oe ciclo eee 176, 257 
BulusPeople, Whe kl . He. Ses ane ee 54, 59, 99, 100, 

101, 102, 108, 134, 145, 168, 174, 184, 196, 198, 204, 208, 209, 285 
Gamera, Thesis, Ak. Sao, BOs. A Sek oe 172, 173, 203 
‘Carpet, (The. oot. Fa a ee a 110, 117, 132, 183, 140, 141, 153 
CALS gS Sretaiece 2.6 sa aleeatene s Caaile aula taker ume otel oy Sac arate ta eee 56, 69, 81, 102, 157 
CHAIN) TRG). «cree a dsacelece s/e''e dia evans bree elie 6 6-e voles fe. ellasalereve) 3 ee 39, 42 
Christenson, Misses oo Gee slays Sie aren sic a eictin o-ore win iace see s/o ee eee 260 
Ofc): Chae 0) uae a en re Mr TAM OO AGA AG cacao: 7 57 163 
Country, Description OL ...5 << e «<.eve< <is)e enero «1 «sles ele) sks eset 46, 47, 104 
*Culimary ‘TROUWDICS «oui. oie eiesienciec. 00 este oye oie. s\ slain ne e000 eee eee 121, 153 
Curiosity Of INAativesiiccicis.Sstase ale age aceie gre bers estore re eee 69, 81, 82, 85 
Collections WAcs . oie eicie sche aoe atari cie 0.010006) wie algae a ol este eo eee 275 
"Dalser eva and Mins oetraciicelelsiaiy tertile 176, 227, 228, 231, 236, 

240, 244, 245, 248, 250, 253, 254, 256, 257, 260, 262, 264, 265, 272, 275 
Dannenberg), Herr VOM 6 oss ces ois a 0s pieicie'sw ac'e ci6 6 «0s cee 224 
ADDQVOE -ii5)5 5:5 onto d aisha pis del eilars 0's is siete sia! s,s) ered c/o e/a ale) © 60ils) oe eee 261 
TDP UM, PWS ee have aya rase ceils wae arsis\aatdl aller usta wepetatsesde mist etecoy swear econ eee 8, 45, 241 
Dwar ls, THe ie ais siccaid thors erasers a 6iw creile a2e leis ore eral evento venens weve lonere eae 114 
OPTS oie scs ators bedvorole caro ureteeis oss: seeders eee eee terete 45, 132, 158, 159, 237 
Bate ices Gals Apdetaieeh aretaeaele oa oaks bile ine GIFS OE eee 67, 119, 132, 256 


Paviniciersneriertoiesis ccicine re cM ce ceo cian ce cate aclees deeeneae cc dane. 225, 236 
MZOnTs ose sok =r Db ROGS RICCO OCC SAT OSS SOO ORS 64, 68, 85, 87 
PME EICHCCE GUNS At CODA sc ce cle clcc a cc cieice fac Secure cca eels teas 290 
DEAT ATI OUT eaters (arclal@roinis «ie's\cieieis wieck es ei ei aes 52, 81, 93, 119, 129, 132, 157 
Meets EemVIELD COTM ere rey crs tee cl aveve at lleva) overs (avsrai-c (aise, Ore) sania ager oecralope erie el an ommtova-acous 154 
BESTT ATI OMI EO gel ive 5\cyeyais! 2.6) <10t0a¥als lesen ee 6) sie101 wie e eieisicversre oie siers ajcletien eile 39 
BENCH IgE S Bere Tetsy Rene) clave raversicle, wrcicyele'aucieyee coisa. o's se c/s fais, sisiaeigiavera are) etaja love etaceneieieee 46 
REIL G Sten cPet ve laveyeychalistelcie) aie) evets eva s'e.g.0 eecve.c 0.6 ele e006 ocd 016) 5 ore areie archane 120, 204 
ENC cotter tereterer Vaictohcicversccle sie ise scieiercie calles sicvareie ica aie acelese ele versie 48, 150, 152 
PRONE Sie petelete ie veror fr eicncavereveTe ic: alee a) b"eiviercieicie: 6 wianacsls eee Gees 65, 81, 99, 121 
OOGE nos cine, ies scree 6.6 PR retettevete te (ai sicce clogs /cleveisiaveuarsa Nevsle-ecee aie 52, 57, 58, 64 
TSGHGL MO SGS S46 SRC GS bs es er oO eee ees 39, 48, 70-73, 76, 78, 89, 257 


Fraser, Rev. ..39, 42, 48, 49, 57, 58, 62, 67, 70, 72, 73, 76, 77, 82, 
83, 97, 106 110, 115, 119, 121, 141, 144, 150, 154, 156, 
159, 162, 164, 169, 170-173, 176, 181, 195, 209, 219, 226, 
229, 231, 235, 237, 249, 265, 273, 275, 276, 278, 280, 283 


PREDOMI Mra eteveve folecie ciel eielaeccrevaycletete) sue: sia) sisieielgieisiais ais suai s/svee aie odie oh efereneyerese 35 
PRRs NSTC at) Tomy ATIC VET Get ay op cveracic’ s uo1 ei cnersieievelolaleiele'e: eae s clove oisre eters. qa mieeiore 156 
ARE Tcl eens at arciratet ace iete) crai uses sve) ele) © iets avayersis ei cie/o:sinve wie as 0.6.2 ala ethelnowlee.« 127 
Meee IS CO PEM camncyoPoN siete ey palopoleveds ia iepeieucsa¥averefeleasieveys 16 Be eee Meee ue:ser a: aieks atesane: s 78, 160 
NEOTEL TNO PN eet cue oihetei) cela) shel Sia) cleo leqoreielc wie tuValisvetSieUatels cha atetsl'a cual, o veversece 73, 96 
AUT UC PATIO MIME «| c'ayova/miaieisielcieicy sige cies 40, 42, 78, 189, 159, 163, 211 
Soc 1D eee CoS s coca 20, 41, 80, 173, 196, 199, 213, 214, 242, 246, 281 
ACGME UTM INIT C Hey Mare ctclc\ ajay cvevesefovers teravetsveveivesecouese' v's'eisi ere: evsua tS7(S aba In Lea ba sys Pe 
FMI CKIMANOOM T=. acisialetoe <ierevers cate die sieieienneve © 22, 38, 42, 78, 79, 160, 170, 228 
ELEY TMC MCLE SETSIIDE Oisvajcrctaretel ctevere sta oloten ticrste ere reveceuwivel's\/e\iayei oie, atfey svanet'eiaveheresonshaveter elle 56 
lames Bm g es eee aoe adnan nooner Se C eee eaer cnet 53, 265 
TS DUT OSS 3 oe OCR e CIIee IER ae 65, 97, 129-132, 151, 196, 203, 290, 291 
wonnson, Dr: and Mrsii<....c.sieaes 45, 46, 48, 80, 81, 111, 112, 


132, 184, 135, 141, 142, 158, 159, 218, 219, 222, 232, 250, 252, 258 
Johnston, Rev. and Mrs...42, 80, 88, 113, 115, 117, 135, 142, 147, 
153, 158, 159, 218, 219, 222, 232, 238, 251, 258, 258, 260, 278, 280 


OMEN Came AaPLC EI OU Siafacsis als /ciale/ si clare icleicusislsvelsleie: clare (era) isla wieielcrcrere KGS tis 259 
SRGETILETAN ayeteteyeie ere ae Siena: ss/F aN Gi biere b.o.01b Beis 0.5 Me ce sie vseietete otra aloe cles 38, 39 
LECOTES EES OO SIG aE CSIC ICICRERENS Cie ICE Racca ese ac 40-43, 45, 49, 


50, 53, 60, 65, 69, 70-73, 80-82, 85, 87, 95, 97, 106, 107, 
109, 111-2, 114, 117, 119-22, 127, 181-32, 141, 144, 175, 178, 181 


KAM ET MMC Vise ots oo ee Sold case sade Sacleee ee odes 159, 236, 241, 251, 258 
CUT LESS) rarer ey otoyors cists otevehcteiehol eh stat dhave¥ahey ota atevotietalcheta. a 23, 24, 27, 267, 268 
PID Meee es ie iwc wees Gece de bicskadavewacdaves 76, 78, 166, 167, 218 
UTES MOVIN ielaa's law sis els e's e ciel ss a's 158, 162, 164, 169, 173, 178, 236, 241 
Lanitin, RS  sccgAkgeeuecatnen aaio Goto POG UCO OST OD COnCRISo. Kone toc 79 
MAMAS CMESEIIGY OL Se s.cis clave smlsccciere cioiete oii sle ce eisie vicieie lye’ tS dg 148 
IE AUS Hie Vacca tel chciavs co nceig eveveie oiwis fret icin sverale oleic e elersvecae\ a sree aleve) ela (e 257, 264 
WehmMany DG sav eces 3 178, 181, 218, 222, 230, 231, 232, 235, 260, 272, 275 


Lippert, Dr. and Mrs....... 176, 178, 181, 182, 195, 197, 211, 226 

228, 231, 232, 236, 241, 248, 249, 258, 256, 258, 260, 264, 265, 273, 275 
no) Kors (c) od Se eee 76, 78, 114, 162, 164, 166, 168, 169, 171, 177 
Letters Concerning Death: Mrs. McCleary................. dio ote 
Letter: HR: M. Johnston, M.D). Jc cascn cena "9 Se at ain SNe a eee 279 
Letter: Harry D. Salveter 2.5. oa ccs ba « os oiniene et eneeneaene eens 280 
Letter: Rev. W.'C. JOHNSON ois. cs ace 0 sls 6 nice ee 281 
Letter: Rev. F. D. Hickman ........ 0050000000 esc eRe ee eeeee 282 
Maderia <i cece see cwecsevcesa Dedveance cen se =.= 30 
Mitr dmg Mr oe 535i c!aca seis lores 0, talamiae ayelnen otek ee said teers jahell> aes ieee 106, 110 
Market Day ees g ees veces 04:00 0 eoie o:6c 6.e crahoie ie bie cele coe ee 
Mebae,. THE icc... o's .c.s:e's ai go piv ors wiv is ieteroie cae ere eek ee 166, 167 
Medical! Work. .:.6.0.05.6 6. dis Seascae Oe cewicaeiie eee 151, 240, 274 
Merkel, MY. 6 o.oic is. ciesaie 0.0 vie,5.0 wie ase proce pvnla-s e)aie' ete) fai er ...162 
MONKEYS): fssleyeoiais, seta eihcc die ayorevanerase ie. aie/ars crab ate ove OE 129, 151 246 
MeLain, MISS, 5. 2.sscaaseenscceccaac ooreele «00a tee ee 114 
Myon Os 2 cic cajs sors. Wa ainteit a eee cases aan ooo 51, 52, 54, 60 


61, 66, 71, 73, 74, 81, 84, 102, 112, 119, 175, 205, 208, 214, 218, 221 


McCleary, Mr. 
Tribute to: 


Dr. A. W. Halsey. ..... icc ca0 cee wewan eee Gene 3 

Rev. Melvin. Fraser. .....00 cc 00s 0 sce «0 s\0c)ee ateielsleeneieeenenerene 4 

Dr. Orville Reed) oe... b.«. So cis,sra\osa 3:0: oerecoge lone ee sealers silastic 
In. - Parsons. cchecc ccc ccs seisc cat oe vcwee cee One eee 17 
Tm Princeton » oe ci. sain oie ceis oo os ein ee 8s 20 oe aes sielele ate tee 18 
Offers Himself 2.22.0. See oes cod vic ciate © cle 0.0 ieee tere eee 19 
Accepted ‘by Board 2.2.0... ee we cw ee cs c0 00 cise dieleie aiesietenene iene 19 
Suecessor Of ‘Dr. (Good! 2) hoc von site ais cle e oles cele eee oss sscretoene 20 
Getting Ready (2.2.06 cee case tenses carccw poe sem ulenenetee tee 22 
Sails from: New “YOrK oi wdiseccec ceases cle cence cailaes 23 
Tn Aver pool!r.c2e 0c) ate cae o sates aisterosinee are ae ‘a oo oe a ree 25 
Out irom? England © ssictensielsalars cajavoe eicleraterelaetenemncteee 5 Seater 28 
Dry WIMAGOrda <5 svalew raietareralonetete  aletwrerete stele eneee RP i 6 acoso 30 
Tn) "Teneriffe (2. oi.icy 0 seieieie sive ni svaio)e nieieeie aluiw cles) tenet ate een 33 
Assigned ‘to New Field 2.5... 665.600 ce ce seca» claleaterenen isc 42 
Goes, Inland) \.ii5. 25 sec oie os oicieiea dere alge os 0s oo alee ee 44 
Glories sin) His “Work 722.770. aici 6: 21s adele wi0le 0 ale’ = einen eae oth citeeand 63 
A: Perilous (TOUrNeY. | 4).).6. Ve < sles ie'elslelevetalurs ell elcie siotebersatete oS. cee 76 
Baek ‘to: lat) cp.cic. 5 wee, 5 60,500 B00 «,0le,i0'8i ale oie/eie)aye, 3 0-5.0)/ eee tie 
Teaching (School 4 ...<,. <.. o\s.«.6 0.0.0.0 0 4 j0' 0 1alejs\e|s o/c a(n o/e/= slotatata teens 91 
Al Short | DPI). 2/0 si0 2:5 0 6:0 0s ers, 00.6 ais alaile 0,0 ame ae) cere eke eee 95 
PRIZES VsPRAV OT i iccceisrale sk atorare's reel ele bl auecel exelle’ Stans slsie' aie eustenentenei ameter 105 
INGar DeAEI  he\ciac= perio iaial overs satel stekotetelalwtclclereteleteiclerstelneions oosnels eon 
First: Sermon in Bult... scwccccncccvntciaeeeciaent ts «a's Berens 113 
Report, L897 |e wsiis craicisiaie ccs o.c0 10.5 /eis «fela)nleleinicie/eis's/felete ena nana 147 


Many. Tribulations) cis jcieis.cetsce Gs elec aie oie Gieevere ate el ets’ atuleletete en 156 


A Trying Journey ........... ose ere oc. 159 


Pot. Le ae eee eee hee ey ee Se setae 164 
Evangelistic Tour .............20. Go sacsarccceeesteeseceeees 173 
SDeie EMMOUOEE: } «conc aes aedeu sede cet’ SebECTE HERES EER oDesus ate 177 
RiP MEEEMORERGURMS cocoon Got ous Soc b ee ch cere ee eewebibeceeeatcene 178 
Pa AMOI EAN akc c be eRb ce bebete rs DECTE DORE DEEE TES SCR ES 196 
ere AEINE eS C.OSHCNS bac codices sch ce cclec sete ae vees veeedeesueees 199 
eben, OCF owen ces. Ghabcaecenctabce tse tibsect cous teases 203 
IRN AUPE CRRBIENE raat a oye cree tre wcllereetewe st eee Shes Seco ee eee es 220 
Ren ple owith “GOVCEDMICNE «2 02660 neces ded cdesccccdusecs 223, 225 
ANPANSWOW tO UPEAVER ccccctecec eects cect esee esas ot ae eescees 229 
we. thrive, Anions the ‘People. .....0.ciccccccecticaencececcen 232 
SPOESE ET POLS Sa SLR CS SE a ee eee ee ae 239 
PP MCHEr) MISMES, OF te Beds: cnciiec ct sits ise a Seciese eke 241 
MMP ENC MWAC LP CODIC. oi ccc ccaccceceesscees sales doncdees 244 
POMEER TORE CONC cca nideic cence eckwe cca vleaneewateceee cee ber 249 
BURR HIE OER CUPESRE ATI SEs te Se iy es oe tance Sees es Joe eae 250 
MicVeMete yO TICE@I mc ce wt anceicr sctmocn sk tst cave de oriae cee 251 
BEES De LAT ete dcee cs sdde eens coop pocesasneeo eeenooccce 253 
SIU ERIORET ASE LS RS ee oS ee ae 255 
Gite See SEMIN C- GOMES ess cs cme alec cea cecescccccscancccesen 259 
Enc eS CCPERME re Sciet cate cece cece +e cueceueteceedeasctees 261 
ESIC OOH E PICEAVOCO, | Satis Serine s Sec cS ove cw ede cwewcsesccce 264 
RWI CEE EER PEIN Ee ree ciees ac cre wins coe acc ce hue sc aus oleae Hae cs 265 
PEOIGM ante ioe onan em emcee eC odabc ccs hbhbsccade Geaces eek 266 
Baer taatrics with Mrs. MeCleary = 2 6.6. sec. cneccmecctee. -2609 
ete R ENCE ANE ioe y erate swia mecce wens ssi sieeaciesweeisiceeseee 272 
CIVCEWEER CO tae oe ole enaia Ne loeae cuaeseint cobie Sto waccdveclwewier 274 - 
IEEE shoo cdteucegecdtcdc Fae aA eOOCE arene cic 276-284 
LR ES TA. TESS) EB ASC CIR ne ee a ee 40, 41, 78, 79, 160 
DG Wot by Gr i eee eee 161 
PEMA PREP ereterc lors aia ero, oie iia a cine o Sais bina Sree ls =o onmeiefaimsicleiee cine 167 
IWEEGG. TUT 6). RASS ORE Sea Oe eC ame 28, 35, 39, 40, 159 
NR ER EME era ele ani avcie usta ovale scleic ce neeeoenacsce 117, 119, 55, 85, 222, 223 
NRA rahe acre ia Sint nis e/e raven ocimielere al n/elagercian Ua ding mas Glaimlere sve 175 
GT Te 3-2 Seen oe 117, 143, 146, 152, 165, 173, 241, 274 
Palaver House ........... Seatates rel cia eect ate clei a ctnestel cua terse |e cia eee 55, 83 
PPR SRES MR eet etc cca acinie emis wiciciaiwiaclen acc cle Sele eeismalabave aie 99, 117, 104 
Bay DET 2d Man Seg ee COO rE Or OARS Ce Go Ben BRnc CeO BEING cia 257 
IPA He ME Gens. co cccs cececccecaseccecces eieenia aac ajeince als went seal ae 25 
I RRR MED REI crease oy soi. 9 aloof itt Sia crevateinevalaiclain e/a oa ae 4 siale eedialers = 68 
aR re tet ato wictayo) =,cieeu/ons ono ae cists Min aise ae oie Wisiala aie mw cetet ae aie 105 
RCE PLOW colina occ’ alg dome. ae da cae nice deine cwslee se cieietere scale 41, 251 
LTEiTHE Li: CoCBR CRESS SSSR Seae bode Gener Homo ooonmorccere 200, 202 
LTP TES. A. LST GE ICR ORE AISE COG CCE DCRR EE Orn OC orriccre 73 
ESM ICC EO REISRE MO oo. = so daice visc.cocee dp aceteuce ceitecees oheaeckesese 236 


Relations with German Government ..........0.ceccevceenacceces 292 


Resolutions of Mission on Death ...........0ceeeeee Jc ae 2.288 


Reutlinger, Mrs... gece peep ae e's pienso pine eins bale 162, 159 
FRODELHS; sO Vareely clelelsiaeaaeseisiniomiece teint 39, 78, 79, 97, 114, 143, 144, 168 
Santa Cruz. cccace cg eases eles aqeces se ee 08 100 als eee eee rs 33 
Sakveter, Mir: aise sac uiscre aerate 258, 258, 259, 261, 262, 272, 273, 278, 279 
SEHOO!! :. hones cislawwia e pla alece ates ane aravae g eistlal hela fet tater gia 47, 48, 

146, 154, 123, 125, 138, 139, 191, 146, 178, 194, 235, 240, 274, 276 
SchnatzZ, REV... ..cis.cee sb. erare's a ena ecerg ies eels a eyale lane eee 39, 42, 78 
Secret Society |... ase esa ee ewe seme oboe oles aes lee eee Tay 208: 
SSO GS ie loses seals is on jape ose jeyezeleyerels yoseeueveds caseseys lobes telelele tae Cee Nae 49, 81, 93 
Sermon, First im Bulu, .2 00.5. 0c ce tc cee 00 0m 0 pielehe crenata een 113 
Sierra TON: scare sisva sb gc op a lalores pre’ pce Shehe Rate ie ee 35, 36, 38, 243, 270 
SMart, REV. © os ccs e ieee we sels wien ose lel. cie aie we'eialale cle Steet 30-32 
Spelling of Station’s Name. ........2 0c... cee sete eee eee 119 
Stein; Merr Von, « oo %6 cies g 6 a0 kos biee ales Seo ee 164, 168, 171 
SSUGHINIONS ) Savane hares be oooh sa Witare ale carecesa late Nels ls kelataletareatete 23, 29, 28, 35, 39, 40 
Supposition, AL, cscs ie srsie a ocieele soins tials wien wos wie aRehee eee eee 135-138 
Surgery, African, 6.0.60 ce cc ck cee ee sice ccs cee cle celeste naaenS 123 
MOM EN UIS 3 e540, ataie «4 pa 0a ws ard & Qaiaiglosaialee4iele 6 ul arse 33, 270 
DEAGETS Se eee oice ee eines evete 78, 188, 197, .198, 199, 201, 210, 240, 248 
TreGSs, BIS si joscpascaxagalcgeresclere cane ead eee ee ee 44, 46, 57, 66, 240 
Trip, A. Hard <i ace ewe cen as caee eee ce eine 6c altel chelate 134 
WARS 5.2 en ncled cepts 48, 108, 112, 128, 150, 155, 195, 222, 224, 230, 234 
Wedding, As. ceo g aca eal bass eateare «okie. atlas er ohete eee 42, 253 


Wrestling Mate). op. sac cscrecja saw hers sa\tyere aleve eae etctakeretaeeeaa PHAR IC 96 


DATE DUE 


DEMCO 38-297 


ee iii 


